From 2b20fe1f26910828db54f2f7a8ed2e2097e14104 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: nsz Date: Wed, 5 Sep 2012 10:45:39 +0200 Subject: [PATCH] add #1.2.3p4 style paragraph links --- ann2html.sh | 2 +- n1256.html | 4760 +++++++++++++++++++------------------- n1570.html | 6416 +++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 3 files changed, 5589 insertions(+), 5589 deletions(-) diff --git a/ann2html.sh b/ann2html.sh index 5a93b35..f7edb9b 100755 --- a/ann2html.sh +++ b/ann2html.sh @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ seencontents && !seenfore && /^[^@]/ { } /^@para/ { - ss[sid] = ss[sid] "

\n" + ss[sid] = ss[sid] sprintf("

%s\n", sect, $2, sect, $2, $2) next } diff --git a/n1256.html b/n1256.html index a07b492..c628b68 100644 --- a/n1256.html +++ b/n1256.html @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

Contents

Foreword

-

+

1 ISO (the International Organization for Standardization) and IEC (the International Electrotechnical Commission) form the specialized system for worldwide standardization. National bodies that are member of ISO or IEC participate in the @@ -389,15 +389,15 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 technical committees collaborate in fields of mutual interest. Other international organizations, governmental and non-governmental, in liaison with ISO and IEC, also take part in the work. -

+

2 International Standards are drafted in accordance with the rules given in the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 3. -

+

3 In the field of information technology, ISO and IEC have established a joint technical committee, ISO/IEC JTC 1. Draft International Standards adopted by the joint technical committee are circulated to national bodies for voting. Publication as an International Standard requires approval by at least 75% of the national bodies casting a vote. -

+

4 International Standard ISO/IEC 9899 was prepared by Joint Technical Committee ISO/IEC JTC 1, Information technology, Subcommittee SC 22, Programming languages, their environments and system software interfaces. The Working Group responsible for @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/ containing additional information relevant to this standard such as a Rationale for many of the decisions made during its preparation and a log of Defect Reports and Responses. -

+

5 This second edition cancels and replaces the first edition, ISO/IEC 9899:1990, as amended and corrected by ISO/IEC 9899/COR1:1994, ISO/IEC 9899/AMD1:1995, and ISO/IEC 9899/COR2:1996. Major changes from the previous edition include: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

  • return without expression not permitted in function that returns a value (and vice versa) -

    +

    6 Annexes D and F form a normative part of this standard; annexes A, B, C, E, G, H, I, J, the bibliography, and the index are for information only. In accordance with Part 3 of the ISO/IEC Directives, this foreword, the introduction, notes, footnotes, and examples are @@ -480,17 +480,17 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    Introduction

    -

    +

    1 With the introduction of new devices and extended character sets, new features may be added to this International Standard. Subclauses in the language and library clauses warn implementors and programmers of usages which, though valid in themselves, may conflict with future additions. -

    +

    2 Certain features are obsolescent, which means that they may be considered for withdrawal in future revisions of this International Standard. They are retained because of their widespread use, but their use in new implementations (for implementation features) or new programs (for language [6.11] or library features [7.26]) is discouraged. -

    +

    3 This International Standard is divided into four major subdivisions:

    -

    +

    4 Examples are provided to illustrate possible forms of the constructions described. Footnotes are provided to emphasize consequences of the rules described in that subclause or elsewhere in this International Standard. References are used to refer to @@ -506,9 +506,9 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 implementors. Annexes provide additional information and summarize the information contained in this International Standard. A bibliography lists documents that were referred to during the preparation of the standard. -

    +

    5 The language clause (clause 6) is derived from ''The C Reference Manual''. -

    +

    6 The library clause (clause 7) is based on the 1984 /usr/group Standard. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    1. Scope

    -

    +

    1 This International Standard specifies the form and establishes the interpretation of programs written in the C programming language.1) It specifies

    -

    +

    2 This International Standard does not specify

    -

    +

    2 The values of floating operands and of the results of floating expressions may be represented in greater precision and range than that required by the type; the types are not changed thereby.52) @@ -2812,7 +2812,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.3.2.1 Lvalues, arrays, and function designators
    -

    +

    1 An lvalue is an expression with an object type or an incomplete type other than void;53) if an lvalue does not designate an object when it is evaluated, the behavior is undefined. When an object is said to have a particular type, the type is specified by the lvalue used to @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 not have an incomplete type, does not have a const-qualified type, and if it is a structure or union, does not have any member (including, recursively, any member or element of all contained aggregates or unions) with a const-qualified type. -

    +

    2 Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator, the unary & operator, the ++ operator, the -- operator, or the left operand of the . operator or an assignment operator, an lvalue that does not have array type is converted to the value stored in the designated @@ -2828,13 +2828,13 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 unqualified version of the type of the lvalue; otherwise, the value has the type of the lvalue. If the lvalue has an incomplete type and does not have array type, the behavior is undefined. -

    +

    3 Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator or the unary & operator, or is a string literal used to initialize an array, an expression that has type ''array of type'' is converted to an expression with type ''pointer to type'' that points to the initial element of the array object and is not an lvalue. If the array object has register storage class, the behavior is undefined. -

    +

    4 A function designator is an expression that has function type. Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator54) or the unary & operator, a function designator with type ''function returning type'' is converted to an expression that has type ''pointer to @@ -2861,7 +2861,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.3.2.2 void
    -

    +

    1 The (nonexistent) value of a void expression (an expression that has type void) shall not be used in any way, and implicit or explicit conversions (except to void) shall not be applied to such an expression. If an expression of any other type is evaluated as a void @@ -2870,32 +2870,32 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.3.2.3 Pointers
    -

    +

    1 A pointer to void may be converted to or from a pointer to any incomplete or object type. A pointer to any incomplete or object type may be converted to a pointer to void and back again; the result shall compare equal to the original pointer. -

    +

    2 For any qualifier q, a pointer to a non-q-qualified type may be converted to a pointer to the q-qualified version of the type; the values stored in the original and converted pointers shall compare equal. -

    +

    3 An integer constant expression with the value 0, or such an expression cast to type void *, is called a null pointer constant.55) If a null pointer constant is converted to a pointer type, the resulting pointer, called a null pointer, is guaranteed to compare unequal to a pointer to any object or function. -

    +

    4 Conversion of a null pointer to another pointer type yields a null pointer of that type. Any two null pointers shall compare equal. -

    +

    5 An integer may be converted to any pointer type. Except as previously specified, the result is implementation-defined, might not be correctly aligned, might not point to an entity of the referenced type, and might be a trap representation.56) -

    +

    6 Any pointer type may be converted to an integer type. Except as previously specified, the result is implementation-defined. If the result cannot be represented in the integer type, the behavior is undefined. The result need not be in the range of values of any integer type. -

    +

    7 A pointer to an object or incomplete type may be converted to a pointer to a different object or incomplete type. If the resulting pointer is not correctly aligned57) for the pointed-to type, the behavior is undefined. Otherwise, when converted back again, the @@ -2906,7 +2906,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 converted to a pointer to a character type, the result points to the lowest addressed byte of the object. Successive increments of the result, up to the size of the object, yield pointers to the remaining bytes of the object. -

    +

    8 A pointer to a function of one type may be converted to a pointer to a function of another type and back again; the result shall compare equal to the original pointer. If a converted pointer is used to call a function whose type is not compatible with the pointed-to type, @@ -2929,7 +2929,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.4 Lexical elements

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               token:
                    keyword
@@ -2947,11 +2947,11 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                  each non-white-space character that cannot be one of the above

    Constraints -

    +

    2 Each preprocessing token that is converted to a token shall have the lexical form of a keyword, an identifier, a constant, a string literal, or a punctuator.

    Semantics -

    +

    3 A token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation phases 7 and 8. The categories of tokens are: keywords, identifiers, constants, string literals, and punctuators. A preprocessing token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation @@ -2970,7 +2970,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 -

    +

    4 If the input stream has been parsed into preprocessing tokens up to a given character, the next preprocessing token is the longest sequence of characters that could constitute a preprocessing token. There is one exception to this rule: header name preprocessing @@ -2978,14 +2978,14 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007 implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives. In such contexts, a sequence of characters that could be either a header name or a string literal is recognized as the former. -

    +

    5 EXAMPLE 1 The program fragment 1Ex is parsed as a preprocessing number token (one that is not a valid floating or integer constant token), even though a parse as the pair of preprocessing tokens 1 and Ex might produce a valid expression (for example, if Ex were a macro defined as +1). Similarly, the program fragment 1E1 is parsed as a preprocessing number (one that is a valid floating constant token), whether or not E is a macro name. -

    +

    6 EXAMPLE 2 The program fragment x+++++y is parsed as x ++ ++ + y, which violates a constraint on increment operators, even though the parse x ++ + ++ y might yield a correct expression. @@ -3003,7 +3003,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.4.1 Keywords

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               keyword: one of
                 auto                    enum                  restrict              unsigned
@@ -3018,7 +3018,7 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                 else                    register              union

    Semantics -

    +

    2 The above tokens (case sensitive) are reserved (in translation phases 7 and 8) for use as keywords, and shall not be used otherwise. The keyword _Imaginary is reserved for specifying imaginary types.59) @@ -3037,7 +3037,7 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.4.2.1 General

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               identifier:
                  identifier-nondigit
@@ -3056,19 +3056,19 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                  0 1        2     3    4    5    6     7    8    9

    Semantics -

    +

    2 An identifier is a sequence of nondigit characters (including the underscore _, the lowercase and uppercase Latin letters, and other characters) and digits, which designates one or more entities as described in 6.2.1. Lowercase and uppercase letters are distinct. There is no specific limit on the maximum length of an identifier. -

    +

    3 Each universal character name in an identifier shall designate a character whose encoding in ISO/IEC 10646 falls into one of the ranges specified in annex D.60) The initial character shall not be a universal character name designating a digit. An implementation may allow multibyte characters that are not part of the basic source character set to appear in identifiers; which characters and their correspondence to universal character names is implementation-defined. -

    +

    4 When preprocessing tokens are converted to tokens during translation phase 7, if a preprocessing token could be converted to either a keyword or an identifier, it is converted to a keyword. @@ -3076,13 +3076,13 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Implementation limits -

    +

    5 As discussed in 5.2.4.1, an implementation may limit the number of significant initial characters in an identifier; the limit for an external name (an identifier that has external linkage) may be more restrictive than that for an internal name (a macro name or an identifier that does not have external linkage). The number of significant characters in an identifier is implementation-defined. -

    +

    6 Any identifiers that differ in a significant character are different identifiers. If two identifiers differ only in nonsignificant characters, the behavior is undefined.

    Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), macro replacement (6.10.3). @@ -3097,18 +3097,18 @@ WG14/N1256 Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007

    Contents

    6.4.2.2 Predefined identifiers

    Semantics -

    +

    1 The identifier __func__ shall be implicitly declared by the translator as if, immediately following the opening brace of each function definition, the declaration 

               static const char __func__[] = "function-name";
    appeared, where function-name is the name of the lexically-enclosing function.61) -

    +

    2 This name is encoded as if the implicit declaration had been written in the source character set and then translated into the execution character set as indicated in translation phase 5. -

    +

    3 EXAMPLE Consider the code fragment: 

               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -3138,7 +3138,7 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.3 Universal character names
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               universal-character-name:
                  \u hex-quad
@@ -3148,16 +3148,16 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                               hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  A universal character name shall not specify a character whose short identifier is less than
  00A0 other than 0024 ($), 0040 (@), or 0060 ('), nor one in the range D800 through
  DFFF inclusive.62)
 
    Description
-
    
+
    3
  Universal character names may be used in identifiers, character constants, and string
  literals to designate characters that are not in the basic character set.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  The universal character name \Unnnnnnnn designates the character whose eight-digit
  short identifier (as specified by ISO/IEC 10646) is nnnnnnnn.63) Similarly, the universal
  character name \unnnn designates the character whose four-digit short identifier is nnnn
@@ -3179,7 +3179,7 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.4 Constants
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               constant:
                  integer-constant
@@ -3188,17 +3188,17 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                  character-constant
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each constant shall have a type and the value of a constant shall be in the range of
  representable values for its type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  Each constant has a type, determined by its form and value, as detailed later.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.4.1 Integer constants
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
 
               integer-constant:
@@ -3237,20 +3237,20 @@ WG14/N1256                Committee Draft -- Septermber 7, 2007
                ll LL
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  An integer constant begins with a digit, but has no period or exponent part. It may have a
  prefix that specifies its base and a suffix that specifies its type.
-
    
+
    3
  A decimal constant begins with a nonzero digit and consists of a sequence of decimal
  digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix 0 optionally followed by a sequence of the
  digits 0 through 7 only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
  by a sequence of the decimal digits and the letters a (or A) through f (or F) with values
  10 through 15 respectively.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  The value of a decimal constant is computed base 10; that of an octal constant, base 8;
  that of a hexadecimal constant, base 16. The lexically first digit is the most significant.
-
    
+
    5
  The type of an integer constant is the first of the corresponding list in which its value can
  be represented.
 
@@ -3317,7 +3317,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 unsigned long long int
    -

    +

    6 If an integer constant cannot be represented by any type in its list, it may have an extended integer type, if the extended integer type can represent its value. If all of the types in the list for the constant are signed, the extended integer type shall be signed. If @@ -3330,7 +3330,7 @@ unsigned long long int

    Contents

    6.4.4.2 Floating constants

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               floating-constant:
@@ -3369,7 +3369,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                  f l F L

    Description -

    +

    2 A floating constant has a significand part that may be followed by an exponent part and a suffix that specifies its type. The components of the significand part may include a digit sequence representing the whole-number part, followed by a period (.), followed by a @@ -3378,7 +3378,7 @@ unsigned long long int Either the whole-number part or the fraction part has to be present; for decimal floating constants, either the period or the exponent part has to be present.

    Semantics -

    +

    3 The significand part is interpreted as a (decimal or hexadecimal) rational number; the digit sequence in the exponent part is interpreted as a decimal integer. For decimal floating constants, the exponent indicates the power of 10 by which the significand part is @@ -3389,19 +3389,19 @@ unsigned long long int adjacent to the nearest representable value, chosen in an implementation-defined manner. For hexadecimal floating constants when FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the result is correctly rounded. -

    +

    4 An unsuffixed floating constant has type double. If suffixed by the letter f or F, it has type float. If suffixed by the letter l or L, it has type long double. -

    +

    5 Floating constants are converted to internal format as if at translation-time. The conversion of a floating constant shall not raise an exceptional condition or a floating- point exception at execution time.

    Recommended practice -

    +

    6 The implementation should produce a diagnostic message if a hexadecimal constant cannot be represented exactly in its evaluation format; the implementation should then proceed with the translation of the program. -

    +

    7 The translation-time conversion of floating constants should match the execution-time conversion of character strings by library functions, such as strtod, given matching inputs suitable for both conversions, the same result format, and default execution-time @@ -3420,20 +3420,20 @@ unsigned long long int

    Contents

    6.4.4.3 Enumeration constants

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               enumeration-constant:
                 identifier

    Semantics -

    +

    2 An identifier declared as an enumeration constant has type int.

    Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.2.2).

    Contents

    6.4.4.4 Character constants

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               character-constant:
@@ -3463,13 +3463,13 @@ unsigned long long int
                 hexadecimal-escape-sequence hexadecimal-digit

    Description -

    +

    2 An integer character constant is a sequence of one or more multibyte characters enclosed in single-quotes, as in 'x'. A wide character constant is the same, except prefixed by the letter L. With a few exceptions detailed later, the elements of the sequence are any members of the source character set; they are mapped in an implementation-defined manner to members of the execution character set. -

    +

    3 The single-quote ', the double-quote ", the question-mark ?, the backslash \, and arbitrary integer values are representable according to the following table of escape sequences: @@ -3481,25 +3481,25 @@ unsigned long long int octal character \octal digits hexadecimal character \x hexadecimal digits -

    +

    4 The double-quote " and question-mark ? are representable either by themselves or by the escape sequences \" and \?, respectively, but the single-quote ' and the backslash \ shall be represented, respectively, by the escape sequences \' and \\. -

    +

    5 The octal digits that follow the backslash in an octal escape sequence are taken to be part of the construction of a single character for an integer character constant or of a single wide character for a wide character constant. The numerical value of the octal integer so formed specifies the value of the desired character or wide character. -

    +

    6 The hexadecimal digits that follow the backslash and the letter x in a hexadecimal escape sequence are taken to be part of the construction of a single character for an integer character constant or of a single wide character for a wide character constant. The numerical value of the hexadecimal integer so formed specifies the value of the desired character or wide character. -

    +

    7 Each octal or hexadecimal escape sequence is the longest sequence of characters that can constitute the escape sequence. -

    +

    8 In addition, characters not in the basic character set are representable by universal character names and certain nongraphic characters are representable by escape sequences consisting of the backslash \ followed by a lowercase letter: \a, \b, \f, \n, \r, \t, @@ -3510,12 +3510,12 @@ unsigned long long int

    Constraints -

    +

    9 The value of an octal or hexadecimal escape sequence shall be in the range of representable values for the type unsigned char for an integer character constant, or the unsigned type corresponding to wchar_t for a wide character constant.

    Semantics -

    +

    10 An integer character constant has type int. The value of an integer character constant containing a single character that maps to a single-byte execution character is the numerical value of the representation of the mapped character interpreted as an integer. @@ -3525,7 +3525,7 @@ unsigned long long int a single character or escape sequence, its value is the one that results when an object with type char whose value is that of the single character or escape sequence is converted to type int. -

    +

    11 A wide character constant has type wchar_t, an integer type defined in the <stddef.h> header. The value of a wide character constant containing a single multibyte character that maps to a member of the extended execution character set is the @@ -3534,16 +3534,16 @@ unsigned long long int constant containing more than one multibyte character, or containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the extended execution character set, is implementation-defined. -

    +

    12 EXAMPLE 1 The construction '\0' is commonly used to represent the null character. -

    +

    13 EXAMPLE 2 Consider implementations that use two's-complement representation for integers and eight bits for objects that have type char. In an implementation in which type char has the same range of values as signed char, the integer character constant '\xFF' has the value -1; if type char has the same range of values as unsigned char, the character constant '\xFF' has the value +255. -

    +

    14 EXAMPLE 3 Even if eight bits are used for objects that have type char, the construction '\x123' specifies an integer character constant containing only one character, since a hexadecimal escape sequence is terminated only by a non-hexadecimal character. To specify an integer character constant containing the @@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ unsigned long long int escape sequence is terminated after three octal digits. (The value of this two-character integer character constant is implementation-defined.) -

    +

    15 EXAMPLE 4 Even if 12 or more bits are used for objects that have type wchar_t, the construction L'\1234' specifies the implementation-defined value that results from the combination of the values 0123 and '4'. @@ -3568,7 +3568,7 @@ unsigned long long int

    Contents

    6.4.5 String literals

    Syntax -

    +

    1 

               string-literal:
                   " s-char-sequenceopt "
@@ -3582,24 +3582,24 @@ unsigned long long int
                     escape-sequence

    Description -

    +

    2 A character string literal is a sequence of zero or more multibyte characters enclosed in double-quotes, as in "xyz". A wide string literal is the same, except prefixed by the letter L. -

    +

    3 The same considerations apply to each element of the sequence in a character string literal or a wide string literal as if it were in an integer character constant or a wide character constant, except that the single-quote ' is representable either by itself or by the escape sequence \', but the double-quote " shall be represented by the escape sequence \".

    Semantics -

    +

    4 In translation phase 6, the multibyte character sequences specified by any sequence of adjacent character and wide string literal tokens are concatenated into a single multibyte character sequence. If any of the tokens are wide string literal tokens, the resulting multibyte character sequence is treated as a wide string literal; otherwise, it is treated as a character string literal. -

    +

    5 In translation phase 7, a byte or code of value zero is appended to each multibyte character sequence that results from a string literal or literals.66) The multibyte character sequence is then used to initialize an array of static storage duration and length just @@ -3612,11 +3612,11 @@ unsigned long long int sequence, as defined by the mbstowcs function with an implementation-defined current locale. The value of a string literal containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the execution character set is implementation-defined. -

    +

    6 It is unspecified whether these arrays are distinct provided their elements have the appropriate values. If the program attempts to modify such an array, the behavior is undefined. -

    +

    7 EXAMPLE This pair of adjacent character string literals 

               "\x12" "3"
@@ -3636,7 +3636,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.6 Punctuators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               punctuator: one of
                  [ ] ( ) { } . ->
@@ -3648,14 +3648,14 @@ unsigned long long int
                  <: :> <% %> %: %:%:
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A punctuator is a symbol that has independent syntactic and semantic significance.
  Depending on context, it may specify an operation to be performed (which in turn may
  yield a value or a function designator, produce a side effect, or some combination thereof)
  in which case it is known as an operator (other forms of operator also exist in some
  contexts). An operand is an entity on which an operator acts.
 
-
    
+
    3
  In all aspects of the language, the six tokens67)
 
               <:    :>      <%    %>     %:     %:%:
@@ -3678,7 +3678,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.7 Header names
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               header-name:
                  < h-char-sequence >
@@ -3697,10 +3697,10 @@ unsigned long long int
                                  the new-line character and "
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The sequences in both forms of header names are mapped in an implementation-defined
  manner to headers or external source file names as specified in 6.10.2.
-
    
+
    3
  If the characters ', \, ", //, or /* occur in the sequence between the < and > delimiters,
  the behavior is undefined. Similarly, if the characters ', \, //, or /* occur in the
  
@@ -3711,7 +3711,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  sequence between the " delimiters, the behavior is undefined.69) Header name
  preprocessing tokens are recognized only within #include preprocessing directives and
  in implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives.70)
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE       The following sequence of characters:
 
               0x3<1/a.h>1e2
@@ -3737,7 +3737,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.8 Preprocessing numbers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               pp-number:
                 digit
@@ -3751,14 +3751,14 @@ unsigned long long int
                 pp-number       .
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  A preprocessing number begins with a digit optionally preceded by a period (.) and may
  be followed by valid identifier characters and the character sequences e+, e-, E+, E-,
  p+, p-, P+, or P-.
-
    
+
    3
  Preprocessing number tokens lexically include all floating and integer constant tokens.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  A preprocessing number does not have type or a value; it acquires both after a successful
  conversion (as part of translation phase 7) to a floating constant token or an integer
  constant token.
@@ -3768,16 +3768,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.4.9 Comments
    
-
    
+
    1
  Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters /*
  introduce a comment. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify
  multibyte characters and to find the characters */ that terminate it.71)
-
    
+
    2
  Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters //
  introduce a comment that includes all multibyte characters up to, but not including, the
  next new-line character. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify
  multibyte characters and to find the terminating new-line character.
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE
 
              "a//b"                              //   four-character string literal
@@ -3806,28 +3806,28 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.5 Expressions
    
-
    
+
    1
  An expression is a sequence of operators and operands that specifies computation of a
  value, or that designates an object or a function, or that generates side effects, or that
  performs a combination thereof.
-
    
+
    2
  Between the previous and next sequence point an object shall have its stored value
  modified at most once by the evaluation of an expression.72) Furthermore, the prior value
  shall be read only to determine the value to be stored.73)
-
    
+
    3
  The grouping of operators and operands is indicated by the syntax.74) Except as specified
  later (for the function-call (), &&, ||, ?:, and comma operators), the order of evaluation
  of subexpressions and the order in which side effects take place are both unspecified.
-
    
+
    4
  Some operators (the unary operator ~, and the binary operators <<, >>, &, ^, and |,
  collectively described as bitwise operators) are required to have operands that have
  integer type. These operators yield values that depend on the internal representations of
  integers, and have implementation-defined and undefined aspects for signed types.
-
    
+
    5
  If an exceptional condition occurs during the evaluation of an expression (that is, if the
  result is not mathematically defined or not in the range of representable values for its
  type), the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    6
  The effective type of an object for an access to its stored value is the declared type of the
  object, if any.75) If a value is stored into an object having no declared type through an
  lvalue having a type that is not a character type, then the type of the lvalue becomes the
@@ -3841,7 +3841,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  value is the effective type of the object from which the value is copied, if it has one. For
  all other accesses to an object having no declared type, the effective type of the object is
  simply the type of the lvalue used for the access.
-
    
+
    7
  An object shall have its stored value accessed only by an lvalue expression that has one of
  the following types:76)
 
      
@@ -3855,7 +3855,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  members (including, recursively, a member of a subaggregate or contained union), or
 
    •   a character type.
 
    
-
    
+
    8
  A floating expression may be contracted, that is, evaluated as though it were an atomic
  operation, thereby omitting rounding errors implied by the source code and the
  expression evaluation method.77) The FP_CONTRACT pragma in <math.h> provides a
@@ -3910,7 +3910,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.1 Primary expressions
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               primary-expression:
                  identifier
@@ -3919,16 +3919,16 @@ unsigned long long int
                  ( expression )
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  An identifier is a primary expression, provided it has been declared as designating an
  object (in which case it is an lvalue) or a function (in which case it is a function
  designator).79)
-
    
+
    3
  A constant is a primary expression. Its type depends on its form and value, as detailed in
  6.4.4.
-
    
+
    4
  A string literal is a primary expression. It is an lvalue with type as detailed in 6.4.5.
-
    
+
    5
  A parenthesized expression is a primary expression. Its type and value are identical to
  those of the unparenthesized expression. It is an lvalue, a function designator, or a void
  expression if the unparenthesized expression is, respectively, an lvalue, a function
@@ -3942,7 +3942,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2 Postfix operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               postfix-expression:
                  primary-expression
@@ -3969,18 +3969,18 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2.1 Array subscripting
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  One of the expressions shall have type ''pointer to object type'', the other expression shall
  have integer type, and the result has type ''type''.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A postfix expression followed by an expression in square brackets [] is a subscripted
  designation of an element of an array object. The definition of the subscript operator []
  is that E1[E2] is identical to (*((E1)+(E2))). Because of the conversion rules that
  apply to the binary + operator, if E1 is an array object (equivalently, a pointer to the
  initial element of an array object) and E2 is an integer, E1[E2] designates the E2-th
  element of E1 (counting from zero).
-
    
+
    3
  Successive subscript operators designate an element of a multidimensional array object.
  If E is an n-dimensional array (n >= 2) with dimensions i x j x . . . x k, then E (used as
  other than an lvalue) is converted to a pointer to an (n - 1)-dimensional array with
@@ -3988,7 +3988,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  implicitly as a result of subscripting, the result is the pointed-to (n - 1)-dimensional array,
  which itself is converted into a pointer if used as other than an lvalue. It follows from this
  that arrays are stored in row-major order (last subscript varies fastest).
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE        Consider the array object defined by the declaration
 
               int x[3][5];
@@ -4008,30 +4008,30 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2.2 Function calls
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The expression that denotes the called function80) shall have type pointer to function
  returning void or returning an object type other than an array type.
-
    
+
    2
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that includes a prototype, the
  number of arguments shall agree with the number of parameters. Each argument shall
  have a type such that its value may be assigned to an object with the unqualified version
  of the type of its corresponding parameter.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  A postfix expression followed by parentheses () containing a possibly empty, comma-
  separated list of expressions is a function call. The postfix expression denotes the called
  function. The list of expressions specifies the arguments to the function.
-
    
+
    4
  An argument may be an expression of any object type. In preparing for the call to a
  function, the arguments are evaluated, and each parameter is assigned the value of the
  corresponding argument.81)
-
    
+
    5
  If the expression that denotes the called function has type pointer to function returning an
  object type, the function call expression has the same type as that object type, and has the
  value determined as specified in 6.8.6.4. Otherwise, the function call has type void. If
  an attempt is made to modify the result of a function call or to access it after the next
  sequence point, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    6
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that does not include a
  prototype, the integer promotions are performed on each argument, and arguments that
  have type float are promoted to double. These are called the default argument
@@ -4053,29 +4053,29 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  •   both types are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of a character type or
  void.
 
-
    
+
    7
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that does include a prototype,
  the arguments are implicitly converted, as if by assignment, to the types of the
  corresponding parameters, taking the type of each parameter to be the unqualified version
  of its declared type. The ellipsis notation in a function prototype declarator causes
  argument type conversion to stop after the last declared parameter. The default argument
  promotions are performed on trailing arguments.
-
    
+
    8
  No other conversions are performed implicitly; in particular, the number and types of
  arguments are not compared with those of the parameters in a function definition that
  does not include a function prototype declarator.
-
    
+
    9
  If the function is defined with a type that is not compatible with the type (of the
  expression) pointed to by the expression that denotes the called function, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
    
+
    10
  The order of evaluation of the function designator, the actual arguments, and
  subexpressions within the actual arguments is unspecified, but there is a sequence point
  before the actual call.
-
    
+
    11
  Recursive function calls shall be permitted, both directly and indirectly through any chain
  of other functions.
-
    
+
    12
  EXAMPLE       In the function call
 
              (*pf[f1()]) (f2(), f3() + f4())
@@ -4098,27 +4098,27 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2.3 Structure and union members
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The first operand of the . operator shall have a qualified or unqualified structure or union
  type, and the second operand shall name a member of that type.
-
    
+
    2
  The first operand of the -> operator shall have type ''pointer to qualified or unqualified
  structure'' or ''pointer to qualified or unqualified union'', and the second operand shall
  name a member of the type pointed to.
 
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  A postfix expression followed by the . operator and an identifier designates a member of
  a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member,82) and is an lvalue if
  the first expression is an lvalue. If the first expression has qualified type, the result has
  the so-qualified version of the type of the designated member.
-
    
+
    4
  A postfix expression followed by the -> operator and an identifier designates a member
  of a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member of the object to
  which the first expression points, and is an lvalue.83) If the first expression is a pointer to
  a qualified type, the result has the so-qualified version of the type of the designated
  member.
-
    
+
    5
  One special guarantee is made in order to simplify the use of unions: if a union contains
  several structures that share a common initial sequence (see below), and if the union
  object currently contains one of these structures, it is permitted to inspect the common
@@ -4126,11 +4126,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  visible. Two structures share a common initial sequence if corresponding members have
  compatible types (and, for bit-fields, the same widths) for a sequence of one or more
  initial members.
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 1 If f is a function returning a structure or union, and x is a member of that structure or
  union, f().x is a valid postfix expression but is not an lvalue.
  
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 2 In:
 
               struct s { int i; const int ci; };
@@ -4152,7 +4152,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 3       The following is a valid fragment:
 
               union {
@@ -4213,18 +4213,18 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2.4 Postfix increment and decrement operators
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The operand of the postfix increment or decrement operator shall have qualified or
  unqualified real or pointer type and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The result of the postfix ++ operator is the value of the operand. After the result is
  obtained, the value of the operand is incremented. (That is, the value 1 of the appropriate
  type is added to it.) See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment
  for information on constraints, types, and conversions and the effects of operations on
  pointers. The side effect of updating the stored value of the operand shall occur between
  the previous and the next sequence point.
-
    
+
    3
  The postfix -- operator is analogous to the postfix ++ operator, except that the value of
  the operand is decremented (that is, the value 1 of the appropriate type is subtracted from
  it).
@@ -4233,21 +4233,21 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.2.5 Compound literals
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The type name shall specify an object type or an array of unknown size, but not a variable
  length array type.
-
    
+
    2
  No initializer shall attempt to provide a value for an object not contained within the entire
  unnamed object specified by the compound literal.
-
    
+
    3
  If the compound literal occurs outside the body of a function, the initializer list shall
  consist of constant expressions.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  A postfix expression that consists of a parenthesized type name followed by a brace-
  enclosed list of initializers is a compound literal. It provides an unnamed object whose
  value is given by the initializer list.84)
-
    
+
    5
  If the type name specifies an array of unknown size, the size is determined by the
  initializer list as specified in 6.7.8, and the type of the compound literal is that of the
  completed array type. Otherwise (when the type name specifies an object type), the type
@@ -4256,18 +4256,18 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    6
  The value of the compound literal is that of an unnamed object initialized by the
  initializer list. If the compound literal occurs outside the body of a function, the object
  has static storage duration; otherwise, it has automatic storage duration associated with
  the enclosing block.
-
    
+
    7
  All the semantic rules and constraints for initializer lists in 6.7.8 are applicable to
  compound literals.85)
-
    
+
    8
  String literals, and compound literals with const-qualified types, need not designate
  distinct objects.86)
-
    
+
    9
  EXAMPLE 1       The file scope definition
 
               int *p = (int []){2, 4};
@@ -4276,7 +4276,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  second, four. The expressions in this compound literal are required to be constant. The unnamed object
  has static storage duration.
  
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE 2       In contrast, in
 
               void f(void)
@@ -4291,7 +4291,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  pointed to by p and the second, zero. The expressions in this compound literal need not be constant. The
  unnamed object has automatic storage duration.
  
-
    
+
    11
  EXAMPLE 3 Initializers with designations can be combined with compound literals. Structure objects
  created using compound literals can be passed to functions without depending on member order:
 
    @@ -4304,7 +4304,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                 &(struct point){.x=3, .y=4});
 
    
  
-
    
+
    12
  EXAMPLE 4       A read-only compound literal can be specified through constructions like:
 
               (const float []){1e0, 1e1, 1e2, 1e3, 1e4, 1e5, 1e6}
@@ -4314,7 +4314,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    13
  EXAMPLE 5        The following three expressions have different meanings:
 
               "/tmp/fileXXXXXX"
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  two have automatic storage duration when they occur within the body of a function, and the first of these
  two is modifiable.
  
-
    
+
    14
  EXAMPLE 6 Like string literals, const-qualified compound literals can be placed into read-only memory
  and can even be shared. For example,
 
    @@ -4333,7 +4333,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  might yield 1 if the literals' storage is shared.
  
-
    
+
    15
  EXAMPLE 7 Since compound literals are unnamed, a single compound literal cannot specify a circularly
  linked object. For example, there is no way to write a self-referential compound literal that could be used
  as the function argument in place of the named object endless_zeros below:
@@ -4343,7 +4343,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           eval(endless_zeros);
 
    
  
-
    
+
    16
  EXAMPLE 8        Each compound literal creates only a single object in a given scope:
 
               struct s { int i; };
@@ -4358,7 +4358,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           }
 
    
  The function f() always returns the value 1.
-
    
+
    17
  Note that if an iteration statement were used instead of an explicit goto and a labeled statement, the
  lifetime of the unnamed object would be the body of the loop only, and on entry next time around p would
  have an indeterminate value, which would result in undefined behavior.
@@ -4379,7 +4379,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.3 Unary operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               unary-expression:
                  postfix-expression
@@ -4395,16 +4395,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.3.1 Prefix increment and decrement operators
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The operand of the prefix increment or decrement operator shall have qualified or
  unqualified real or pointer type and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The value of the operand of the prefix ++ operator is incremented. The result is the new
  value of the operand after incrementation. The expression ++E is equivalent to (E+=1).
  See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment for information on
  constraints, types, side effects, and conversions and the effects of operations on pointers.
-
    
+
    3
  The prefix -- operator is analogous to the prefix ++ operator, except that the value of the
  operand is decremented.
 
     Forward references: additive operators (6.5.6), compound assignment (6.5.16.2).
@@ -4412,14 +4412,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.3.2 Address and indirection operators
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The operand of the unary & operator shall be either a function designator, the result of a
  [] or unary * operator, or an lvalue that designates an object that is not a bit-field and is
  not declared with the register storage-class specifier.
-
    
+
    2
  The operand of the unary * operator shall have pointer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The unary & operator yields the address of its operand. If the operand has type ''type'',
  the result has type ''pointer to type''. If the operand is the result of a unary * operator,
  neither that operator nor the & operator is evaluated and the result is as if both were
@@ -4429,7 +4429,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the unary * that is implied by the [] is evaluated and the result is as if the & operator
  were removed and the [] operator were changed to a + operator. Otherwise, the result is
  a pointer to the object or function designated by its operand.
-
    
+
    4
  The unary * operator denotes indirection. If the operand points to a function, the result is
  a function designator; if it points to an object, the result is an lvalue designating the
  object. If the operand has type ''pointer to type'', the result has type ''type''. If an
@@ -4451,23 +4451,23 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.3.3 Unary arithmetic operators
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The operand of the unary + or - operator shall have arithmetic type; of the ~ operator,
  integer type; of the ! operator, scalar type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The result of the unary + operator is the value of its (promoted) operand. The integer
  promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.
-
    
+
    3
  The result of the unary - operator is the negative of its (promoted) operand. The integer
  promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.
-
    
+
    4
  The result of the ~ operator is the bitwise complement of its (promoted) operand (that is,
  each bit in the result is set if and only if the corresponding bit in the converted operand is
  not set). The integer promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the
  promoted type. If the promoted type is an unsigned type, the expression ~E is equivalent
  to the maximum value representable in that type minus E.
-
    
+
    5
  The result of the logical negation operator ! is 0 if the value of its operand compares
  unequal to 0, 1 if the value of its operand compares equal to 0. The result has type int.
  The expression !E is equivalent to (0==E).
@@ -4480,27 +4480,27 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.3.4 The sizeof operator
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The sizeof operator shall not be applied to an expression that has function type or an
  incomplete type, to the parenthesized name of such a type, or to an expression that
  designates a bit-field member.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The sizeof operator yields the size (in bytes) of its operand, which may be an
  expression or the parenthesized name of a type. The size is determined from the type of
  the operand. The result is an integer. If the type of the operand is a variable length array
  type, the operand is evaluated; otherwise, the operand is not evaluated and the result is an
  integer constant.
-
    
+
    3
  When applied to an operand that has type char, unsigned char, or signed char,
  (or a qualified version thereof) the result is 1. When applied to an operand that has array
  type, the result is the total number of bytes in the array.88) When applied to an operand
  that has structure or union type, the result is the total number of bytes in such an object,
  including internal and trailing padding.
-
    
+
    4
  The value of the result is implementation-defined, and its type (an unsigned integer type)
  is size_t, defined in <stddef.h> (and other headers).
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 1 A principal use of the sizeof operator is in communication with routines such as storage
  allocators and I/O systems. A storage-allocation function might accept a size (in bytes) of an object to
  allocate and return a pointer to void. For example:
@@ -4511,13 +4511,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  The implementation of the alloc function should ensure that its return value is aligned suitably for
  conversion to a pointer to double.
  
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 2      Another use of the sizeof operator is to compute the number of elements in an array:
 
              sizeof array / sizeof array[0]
 
    
  
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 3      In this example, the size of a variable length array is computed and returned from a
  function:
 
    @@ -4552,25 +4552,25 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.4 Cast operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               cast-expression:
                  unary-expression
                  ( type-name ) cast-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Unless the type name specifies a void type, the type name shall specify qualified or
  unqualified scalar type and the operand shall have scalar type.
-
    
+
    3
  Conversions that involve pointers, other than where permitted by the constraints of
  6.5.16.1, shall be specified by means of an explicit cast.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  Preceding an expression by a parenthesized type name converts the value of the
  expression to the named type. This construction is called a cast.89) A cast that specifies
  no conversion has no effect on the type or value of an expression.
-
    
+
    5
  If the value of the expression is represented with greater precision or range than required
  by the type named by the cast (6.3.1.8), then the cast specifies a conversion even if the
  type of the expression is the same as the named type.
@@ -4590,7 +4590,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.5 Multiplicative operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               multiplicative-expression:
                   cast-expression
@@ -4599,19 +4599,19 @@ unsigned long long int
                   multiplicative-expression % cast-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have arithmetic type. The operands of the % operator shall
  have integer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
    
+
    4
  The result of the binary * operator is the product of the operands.
-
    
+
    5
  The result of the / operator is the quotient from the division of the first operand by the
  second; the result of the % operator is the remainder. In both operations, if the value of
  the second operand is zero, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    6
  When integers are divided, the result of the / operator is the algebraic quotient with any
  fractional part discarded.90) If the quotient a/b is representable, the expression
  (a/b)*b + a%b shall equal a.
@@ -4623,7 +4623,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.6 Additive operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               additive-expression:
                   multiplicative-expression
@@ -4631,11 +4631,11 @@ unsigned long long int
                   additive-expression - multiplicative-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  For addition, either both operands shall have arithmetic type, or one operand shall be a
  pointer to an object type and the other shall have integer type. (Incrementing is
  equivalent to adding 1.)
-
    
+
    3
  For subtraction, one of the following shall hold:
 
      
 
    •   both operands have arithmetic type;
@@ -4649,19 +4649,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  (Decrementing is equivalent to subtracting 1.)
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  If both operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed on
  them.
-
    
+
    5
  The result of the binary + operator is the sum of the operands.
-
    
+
    6
  The result of the binary - operator is the difference resulting from the subtraction of the
  second operand from the first.
-
    
+
    7
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
-
    
+
    8
  When an expression that has integer type is added to or subtracted from a pointer, the
  result has the type of the pointer operand. If the pointer operand points to an element of
  an array object, and the array is large enough, the result points to an element offset from
@@ -4677,7 +4677,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  element of the array object, the evaluation shall not produce an overflow; otherwise, the
  behavior is undefined. If the result points one past the last element of the array object, it
  shall not be used as the operand of a unary * operator that is evaluated.
-
    
+
    9
  When two pointers are subtracted, both shall point to elements of the same array object,
  or one past the last element of the array object; the result is the difference of the
  subscripts of the two array elements. The size of the result is implementation-defined,
@@ -4692,7 +4692,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  value as ((Q)-(P))+1 and as -((P)-((Q)+1)), and has the value zero if the
  expression P points one past the last element of the array object, even though the
  expression (Q)+1 does not point to an element of the array object.91)
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE        Pointer arithmetic is well defined with pointers to variable length array types.
 
               {
@@ -4704,7 +4704,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                    n = p - a;                  //   n == 1
           }
 
    
-
    
+
    11
  If array a in the above example were declared to be an array of known constant size, and pointer p were
  declared to be a pointer to an array of the same known constant size (pointing to a), the results would be
  the same.
@@ -4726,7 +4726,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.7 Bitwise shift operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               shift-expression:
                   additive-expression
@@ -4734,10 +4734,10 @@ unsigned long long int
                   shift-expression >> additive-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The integer promotions are performed on each of the operands. The type of the result is
  that of the promoted left operand. If the value of the right operand is negative or is
  greater than or equal to the width of the promoted left operand, the behavior is undefined.
@@ -4746,13 +4746,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    4
  The result of E1 << E2 is E1 left-shifted E2 bit positions; vacated bits are filled with
  zeros. If E1 has an unsigned type, the value of the result is E1 x 2E2 , reduced modulo
  one more than the maximum value representable in the result type. If E1 has a signed
  type and nonnegative value, and E1 x 2E2 is representable in the result type, then that is
  the resulting value; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    5
  The result of E1 >> E2 is E1 right-shifted E2 bit positions. If E1 has an unsigned type
  or if E1 has a signed type and a nonnegative value, the value of the result is the integral
  part of the quotient of E1 / 2E2 . If E1 has a signed type and a negative value, the
@@ -4761,7 +4761,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.8 Relational operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               relational-expression:
                   shift-expression
@@ -4771,7 +4771,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                   relational-expression   >=   shift-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  One of the following shall hold:
 
      
 
    •   both operands have real type;
@@ -4781,14 +4781,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  incomplete types.
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are
  performed.
-
    
+
    4
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
-
    
+
    5
  When two pointers are compared, the result depends on the relative locations in the
  address space of the objects pointed to. If two pointers to object or incomplete types both
  point to the same object, or both point one past the last element of the same array object,
@@ -4801,7 +4801,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  expression P points to an element of an array object and the expression Q points to the
  last element of the same array object, the pointer expression Q+1 compares greater than
  P. In all other cases, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    6
  Each of the operators < (less than), > (greater than), <= (less than or equal to), and >=
  (greater than or equal to) shall yield 1 if the specified relation is true and 0 if it is false.92)
  The result has type int.
@@ -4814,7 +4814,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.9 Equality operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               equality-expression:
                   relational-expression
@@ -4822,7 +4822,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                  equality-expression != relational-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  One of the following shall hold:
 
      
 
    •   both operands have arithmetic type;
@@ -4832,12 +4832,12 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    •   one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant.
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The == (equal to) and != (not equal to) operators are analogous to the relational
  operators except for their lower precedence.93) Each of the operators yields 1 if the
  specified relation is true and 0 if it is false. The result has type int. For any pair of
  operands, exactly one of the relations is true.
-
    
+
    4
  If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are
  performed. Values of complex types are equal if and only if both their real parts are equal
  and also their imaginary parts are equal. Any two values of arithmetic types from
@@ -4846,19 +4846,19 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    5
  Otherwise, at least one operand is a pointer. If one operand is a pointer and the other is a
  null pointer constant, the null pointer constant is converted to the type of the pointer. If
  one operand is a pointer to an object or incomplete type and the other is a pointer to a
  qualified or unqualified version of void, the former is converted to the type of the latter.
-
    
+
    6
  Two pointers compare equal if and only if both are null pointers, both are pointers to the
  same object (including a pointer to an object and a subobject at its beginning) or function,
  both are pointers to one past the last element of the same array object, or one is a pointer
  to one past the end of one array object and the other is a pointer to the start of a different
  array object that happens to immediately follow the first array object in the address
  space.94)
-
    
+
    7
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
@@ -4876,19 +4876,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.10 Bitwise AND operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               AND-expression:
                 equality-expression
                 AND-expression & equality-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
    
+
    4
  The result of the binary & operator is the bitwise AND of the operands (that is, each bit in
  the result is set if and only if each of the corresponding bits in the converted operands is
  set).
@@ -4901,19 +4901,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.11 Bitwise exclusive OR operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               exclusive-OR-expression:
                   AND-expression
                   exclusive-OR-expression ^ AND-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
    
+
    4
  The result of the ^ operator is the bitwise exclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit
  in the result is set if and only if exactly one of the corresponding bits in the converted
  operands is set).
@@ -4921,19 +4921,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.12 Bitwise inclusive OR operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               inclusive-OR-expression:
                   exclusive-OR-expression
                   inclusive-OR-expression | exclusive-OR-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
    
+
    4
  The result of the | operator is the bitwise inclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit in
  the result is set if and only if at least one of the corresponding bits in the converted
  operands is set).
@@ -4942,20 +4942,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.13 Logical AND operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
                logical-AND-expression:
                    inclusive-OR-expression
                    logical-AND-expression && inclusive-OR-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The && operator shall yield 1 if both of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
  yields 0. The result has type int.
-
    
+
    4
  Unlike the bitwise binary & operator, the && operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation;
  there is a sequence point after the evaluation of the first operand. If the first operand
  compares equal to 0, the second operand is not evaluated.
@@ -4963,20 +4963,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.14 Logical OR operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
                logical-OR-expression:
                    logical-AND-expression
                    logical-OR-expression || logical-AND-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The || operator shall yield 1 if either of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
  yields 0. The result has type int.
-
    
+
    4
  Unlike the bitwise | operator, the || operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation; there is
  a sequence point after the evaluation of the first operand. If the first operand compares
  unequal to 0, the second operand is not evaluated.
@@ -4985,16 +4985,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.15 Conditional operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               conditional-expression:
                  logical-OR-expression
                  logical-OR-expression ? expression : conditional-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  The first operand shall have scalar type.
-
    
+
    3
  One of the following shall hold for the second and third operands:
 
      
 
    •   both operands have arithmetic type;
@@ -5006,19 +5006,19 @@ unsigned long long int
  qualified or unqualified version of void.
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  The first operand is evaluated; there is a sequence point after its evaluation. The second
  operand is evaluated only if the first compares unequal to 0; the third operand is evaluated
  only if the first compares equal to 0; the result is the value of the second or third operand
  (whichever is evaluated), converted to the type described below.95) If an attempt is made
  to modify the result of a conditional operator or to access it after the next sequence point,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    5
  If both the second and third operands have arithmetic type, the result type that would be
  determined by the usual arithmetic conversions, were they applied to those two operands,
  is the type of the result. If both the operands have structure or union type, the result has
  that type. If both operands have void type, the result has void type.
-
    
+
    6
  If both the second and third operands are pointers or one is a null pointer constant and the
  other is a pointer, the result type is a pointer to a type qualified with all the type qualifiers
  of the types pointed-to by both operands. Furthermore, if both operands are pointers to
@@ -5029,11 +5029,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
  pointer to an appropriately qualified version of void.
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE The common type that results when the second and third operands are pointers is determined
  in two independent stages. The appropriate qualifiers, for example, do not depend on whether the two
  pointers have compatible types.
-
    
+
    8
  Given the declarations
 
               const void *c_vp;
@@ -5062,7 +5062,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.16 Assignment operators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               assignment-expression:
                  conditional-expression
@@ -5071,17 +5071,17 @@ unsigned long long int
                  = *= /= %= +=                       -=     <<=      >>=      &=     ^=     |=
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  An assignment operator shall have a modifiable lvalue as its left operand.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  An assignment operator stores a value in the object designated by the left operand. An
  assignment expression has the value of the left operand after the assignment, but is not an
  lvalue. The type of an assignment expression is the type of the left operand unless the
  left operand has qualified type, in which case it is the unqualified version of the type of
  the left operand. The side effect of updating the stored value of the left operand shall
  occur between the previous and the next sequence point.
-
    
+
    4
  The order of evaluation of the operands is unspecified. If an attempt is made to modify
  the result of an assignment operator or to access it after the next sequence point, the
  behavior is undefined.
@@ -5090,7 +5090,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.16.1 Simple assignment
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  One of the following shall hold:96)
 
      
 
    •   the left operand has qualified or unqualified arithmetic type and the right has
@@ -5107,16 +5107,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    •   the left operand has type _Bool and the right is a pointer.
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  In simple assignment (=), the value of the right operand is converted to the type of the
  assignment expression and replaces the value stored in the object designated by the left
  operand.
-
    
+
    3
  If the value being stored in an object is read from another object that overlaps in any way
  the storage of the first object, then the overlap shall be exact and the two objects shall
  have qualified or unqualified versions of a compatible type; otherwise, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 1       In the program fragment
 
              int f(void);
@@ -5135,7 +5135,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  negative, so the operands of the comparison can never compare equal. Therefore, for full portability, the
  variable c should be declared as int.
  
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 2       In the fragment:
 
              char c;
@@ -5147,7 +5147,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  of the expression enclosed in parentheses is then converted to the type of the outer assignment expression,
  that is, long int type.
  
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 3       Consider the fragment:
 
              const char **cpp;
@@ -5171,15 +5171,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.16.2 Compound assignment
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  For the operators += and -= only, either the left operand shall be a pointer to an object
  type and the right shall have integer type, or the left operand shall have qualified or
  unqualified arithmetic type and the right shall have arithmetic type.
-
    
+
    2
  For the other operators, each operand shall have arithmetic type consistent with those
  allowed by the corresponding binary operator.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  A compound assignment of the form E1 op = E2 differs from the simple assignment
  expression E1 = E1 op (E2) only in that the lvalue E1 is evaluated only once.
 
@@ -5187,19 +5187,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.5.17 Comma operator
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               expression:
                  assignment-expression
                  expression , assignment-expression
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The left operand of a comma operator is evaluated as a void expression; there is a
  sequence point after its evaluation. Then the right operand is evaluated; the result has its
  type and value.97) If an attempt is made to modify the result of a comma operator or to
  access it after the next sequence point, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE As indicated by the syntax, the comma operator (as described in this subclause) cannot
  appear in contexts where a comma is used to separate items in a list (such as arguments to functions or lists
  of initializers). On the other hand, it can be used within a parenthesized expression or within the second
@@ -5223,37 +5223,37 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.6 Constant expressions
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               constant-expression:
                  conditional-expression
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  A constant expression can be evaluated during translation rather than runtime, and
  accordingly may be used in any place that a constant may be.
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    3
  Constant expressions shall not contain assignment, increment, decrement, function-call,
  or comma operators, except when they are contained within a subexpression that is not
  evaluated.98)
-
    
+
    4
  Each constant expression shall evaluate to a constant that is in the range of representable
  values for its type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    5
  An expression that evaluates to a constant is required in several contexts. If a floating
  expression is evaluated in the translation environment, the arithmetic precision and range
  shall be at least as great as if the expression were being evaluated in the execution
  environment.
-
    
+
    6
  An integer constant expression99) shall have integer type and shall only have operands
  that are integer constants, enumeration constants, character constants, sizeof
  expressions whose results are integer constants, and floating constants that are the
  immediate operands of casts. Cast operators in an integer constant expression shall only
  convert arithmetic types to integer types, except as part of an operand to the sizeof
  operator.
-
    
+
    7
  More latitude is permitted for constant expressions in initializers. Such a constant
  expression shall be, or evaluate to, one of the following:
 
      
@@ -5267,13 +5267,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    •   an address constant, or
 
    •   an address constant for an object type plus or minus an integer constant expression.
 
    
-
    
+
    8
  An arithmetic constant expression shall have arithmetic type and shall only have
  operands that are integer constants, floating constants, enumeration constants, character
  constants, and sizeof expressions. Cast operators in an arithmetic constant expression
  shall only convert arithmetic types to arithmetic types, except as part of an operand to a
  sizeof operator whose result is an integer constant.
-
    
+
    9
  An address constant is a null pointer, a pointer to an lvalue designating an object of static
  storage duration, or a pointer to a function designator; it shall be created explicitly using
  the unary & operator or an integer constant cast to pointer type, or implicitly by the use of
@@ -5281,9 +5281,9 @@ unsigned long long int
  and -> operators, the address & and indirection * unary operators, and pointer casts may
  be used in the creation of an address constant, but the value of an object shall not be
  accessed by use of these operators.
-
    
+
    10
  An implementation may accept other forms of constant expressions.
-
    
+
    11
  The semantic rules for the evaluation of a constant expression are the same as for
  nonconstant expressions.100)
 
     Forward references: array declarators (6.7.5.2), initialization (6.7.8).
@@ -5312,7 +5312,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7 Declarations
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               declaration:
                  declaration-specifiers init-declarator-listopt ;
@@ -5329,18 +5329,18 @@ unsigned long long int
                   declarator = initializer
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  A declaration shall declare at least a declarator (other than the parameters of a function or
  the members of a structure or union), a tag, or the members of an enumeration.
-
    
+
    3
  If an identifier has no linkage, there shall be no more than one declaration of the identifier
  (in a declarator or type specifier) with the same scope and in the same name space, except
  for tags as specified in 6.7.2.3.
-
    
+
    4
  All declarations in the same scope that refer to the same object or function shall specify
  compatible types.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    5
  A declaration specifies the interpretation and attributes of a set of identifiers. A definition
  of an identifier is a declaration for that identifier that:
 
      
@@ -5349,7 +5349,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    •   for an enumeration constant or typedef name, is the (only) declaration of the
  identifier.
 
    
-
    
+
    6
  The declaration specifiers consist of a sequence of specifiers that indicate the linkage,
  storage duration, and part of the type of the entities that the declarators denote. The init-
  declarator-list is a comma-separated sequence of declarators, each of which may have
@@ -5357,7 +5357,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  additional type information, or an initializer, or both. The declarators contain the
  identifiers (if any) being declared.
-
    
+
    7
  If an identifier for an object is declared with no linkage, the type for the object shall be
  complete by the end of its declarator, or by the end of its init-declarator if it has an
  initializer; in the case of function parameters (including in prototypes), it is the adjusted
@@ -5372,7 +5372,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.1 Storage-class specifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               storage-class-specifier:
                  typedef
@@ -5382,26 +5382,26 @@ unsigned long long int
                  register
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  At most, one storage-class specifier may be given in the declaration specifiers in a
  declaration.102)
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The typedef specifier is called a ''storage-class specifier'' for syntactic convenience
  only; it is discussed in 6.7.7. The meanings of the various linkages and storage durations
  were discussed in 6.2.2 and 6.2.4.
-
    
+
    4
  A declaration of an identifier for an object with storage-class specifier register
  suggests that access to the object be as fast as possible. The extent to which such
  suggestions are effective is implementation-defined.103)
-
    
+
    5
  The declaration of an identifier for a function that has block scope shall have no explicit
  storage-class specifier other than extern.
  
  
  
 
-
    
+
    6
  If an aggregate or union object is declared with a storage-class specifier other than
  typedef, the properties resulting from the storage-class specifier, except with respect to
  linkage, also apply to the members of the object, and so on recursively for any aggregate
@@ -5422,7 +5422,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.2 Type specifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               type-specifier:
                  void
@@ -5441,7 +5441,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                  typedef-name
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  At least one type specifier shall be given in the declaration specifiers in each declaration,
  and in the specifier-qualifier list in each struct declaration and type name. Each list of
  type specifiers shall be one of the following sets (delimited by commas, when there is
@@ -5473,15 +5473,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  •   enum specifier
 
  •   typedef name
 
-
    
+
    3
  The type specifier _Complex shall not be used if the implementation does not provide
  complex types.104)
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  Specifiers for structures, unions, and enumerations are discussed in 6.7.2.1 through
  6.7.2.3. Declarations of typedef names are discussed in 6.7.7. The characteristics of the
  other types are discussed in 6.2.5.
-
    
+
    5
  Each of the comma-separated sets designates the same type, except that for bit-fields, it is
  implementation-defined whether the specifier int designates the same type as signed
  int or the same type as unsigned int.
@@ -5500,7 +5500,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.2.1 Structure and union specifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               struct-or-union-specifier:
                   struct-or-union identifieropt { struct-declaration-list }
@@ -5524,46 +5524,46 @@ unsigned long long int
                   declaratoropt : constant-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  A structure or union shall not contain a member with incomplete or function type (hence,
  a structure shall not contain an instance of itself, but may contain a pointer to an instance
  of itself), except that the last member of a structure with more than one named member
  may have incomplete array type; such a structure (and any union containing, possibly
  recursively, a member that is such a structure) shall not be a member of a structure or an
  element of an array.
-
    
+
    3
  The expression that specifies the width of a bit-field shall be an integer constant
  expression with a nonnegative value that does not exceed the width of an object of the
  type that would be specified were the colon and expression omitted. If the value is zero,
  the declaration shall have no declarator.
-
    
+
    4
  A bit-field shall have a type that is a qualified or unqualified version of _Bool, signed
  int, unsigned int, or some other implementation-defined type.
 
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    5
  As discussed in 6.2.5, a structure is a type consisting of a sequence of members, whose
  storage is allocated in an ordered sequence, and a union is a type consisting of a sequence
  of members whose storage overlap.
-
    
+
    6
  Structure and union specifiers have the same form. The keywords struct and union
  indicate that the type being specified is, respectively, a structure type or a union type.
-
    
+
    7
  The presence of a struct-declaration-list in a struct-or-union-specifier declares a new type,
  within a translation unit. The struct-declaration-list is a sequence of declarations for the
  members of the structure or union. If the struct-declaration-list contains no named
  members, the behavior is undefined. The type is incomplete until after the } that
  terminates the list.
-
    
+
    8
  A member of a structure or union may have any object type other than a variably
  modified type.105) In addition, a member may be declared to consist of a specified
  number of bits (including a sign bit, if any). Such a member is called a bit-field;106) its
  width is preceded by a colon.
-
    
+
    9
  A bit-field is interpreted as a signed or unsigned integer type consisting of the specified
  number of bits.107) If the value 0 or 1 is stored into a nonzero-width bit-field of type
  _Bool, the value of the bit-field shall compare equal to the value stored.
-
    
+
    10
  An implementation may allocate any addressable storage unit large enough to hold a bit-
  field. If enough space remains, a bit-field that immediately follows another bit-field in a
  structure shall be packed into adjacent bits of the same unit. If insufficient space remains,
@@ -5571,7 +5571,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  implementation-defined. The order of allocation of bit-fields within a unit (high-order to
  low-order or low-order to high-order) is implementation-defined. The alignment of the
  addressable storage unit is unspecified.
-
    
+
    11
  A bit-field declaration with no declarator, but only a colon and a width, indicates an
  unnamed bit-field.108) As a special case, a bit-field structure member with a width of 0
  indicates that no further bit-field is to be packed into the unit in which the previous bit-
@@ -5579,23 +5579,23 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    12
  Each non-bit-field member of a structure or union object is aligned in an implementation-
  defined manner appropriate to its type.
-
    
+
    13
  Within a structure object, the non-bit-field members and the units in which bit-fields
  reside have addresses that increase in the order in which they are declared. A pointer to a
  structure object, suitably converted, points to its initial member (or if that member is a
  bit-field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa. There may be unnamed
  padding within a structure object, but not at its beginning.
-
    
+
    14
  The size of a union is sufficient to contain the largest of its members. The value of at
  most one of the members can be stored in a union object at any time. A pointer to a
  union object, suitably converted, points to each of its members (or if a member is a bit-
  field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa.
-
    
+
    15
  There may be unnamed padding at the end of a structure or union.
-
    
+
    16
  As a special case, the last element of a structure with more than one named member may
  have an incomplete array type; this is called a flexible array member. In most situations,
  the flexible array member is ignored. In particular, the size of the structure is as if the
@@ -5608,7 +5608,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  from that of the replacement array. If this array would have no elements, it behaves as if
  it had one element but the behavior is undefined if any attempt is made to access that
  element or to generate a pointer one past it.
-
    
+
    17
  EXAMPLE       After the declaration:
 
              struct s { int n; double d[]; };
@@ -5625,7 +5625,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  (there are circumstances in which this equivalence is broken; in particular, the offsets of member d might
  not be the same).
-
    
+
    18
  Following the above declaration:
 
 
    @@ -5641,7 +5641,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  in which case the assignment would be legitimate. Nevertheless, it cannot appear in strictly conforming
  code.
-
    
+
    19
  After the further declaration:
 
               struct ss { int n; };
@@ -5652,7 +5652,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           sizeof (struct s) >= offsetof(struct s, d)
 
    
  are always equal to 1.
-
    
+
    20
  If sizeof (double) is 8, then after the following code is executed:
 
               struct s *s1;
@@ -5666,7 +5666,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           struct { int n; double d[8]; } *s1;
           struct { int n; double d[5]; } *s2;
 
    
-
    
+
    21
  Following the further successful assignments:
 
               s1 = malloc(sizeof (struct s) + 10);
@@ -5684,7 +5684,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           dp = &(s2->d[0]);           //   valid
           *dp = 42;                   //   undefined behavior
 
    
-
    
+
    22
  The assignment:
 
               *s1 = *s2;
@@ -5712,7 +5712,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.2.2 Enumeration specifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               enum-specifier:
                 enum identifieropt { enumerator-list }
@@ -5726,11 +5726,11 @@ unsigned long long int
                 enumeration-constant = constant-expression
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  The expression that defines the value of an enumeration constant shall be an integer
  constant expression that has a value representable as an int.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The identifiers in an enumerator list are declared as constants that have type int and
  may appear wherever such are permitted.109) An enumerator with = defines its
  enumeration constant as the value of the constant expression. If the first enumerator has
@@ -5739,7 +5739,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  adding 1 to the value of the previous enumeration constant. (The use of enumerators with
  = may produce enumeration constants with values that duplicate other values in the same
  enumeration.) The enumerators of an enumeration are also known as its members.
-
    
+
    4
  Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char, a signed integer type, or an
  unsigned integer type. The choice of type is implementation-defined,110) but shall be
  capable of representing the values of all the members of the enumeration. The
@@ -5750,7 +5750,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE       The following fragment:
 
              enum hue { chartreuse, burgundy, claret=20, winedark };
@@ -5776,27 +5776,27 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.2.3 Tags
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A specific type shall have its content defined at most once.
-
    
+
    2
  Where two declarations that use the same tag declare the same type, they shall both use
  the same choice of struct, union, or enum.
-
    
+
    3
  A type specifier of the form
 
              enum identifier
 
    
  without an enumerator list shall only appear after the type it specifies is complete.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  All declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types that have the same scope and
  use the same tag declare the same type. The type is incomplete111) until the closing brace
  of the list defining the content, and complete thereafter.
-
    
+
    5
  Two declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types which are in different scopes or
  use different tags declare distinct types. Each declaration of a structure, union, or
  enumerated type which does not include a tag declares a distinct type.
-
    
+
    6
  A type specifier of the form
 
              struct-or-union identifieropt { struct-declaration-list }
@@ -5814,13 +5814,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  union content, or enumeration content. If an identifier is provided,112) the type specifier
  also declares the identifier to be the tag of that type.
-
    
+
    7
  A declaration of the form
 
               struct-or-union identifier ;
 
    
  specifies a structure or union type and declares the identifier as a tag of that type.113)
-
    
+
    8
  If a type specifier of the form
 
               struct-or-union identifier
@@ -5828,7 +5828,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  occurs other than as part of one of the above forms, and no other declaration of the
  identifier as a tag is visible, then it declares an incomplete structure or union type, and
  declares the identifier as the tag of that type.113)
-
    
+
    9
  If a type specifier of the form
 
               struct-or-union identifier
@@ -5840,7 +5840,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  occurs other than as part of one of the above forms, and a declaration of the identifier as a
  tag is visible, then it specifies the same type as that other declaration, and does not
  redeclare the tag.
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE 1       This mechanism allows declaration of a self-referential structure.
 
               struct tnode {
@@ -5857,7 +5857,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  these declarations, the expression sp->left refers to the left struct tnode pointer of the object to
  which sp points; the expression s.right->count designates the count member of the right struct
  tnode pointed to from s.
-
    
+
    11
  The following alternative formulation uses the typedef mechanism:
  
  
@@ -5873,7 +5873,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           TNODE s, *sp;
 
    
  
-
    
+
    12
  EXAMPLE 2 To illustrate the use of prior declaration of a tag to specify a pair of mutually referential
  structures, the declarations
 
    @@ -5909,7 +5909,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.3 Type qualifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               type-qualifier:
                  const
@@ -5917,14 +5917,14 @@ unsigned long long int
                  volatile
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Types other than pointer types derived from object or incomplete types shall not be
  restrict-qualified.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  The properties associated with qualified types are meaningful only for expressions that
  are lvalues.114)
-
    
+
    4
  If the same qualifier appears more than once in the same specifier-qualifier-list, either
  directly or via one or more typedefs, the behavior is the same as if it appeared only
  once.
@@ -5933,12 +5933,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    5
  If an attempt is made to modify an object defined with a const-qualified type through use
  of an lvalue with non-const-qualified type, the behavior is undefined. If an attempt is
  made to refer to an object defined with a volatile-qualified type through use of an lvalue
  with non-volatile-qualified type, the behavior is undefined.115)
-
    
+
    6
  An object that has volatile-qualified type may be modified in ways unknown to the
  implementation or have other unknown side effects. Therefore any expression referring
  to such an object shall be evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract machine,
@@ -5946,7 +5946,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  object shall agree with that prescribed by the abstract machine, except as modified by the
  unknown factors mentioned previously.116) What constitutes an access to an object that
  has volatile-qualified type is implementation-defined.
-
    
+
    7
  An object that is accessed through a restrict-qualified pointer has a special association
  with that pointer. This association, defined in 6.7.3.1 below, requires that all accesses to
  that object use, directly or indirectly, the value of that particular pointer.117) The intended
@@ -5954,15 +5954,15 @@ unsigned long long int
  optimization, and deleting all instances of the qualifier from all preprocessing translation
  units composing a conforming program does not change its meaning (i.e., observable
  behavior).
-
    
+
    8
  If the specification of an array type includes any type qualifiers, the element type is so-
  qualified, not the array type. If the specification of a function type includes any type
  qualifiers, the behavior is undefined.118)
-
    
+
    9
  For two qualified types to be compatible, both shall have the identically qualified version
  of a compatible type; the order of type qualifiers within a list of specifiers or qualifiers
  does not affect the specified type.
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE 1       An object declared
 
               extern const volatile int real_time_clock;
@@ -5973,7 +5973,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    11
  EXAMPLE 2 The following declarations and expressions illustrate the behavior when type qualifiers
  modify an aggregate type:
 
    @@ -6014,20 +6014,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.3.1 Formal definition of restrict
    
-
    
+
    1
  Let D be a declaration of an ordinary identifier that provides a means of designating an
  object P as a restrict-qualified pointer to type T.
-
    
+
    2
  If D appears inside a block and does not have storage class extern, let B denote the
  block. If D appears in the list of parameter declarations of a function definition, let B
  denote the associated block. Otherwise, let B denote the block of main (or the block of
  whatever function is called at program startup in a freestanding environment).
-
    
+
    3
  In what follows, a pointer expression E is said to be based on object P if (at some
  sequence point in the execution of B prior to the evaluation of E) modifying P to point to
  a copy of the array object into which it formerly pointed would change the value of E.119)
  Note that ''based'' is defined only for expressions with pointer types.
-
    
+
    4
  During each execution of B, let L be any lvalue that has &L based on P. If L is used to
  access the value of the object X that it designates, and X is also modified (by any means),
  then the following requirements apply: T shall not be const-qualified. Every other lvalue
@@ -6037,15 +6037,15 @@ unsigned long long int
  object P2, associated with block B2, then either the execution of B2 shall begin before
  the execution of B, or the execution of B2 shall end prior to the assignment. If these
  requirements are not met, then the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    5
  Here an execution of B means that portion of the execution of the program that would
  correspond to the lifetime of an object with scalar type and automatic storage duration
  
 
  associated with B.
-
    
+
    6
  A translator is free to ignore any or all aliasing implications of uses of restrict.
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 1       The file scope declarations
 
               int * restrict a;
@@ -6055,7 +6055,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  assert that if an object is accessed using one of a, b, or c, and that object is modified anywhere in the
  program, then it is never accessed using either of the other two.
  
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 2 The function parameter declarations in the following example
 
              void f(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q)
@@ -6066,7 +6066,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  assert that, during each execution of the function, if an object is accessed through one of the pointer
  parameters, then it is not also accessed through the other.
-
    
+
    9
  The benefit of the restrict qualifiers is that they enable a translator to make an effective dependence
  analysis of function f without examining any of the calls of f in the program. The cost is that the
  programmer has to examine all of those calls to ensure that none give undefined behavior. For example, the
@@ -6081,7 +6081,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          }
 
    
  
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE 3       The function parameter declarations
 
              void h(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q, int * restrict r)
@@ -6095,7 +6095,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  are disjoint arrays, a call of the form h(100, a, b, b) has defined behavior, because array b is not
  modified within function h.
  
-
    
+
    11
  EXAMPLE 4 The rule limiting assignments between restricted pointers does not distinguish between a
  function call and an equivalent nested block. With one exception, only ''outer-to-inner'' assignments
  between restricted pointers declared in nested blocks have defined behavior.
@@ -6113,7 +6113,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                    }
           }
 
    
-
    
+
    12
  The one exception allows the value of a restricted pointer to be carried out of the block in which it (or, more
  precisely, the ordinary identifier used to designate it) is declared when that block finishes execution. For
  example, this permits new_vector to return a vector.
@@ -6139,29 +6139,29 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.4 Function specifiers
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               function-specifier:
                  inline
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  Function specifiers shall be used only in the declaration of an identifier for a function.
-
    
+
    3
  An inline definition of a function with external linkage shall not contain a definition of a
  modifiable object with static storage duration, and shall not contain a reference to an
  identifier with internal linkage.
-
    
+
    4
  In a hosted environment, the inline function specifier shall not appear in a declaration
  of main.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    5
  A function declared with an inline function specifier is an inline function. The
  function specifier may appear more than once; the behavior is the same as if it appeared
  only once. Making a function an inline function suggests that calls to the function be as
  fast as possible.120) The extent to which such suggestions are effective is
  implementation-defined.121)
-
    
+
    6
  Any function with internal linkage can be an inline function. For a function with external
  linkage, the following restrictions apply: If a function is declared with an inline
 
@@ -6173,7 +6173,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  provides an alternative to an external definition, which a translator may use to implement
  any call to the function in the same translation unit. It is unspecified whether a call to the
  function uses the inline definition or the external definition.122)
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE The declaration of an inline function with external linkage can result in either an external
  definition, or a definition available for use only within the translation unit. A file scope declaration with
  extern creates an external definition. The following example shows an entire translation unit.
@@ -6193,7 +6193,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                 return is_fahr ? cels(temp) : fahr(temp);
           }
 
    
-
    
+
    8
  Note that the definition of fahr is an external definition because fahr is also declared with extern, but
  the definition of cels is an inline definition. Because cels has external linkage and is referenced, an
  external definition has to appear in another translation unit (see 6.9); the inline definition and the external
@@ -6224,7 +6224,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.5 Declarators
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               declarator:
                  pointeropt direct-declarator
@@ -6257,18 +6257,18 @@ unsigned long long int
                   identifier-list , identifier
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  Each declarator declares one identifier, and asserts that when an operand of the same
  form as the declarator appears in an expression, it designates a function or object with the
  scope, storage duration, and type indicated by the declaration specifiers.
-
    
+
    3
  A full declarator is a declarator that is not part of another declarator. The end of a full
  declarator is a sequence point. If, in the nested sequence of declarators in a full
 
  declarator, there is a declarator specifying a variable length array type, the type specified
  by the full declarator is said to be variably modified. Furthermore, any type derived by
  declarator type derivation from a variably modified type is itself variably modified.
-
    
+
    4
  In the following subclauses, consider a declaration
 
              T D1
@@ -6276,13 +6276,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  where T contains the declaration specifiers that specify a type T (such as int) and D1 is
  a declarator that contains an identifier ident. The type specified for the identifier ident in
  the various forms of declarator is described inductively using this notation.
-
    
+
    5
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
              identifier
 
    
  then the type specified for ident is T .
-
    
+
    6
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
              ( D )
@@ -6291,7 +6291,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  parentheses is identical to the unparenthesized declarator, but the binding of complicated
  declarators may be altered by parentheses.
 
    Implementation limits
-
    
+
    7
  As discussed in 5.2.4.1, an implementation may limit the number of pointer, array, and
  function declarators that modify an arithmetic, structure, union, or incomplete type, either
  directly or via one or more typedefs.
@@ -6300,7 +6300,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.5.1 Pointer declarators
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
              * type-qualifier-listopt D
@@ -6308,10 +6308,10 @@ unsigned long long int
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list type-qualifier-list
  pointer to T ''. For each type qualifier in the list, ident is a so-qualified pointer.
-
    
+
    2
  For two pointer types to be compatible, both shall be identically qualified and both shall
  be pointers to compatible types.
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE The following pair of declarations demonstrates the difference between a ''variable pointer
  to a constant value'' and a ''constant pointer to a variable value''.
 
@@ -6323,7 +6323,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  but ptr_to_constant itself may be changed to point to another object. Similarly, the contents of the
  int pointed to by constant_ptr may be modified, but constant_ptr itself shall always point to the
  same location.
-
    
+
    4
  The declaration of the constant pointer constant_ptr may be clarified by including a definition for the
  type ''pointer to int''.
 
    @@ -6336,7 +6336,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.5.2 Array declarators
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  In addition to optional type qualifiers and the keyword static, the [ and ] may delimit
  an expression or *. If they delimit an expression (which specifies the size of an array), the
  expression shall have an integer type. If the expression is a constant expression, it shall
@@ -6344,12 +6344,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  type. The optional type qualifiers and the keyword static shall appear only in a
  declaration of a function parameter with an array type, and then only in the outermost
  array type derivation.
-
    
+
    2
  An ordinary identifier (as defined in 6.2.3) that has a variably modified type shall have
  either block scope and no linkage or function prototype scope. If an identifier is declared
  to be an object with static storage duration, it shall not have a variable length array type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has one of the forms:
 
               D[ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ]
@@ -6360,7 +6360,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list array of T ''.123)
  (See 6.7.5.3 for the meaning of the optional type qualifiers and the keyword static.)
-
    
+
    4
  If the size is not present, the array type is an incomplete type. If the size is * instead of
  being an expression, the array type is a variable length array type of unspecified size,
  which can only be used in declarations with function prototype scope;124) such arrays are
@@ -6369,7 +6369,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  type has a known constant size, the array type is not a variable length array type;
  otherwise, the array type is a variable length array type.
-
    
+
    5
  If the size is an expression that is not an integer constant expression: if it occurs in a
  declaration at function prototype scope, it is treated as if it were replaced by *; otherwise,
  each time it is evaluated it shall have a value greater than zero. The size of each instance
@@ -6377,20 +6377,20 @@ unsigned long long int
  expression is part of the operand of a sizeof operator and changing the value of the
  size expression would not affect the result of the operator, it is unspecified whether or not
  the size expression is evaluated.
-
    
+
    6
  For two array types to be compatible, both shall have compatible element types, and if
  both size specifiers are present, and are integer constant expressions, then both size
  specifiers shall have the same constant value. If the two array types are used in a context
  which requires them to be compatible, it is undefined behavior if the two size specifiers
  evaluate to unequal values.
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 1
 
               float fa[11], *afp[17];
 
    
  declares an array of float numbers and an array of pointers to float numbers.
  
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 2       Note the distinction between the declarations
 
               extern int *x;
@@ -6399,7 +6399,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  The first declares x to be a pointer to int; the second declares y to be an array of int of unspecified size
  (an incomplete type), the storage for which is defined elsewhere.
  
-
    
+
    9
  EXAMPLE 3       The following declarations demonstrate the compatibility rules for variably modified types.
 
               extern int n;
@@ -6420,7 +6420,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    10
  EXAMPLE 4 All declarations of variably modified (VM) types have to be at either block scope or
  function prototype scope. Array objects declared with the static or extern storage-class specifier
  cannot have a variable length array (VLA) type. However, an object declared with the static storage-
@@ -6460,19 +6460,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.5.3 Function declarators (including prototypes)
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A function declarator shall not specify a return type that is a function type or an array
  type.
-
    
+
    2
  The only storage-class specifier that shall occur in a parameter declaration is register.
-
    
+
    3
  An identifier list in a function declarator that is not part of a definition of that function
  shall be empty.
-
    
+
    4
  After adjustment, the parameters in a parameter type list in a function declarator that is
  part of a definition of that function shall not have incomplete type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    5
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
               D( parameter-type-list )
@@ -6485,43 +6485,43 @@ unsigned long long int
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list function returning
  T ''.
-
    
+
    6
  A parameter type list specifies the types of, and may declare identifiers for, the
  parameters of the function.
-
    
+
    7
  A declaration of a parameter as ''array of type'' shall be adjusted to ''qualified pointer to
  type'', where the type qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of the
  array type derivation. If the keyword static also appears within the [ and ] of the
  array type derivation, then for each call to the function, the value of the corresponding
  actual argument shall provide access to the first element of an array with at least as many
  elements as specified by the size expression.
-
    
+
    8
  A declaration of a parameter as ''function returning type'' shall be adjusted to ''pointer to
  function returning type'', as in 6.3.2.1.
-
    
+
    9
  If the list terminates with an ellipsis (, ...), no information about the number or types
  of the parameters after the comma is supplied.125)
-
    
+
    10
  The special case of an unnamed parameter of type void as the only item in the list
  specifies that the function has no parameters.
-
    
+
    11
  If, in a parameter declaration, an identifier can be treated either as a typedef name or as a
  parameter name, it shall be taken as a typedef name.
-
    
+
    12
  If the function declarator is not part of a definition of that function, parameters may have
  incomplete type and may use the [*] notation in their sequences of declarator specifiers
  to specify variable length array types.
-
    
+
    13
  The storage-class specifier in the declaration specifiers for a parameter declaration, if
  present, is ignored unless the declared parameter is one of the members of the parameter
  type list for a function definition.
-
    
+
    14
  An identifier list declares only the identifiers of the parameters of the function. An empty
  list in a function declarator that is part of a definition of that function specifies that the
  function has no parameters. The empty list in a function declarator that is not part of a
  definition of that function specifies that no information about the number or types of the
  parameters is supplied.126)
-
    
+
    15
  For two function types to be compatible, both shall specify compatible return types.127)
  
  
@@ -6540,7 +6540,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  compatibility and of a composite type, each parameter declared with function or array
  type is taken as having the adjusted type and each parameter declared with qualified type
  is taken as having the unqualified version of its declared type.)
-
    
+
    16
  EXAMPLE 1       The declaration
 
               int f(void), *fip(), (*pfi)();
@@ -6552,13 +6552,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  and then using indirection through the pointer result to yield an int. In the declarator (*pfi)(), the
  extra parentheses are necessary to indicate that indirection through a pointer to a function yields a function
  designator, which is then used to call the function; it returns an int.
-
    
+
    17
  If the declaration occurs outside of any function, the identifiers have file scope and external linkage. If the
  declaration occurs inside a function, the identifiers of the functions f and fip have block scope and either
  internal or external linkage (depending on what file scope declarations for these identifiers are visible), and
  the identifier of the pointer pfi has block scope and no linkage.
  
-
    
+
    18
  EXAMPLE 2       The declaration
 
               int (*apfi[3])(int *x, int *y);
@@ -6567,7 +6567,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  parameters that are pointers to int. The identifiers x and y are declared for descriptive purposes only and
  go out of scope at the end of the declaration of apfi.
  
-
    
+
    19
  EXAMPLE 3       The declaration
 
               int (*fpfi(int (*)(long), int))(int, ...);
@@ -6577,7 +6577,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  The pointer returned by fpfi points to a function that has one int parameter and accepts zero or more
  additional arguments of any type.
 
-
    
+
    20
  EXAMPLE 4        The following prototype has a variably modified parameter.
 
                void addscalar(int n, int m,
@@ -6598,7 +6598,7 @@ unsigned long long int
            }
 
    
  
-
    
+
    21
  EXAMPLE 5        The following are all compatible function prototype declarators.
 
                double    maximum(int       n,   int   m,   double   a[n][m]);
@@ -6631,7 +6631,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.6 Type names
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               type-name:
                  specifier-qualifier-list abstract-declaratoropt
@@ -6650,11 +6650,11 @@ unsigned long long int
                   direct-abstract-declaratoropt ( parameter-type-listopt )
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  In several contexts, it is necessary to specify a type. This is accomplished using a type
  name, which is syntactically a declaration for a function or an object of that type that
  omits the identifier.128)
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE        The constructions
 
               (a)      int
@@ -6686,16 +6686,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.7 Type definitions
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               typedef-name:
                  identifier
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  If a typedef name specifies a variably modified type then it shall have block scope.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  In a declaration whose storage-class specifier is typedef, each declarator defines an
  identifier to be a typedef name that denotes the type specified for the identifier in the way
  described in 6.7.5. Any array size expressions associated with variable length array
@@ -6711,7 +6711,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  type-list T '' where the derived-declarator-type-list is specified by the declarators of D. A
  typedef name shares the same name space as other identifiers declared in ordinary
  declarators.
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 1       After
 
               typedef int MILES, KLICKSP();
@@ -6728,7 +6728,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  parameter specification returning int'', and that of x and z is the specified structure; zp is a pointer to
  such a structure. The object distance has a type compatible with any other int object.
  
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 2       After the declarations
 
               typedef struct s1 { int x; } t1, *tp1;
@@ -6737,7 +6737,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  type t1 and the type pointed to by tp1 are compatible. Type t1 is also compatible with type struct
  s1, but not compatible with the types struct s2, t2, the type pointed to by tp2, or int.
 
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 3       The following obscure constructions
 
              typedef signed int t;
@@ -6764,7 +6764,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  with type pointer to function returning signed int with one unnamed parameter with type signed
  int'', and an identifier t with type long int.
  
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 4 On the other hand, typedef names can be used to improve code readability. All three of the
  following declarations of the signal function specify exactly the same type, the first without making use
  of any typedef names.
@@ -6775,7 +6775,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          pfv signal(int, pfv);
 
    
  
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 5 If a typedef name denotes a variable length array type, the length of the array is fixed at the
  time the typedef name is defined, not each time it is used:
 
@@ -6794,7 +6794,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.7.8 Initialization
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               initializer:
                    assignment-expression
@@ -6813,19 +6813,19 @@ unsigned long long int
                  . identifier
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  No initializer shall attempt to provide a value for an object not contained within the entity
  being initialized.
-
    
+
    3
  The type of the entity to be initialized shall be an array of unknown size or an object type
  that is not a variable length array type.
-
    
+
    4
  All the expressions in an initializer for an object that has static storage duration shall be
  constant expressions or string literals.
-
    
+
    5
  If the declaration of an identifier has block scope, and the identifier has external or
  internal linkage, the declaration shall have no initializer for the identifier.
-
    
+
    6
  If a designator has the form
 
               [ constant-expression ]
@@ -6833,7 +6833,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  then the current object (defined below) shall have array type and the expression shall be
  an integer constant expression. If the array is of unknown size, any nonnegative value is
  valid.
-
    
+
    7
  If a designator has the form
 
               . identifier
@@ -6842,13 +6842,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  identifier shall be the name of a member of that type.
 
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    8
  An initializer specifies the initial value stored in an object.
-
    
+
    9
  Except where explicitly stated otherwise, for the purposes of this subclause unnamed
  members of objects of structure and union type do not participate in initialization.
  Unnamed members of structure objects have indeterminate value even after initialization.
-
    
+
    10
  If an object that has automatic storage duration is not initialized explicitly, its value is
  indeterminate. If an object that has static storage duration is not initialized explicitly,
  then:
@@ -6859,33 +6859,33 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  •   if it is a union, the first named member is initialized (recursively) according to these
  rules.
 
-
    
+
    11
  The initializer for a scalar shall be a single expression, optionally enclosed in braces. The
  initial value of the object is that of the expression (after conversion); the same type
  constraints and conversions as for simple assignment apply, taking the type of the scalar
  to be the unqualified version of its declared type.
-
    
+
    12
  The rest of this subclause deals with initializers for objects that have aggregate or union
  type.
-
    
+
    13
  The initializer for a structure or union object that has automatic storage duration shall be
  either an initializer list as described below, or a single expression that has compatible
  structure or union type. In the latter case, the initial value of the object, including
  unnamed members, is that of the expression.
-
    
+
    14
  An array of character type may be initialized by a character string literal, optionally
  enclosed in braces. Successive characters of the character string literal (including the
  terminating null character if there is room or if the array is of unknown size) initialize the
  elements of the array.
-
    
+
    15
  An array with element type compatible with wchar_t may be initialized by a wide
  string literal, optionally enclosed in braces. Successive wide characters of the wide string
  literal (including the terminating null wide character if there is room or if the array is of
  unknown size) initialize the elements of the array.
-
    
+
    16
  Otherwise, the initializer for an object that has aggregate or union type shall be a brace-
  enclosed list of initializers for the elements or named members.
-
    
+
    17
  Each brace-enclosed initializer list has an associated current object. When no
  designations are present, subobjects of the current object are initialized in order according
  to the type of the current object: array elements in increasing subscript order, structure
@@ -6894,18 +6894,18 @@ unsigned long long int
  designation causes the following initializer to begin initialization of the subobject
  described by the designator. Initialization then continues forward in order, beginning
  with the next subobject after that described by the designator.130)
-
    
+
    18
  Each designator list begins its description with the current object associated with the
  closest surrounding brace pair. Each item in the designator list (in order) specifies a
  particular member of its current object and changes the current object for the next
  designator (if any) to be that member.131) The current object that results at the end of the
  designator list is the subobject to be initialized by the following initializer.
-
    
+
    19
  The initialization shall occur in initializer list order, each initializer provided for a
  particular subobject overriding any previously listed initializer for the same subobject;132)
  all subobjects that are not initialized explicitly shall be initialized implicitly the same as
  objects that have static storage duration.
-
    
+
    20
  If the aggregate or union contains elements or members that are aggregates or unions,
  these rules apply recursively to the subaggregates or contained unions. If the initializer of
  a subaggregate or contained union begins with a left brace, the initializers enclosed by
@@ -6914,12 +6914,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  taken to account for the elements or members of the subaggregate or the first member of
  the contained union; any remaining initializers are left to initialize the next element or
  member of the aggregate of which the current subaggregate or contained union is a part.
-
    
+
    21
  If there are fewer initializers in a brace-enclosed list than there are elements or members
  of an aggregate, or fewer characters in a string literal used to initialize an array of known
  size than there are elements in the array, the remainder of the aggregate shall be
  initialized implicitly the same as objects that have static storage duration.
-
    
+
    22
  If an array of unknown size is initialized, its size is determined by the largest indexed
  element with an explicit initializer. At the end of its initializer list, the array no longer
  has incomplete type.
@@ -6927,10 +6927,10 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    23
  The order in which any side effects occur among the initialization list expressions is
  unspecified.133)
-
    
+
    24
  EXAMPLE 1       Provided that <complex.h> has been #included, the declarations
 
               int i = 3.5;
@@ -6938,7 +6938,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  define and initialize i with the value 3 and c with the value 5.0 + i3.0.
  
-
    
+
    25
  EXAMPLE 2 The declaration
 
               int x[] = { 1, 3, 5 };
@@ -6946,7 +6946,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  defines and initializes x as a one-dimensional array object that has three elements, as no size was specified
  and there are three initializers.
  
-
    
+
    26
  EXAMPLE 3       The declaration
 
               int y[4][3] =         {
@@ -6967,7 +6967,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  The initializer for y[0] does not begin with a left brace, so three items from the list are used. Likewise the
  next three are taken successively for y[1] and y[2].
  
-
    
+
    27
  EXAMPLE 4       The declaration
 
               int z[4][3] = {
@@ -6976,7 +6976,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  initializes the first column of z as specified and initializes the rest with zeros.
  
-
    
+
    28
  EXAMPLE 5       The declaration
 
               struct { int a[3], b; } w[] = { { 1 }, 2 };
@@ -6988,7 +6988,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    29
  EXAMPLE 6         The declaration
 
                short q[4][3][2] = {
@@ -7028,11 +7028,11 @@ unsigned long long int
            };
 
    
  in a fully bracketed form.
-
    
+
    30
  Note that the fully bracketed and minimally bracketed forms of initialization are, in general, less likely to
  cause confusion.
  
-
    
+
    31
  EXAMPLE 7         One form of initialization that completes array types involves typedef names. Given the
  declaration
 
    @@ -7048,7 +7048,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  due to the rules for incomplete types.
 
-
    
+
    32
  EXAMPLE 8       The declaration
 
               char s[] = "abc", t[3] = "abc";
@@ -7067,7 +7067,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  with length 4 whose elements are initialized with a character string literal. If an attempt is made to use p to
  modify the contents of the array, the behavior is undefined.
  
-
    
+
    33
  EXAMPLE 9       Arrays can be initialized to correspond to the elements of an enumeration by using
  designators:
 
    @@ -7078,13 +7078,13 @@ unsigned long long int
           };
 
    
  
-
    
+
    34
  EXAMPLE 10       Structure members can be initialized to nonzero values without depending on their order:
 
               div_t answer = { .quot = 2, .rem = -1 };
 
    
  
-
    
+
    35
  EXAMPLE 11 Designators can be used to provide explicit initialization when unadorned initializer lists
  might be misunderstood:
 
    @@ -7092,18 +7092,18 @@ unsigned long long int
                 { [0].a = {1}, [1].a[0] = 2 };
 
    
  
-
    
+
    36
  EXAMPLE 12       Space can be ''allocated'' from both ends of an array by using a single designator:
 
               int a[MAX] = {
                 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, [MAX-5] = 8, 6, 4, 2, 0
           };
 
    
-
    
+
    37
  In the above, if MAX is greater than ten, there will be some zero-valued elements in the middle; if it is less
  than ten, some of the values provided by the first five initializers will be overridden by the second five.
  
-
    
+
    38
  EXAMPLE 13       Any member of a union can be initialized:
 
               union { /* ... */ } u = { .any_member = 42 };
@@ -7132,7 +7132,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8 Statements and blocks
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               statement:
                  labeled-statement
@@ -7143,17 +7143,17 @@ unsigned long long int
                  jump-statement
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A statement specifies an action to be performed. Except as indicated, statements are
  executed in sequence.
-
    
+
    3
  A block allows a set of declarations and statements to be grouped into one syntactic unit.
  The initializers of objects that have automatic storage duration, and the variable length
  array declarators of ordinary identifiers with block scope, are evaluated and the values are
  stored in the objects (including storing an indeterminate value in objects without an
  initializer) each time the declaration is reached in the order of execution, as if it were a
  statement, and within each declaration in the order that declarators appear.
-
    
+
    4
  A full expression is an expression that is not part of another expression or of a declarator.
  Each of the following is a full expression: an initializer; the expression in an expression
  statement; the controlling expression of a selection statement (if or switch); the
@@ -7166,7 +7166,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.1 Labeled statements
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               labeled-statement:
                  identifier : statement
@@ -7174,14 +7174,14 @@ unsigned long long int
                  default : statement
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  A case or default label shall appear only in a switch statement. Further
  constraints on such labels are discussed under the switch statement.
 
-
    
+
    3
  Label names shall be unique within a function.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  Any statement may be preceded by a prefix that declares an identifier as a label name.
  Labels in themselves do not alter the flow of control, which continues unimpeded across
  them.
@@ -7190,7 +7190,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.2 Compound statement
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               compound-statement:
                 { block-item-listopt }
@@ -7202,24 +7202,24 @@ unsigned long long int
                   statement
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A compound statement is a block.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.3 Expression and null statements
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               expression-statement:
                  expressionopt ;
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The expression in an expression statement is evaluated as a void expression for its side
  effects.134)
-
    
+
    3
  A null statement (consisting of just a semicolon) performs no operations.
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 1 If a function call is evaluated as an expression statement for its side effects only, the
  discarding of its value may be made explicit by converting the expression to a void expression by means of
  a cast:
@@ -7232,7 +7232,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 2       In the program fragment
 
               char *s;
@@ -7242,7 +7242,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  a null statement is used to supply an empty loop body to the iteration statement.
  
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 3       A null statement may also be used to carry a label just before the closing } of a compound
  statement.
 
    @@ -7268,7 +7268,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.4 Selection statements
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               selection-statement:
                   if ( expression ) statement
@@ -7276,10 +7276,10 @@ unsigned long long int
                   switch ( expression ) statement
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A selection statement selects among a set of statements depending on the value of a
  controlling expression.
-
    
+
    3
  A selection statement is a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope of its
  enclosing block. Each associated substatement is also a block whose scope is a strict
  subset of the scope of the selection statement.
@@ -7287,29 +7287,29 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.4.1 The if statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The controlling expression of an if statement shall have scalar type.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  In both forms, the first substatement is executed if the expression compares unequal to 0.
  In the else form, the second substatement is executed if the expression compares equal
 
  to 0. If the first substatement is reached via a label, the second substatement is not
  executed.
-
    
+
    3
  An else is associated with the lexically nearest preceding if that is allowed by the
  syntax.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.4.2 The switch statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The controlling expression of a switch statement shall have integer type.
-
    
+
    2
  If a switch statement has an associated case or default label within the scope of an
  identifier with a variably modified type, the entire switch statement shall be within the
  scope of that identifier.135)
-
    
+
    3
  The expression of each case label shall be an integer constant expression and no two of
  the case constant expressions in the same switch statement shall have the same value
  after conversion. There may be at most one default label in a switch statement.
@@ -7317,12 +7317,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  expressions with values that duplicate case constant expressions in the enclosing
  switch statement.)
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  A switch statement causes control to jump to, into, or past the statement that is the
  switch body, depending on the value of a controlling expression, and on the presence of a
  default label and the values of any case labels on or in the switch body. A case or
  default label is accessible only within the closest enclosing switch statement.
-
    
+
    5
  The integer promotions are performed on the controlling expression. The constant
  expression in each case label is converted to the promoted type of the controlling
  expression. If a converted value matches that of the promoted controlling expression,
@@ -7331,7 +7331,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  expression matches and there is no default label, no part of the switch body is
  executed.
 
    Implementation limits
-
    
+
    6
  As discussed in 5.2.4.1, the implementation may limit the number of case values in a
  switch statement.
  
@@ -7339,7 +7339,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE        In the artificial program fragment
 
               switch (expr)
@@ -7366,7 +7366,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.5 Iteration statements
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               iteration-statement:
                   while ( expression ) statement
@@ -7375,17 +7375,17 @@ unsigned long long int
                   for ( declaration expressionopt ; expressionopt ) statement
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  The controlling expression of an iteration statement shall have scalar type.
-
    
+
    3
  The declaration part of a for statement shall only declare identifiers for objects having
  storage class auto or register.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  An iteration statement causes a statement called the loop body to be executed repeatedly
  until the controlling expression compares equal to 0. The repetition occurs regardless of
  whether the loop body is entered from the iteration statement or by a jump.136)
-
    
+
    5
  An iteration statement is a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope of its
  enclosing block. The loop body is also a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope
  of the iteration statement.
@@ -7402,19 +7402,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.5.1 The while statement
    
-
    
+
    1
  The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place before each execution of the loop
  body.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.5.2 The do statement
    
-
    
+
    1
  The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place after each execution of the loop
  body.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.5.3 The for statement
    
-
    
+
    1
  The statement
 
               for ( clause-1 ; expression-2 ; expression-3 ) statement
@@ -7426,7 +7426,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the entire loop, including the other two expressions; it is reached in the order of execution
  before the first evaluation of the controlling expression. If clause-1 is an expression, it is
  evaluated as a void expression before the first evaluation of the controlling expression.137)
-
    
+
    2
  Both clause-1 and expression-3 can be omitted. An omitted expression-2 is replaced by a
  nonzero constant.
 
@@ -7440,7 +7440,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.6 Jump statements
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               jump-statement:
                  goto identifier ;
@@ -7449,7 +7449,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                  return expressionopt ;
 
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A jump statement causes an unconditional jump to another place.
  
  
@@ -7460,15 +7460,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.6.1 The goto statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The identifier in a goto statement shall name a label located somewhere in the enclosing
  function. A goto statement shall not jump from outside the scope of an identifier having
  a variably modified type to inside the scope of that identifier.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A goto statement causes an unconditional jump to the statement prefixed by the named
  label in the enclosing function.
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE 1 It is sometimes convenient to jump into the middle of a complicated set of statements. The
  following outline presents one possible approach to a problem based on these three assumptions:
 
      
@@ -7496,7 +7496,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
 
 
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 2 A goto statement is not allowed to jump past any declarations of objects with variably
  modified types. A jump within the scope, however, is permitted.
 
    @@ -7518,10 +7518,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.6.2 The continue statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A continue statement shall appear only in or as a loop body.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A continue statement causes a jump to the loop-continuation portion of the smallest
  enclosing iteration statement; that is, to the end of the loop body. More precisely, in each
  of the statements
@@ -7543,10 +7543,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.6.3 The break statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A break statement shall appear only in or as a switch body or loop body.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A break statement terminates execution of the smallest enclosing switch or iteration
  statement.
  
@@ -7557,20 +7557,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.8.6.4 The return statement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A return statement with an expression shall not appear in a function whose return type
  is void. A return statement without an expression shall only appear in a function
  whose return type is void.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A return statement terminates execution of the current function and returns control to
  its caller. A function may have any number of return statements.
-
    
+
    3
  If a return statement with an expression is executed, the value of the expression is
  returned to the caller as the value of the function call expression. If the expression has a
  type different from the return type of the function in which it appears, the value is
  converted as if by assignment to an object having the return type of the function.139)
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE       In:
 
              struct s { double i; } f(void);
@@ -7609,7 +7609,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.9 External definitions
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               translation-unit:
                   external-declaration
@@ -7619,23 +7619,23 @@ unsigned long long int
                  declaration
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  The storage-class specifiers auto and register shall not appear in the declaration
  specifiers in an external declaration.
-
    
+
    3
  There shall be no more than one external definition for each identifier declared with
  internal linkage in a translation unit. Moreover, if an identifier declared with internal
  linkage is used in an expression (other than as a part of the operand of a sizeof
  operator whose result is an integer constant), there shall be exactly one external definition
  for the identifier in the translation unit.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    4
  As discussed in 5.1.1.1, the unit of program text after preprocessing is a translation unit,
  which consists of a sequence of external declarations. These are described as ''external''
  because they appear outside any function (and hence have file scope). As discussed in
  6.7, a declaration that also causes storage to be reserved for an object or a function named
  by the identifier is a definition.
-
    
+
    5
  An external definition is an external declaration that is also a definition of a function
  (other than an inline definition) or an object. If an identifier declared with external
  linkage is used in an expression (other than as part of the operand of a sizeof operator
@@ -7656,7 +7656,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.9.1 Function definitions
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
               function-definition:
                  declaration-specifiers declarator declaration-listopt compound-statement
@@ -7665,20 +7665,20 @@ unsigned long long int
                  declaration-list declaration
 
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    2
  The identifier declared in a function definition (which is the name of the function) shall
  have a function type, as specified by the declarator portion of the function definition.141)
-
    
+
    3
  The return type of a function shall be void or an object type other than array type.
-
    
+
    4
  The storage-class specifier, if any, in the declaration specifiers shall be either extern or
  static.
-
    
+
    5
  If the declarator includes a parameter type list, the declaration of each parameter shall
  include an identifier, except for the special case of a parameter list consisting of a single
  parameter of type void, in which case there shall not be an identifier. No declaration list
  shall follow.
-
    
+
    6
  If the declarator includes an identifier list, each declaration in the declaration list shall
  have at least one declarator, those declarators shall declare only identifiers from the
  identifier list, and every identifier in the identifier list shall be declared. An identifier
@@ -7691,7 +7691,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    7
  The declarator in a function definition specifies the name of the function being defined
  and the identifiers of its parameters. If the declarator includes a parameter type list, the
  list also specifies the types of all the parameters; such a declarator also serves as a
@@ -7699,26 +7699,26 @@ unsigned long long int
  declarator includes an identifier list,142) the types of the parameters shall be declared in a
  following declaration list. In either case, the type of each parameter is adjusted as
  described in 6.7.5.3 for a parameter type list; the resulting type shall be an object type.
-
    
+
    8
  If a function that accepts a variable number of arguments is defined without a parameter
  type list that ends with the ellipsis notation, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    9
  Each parameter has automatic storage duration. Its identifier is an lvalue, which is in
  effect declared at the head of the compound statement that constitutes the function body
  (and therefore cannot be redeclared in the function body except in an enclosed block).
  The layout of the storage for parameters is unspecified.
-
    
+
    10
  On entry to the function, the size expressions of each variably modified parameter are
  evaluated and the value of each argument expression is converted to the type of the
  corresponding parameter as if by assignment. (Array expressions and function
  designators as arguments were converted to pointers before the call.)
-
    
+
    11
  After all parameters have been assigned, the compound statement that constitutes the
  body of the function definition is executed.
-
    
+
    12
  If the } that terminates a function is reached, and the value of the function call is used by
  the caller, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    13
  EXAMPLE 1       In the following:
 
               extern int max(int a, int b)
@@ -7749,7 +7749,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  that the first form acts as a prototype declaration that forces conversion of the arguments of subsequent calls
  to the function, whereas the second form does not.
  
-
    
+
    14
  EXAMPLE 2           To pass one function to another, one might say
 
                           int f(void);
@@ -7797,10 +7797,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.9.2 External object definitions
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  If the declaration of an identifier for an object has file scope and an initializer, the
  declaration is an external definition for the identifier.
-
    
+
    2
  A declaration of an identifier for an object that has file scope without an initializer, and
  without a storage-class specifier or with the storage-class specifier static, constitutes a
  tentative definition. If a translation unit contains one or more tentative definitions for an
@@ -7808,11 +7808,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  the behavior is exactly as if the translation unit contains a file scope declaration of that
  identifier, with the composite type as of the end of the translation unit, with an initializer
  equal to 0.
-
    
+
    3
  If the declaration of an identifier for an object is a tentative definition and has internal
  linkage, the declared type shall not be an incomplete type.
 
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 1
 
               int i1 = 1;                    // definition, external linkage
@@ -7832,7 +7832,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           extern    int   i5;            // refers to previous, whose linkage is internal
 
    
  
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 2       If at the end of the translation unit containing
 
               int i[];
@@ -7844,7 +7844,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10 Preprocessing directives
    
 
    Syntax
-
    
+
    1
 
 
               preprocessing-file:
@@ -7900,7 +7900,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                  the new-line character
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  A preprocessing directive consists of a sequence of preprocessing tokens that satisfies the
  following constraints: The first token in the sequence is a # preprocessing token that (at
  the start of translation phase 4) is either the first character in the source file (optionally
@@ -7911,29 +7911,29 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
  invocation of a function-like macro.
-
    
+
    3
  A text line shall not begin with a # preprocessing token. A non-directive shall not begin
  with any of the directive names appearing in the syntax.
-
    
+
    4
  When in a group that is skipped (6.10.1), the directive syntax is relaxed to allow any
  sequence of preprocessing tokens to occur between the directive name and the following
  new-line character.
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    5
  The only white-space characters that shall appear between preprocessing tokens within a
  preprocessing directive (from just after the introducing # preprocessing token through
  just before the terminating new-line character) are space and horizontal-tab (including
  spaces that have replaced comments or possibly other white-space characters in
  translation phase 3).
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    6
  The implementation can process and skip sections of source files conditionally, include
  other source files, and replace macros. These capabilities are called preprocessing,
  because conceptually they occur before translation of the resulting translation unit.
-
    
+
    7
  The preprocessing tokens within a preprocessing directive are not subject to macro
  expansion unless otherwise stated.
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE        In:
 
               #define EMPTY
@@ -7953,7 +7953,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.1 Conditional inclusion
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The expression that controls conditional inclusion shall be an integer constant expression
  except that: it shall not contain a cast; identifiers (including those lexically identical to
  keywords) are interpreted as described below;144) and it may contain unary operator
@@ -7973,19 +7973,19 @@ unsigned long long int
  which evaluate to 1 if the identifier is currently defined as a macro name (that is, if it is
  predefined or if it has been the subject of a #define preprocessing directive without an
  intervening #undef directive with the same subject identifier), 0 if it is not.
-
    
+
    2
  Each preprocessing token that remains (in the list of preprocessing tokens that will
  become the controlling expression) after all macro replacements have occurred shall be in
  the lexical form of a token (6.4).
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    3
  Preprocessing directives of the forms
 
           # if   constant-expression new-line groupopt
       # elif constant-expression new-line groupopt
 
    
  check whether the controlling constant expression evaluates to nonzero.
-
    
+
    4
  Prior to evaluation, macro invocations in the list of preprocessing tokens that will become
  the controlling constant expression are replaced (except for those macro names modified
  by the defined unary operator), just as in normal text. If the token defined is
@@ -8004,7 +8004,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the value obtained when an identical character constant occurs in an expression (other
  than within a #if or #elif directive) is implementation-defined.146) Also, whether a
  single-character character constant may have a negative value is implementation-defined.
-
    
+
    5
  Preprocessing directives of the forms
  
  
@@ -8017,7 +8017,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  check whether the identifier is or is not currently defined as a macro name. Their
  conditions are equivalent to #if defined identifier and #if !defined identifier
  respectively.
-
    
+
    6
  Each directive's condition is checked in order. If it evaluates to false (zero), the group
  that it controls is skipped: directives are processed only through the name that determines
  the directive in order to keep track of the level of nested conditionals; the rest of the
@@ -8053,11 +8053,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.2 Source file inclusion
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A #include directive shall identify a header or source file that can be processed by the
  implementation.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # include <h-char-sequence> new-line
@@ -8066,7 +8066,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the specified sequence between the < and > delimiters, and causes the replacement of that
  directive by the entire contents of the header. How the places are specified or the header
  identified is implementation-defined.
-
    
+
    3
  A preprocessing directive of the form
  
  
@@ -8084,7 +8084,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  with the identical contained sequence (including > characters, if any) from the original
  directive.
-
    
+
    4
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # include pp-tokens new-line
@@ -8096,24 +8096,24 @@ unsigned long long int
  the two previous forms.148) The method by which a sequence of preprocessing tokens
  between a < and a > preprocessing token pair or a pair of " characters is combined into a
  single header name preprocessing token is implementation-defined.
-
    
+
    5
  The implementation shall provide unique mappings for sequences consisting of one or
  more nondigits or digits (6.4.2.1) followed by a period (.) and a single nondigit. The
  first character shall not be a digit. The implementation may ignore distinctions of
  alphabetical case and restrict the mapping to eight significant characters before the
  period.
-
    
+
    6
  A #include preprocessing directive may appear in a source file that has been read
  because of a #include directive in another file, up to an implementation-defined
  nesting limit (see 5.2.4.1).
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 1       The most common uses of #include preprocessing directives are as in the following:
 
               #include <stdio.h>
           #include "myprog.h"
 
    
  
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 2       This illustrates macro-replaced #include directives:
  
  
@@ -8141,11 +8141,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3 Macro replacement
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  Two replacement lists are identical if and only if the preprocessing tokens in both have
  the same number, ordering, spelling, and white-space separation, where all white-space
  separations are considered identical.
-
    
+
    2
  An identifier currently defined as an object-like macro shall not be redefined by another
  #define preprocessing directive unless the second definition is an object-like macro
  definition and the two replacement lists are identical. Likewise, an identifier currently
@@ -8153,33 +8153,33 @@ unsigned long long int
  preprocessing directive unless the second definition is a function-like macro definition
  that has the same number and spelling of parameters, and the two replacement lists are
  identical.
-
    
+
    3
  There shall be white-space between the identifier and the replacement list in the definition
  of an object-like macro.
-
    
+
    4
  If the identifier-list in the macro definition does not end with an ellipsis, the number of
  arguments (including those arguments consisting of no preprocessing tokens) in an
  invocation of a function-like macro shall equal the number of parameters in the macro
  definition. Otherwise, there shall be more arguments in the invocation than there are
  parameters in the macro definition (excluding the ...). There shall exist a )
  preprocessing token that terminates the invocation.
-
    
+
    5
  The identifier __VA_ARGS__ shall occur only in the replacement-list of a function-like
  macro that uses the ellipsis notation in the parameters.
-
    
+
    6
  A parameter identifier in a function-like macro shall be uniquely declared within its
  scope.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    7
  The identifier immediately following the define is called the macro name. There is one
  name space for macro names. Any white-space characters preceding or following the
  replacement list of preprocessing tokens are not considered part of the replacement list
  for either form of macro.
 
-
    
+
    8
  If a # preprocessing token, followed by an identifier, occurs lexically at the point at which
  a preprocessing directive could begin, the identifier is not subject to macro replacement.
-
    
+
    9
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # define identifier replacement-list new-line
@@ -8188,7 +8188,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  to be replaced by the replacement list of preprocessing tokens that constitute the
  remainder of the directive. The replacement list is then rescanned for more macro names
  as specified below.
-
    
+
    10
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # define identifier lparen identifier-listopt ) replacement-list new-line
@@ -8206,14 +8206,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  left and right parenthesis preprocessing tokens. Within the sequence of preprocessing
  tokens making up an invocation of a function-like macro, new-line is considered a normal
  white-space character.
-
    
+
    11
  The sequence of preprocessing tokens bounded by the outside-most matching parentheses
  forms the list of arguments for the function-like macro. The individual arguments within
  the list are separated by comma preprocessing tokens, but comma preprocessing tokens
  between matching inner parentheses do not separate arguments. If there are sequences of
  preprocessing tokens within the list of arguments that would otherwise act as
  preprocessing directives,150) the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    12
  If there is a ... in the identifier-list in the macro definition, then the trailing arguments,
  including any separating comma preprocessing tokens, are merged to form a single item:
  the variable arguments. The number of arguments so combined is such that, following
@@ -8233,7 +8233,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3.1 Argument substitution
    
-
    
+
    1
  After the arguments for the invocation of a function-like macro have been identified,
  argument substitution takes place. A parameter in the replacement list, unless preceded
  by a # or ## preprocessing token or followed by a ## preprocessing token (see below), is
@@ -8241,7 +8241,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  expanded. Before being substituted, each argument's preprocessing tokens are
  completely macro replaced as if they formed the rest of the preprocessing file; no other
  preprocessing tokens are available.
-
    
+
    2
  An identifier __VA_ARGS__ that occurs in the replacement list shall be treated as if it
  were a parameter, and the variable arguments shall form the preprocessing tokens used to
  replace it.
@@ -8249,11 +8249,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3.2 The # operator
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  Each # preprocessing token in the replacement list for a function-like macro shall be
  followed by a parameter as the next preprocessing token in the replacement list.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  If, in the replacement list, a parameter is immediately preceded by a # preprocessing
  token, both are replaced by a single character string literal preprocessing token that
  contains the spelling of the preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding
@@ -8274,17 +8274,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3.3 The ## operator
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  A ## preprocessing token shall not occur at the beginning or at the end of a replacement
  list for either form of macro definition.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  If, in the replacement list of a function-like macro, a parameter is immediately preceded
  or followed by a ## preprocessing token, the parameter is replaced by the corresponding
  argument's preprocessing token sequence; however, if an argument consists of no
  preprocessing tokens, the parameter is replaced by a placemarker preprocessing token
  instead.151)
-
    
+
    3
  For both object-like and function-like macro invocations, before the replacement list is
  reexamined for more macro names to replace, each instance of a ## preprocessing token
  in the replacement list (not from an argument) is deleted and the preceding preprocessing
@@ -8295,7 +8295,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  If the result is not a valid preprocessing token, the behavior is undefined. The resulting
  token is available for further macro replacement. The order of evaluation of ## operators
  is unspecified.
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE       In the following fragment:
 
              #define     hash_hash # ## #
@@ -8326,44 +8326,44 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3.4 Rescanning and further replacement
    
-
    
+
    1
  After all parameters in the replacement list have been substituted and # and ##
  processing has taken place, all placemarker preprocessing tokens are removed. Then, the
  resulting preprocessing token sequence is rescanned, along with all subsequent
  preprocessing tokens of the source file, for more macro names to replace.
-
    
+
    2
  If the name of the macro being replaced is found during this scan of the replacement list
  (not including the rest of the source file's preprocessing tokens), it is not replaced.
  Furthermore, if any nested replacements encounter the name of the macro being replaced,
  it is not replaced. These nonreplaced macro name preprocessing tokens are no longer
  available for further replacement even if they are later (re)examined in contexts in which
  that macro name preprocessing token would otherwise have been replaced.
-
    
+
    3
  The resulting completely macro-replaced preprocessing token sequence is not processed
  as a preprocessing directive even if it resembles one, but all pragma unary operator
  expressions within it are then processed as specified in 6.10.9 below.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.3.5 Scope of macro definitions
    
-
    
+
    1
  A macro definition lasts (independent of block structure) until a corresponding #undef
  directive is encountered or (if none is encountered) until the end of the preprocessing
  translation unit. Macro definitions have no significance after translation phase 4.
-
    
+
    2
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # undef identifier new-line
 
    
  causes the specified identifier no longer to be defined as a macro name. It is ignored if
  the specified identifier is not currently defined as a macro name.
-
    
+
    3
  EXAMPLE 1      The simplest use of this facility is to define a ''manifest constant'', as in
 
              #define TABSIZE 100
          int table[TABSIZE];
 
    
  
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE 2 The following defines a function-like macro whose value is the maximum of its arguments.
  It has the advantages of working for any compatible types of the arguments and of generating in-line code
  without the overhead of function calling. It has the disadvantages of evaluating one or the other of its
@@ -8374,7 +8374,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  The parentheses ensure that the arguments and the resulting expression are bound properly.
 
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE 3     To illustrate the rules for redefinition and reexamination, the sequence
 
               #define   x         3
@@ -8405,7 +8405,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           char c[2][6] = { "hello", "" };
 
    
  
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 4     To illustrate the rules for creating character string literals and concatenating tokens, the
  sequence
 
    @@ -8448,7 +8448,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  Space around the # and ## tokens in the macro definition is optional.
  
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 5        To illustrate the rules for placemarker preprocessing tokens, the sequence
 
               #define t(x,y,z) x ## y ## z
@@ -8461,7 +8461,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                       10, 11, 12, };
 
    
  
-
    
+
    8
  EXAMPLE 6        To demonstrate the redefinition rules, the following sequence is valid.
 
               #define      OBJ_LIKE      (1-1)
@@ -8479,7 +8479,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           #define      FUNC_LIKE(b) ( b ) // different parameter spelling
 
    
  
-
    
+
    9
  EXAMPLE 7        Finally, to show the variable argument list macro facilities:
 
 
    @@ -8505,14 +8505,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.4 Line control
    
 
    Constraints
-
    
+
    1
  The string literal of a #line directive, if present, shall be a character string literal.
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    2
  The line number of the current source line is one greater than the number of new-line
  characters read or introduced in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2) while processing the source
  file to the current token.
-
    
+
    3
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # line digit-sequence new-line
@@ -8521,14 +8521,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  with a source line that has a line number as specified by the digit sequence (interpreted as
  a decimal integer). The digit sequence shall not specify zero, nor a number greater than
  2147483647.
-
    
+
    4
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # line digit-sequence "s-char-sequenceopt" new-line
 
    
  sets the presumed line number similarly and changes the presumed name of the source
  file to be the contents of the character string literal.
-
    
+
    5
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # line pp-tokens new-line
@@ -8543,7 +8543,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.5 Error directive
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # error pp-tokensopt new-line
@@ -8554,7 +8554,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.6 Pragma directive
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # pragma pp-tokensopt new-line
@@ -8564,7 +8564,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  implementation-defined manner. The behavior might cause translation to fail or cause the
  translator or the resulting program to behave in a non-conforming manner. Any such
  pragma that is not recognized by the implementation is ignored.
-
    
+
    2
  If the preprocessing token STDC does immediately follow pragma in the directive (prior
  to any macro replacement), then no macro replacement is performed on the directive, and
  the directive shall have one of the following forms153) whose meanings are described
@@ -8597,7 +8597,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.7 Null directive
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
         # new-line
@@ -8606,7 +8606,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.8 Predefined macro names
    
-
    
+
    1
  The following macro names154) shall be defined by the implementation:
 
    
 
     __DATE__ 
    The date of translation of the preprocessing translation unit: a character
@@ -8634,7 +8634,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    2
  The following macro names are conditionally defined by the implementation:
 
    
 
     __STDC_IEC_559__ 
    The integer constant 1, intended to indicate conformance to the
@@ -8650,15 +8650,15 @@ unsigned long long int
            all amendments and technical corrigenda, as of the specified year and
            month.
 
    
-
    
+
    3
  The values of the predefined macros (except for __FILE__ and __LINE__) remain
  constant throughout the translation unit.
-
    
+
    4
  None of these macro names, nor the identifier defined, shall be the subject of a
  #define or a #undef preprocessing directive. Any other predefined macro names
  shall begin with a leading underscore followed by an uppercase letter or a second
  underscore.
-
    
+
    5
  The implementation shall not predefine the macro __cplusplus, nor shall it define it
  in any standard header.
 
     Forward references: the asctime function (7.23.3.1), standard headers (7.1.2).
@@ -8676,7 +8676,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    6.10.9 Pragma operator
    
 
    Semantics
-
    
+
    1
  A unary operator expression of the form:
 
         _Pragma ( string-literal )
@@ -8688,7 +8688,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  preprocessing tokens that are executed as if they were the pp-tokens in a pragma
  directive. The original four preprocessing tokens in the unary operator expression are
  removed.
-
    
+
    2
  EXAMPLE       A directive of the form:
 
               #pragma listing on "..\listing.dir"
@@ -8712,55 +8712,55 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.1 Floating types
    
-
    
+
    1
  Future standardization may include additional floating-point types, including those with
  greater range, precision, or both than long double.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.2 Linkages of identifiers
    
-
    
+
    1
  Declaring an identifier with internal linkage at file scope without the static storage-
  class specifier is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.3 External names
    
-
    
+
    1
  Restriction of the significance of an external name to fewer than 255 characters
  (considering each universal character name or extended source character as a single
  character) is an obsolescent feature that is a concession to existing implementations.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.4 Character escape sequences
    
-
    
+
    1
  Lowercase letters as escape sequences are reserved for future standardization. Other
  characters may be used in extensions.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.5 Storage-class specifiers
    
-
    
+
    1
  The placement of a storage-class specifier other than at the beginning of the declaration
  specifiers in a declaration is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.6 Function declarators
    
-
    
+
    1
  The use of function declarators with empty parentheses (not prototype-format parameter
  type declarators) is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.7 Function definitions
    
-
    
+
    1
  The use of function definitions with separate parameter identifier and declaration lists
  (not prototype-format parameter type and identifier declarators) is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.8 Pragma directives
    
-
    
+
    1
  Pragmas whose first preprocessing token is STDC are reserved for future standardization.
 
 
    Contents
 
    6.11.9 Predefined macro names
    
-
    
+
    1
  Macro names beginning with __STDC_ are reserved for future standardization.
 
 
@@ -8773,27 +8773,27 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.1.1 Definitions of terms
    
-
    
+
    1
  A string is a contiguous sequence of characters terminated by and including the first null
  character. The term multibyte string is sometimes used instead to emphasize special
  processing given to multibyte characters contained in the string or to avoid confusion
  with a wide string. A pointer to a string is a pointer to its initial (lowest addressed)
  character. The length of a string is the number of bytes preceding the null character and
  the value of a string is the sequence of the values of the contained characters, in order.
-
    
+
    2
  The decimal-point character is the character used by functions that convert floating-point
  numbers to or from character sequences to denote the beginning of the fractional part of
  such character sequences.157) It is represented in the text and examples by a period, but
  may be changed by the setlocale function.
-
    
+
    3
  A null wide character is a wide character with code value zero.
-
    
+
    4
  A wide string is a contiguous sequence of wide characters terminated by and including
  the first null wide character. A pointer to a wide string is a pointer to its initial (lowest
  addressed) wide character. The length of a wide string is the number of wide characters
  preceding the null wide character and the value of a wide string is the sequence of code
  values of the contained wide characters, in order.
-
    
+
    5
  A shift sequence is a contiguous sequence of bytes within a multibyte string that
  (potentially) causes a change in shift state (see 5.2.1.2). A shift sequence shall not have a
  corresponding wide character; it is instead taken to be an adjunct to an adjacent multibyte
@@ -8817,13 +8817,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.1.2 Standard headers
    
-
    
+
    1
  Each library function is declared, with a type that includes a prototype, in a header,159)
  whose contents are made available by the #include preprocessing directive. The
  header declares a set of related functions, plus any necessary types and additional macros
  needed to facilitate their use. Declarations of types described in this clause shall not
  include type qualifiers, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
-
    
+
    2
  The standard headers are
 
             <assert.h>             <inttypes.h>            <signal.h>              <stdlib.h>
@@ -8833,11 +8833,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         <fenv.h>               <math.h>                <stdint.h>              <wchar.h>
         <float.h>              <setjmp.h>              <stdio.h>               <wctype.h>
 
    
-
    
+
    3
  If a file with the same name as one of the above < and > delimited sequences, not
  provided as part of the implementation, is placed in any of the standard places that are
  searched for included source files, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    4
  Standard headers may be included in any order; each may be included more than once in
  a given scope, with no effect different from being included only once, except that the
  effect of including <assert.h> depends on the definition of NDEBUG (see 7.2). If
@@ -8848,13 +8848,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  included after the initial reference to the identifier. The program shall not have any
  macros with names lexically identical to keywords currently defined prior to the
  inclusion.
-
    
+
    5
  Any definition of an object-like macro described in this clause shall expand to code that is
  fully protected by parentheses where necessary, so that it groups in an arbitrary
  expression as if it were a single identifier.
-
    
+
    6
  Any declaration of a library function shall have external linkage.
-
    
+
    7
  A summary of the contents of the standard headers is given in annex B.
 
     Forward references: diagnostics (7.2).
  
@@ -8870,7 +8870,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.1.3 Reserved identifiers
    
-
    
+
    1
  Each header declares or defines all identifiers listed in its associated subclause, and
  optionally declares or defines identifiers listed in its associated future library directions
  subclause and identifiers which are always reserved either for any use or for use as file
@@ -8890,11 +8890,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  future library directions) is reserved for use as a macro name and as an identifier with
  file scope in the same name space if any of its associated headers is included.
 
-
    
+
    2
  No other identifiers are reserved. If the program declares or defines an identifier in a
  context in which it is reserved (other than as allowed by 7.1.4), or defines a reserved
  identifier as a macro name, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    3
  If the program removes (with #undef) any macro definition of an identifier in the first
  group listed above, the behavior is undefined.
 
@@ -8905,7 +8905,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.1.4 Use of library functions
    
-
    
+
    1
  Each of the following statements applies unless explicitly stated otherwise in the detailed
  descriptions that follow: If an argument to a function has an invalid value (such as a value
  outside the domain of the function, or a pointer outside the address space of the program,
@@ -8933,20 +8933,20 @@ unsigned long long int
  compatible return type could be called.163) All object-like macros listed as expanding to
  integer constant expressions shall additionally be suitable for use in #if preprocessing
  directives.
-
    
+
    2
  Provided that a library function can be declared without reference to any type defined in a
  header, it is also permissible to declare the function and use it without including its
  associated header.
-
    
+
    3
  There is a sequence point immediately before a library function returns.
-
    
+
    4
  The functions in the standard library are not guaranteed to be reentrant and may modify
  objects with static storage duration.164)
  
  
  
 
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE       The function atoi may be used in any of several ways:
 
      
 
    •   by use of its associated header (possibly generating a macro expansion)
@@ -9011,7 +9011,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.2 Diagnostics <assert.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <assert.h> defines the assert macro and refers to another macro,
 
                NDEBUG
@@ -9024,7 +9024,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      
  The assert macro is redefined according to the current state of NDEBUG each time that
  <assert.h> is included.
-
      
+
      2
  The assert macro shall be implemented as a macro, not as an actual function. If the
  macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, the behavior is
  undefined.
@@ -9035,13 +9035,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.2.1.1 The assert macro
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <assert.h>
          void assert(scalar expression);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The assert macro puts diagnostic tests into programs; it expands to a void expression.
  When it is executed, if expression (which shall have a scalar type) is false (that is,
  compares equal to 0), the assert macro writes information about the particular call that
@@ -9051,7 +9051,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  __func__) on the standard error stream in an implementation-defined format.165) It
  then calls the abort function.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The assert macro returns no value.
 
       Forward references: the abort function (7.20.4.1).
  
@@ -9070,14 +9070,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.1 Introduction
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <complex.h> defines macros and declares functions that support complex
  arithmetic.166) Each synopsis specifies a family of functions consisting of a principal
  function with one or more double complex parameters and a double complex or
  double return value; and other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes
  which are corresponding functions with float and long double parameters and
  return values.
-
      
+
      2
  The macro
 
                 complex
@@ -9088,7 +9088,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      
  expands to a constant expression of type const float _Complex, with the value of
  the imaginary unit.167)
-
      
+
      3
  The macros
 
                 imaginary
@@ -9100,14 +9100,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  are defined if and only if the implementation supports imaginary types;168) if defined,
  they expand to _Imaginary and a constant expression of type const float
  _Imaginary with the value of the imaginary unit.
-
      
+
      4
  The macro
 
                 I
 
      
  expands to either _Imaginary_I or _Complex_I. If _Imaginary_I is not
  defined, I shall expand to _Complex_I.
-
      
+
      5
  Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and perhaps then
  redefine the macros complex, imaginary, and I.
 
       Forward references: IEC 60559-compatible complex arithmetic (annex G).
@@ -9126,13 +9126,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.2 Conventions
      
-
      
+
      1
  Values are interpreted as radians, not degrees. An implementation may set errno but is
  not required to.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.3 Branch cuts
      
-
      
+
      1
  Some of the functions below have branch cuts, across which the function is
  discontinuous. For implementations with a signed zero (including all IEC 60559
  implementations) that follow the specifications of annex G, the sign of zero distinguishes
@@ -9141,7 +9141,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  function, which has a branch cut along the negative real axis, the top of the cut, with
  imaginary part +0, maps to the positive imaginary axis, and the bottom of the cut, with
  imaginary part -0, maps to the negative imaginary axis.
-
      
+
      2
  Implementations that do not support a signed zero (see annex F) cannot distinguish the
  sides of branch cuts. These implementations shall map a cut so the function is continuous
  as the cut is approached coming around the finite endpoint of the cut in a counter
@@ -9153,13 +9153,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.4 The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <complex.h>
           #pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The usual mathematical formulas for complex multiply, divide, and absolute value are
  problematic because of their treatment of infinities and because of undue overflow and
  underflow. The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma can be used to inform the
@@ -9194,7 +9194,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.1 The cacos functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex cacos(double complex z);
@@ -9202,11 +9202,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cacos functions compute the complex arc cosine of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cacos functions return the complex arc cosine value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [0, pi ] along the
  real axis.
@@ -9214,7 +9214,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.2 The casin functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex casin(double complex z);
@@ -9222,11 +9222,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex casinl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The casin functions compute the complex arc sine of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The casin functions return the complex arc sine value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
  along the real axis.
@@ -9235,7 +9235,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.3 The catan functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex catan(double complex z);
@@ -9243,11 +9243,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex catanl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The catan functions compute the complex arc tangent of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The catan functions return the complex arc tangent value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
  along the real axis.
@@ -9255,7 +9255,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.4 The ccos functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex ccos(double complex z);
@@ -9263,16 +9263,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex ccosl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The ccos functions compute the complex cosine of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The ccos functions return the complex cosine value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.5 The csin functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex csin(double complex z);
@@ -9280,17 +9280,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex csinl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The csin functions compute the complex sine of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The csin functions return the complex sine value.
 
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.5.6 The ctan functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex ctan(double complex z);
@@ -9298,10 +9298,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The ctan functions compute the complex tangent of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The ctan functions return the complex tangent value.
 
 
      Contents
@@ -9310,7 +9310,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.1 The cacosh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex cacosh(double complex z);
@@ -9318,11 +9318,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cacosh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of z, with a branch
  cut at values less than 1 along the real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cacosh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic cosine value, in the range of a
  half-strip of non-negative values along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along
  the imaginary axis.
@@ -9330,7 +9330,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.2 The casinh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex casinh(double complex z);
@@ -9338,12 +9338,12 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The casinh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine of z, with branch cuts
  outside the interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
 
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The casinh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic sine value, in the range of a
  strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
  along the imaginary axis.
@@ -9351,7 +9351,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.3 The catanh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex catanh(double complex z);
@@ -9359,11 +9359,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The catanh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of z, with branch
  cuts outside the interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The catanh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic tangent value, in the range of a
  strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
  along the imaginary axis.
@@ -9371,7 +9371,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.4 The ccosh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex ccosh(double complex z);
@@ -9379,16 +9379,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The ccosh functions compute the complex hyperbolic cosine of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The ccosh functions return the complex hyperbolic cosine value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.5 The csinh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
 
               #include <complex.h>
@@ -9397,16 +9397,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The csinh functions compute the complex hyperbolic sine of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The csinh functions return the complex hyperbolic sine value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.6.6 The ctanh functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex ctanh(double complex z);
@@ -9414,10 +9414,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The ctanh functions compute the complex hyperbolic tangent of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The ctanh functions return the complex hyperbolic tangent value.
 
 
      Contents
@@ -9426,7 +9426,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.7.1 The cexp functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex cexp(double complex z);
@@ -9434,16 +9434,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cexp functions compute the complex base-e exponential of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cexp functions return the complex base-e exponential value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.7.2 The clog functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
 
               #include <complex.h>
@@ -9452,11 +9452,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex clogl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The clog functions compute the complex natural (base-e) logarithm of z, with a branch
  cut along the negative real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The clog functions return the complex natural logarithm value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along the
  imaginary axis.
@@ -9467,7 +9467,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.8.1 The cabs functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double cabs(double complex z);
@@ -9475,17 +9475,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double cabsl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cabs functions compute the complex absolute value (also called norm, modulus, or
  magnitude) of z.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cabs functions return the complex absolute value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.8.2 The cpow functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex cpow(double complex x, double complex y);
@@ -9494,18 +9494,18 @@ unsigned long long int
              long double complex y);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cpow functions compute the complex power function xy , with a branch cut for the
  first parameter along the negative real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cpow functions return the complex power function value.
 
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.8.3 The csqrt functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex csqrt(double complex z);
@@ -9513,11 +9513,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The csqrt functions compute the complex square root of z, with a branch cut along the
  negative real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The csqrt functions return the complex square root value, in the range of the right half-
  plane (including the imaginary axis).
 
@@ -9527,7 +9527,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.9.1 The carg functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double carg(double complex z);
@@ -9535,17 +9535,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double cargl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The carg functions compute the argument (also called phase angle) of z, with a branch
  cut along the negative real axis.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The carg functions return the value of the argument in the interval [-pi , +pi ].
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.9.2 The cimag functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
 
               #include <complex.h>
@@ -9554,10 +9554,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double cimagl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cimag functions compute the imaginary part of z.170)
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cimag functions return the imaginary part value (as a real).
 
 
      Footnotes
@@ -9567,7 +9567,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.9.3 The conj functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex conj(double complex z);
@@ -9575,17 +9575,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex conjl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The conj functions compute the complex conjugate of z, by reversing the sign of its
  imaginary part.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The conj functions return the complex conjugate value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.9.4 The cproj functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double complex cproj(double complex z);
@@ -9593,7 +9593,7 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The cproj functions compute a projection of z onto the Riemann sphere: z projects to
  z except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part and one NaN part)
  project to positive infinity on the real axis. If z has an infinite part, then cproj(z) is
@@ -9602,7 +9602,7 @@ unsigned long long int
         INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))
 
      
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The cproj functions return the value of the projection onto the Riemann sphere.
  
  
@@ -9613,7 +9613,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.3.9.5 The creal functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <complex.h>
         double creal(double complex z);
@@ -9621,10 +9621,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double creall(long double complex z);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The creal functions compute the real part of z.171)
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The creal functions return the real part value.
  
  
@@ -9638,15 +9638,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4 Character handling <ctype.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <ctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying and mapping
  characters.172) In all cases the argument is an int, the value of which shall be
  representable as an unsigned char or shall equal the value of the macro EOF. If the
  argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
-
      
+
      2
  The behavior of these functions is affected by the current locale. Those functions that
  have locale-specific aspects only when not in the "C" locale are noted below.
-
      
+
      3
  The term printing character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters, each
  of which occupies one printing position on a display device; the term control character
  refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters that are not printing
@@ -9663,32 +9663,32 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1 Character classification functions
      
-
      
+
      1
  The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the
  argument c conforms to that in the description of the function.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.1 The isalnum function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <ctype.h>
           int isalnum(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isalnum function tests for any character for which isalpha or isdigit is true.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.2 The isalpha function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <ctype.h>
           int isalpha(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isalpha function tests for any character for which isupper or islower is true,
  or any character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic characters for which
  
@@ -9706,13 +9706,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.3 The isblank function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <ctype.h>
          int isblank(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isblank function tests for any character that is a standard blank character or is one
  of a locale-specific set of characters for which isspace is true and that is used to
  separate words within a line of text. The standard blank characters are the following:
@@ -9722,31 +9722,31 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.4 The iscntrl function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <ctype.h>
          int iscntrl(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The iscntrl function tests for any control character.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.5 The isdigit function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <ctype.h>
          int isdigit(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isdigit function tests for any decimal-digit character (as defined in 5.2.1).
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.6 The isgraph function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <ctype.h>
          int isgraph(int c);
@@ -9757,19 +9757,19 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isgraph function tests for any printing character except space (' ').
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.7 The islower function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int islower(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The islower function tests for any character that is a lowercase letter or is one of a
  locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
  isspace is true. In the "C" locale, islower returns true only for the lowercase
@@ -9778,25 +9778,25 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.8 The isprint function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int isprint(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isprint function tests for any printing character including space (' ').
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.9 The ispunct function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int ispunct(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The ispunct function tests for any printing character that is one of a locale-specific set
  of punctuation characters for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true. In the "C"
  locale, ispunct returns true for every printing character for which neither isspace
@@ -9805,13 +9805,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.10 The isspace function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int isspace(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isspace function tests for any character that is a standard white-space character or
  is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which isalnum is false. The standard
 
@@ -9822,13 +9822,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.11 The isupper function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int isupper(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isupper function tests for any character that is an uppercase letter or is one of a
  locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
  isspace is true. In the "C" locale, isupper returns true only for the uppercase
@@ -9837,13 +9837,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.1.12 The isxdigit function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int isxdigit(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The isxdigit function tests for any hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.1).
 
 
      Contents
@@ -9852,16 +9852,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.2.1 The tolower function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int tolower(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The tolower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  If the argument is a character for which isupper is true and there are one or more
  corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which islower is true,
  the tolower function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one
@@ -9871,16 +9871,16 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.4.2.2 The toupper function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <ctype.h>
         int toupper(int c);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The toupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  If the argument is a character for which islower is true and there are one or more
  corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which isupper is true,
  the toupper function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one
@@ -9889,10 +9889,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.5 Errors <errno.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <errno.h> defines several macros, all relating to the reporting of error
  conditions.
-
      
+
      2
  The macros are
 
                 EDOM
@@ -9909,12 +9909,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed
  in order to access an actual object, or a program defines an identifier with the name
  errno, the behavior is undefined.
-
      
+
      3
  The value of errno is zero at program startup, but is never set to zero by any library
  function.176) The value of errno may be set to nonzero by a library function call
  whether or not there is an error, provided the use of errno is not documented in the
  description of the function in this International Standard.
-
      
+
      4
  Additional macro definitions, beginning with E and a digit or E and an uppercase
  letter,177) may also be specified by the implementation.
  
@@ -9937,7 +9937,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <fenv.h> declares two types and several macros and functions to provide
  access to the floating-point environment. The floating-point environment refers
  collectively to any floating-point status flags and control modes supported by the
@@ -9946,7 +9946,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  of exceptional floating-point arithmetic to provide auxiliary information.179) A floating-
  point control mode is a system variable whose value may be set by the user to affect the
  subsequent behavior of floating-point arithmetic.
-
      
+
      2
  Certain programming conventions support the intended model of use for the floating-
  point environment:180)
 
        
@@ -9958,13 +9958,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      •   a function call is assumed to have the potential for raising floating-point exceptions,
  unless its documentation promises otherwise.
 
      
-
      
+
      3
  The type
 
                fenv_t
 
      
  represents the entire floating-point environment.
-
      
+
      4
  The type
 
                fexcept_t
@@ -9976,7 +9976,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
      
+
      5
  Each of the macros
 
                FE_DIVBYZERO
@@ -9992,14 +9992,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  expressions with values such that bitwise ORs of all combinations of the macros result in
  distinct values, and furthermore, bitwise ANDs of all combinations of the macros result in
  zero.182)
-
      
+
      6
  The macro
 
                FE_ALL_EXCEPT
 
      
  is simply the bitwise OR of all floating-point exception macros defined by the
  implementation. If no such macros are defined, FE_ALL_EXCEPT shall be defined as 0.
-
      
+
      7
  Each of the macros
 
                FE_DOWNWARD
@@ -10013,7 +10013,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  with FE_ and an uppercase letter, may also be specified by the implementation. The
  defined macros expand to integer constant expressions whose values are distinct
  nonnegative values.183)
-
      
+
      8
  The macro
  
  
@@ -10025,7 +10025,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  represents the default floating-point environment -- the one installed at program startup
  -- and has type ''pointer to const-qualified fenv_t''. It can be used as an argument to
  <fenv.h> functions that manage the floating-point environment.
-
      
+
      9
  Additional implementation-defined environments, with macro definitions beginning with
  FE_ and an uppercase letter, and having type ''pointer to const-qualified fenv_t'', may
  also be specified by the implementation.
@@ -10054,13 +10054,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.1 The FENV_ACCESS pragma
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <fenv.h>
           #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The FENV_ACCESS pragma provides a means to inform the implementation when a
  program might access the floating-point environment to test floating-point status flags or
  run under non-default floating-point control modes.184) The pragma shall occur either
@@ -10084,7 +10084,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
      
+
      3
  EXAMPLE
 
                #include <fenv.h>
@@ -10099,7 +10099,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                /* ... */
          }
 
      
-
      
+
      4
  If the function g might depend on status flags set as a side effect of the first x + 1, or if the second
  x + 1 might depend on control modes set as a side effect of the call to function g, then the program shall
  contain an appropriately placed invocation of #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON.185)
@@ -10118,7 +10118,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2 Floating-point exceptions
      
-
      
+
      1
  The following functions provide access to the floating-point status flags.186) The int
  input argument for the functions represents a subset of floating-point exceptions, and can
  be zero or the bitwise OR of one or more floating-point exception macros, for example
@@ -10136,17 +10136,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2.1 The feclearexcept function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <fenv.h>
          int feclearexcept(int excepts);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The feclearexcept function attempts to clear the supported floating-point exceptions
  represented by its argument.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The feclearexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
  the specified exceptions were successfully cleared. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -10156,39 +10156,39 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2.2 The fegetexceptflag function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <fenv.h>
           int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp,
                int excepts);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fegetexceptflag function attempts to store an implementation-defined
  representation of the states of the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument
  excepts in the object pointed to by the argument flagp.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fegetexceptflag function returns zero if the representation was successfully
  stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2.3 The feraiseexcept function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <fenv.h>
           int feraiseexcept(int excepts);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The feraiseexcept function attempts to raise the supported floating-point exceptions
  represented by its argument.187) The order in which these floating-point exceptions are
  raised is unspecified, except as stated in F.7.6. Whether the feraiseexcept function
  additionally raises the ''inexact'' floating-point exception whenever it raises the
  ''overflow'' or ''underflow'' floating-point exception is implementation-defined.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The feraiseexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
  the specified exceptions were successfully raised. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -10206,14 +10206,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2.4 The fesetexceptflag function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <fenv.h>
          int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp,
               int excepts);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fesetexceptflag function attempts to set the floating-point status flags
  indicated by the argument excepts to the states stored in the object pointed to by
  flagp. The value of *flagp shall have been set by a previous call to
@@ -10221,7 +10221,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  exceptions represented by the argument excepts. This function does not raise floating-
  point exceptions, but only sets the state of the flags.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fesetexceptflag function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if
  all the specified flags were successfully set to the appropriate state. Otherwise, it returns
  a nonzero value.
@@ -10229,22 +10229,22 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.2.5 The fetestexcept function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <fenv.h>
          int fetestexcept(int excepts);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fetestexcept function determines which of a specified subset of the floating-
  point exception flags are currently set. The excepts argument specifies the floating-
  point status flags to be queried.188)
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fetestexcept function returns the value of the bitwise OR of the floating-point
  exception macros corresponding to the currently set floating-point exceptions included in
  excepts.
-
      
+
      4
  EXAMPLE       Call f if ''invalid'' is set, then g if ''overflow'' is set:
  
  
@@ -10273,23 +10273,23 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.3 Rounding
      
-
      
+
      1
  The fegetround and fesetround functions provide control of rounding direction
  modes.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.3.1 The fegetround function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <fenv.h>
         int fegetround(void);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fegetround function gets the current rounding direction.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fegetround function returns the value of the rounding direction macro
  representing the current rounding direction or a negative value if there is no such
  rounding direction macro or the current rounding direction is not determinable.
@@ -10297,22 +10297,22 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.3.2 The fesetround function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <fenv.h>
         int fesetround(int round);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fesetround function establishes the rounding direction represented by its
  argument round. If the argument is not equal to the value of a rounding direction macro,
  the rounding direction is not changed.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fesetround function returns zero if and only if the requested rounding direction
  was established.
 
-
      
+
      4
  EXAMPLE Save, set, and restore the rounding direction. Report an error and abort if setting the
  rounding direction fails.
 
      @@ -10335,44 +10335,44 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.4 Environment
      
-
      
+
      1
  The functions in this section manage the floating-point environment -- status flags and
  control modes -- as one entity.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.4.1 The fegetenv function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <fenv.h>
         int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fegetenv function attempts to store the current floating-point environment in the
  object pointed to by envp.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fegetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully stored.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.4.2 The feholdexcept function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <fenv.h>
         int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The feholdexcept function saves the current floating-point environment in the object
  pointed to by envp, clears the floating-point status flags, and then installs a non-stop
  (continue on floating-point exceptions) mode, if available, for all floating-point
  exceptions.189)
 
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The feholdexcept function returns zero if and only if non-stop floating-point
  exception handling was successfully installed.
 
@@ -10386,40 +10386,40 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.4.3 The fesetenv function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <fenv.h>
          int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The fesetenv function attempts to establish the floating-point environment represented
  by the object pointed to by envp. The argument envp shall point to an object set by a
  call to fegetenv or feholdexcept, or equal a floating-point environment macro.
  Note that fesetenv merely installs the state of the floating-point status flags
  represented through its argument, and does not raise these floating-point exceptions.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The fesetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully established.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.6.4.4 The feupdateenv function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <fenv.h>
          int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The feupdateenv function attempts to save the currently raised floating-point
  exceptions in its automatic storage, install the floating-point environment represented by
  the object pointed to by envp, and then raise the saved floating-point exceptions. The
  argument envp shall point to an object set by a call to feholdexcept or fegetenv,
  or equal a floating-point environment macro.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The feupdateenv function returns zero if all the actions were successfully carried out.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -10427,7 +10427,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
      
+
      4
  EXAMPLE   Hide spurious underflow floating-point exceptions:
 
 
      @@ -10451,20 +10451,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.7 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <float.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and
  parameters of the standard floating-point types.
-
      
+
      2
  The macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed
  in 5.2.4.2.2.
 
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.8 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <inttypes.h> includes the header <stdint.h> and extends it with
  additional facilities provided by hosted implementations.
-
      
+
      2
  It declares functions for manipulating greatest-width integers and converting numeric
  character strings to greatest-width integers, and it declares the type
 
      @@ -10482,7 +10482,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.8.1 Macros for format specifiers
      
-
      
+
      1
  Each of the following object-like macros191) expands to a character string literal
  containing a conversion specifier, possibly modified by a length modifier, suitable for use
  within the format argument of a formatted input/output function when converting the
@@ -10492,7 +10492,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  followed by a name corresponding to a similar type name in 7.18.1. In these names, N
  represents the width of the type as described in 7.18.1. For example, PRIdFAST32 can
  be used in a format string to print the value of an integer of type int_fast32_t.
-
      
+
      2
  The fprintf macros for signed integers are:
 
               PRIdN             PRIdLEASTN                PRIdFASTN          PRIdMAX             PRIdPTR
@@ -10503,7 +10503,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
      
+
      3
  The fprintf macros for unsigned integers are:
 
               PRIoN           PRIoLEASTN               PRIoFASTN              PRIoMAX             PRIoPTR
@@ -10511,25 +10511,25 @@ unsigned long long int
         PRIxN           PRIxLEASTN               PRIxFASTN              PRIxMAX             PRIxPTR
         PRIXN           PRIXLEASTN               PRIXFASTN              PRIXMAX             PRIXPTR
 
      
-
      
+
      4
  The fscanf macros for signed integers are:
 
               SCNdN           SCNdLEASTN               SCNdFASTN              SCNdMAX             SCNdPTR
         SCNiN           SCNiLEASTN               SCNiFASTN              SCNiMAX             SCNiPTR
 
      
-
      
+
      5
  The fscanf macros for unsigned integers are:
 
               SCNoN           SCNoLEASTN               SCNoFASTN              SCNoMAX             SCNoPTR
         SCNuN           SCNuLEASTN               SCNuFASTN              SCNuMAX             SCNuPTR
         SCNxN           SCNxLEASTN               SCNxFASTN              SCNxMAX             SCNxPTR
 
      
-
      
+
      6
  For each type that the implementation provides in <stdint.h>, the corresponding
  fprintf macros shall be defined and the corresponding fscanf macros shall be
  defined unless the implementation does not have a suitable fscanf length modifier for
  the type.
-
      
+
      7
  EXAMPLE
 
                #include <inttypes.h>
@@ -10559,13 +10559,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.8.2.1 The imaxabs function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <inttypes.h>
          intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The imaxabs function computes the absolute value of an integer j. If the result cannot
  be represented, the behavior is undefined.193)
  
@@ -10573,7 +10573,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The imaxabs function returns the absolute value.
 
 
      Footnotes
@@ -10583,17 +10583,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.8.2.2 The imaxdiv function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                   #include <inttypes.h>
             imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The imaxdiv function computes numer / denom and numer % denom in a single
  operation.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The imaxdiv function returns a structure of type imaxdiv_t comprising both the
  quotient and the remainder. The structure shall contain (in either order) the members
  quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder), each of which has type intmax_t. If
@@ -10602,7 +10602,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.8.2.3 The strtoimax and strtoumax functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <inttypes.h>
         intmax_t strtoimax(const char * restrict nptr,
@@ -10611,12 +10611,12 @@ unsigned long long int
              char ** restrict endptr, int base);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The strtoimax and strtoumax functions are equivalent to the strtol, strtoll,
  strtoul, and strtoull functions, except that the initial portion of the string is
  converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The strtoimax and strtoumax functions return the converted value, if any. If no
  conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range
  of representable values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned
@@ -10629,7 +10629,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.8.2.4 The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
               #include <stddef.h>           // for wchar_t
         #include <inttypes.h>
@@ -10639,12 +10639,12 @@ unsigned long long int
              wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions are equivalent to the wcstol, wcstoll,
  wcstoul, and wcstoull functions except that the initial portion of the wide string is
  converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      3
  The wcstoimax function returns the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be
  performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable
  values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned (according to the
@@ -10656,7 +10656,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.9 Alternative spellings <iso646.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <iso646.h> defines the following eleven macros (on the left) that expand
  to the corresponding tokens (on the right):
 
@@ -10676,19 +10676,19 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.10 Sizes of integer types <limits.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <limits.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and
  parameters of the standard integer types.
-
      
+
      2
  The macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed
  in 5.2.4.2.1.
 
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.11 Localization <locale.h>
      
-
      
+
      1
  The header <locale.h> declares two functions, one type, and defines several macros.
-
      
+
      2
  The type is
 
               struct lconv
@@ -10724,7 +10724,7 @@ unsigned long long int
         char   int_p_sign_posn;                //   CHAR_MAX
         char   int_n_sign_posn;                //   CHAR_MAX
 
      
-
      
+
      3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.17); and
 
                 LC_ALL
@@ -10751,13 +10751,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.11.1.1 The setlocale function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                 #include <locale.h>
           char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The setlocale function selects the appropriate portion of the program's locale as
  specified by the category and locale arguments. The setlocale function may be
  used to change or query the program's entire current locale or portions thereof. The value
@@ -10770,31 +10770,31 @@ unsigned long long int
  formatted input/output functions and the string conversion functions, as well as the
  nonmonetary formatting information returned by the localeconv function. LC_TIME
  affects the behavior of the strftime and wcsftime functions.
-
      
+
      3
  A value of "C" for locale specifies the minimal environment for C translation; a value
  of "" for locale specifies the locale-specific native environment. Other
  implementation-defined strings may be passed as the second argument to setlocale.
  
 
-
      
+
      4
  At program startup, the equivalent of
 
                setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
 
      
  is executed.
-
      
+
      5
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the setlocale function.
 
      Returns
-
      
+
      6
  If a pointer to a string is given for locale and the selection can be honored, the
  setlocale function returns a pointer to the string associated with the specified
  category for the new locale. If the selection cannot be honored, the setlocale
  function returns a null pointer and the program's locale is not changed.
-
      
+
      7
  A null pointer for locale causes the setlocale function to return a pointer to the
  string associated with the category for the program's current locale; the program's
  locale is not changed.197)
-
      
+
      8
  The pointer to string returned by the setlocale function is such that a subsequent call
  with that string value and its associated category will restore that part of the program's
  locale. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
@@ -10818,17 +10818,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
      Contents
 
      7.11.2.1 The localeconv function
      
 
      Synopsis
-
      
+
      1
 
                #include <locale.h>
          struct lconv *localeconv(void);
 
      
 
      Description
-
      
+
      2
  The localeconv function sets the components of an object with type struct lconv
  with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities (monetary and otherwise)
  according to the rules of the current locale.
-
      
+
      3
  The members of the structure with type char * are pointers to strings, any of which
  (except decimal_point) can point to "", to indicate that the value is not available in
  the current locale or is of zero length. Apart from grouping and mon_grouping, the
@@ -10942,7 +10942,7 @@ unsigned long long int
            Set to a value indicating the positioning of the negative_sign for a
            negative internationally formatted monetary quantity.
 
    
-
    
+
    4
  The elements of grouping and mon_grouping are interpreted according to the
  following:
 
    
@@ -10953,7 +10953,7 @@ unsigned long long int
                The next element is examined to determine the size of the next group of
                digits before the current group.
 
    
-
    
+
    5
  The values of p_sep_by_space, n_sep_by_space, int_p_sep_by_space,
  and int_n_sep_by_space are interpreted according to the following:
 
    
@@ -10965,7 +10965,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  For int_p_sep_by_space and int_n_sep_by_space, the fourth character of
  int_curr_symbol is used instead of a space.
-
    
+
    6
  The values of p_sign_posn, n_sign_posn, int_p_sign_posn,                            and
  int_n_sign_posn are interpreted according to the following:
 
    
@@ -10976,17 +10976,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
     4   
    The sign string immediately succeeds the currency symbol.
 
    
 
-
    
+
    7
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the localeconv
  function.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    8
  The localeconv function returns a pointer to the filled-in object. The structure
  pointed to by the return value shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the localeconv function. In addition, calls to the
  setlocale function with categories LC_ALL, LC_MONETARY, or LC_NUMERIC may
  overwrite the contents of the structure.
-
    
+
    9
  EXAMPLE 1 The following table illustrates rules which may well be used by four countries to format
  monetary quantities.
 
    @@ -10999,7 +10999,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  Country3     fl. 1.234,56            fl. -1.234,56                 NLG   1.234,56         NLG -1.234,56
  Country4     SFrs.1,234.56           SFrs.1,234.56C                CHF   1,234.56         CHF 1,234.56C
 
    
-
    
+
    10
  For these four countries, the respective values for the monetary members of the structure returned by
  localeconv could be:
 
    @@ -11028,7 +11028,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  int_n_sign_posn                   4                     1                    4                   2
 
    
 
-
    
+
    11
  EXAMPLE 2 The following table illustrates how the cs_precedes, sep_by_space, and sign_posn members
  affect the formatted value.
 
    @@ -11051,14 +11051,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12 Mathematics <math.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <math.h> declares two types and many mathematical functions and defines
  several macros. Most synopses specify a family of functions consisting of a principal
  function with one or more double parameters, a double return value, or both; and
  other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes, which are corresponding
  functions with float and long double parameters, return values, or both.198)
  Integer arithmetic functions and conversion functions are discussed later.
-
    
+
    2
  The types
 
              float_t
@@ -11070,7 +11070,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 1, they are both double; if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals
  2, they are both long double; and for other values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD, they are
  otherwise implementation-defined.199)
-
    
+
    3
  The macro
 
              HUGE_VAL
@@ -11082,7 +11082,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          HUGE_VALL
 
    
  are respectively float and long double analogs of HUGE_VAL.200)
-
    
+
    4
  The macro
 
              INFINITY
@@ -11094,14 +11094,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
  translation time.201)
-
    
+
    5
  The macro
 
               NAN
 
    
  is defined if and only if the implementation supports quiet NaNs for the float type. It
  expands to a constant expression of type float representing a quiet NaN.
-
    
+
    6
  The number classification macros
 
               FP_INFINITE
@@ -11114,7 +11114,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  constant expressions with distinct values. Additional implementation-defined floating-
  point classifications, with macro definitions beginning with FP_ and an uppercase letter,
  may also be specified by the implementation.
-
    
+
    7
  The macro
 
               FP_FAST_FMA
@@ -11128,7 +11128,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  are, respectively, float and long double analogs of FP_FAST_FMA. If defined,
  these macros expand to the integer constant 1.
-
    
+
    8
  The macros
 
               FP_ILOGB0
@@ -11140,7 +11140,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    9
  The macros
 
              MATH_ERRNO
@@ -11180,12 +11180,12 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.1 Treatment of error conditions
    
-
    
+
    1
  The behavior of each of the functions in <math.h> is specified for all representable
  values of its input arguments, except where stated otherwise. Each function shall execute
  as if it were a single operation without generating any externally visible exceptional
  conditions.
-
    
+
    2
  For all functions, a domain error occurs if an input argument is outside the domain over
  which the mathematical function is defined. The description of each function lists any
  required domain errors; an implementation may define additional domain errors, provided
@@ -11194,10 +11194,10 @@ unsigned long long int
  expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression
  errno acquires the value EDOM; if the integer expression math_errhandling &
  MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the ''invalid'' floating-point exception is raised.
-
    
+
    3
  Similarly, a range error occurs if the mathematical result of the function cannot be
  represented in an object of the specified type, due to extreme magnitude.
-
    
+
    4
  A floating result overflows if the magnitude of the mathematical result is finite but so
  large that the mathematical result cannot be represented without extraordinary roundoff
  error in an object of the specified type. If a floating result overflows and default rounding
@@ -11212,7 +11212,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the
  ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception is raised if the mathematical result is an exact
  infinity and the ''overflow'' floating-point exception is raised otherwise.
-
    
+
    5
  The result underflows if the magnitude of the mathematical result is so small that the
  mathematical result cannot be represented, without extraordinary roundoff error, in an
  object of the specified type.204) If the result underflows, the function returns an
@@ -11234,13 +11234,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.2 The FP_CONTRACT pragma
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          #pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The FP_CONTRACT pragma can be used to allow (if the state is ''on'') or disallow (if the
  state is ''off'') the implementation to contract expressions (6.5). Each pragma can occur
  either outside external declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements
@@ -11261,29 +11261,29 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3 Classification macros
    
-
    
+
    1
  In the synopses in this subclause, real-floating indicates that the argument shall be an
  expression of real floating type.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.1 The fpclassify macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           int fpclassify(real-floating x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fpclassify macro classifies its argument value as NaN, infinite, normal,
  subnormal, zero, or into another implementation-defined category. First, an argument
  represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
  Then classification is based on the type of the argument.205)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fpclassify macro returns the value of the number classification macro
  appropriate to the value of its argument.
-
    
+
    4
  EXAMPLE        The fpclassify macro might be implemented in terms of ordinary functions as
 
               #define fpclassify(x) \
@@ -11302,13 +11302,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.2 The isfinite macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           int isfinite(real-floating x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isfinite macro determines whether its argument has a finite value (zero,
  subnormal, or normal, and not infinite or NaN). First, an argument represented in a
  format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination
@@ -11319,43 +11319,43 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isfinite macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite
  value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.3 The isinf macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          int isinf(real-floating x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isinf macro determines whether its argument value is an infinity (positive or
  negative). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is
  converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isinf macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinite
  value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.4 The isnan macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          int isnan(real-floating x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isnan macro determines whether its argument value is a NaN. First, an argument
  represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
  Then determination is based on the type of the argument.206)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isnan macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a NaN value.
 
 
    Footnotes
@@ -11366,7 +11366,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.5 The isnormal macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          int isnormal(real-floating x);
@@ -11377,29 +11377,29 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isnormal macro determines whether its argument value is normal (neither zero,
  subnormal, infinite, nor NaN). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its
  semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type
  of the argument.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isnormal macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a normal
  value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.3.6 The signbit macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          int signbit(real-floating x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The signbit macro determines whether the sign of its argument value is negative.207)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The signbit macro returns a nonzero value if and only if the sign of its argument value
  is negative.
 
@@ -11414,7 +11414,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.1 The acos functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double acos(double x);
@@ -11422,11 +11422,11 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double acosl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The acos functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of x. A domain error
  occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The acos functions return arccos x in the interval [0, pi ] radians.
  
  
@@ -11437,7 +11437,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.2 The asin functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double asin(double x);
@@ -11445,17 +11445,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double asinl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The asin functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of x. A domain error
  occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The asin functions return arcsin x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.3 The atan functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double atan(double x);
@@ -11463,16 +11463,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double atanl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The atan functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of x.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The atan functions return arctan x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.4 The atan2 functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double atan2(double y, double x);
@@ -11480,19 +11480,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double atan2l(long double y, long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The atan2 functions compute the value of the arc tangent of y/x, using the signs of both
  arguments to determine the quadrant of the return value. A domain error may occur if
  both arguments are zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The atan2 functions return arctan y/x in the interval [-pi , +pi ] radians.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.5 The cos functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double cos(double x);
@@ -11500,16 +11500,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double cosl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The cos functions compute the cosine of x (measured in radians).
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The cos functions return cos x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.6 The sin functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double sin(double x);
@@ -11517,16 +11517,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double sinl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The sin functions compute the sine of x (measured in radians).
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The sin functions return sin x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.4.7 The tan functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double tan(double x);
@@ -11534,10 +11534,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double tanl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The tan functions return the tangent of x (measured in radians).
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The tan functions return tan x.
 
 
@@ -11547,7 +11547,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.1 The acosh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double acosh(double x);
@@ -11555,17 +11555,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double acoshl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The acosh functions compute the (nonnegative) arc hyperbolic cosine of x. A domain
  error occurs for arguments less than 1.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The acosh functions return arcosh x in the interval [0, +(inf)].
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.2 The asinh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double asinh(double x);
@@ -11573,16 +11573,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double asinhl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The asinh functions compute the arc hyperbolic sine of x.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The asinh functions return arsinh x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.3 The atanh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double atanh(double x);
@@ -11590,19 +11590,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double atanhl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The atanh functions compute the arc hyperbolic tangent of x. A domain error occurs
  for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1]. A range error may occur if the argument
  equals -1 or +1.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The atanh functions return artanh x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.4 The cosh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double cosh(double x);
@@ -11610,17 +11610,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double coshl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The cosh functions compute the hyperbolic cosine of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The cosh functions return cosh x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.5 The sinh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double sinh(double x);
@@ -11628,17 +11628,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double sinhl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The sinh functions compute the hyperbolic sine of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The sinh functions return sinh x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.5.6 The tanh functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double tanh(double x);
@@ -11646,11 +11646,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double tanhl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The tanh functions compute the hyperbolic tangent of x.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The tanh functions return tanh x.
 
 
    Contents
@@ -11659,7 +11659,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.1 The exp functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double exp(double x);
@@ -11667,17 +11667,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double expl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The exp functions compute the base-e exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The exp functions return ex.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.2 The exp2 functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double exp2(double x);
@@ -11685,17 +11685,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double exp2l(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The exp2 functions compute the base-2 exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The exp2 functions return 2x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.3 The expm1 functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
 
             #include <math.h>
@@ -11704,11 +11704,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double expm1l(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The expm1 functions compute the base-e exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range
  error occurs if x is too large.208)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The expm1 functions return ex - 1.
 
 
    Footnotes
@@ -11718,7 +11718,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.4 The frexp functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double frexp(double value, int *exp);
@@ -11726,11 +11726,11 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double frexpl(long double value, int *exp);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The frexp functions break a floating-point number into a normalized fraction and an
  integral power of 2. They store the integer in the int object pointed to by exp.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  If value is not a floating-point number, the results are unspecified. Otherwise, the
  frexp functions return the value x, such that x has a magnitude in the interval [1/2, 1) or
  zero, and value equals x 2*exp . If value is zero, both parts of the result are zero.
@@ -11738,7 +11738,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.5 The ilogb functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          int ilogb(double x);
@@ -11746,7 +11746,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          int ilogbl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The ilogb functions extract the exponent of x as a signed int value. If x is zero they
  compute the value FP_ILOGB0; if x is infinite they compute the value INT_MAX; if x is
  a NaN they compute the value FP_ILOGBNAN; otherwise, they are equivalent to calling
@@ -11759,14 +11759,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The ilogb functions return the exponent of x as a signed int value.
 
     Forward references: the logb functions (7.12.6.11).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.6 The ldexp functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double ldexp(double x, int exp);
@@ -11774,17 +11774,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double ldexpl(long double x, int exp);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The ldexp functions multiply a floating-point number by an integral power of 2. A
  range error may occur.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The ldexp functions return x 2exp .
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.7 The log functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double log(double x);
@@ -11792,17 +11792,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double logl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The log functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if
  the argument is negative. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The log functions return loge x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.8 The log10 functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
 
             #include <math.h>
@@ -11811,17 +11811,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double log10l(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The log10 functions compute the base-10 (common) logarithm of x. A domain error
  occurs if the argument is negative. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The log10 functions return log10 x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.9 The log1p functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double log1p(double x);
@@ -11829,12 +11829,12 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double log1pl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The log1p functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of 1 plus the argument.209)
  A domain error occurs if the argument is less than -1. A range error may occur if the
  argument equals -1.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The log1p functions return loge (1 + x).
 
 
    Footnotes
@@ -11844,7 +11844,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.10 The log2 functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double log2(double x);
@@ -11852,11 +11852,11 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double log2l(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The log2 functions compute the base-2 logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the
  argument is less than zero. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The log2 functions return log2 x.
  
  
@@ -11867,7 +11867,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.11 The logb functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double logb(double x);
@@ -11875,7 +11875,7 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double logbl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The logb functions extract the exponent of x, as a signed integer value in floating-point
  format. If x is subnormal it is treated as though it were normalized; thus, for positive
  finite x,
@@ -11884,13 +11884,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  A domain error or range error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The logb functions return the signed exponent of x.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.12 The modf functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double modf(double value, double *iptr);
@@ -11898,19 +11898,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The modf functions break the argument value into integral and fractional parts, each of
  which has the same type and sign as the argument. They store the integral part (in
  floating-point format) in the object pointed to by iptr.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The modf functions return the signed fractional part of value.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.6.13 The scalbn and scalbln functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double scalbn(double x, int n);
@@ -11921,11 +11921,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The scalbn and scalbln functions compute x FLT_RADIXn efficiently, not
  normally by computing FLT_RADIXn explicitly. A range error may occur.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The scalbn and scalbln functions return x FLT_RADIXn .
 
 
    Contents
@@ -11934,7 +11934,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.7.1 The cbrt functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double cbrt(double x);
@@ -11942,16 +11942,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double cbrtl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The cbrt functions compute the real cube root of x.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The cbrt functions return x1/3.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.7.2 The fabs functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double fabs(double x);
@@ -11959,17 +11959,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double fabsl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fabs functions compute the absolute value of a floating-point number x.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fabs functions return | x |.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.7.3 The hypot functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double hypot(double x, double y);
@@ -11977,18 +11977,18 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The hypot functions compute the square root of the sum of the squares of x and y,
  without undue overflow or underflow. A range error may occur.
-
    
+
    3
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    4
  The hypot functions return (sqrt)(x2 + y2).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.7.4 The pow functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double pow(double x, double y);
@@ -11996,19 +11996,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double powl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The pow functions compute x raised to the power y. A domain error occurs if x is finite
  and negative and y is finite and not an integer value. A range error may occur. A domain
  error may occur if x is zero and y is zero. A domain error or range error may occur if x
  is zero and y is less than zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The pow functions return xy.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.7.5 The sqrt functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
 
             #include <math.h>
@@ -12017,11 +12017,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double sqrtl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The sqrt functions compute the nonnegative square root of x. A domain error occurs if
  the argument is less than zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The sqrt functions return (sqrt)(x).
 
 
    Contents
@@ -12030,7 +12030,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.8.1 The erf functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double erf(double x);
@@ -12038,10 +12038,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double erfl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The erf functions compute the error function of x.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The erf functions return
 
                   2        x
@@ -12052,7 +12052,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.8.2 The erfc functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double erfc(double x);
@@ -12060,11 +12060,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double erfcl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The erfc functions compute the complementary error function of x. A range error
  occurs if x is too large.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The erfc functions return
 
                                2       (inf)
@@ -12076,7 +12076,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.8.3 The lgamma functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double lgamma(double x);
@@ -12084,18 +12084,18 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double lgammal(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The lgamma functions compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of gamma of
  x. A range error occurs if x is too large. A range error may occur if x is a negative
  integer or zero.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The lgamma functions return loge | (Gamma)(x) |.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.8.4 The tgamma functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double tgamma(double x);
@@ -12103,12 +12103,12 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double tgammal(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The tgamma functions compute the gamma function of x. A domain error or range error
  may occur if x is a negative integer or zero. A range error may occur if the magnitude of
  x is too large or too small.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The tgamma functions return (Gamma)(x).
 
 
    Contents
@@ -12117,7 +12117,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.1 The ceil functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double ceil(double x);
@@ -12125,17 +12125,17 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double ceill(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The ceil functions compute the smallest integer value not less than x.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The ceil functions return [^x^], expressed as a floating-point number.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.2 The floor functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double floor(double x);
@@ -12143,16 +12143,16 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double floorl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The floor functions compute the largest integer value not greater than x.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The floor functions return [_x_], expressed as a floating-point number.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.3 The nearbyint functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double nearbyint(double x);
@@ -12160,18 +12160,18 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double nearbyintl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The nearbyint functions round their argument to an integer value in floating-point
  format, using the current rounding direction and without raising the ''inexact'' floating-
  point exception.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The nearbyint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.4 The rint functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double rint(double x);
@@ -12179,19 +12179,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double rintl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions (7.12.9.3) only in that the
  rint functions may raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in
  value from the argument.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The rint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.5 The lrint and llrint functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         long int lrint(double x);
@@ -12202,19 +12202,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long long int llrintl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The lrint and llrint functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
  rounding according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the
  range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range
  error may occur.                                                                          *
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The lrint and llrint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.6 The round functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double round(double x);
@@ -12222,19 +12222,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double roundl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The round functions round their argument to the nearest integer value in floating-point
  format, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding
  direction.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The round functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.7 The lround and llround functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         long int lround(double x);
@@ -12245,19 +12245,19 @@ unsigned long long int
         long long int llroundl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The lround and llround functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
  rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding direction. If
  the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified
  and a domain error or range error may occur.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The lround and llround functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.9.8 The trunc functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double trunc(double x);
@@ -12265,11 +12265,11 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double truncl(long double x);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The trunc functions round their argument to the integer value, in floating format,
  nearest to but no larger in magnitude than the argument.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The trunc functions return the truncated integer value.
 
 
@@ -12279,7 +12279,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.10.1 The fmod functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           double fmod(double x, double y);
@@ -12287,10 +12287,10 @@ unsigned long long int
           long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fmod functions compute the floating-point remainder of x/y.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fmod functions return the value x - ny, for some integer n such that, if y is nonzero,
  the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y. If y is zero,
  whether a domain error occurs or the fmod functions return zero is implementation-
@@ -12299,7 +12299,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.10.2 The remainder functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           double remainder(double x, double y);
@@ -12307,10 +12307,10 @@ unsigned long long int
           long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The remainder functions compute the remainder x REM y required by IEC 60559.210)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The remainder functions return x REM y. If y is zero, whether a domain error occurs
  or the functions return zero is implementation defined.
  
@@ -12329,7 +12329,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.10.3 The remquo functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double remquo(double x, double y, int *quo);
@@ -12338,13 +12338,13 @@ unsigned long long int
              int *quo);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The remquo functions compute the same remainder as the remainder functions. In
  the object pointed to by quo they store a value whose sign is the sign of x/y and whose
  magnitude is congruent modulo 2n to the magnitude of the integral quotient of x/y, where
  n is an implementation-defined integer greater than or equal to 3.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The remquo functions return x REM y. If y is zero, the value stored in the object
  pointed to by quo is unspecified and whether a domain error occurs or the functions
  return zero is implementation defined.
@@ -12355,7 +12355,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.11.1 The copysign functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         double copysign(double x, double y);
@@ -12363,20 +12363,20 @@ unsigned long long int
         long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The copysign functions produce a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
  They produce a NaN (with the sign of y) if x is a NaN. On implementations that
  represent a signed zero but do not treat negative zero consistently in arithmetic
  operations, the copysign functions regard the sign of zero as positive.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The copysign functions return a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.11.2 The nan functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double nan(const char *tagp);
@@ -12384,7 +12384,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double nanl(const char *tagp);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The call nan("n-char-sequence") is equivalent to strtod("NAN(n-char-
  sequence)",     (char**)       NULL); the call nan("") is equivalent to
  strtod("NAN()", (char**) NULL). If tagp does not point to an n-char
@@ -12392,7 +12392,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  NULL). Calls to nanf and nanl are equivalent to the corresponding calls to strtof
  and strtold.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The nan functions return a quiet NaN, if available, with content indicated through tagp.
  If the implementation does not support quiet NaNs, the functions return zero.
 
     Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.20.1.3).
@@ -12400,7 +12400,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.11.3 The nextafter functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double nextafter(double x, double y);
@@ -12408,14 +12408,14 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The nextafter functions determine the next representable value, in the type of the
  function, after x in the direction of y, where x and y are first converted to the type of the
  function.211) The nextafter functions return y if x equals y. A range error may occur
  if the magnitude of x is the largest finite value representable in the type and the result is
  infinite or not representable in the type.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The nextafter functions return the next representable value in the specified format
  after x in the direction of y.
  
@@ -12430,7 +12430,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.11.4 The nexttoward functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double nexttoward(double x, long double y);
@@ -12438,7 +12438,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The nexttoward functions are equivalent to the nextafter functions except that the
  second parameter has type long double and the functions return y converted to the
  type of the function if x equals y.212)
@@ -12454,7 +12454,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.12.1 The fdim functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double fdim(double x, double y);
@@ -12462,7 +12462,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fdim functions determine the positive difference between their arguments:
 
            {x - y  if x > y
@@ -12471,13 +12471,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    
  A range error may occur.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fdim functions return the positive difference value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.12.2 The fmax functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double fmax(double x, double y);
@@ -12489,10 +12489,10 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fmax functions determine the maximum numeric value of their arguments.213)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fmax functions return the maximum numeric value of their arguments.
 
 
    Footnotes
@@ -12503,7 +12503,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.12.3 The fmin functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double fmin(double x, double y);
@@ -12511,10 +12511,10 @@ unsigned long long int
          long double fminl(long double x, long double y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fmin functions determine the minimum numeric value of their arguments.214)
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fmin functions return the minimum numeric value of their arguments.
 
 
    Footnotes
@@ -12527,7 +12527,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.13.1 The fma functions
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <math.h>
          double fma(double x, double y, double z);
@@ -12536,12 +12536,12 @@ unsigned long long int
               long double z);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The fma functions compute (x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation: they compute
  the value (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the result format, according to the
  current rounding mode. A range error may occur.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The fma functions return (x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation.
  
  
@@ -12551,7 +12551,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14 Comparison macros
    
-
    
+
    1
  The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical relationships
  between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric values exactly one of the
  relationships -- less, greater, and equal -- is true. Relational operators may raise the
@@ -12572,31 +12572,31 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.1 The isgreater macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isgreater macro determines whether its first argument is greater than its second
  argument. The value of isgreater(x, y) is always equal to (x) > (y); however,
  unlike (x) > (y), isgreater(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
  exception when x and y are unordered.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isgreater macro returns the value of (x) > (y).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.2 The isgreaterequal macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <math.h>
           int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isgreaterequal macro determines whether its first argument is greater than or
  equal to its second argument. The value of isgreaterequal(x, y) is always equal
  to (x) >= (y); however, unlike (x) >= (y), isgreaterequal(x, y) does
@@ -12606,55 +12606,55 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isgreaterequal macro returns the value of (x) >= (y).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.3 The isless macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isless macro determines whether its first argument is less than its second
  argument. The value of isless(x, y) is always equal to (x) < (y); however,
  unlike (x) < (y), isless(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
  exception when x and y are unordered.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isless macro returns the value of (x) < (y).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.4 The islessequal macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The islessequal macro determines whether its first argument is less than or equal to
  its second argument. The value of islessequal(x, y) is always equal to
  (x) <= (y); however, unlike (x) <= (y), islessequal(x, y) does not raise
  the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The islessequal macro returns the value of (x) <= (y).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.5 The islessgreater macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <math.h>
         int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The islessgreater macro determines whether its first argument is less than or
  greater than its second argument. The islessgreater(x, y) macro is similar to
  (x) < (y) || (x) > (y); however, islessgreater(x, y) does not raise
@@ -12662,31 +12662,31 @@ unsigned long long int
  and y twice).
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The islessgreater macro returns the value of (x) < (y) || (x) > (y).
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.12.14.6 The isunordered macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
            #include <math.h>
        int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The isunordered macro determines whether its arguments are unordered.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The isunordered macro returns 1 if its arguments are unordered and 0 otherwise.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.13 Nonlocal jumps <setjmp.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <setjmp.h> defines the macro setjmp, and declares one function and
  one type, for bypassing the normal function call and return discipline.216)
-
    
+
    2
  The type declared is
 
              jmp_buf
@@ -12697,7 +12697,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  invocation of that block, were it called recursively. It does not include the state of the
  floating-point status flags, of open files, or of any other component of the abstract
  machine.
-
    
+
    3
  It is unspecified whether setjmp is a macro or an identifier declared with external
  linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, or a
  program defines an external identifier with the name setjmp, the behavior is undefined.
@@ -12713,22 +12713,22 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.13.1.1 The setjmp macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <setjmp.h>
          int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The setjmp macro saves its calling environment in its jmp_buf argument for later use
  by the longjmp function.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  If the return is from a direct invocation, the setjmp macro returns the value zero. If the
  return is from a call to the longjmp function, the setjmp macro returns a nonzero
  value.
 
    Environmental limits
-
    
+
    4
  An invocation of the setjmp macro shall appear only in one of the following contexts:
 
      
 
    •   the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement;
@@ -12742,7 +12742,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement; or
 
    •   the entire expression of an expression statement (possibly cast to void).
 
    
-
    
+
    5
  If the invocation appears in any other context, the behavior is undefined.
 
 
    Contents
@@ -12751,20 +12751,20 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.13.2.1 The longjmp function
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
               #include <setjmp.h>
           void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The longjmp function restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of
  the setjmp macro in the same invocation of the program with the corresponding
  jmp_buf argument. If there has been no such invocation, or if the function containing
  the invocation of the setjmp macro has terminated execution217) in the interim, or if the
  invocation of the setjmp macro was within the scope of an identifier with variably
  modified type and execution has left that scope in the interim, the behavior is undefined.
-
    
+
    3
  All accessible objects have values, and all other components of the abstract machine218)
  have state, as of the time the longjmp function was called, except that the values of
  objects of automatic storage duration that are local to the function containing the
@@ -12772,12 +12772,12 @@ unsigned long long int
  and have been changed between the setjmp invocation and longjmp call are
  indeterminate.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    4
  After longjmp is completed, program execution continues as if the corresponding
  invocation of the setjmp macro had just returned the value specified by val. The
  longjmp function cannot cause the setjmp macro to return the value 0; if val is 0,
  the setjmp macro returns the value 1.
-
    
+
    5
  EXAMPLE The longjmp function that returns control back to the point of the setjmp invocation
  might cause memory associated with a variable length array object to be squandered.
  
@@ -12819,17 +12819,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.14 Signal handling <signal.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <signal.h> declares a type and two functions and defines several macros,
  for handling various signals (conditions that may be reported during program execution).
-
    
+
    2
  The type defined is
 
              sig_atomic_t
 
    
  which is the (possibly volatile-qualified) integer type of an object that can be accessed as
  an atomic entity, even in the presence of asynchronous interrupts.
-
    
+
    3
  The macros defined are
 
              SIG_DFL
@@ -12850,7 +12850,7 @@ unsigned long long int
          SIGSEGV an invalid access to storage
          SIGTERM a termination request sent to the program
 
    
-
    
+
    4
  An implementation need not generate any of these signals, except as a result of explicit
  calls to the raise function. Additional signals and pointers to undeclarable functions,
  with macro definitions beginning, respectively, with the letters SIG and an uppercase
@@ -12875,13 +12875,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.14.1.1 The signal function
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <signal.h>
          void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The signal function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal number
  sig is to be subsequently handled. If the value of func is SIG_DFL, default handling
  for that signal will occur. If the value of func is SIG_IGN, the signal will be ignored.
@@ -12889,7 +12889,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  invocation of such a function because of a signal, or (recursively) of any further functions
  called by that invocation (other than functions in the standard library), is called a signal
  handler.
-
    
+
    3
  When a signal occurs and func points to a function, it is implementation-defined
  whether the equivalent of signal(sig, SIG_DFL); is executed or the
  implementation prevents some implementation-defined set of signals (at least including
@@ -12899,10 +12899,10 @@ unsigned long long int
  value of sig is SIGFPE, SIGILL, SIGSEGV, or any other implementation-defined
  value corresponding to a computational exception, the behavior is undefined; otherwise
  the program will resume execution at the point it was interrupted.
-
    
+
    4
  If the signal occurs as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the signal
  handler shall not call the raise function.
-
    
+
    5
  If the signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the
  behavior is undefined if the signal handler refers to any object with static storage duration
  other than by assigning a value to an object declared as volatile sig_atomic_t, or
@@ -12911,7 +12911,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  the signal number corresponding to the signal that caused the invocation of the handler.
  Furthermore, if such a call to the signal function results in a SIG_ERR return, the
  value of errno is indeterminate.220)
-
    
+
    6
  At program startup, the equivalent of
 
              signal(sig, SIG_IGN);
@@ -12925,10 +12925,10 @@ unsigned long long int
         signal(sig, SIG_DFL);
 
    
  is executed for all other signals defined by the implementation.
-
    
+
    7
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the signal function.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    8
  If the request can be honored, the signal function returns the value of func for the
  most recent successful call to signal for the specified signal sig. Otherwise, a value of
  SIG_ERR is returned and a positive value is stored in errno.
@@ -12945,33 +12945,33 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.14.2.1 The raise function
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <signal.h>
         int raise(int sig);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The raise function carries out the actions described in 7.14.1.1 for the signal sig. If a
  signal handler is called, the raise function shall not return until after the signal handler
  does.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The raise function returns zero if successful, nonzero if unsuccessful.
 
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.15 Variable arguments <stdarg.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <stdarg.h> declares a type and defines four macros, for advancing
  through a list of arguments whose number and types are not known to the called function
  when it is translated.
-
    
+
    2
  A function may be called with a variable number of arguments of varying types. As
  described in 6.9.1, its parameter list contains one or more parameters. The rightmost
  parameter plays a special role in the access mechanism, and will be designated parmN in
  this description.
-
    
+
    3
  The type declared is
 
              va_list
@@ -12991,7 +12991,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.15.1 Variable argument list access macros
    
-
    
+
    1
  The va_start and va_arg macros described in this subclause shall be implemented
  as macros, not functions. It is unspecified whether va_copy and va_end are macros or
  identifiers declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed in order to
@@ -13003,13 +13003,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.15.1.1 The va_arg macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <stdarg.h>
          type va_arg(va_list ap, type);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The va_arg macro expands to an expression that has the specified type and the value of
  the next argument in the call. The parameter ap shall have been initialized by the
  va_start or va_copy macro (without an intervening invocation of the va_end
@@ -13028,7 +13028,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  •   one type is pointer to void and the other is a pointer to a character type.
 
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The first invocation of the va_arg macro after that of the va_start macro returns the
  value of the argument after that specified by parmN . Successive invocations return the
  values of the remaining arguments in succession.
@@ -13036,32 +13036,32 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    Contents
 
    7.15.1.2 The va_copy macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <stdarg.h>
         void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The va_copy macro initializes dest as a copy of src, as if the va_start macro had
  been applied to dest followed by the same sequence of uses of the va_arg macro as
  had previously been used to reach the present state of src. Neither the va_copy nor
  va_start macro shall be invoked to reinitialize dest without an intervening
  invocation of the va_end macro for the same dest.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The va_copy macro returns no value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.15.1.3 The va_end macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
             #include <stdarg.h>
         void va_end(va_list ap);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The va_end macro facilitates a normal return from the function whose variable
  argument list was referred to by the expansion of the va_start macro, or the function
  containing the expansion of the va_copy macro, that initialized the va_list ap. The
@@ -13071,34 +13071,34 @@ unsigned long long int
  va_start or va_copy macro, or if the va_end macro is not invoked before the
  return, the behavior is undefined.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    3
  The va_end macro returns no value.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.15.1.4 The va_start macro
    
 
    Synopsis
-
    
+
    1
 
              #include <stdarg.h>
          void va_start(va_list ap, parmN);
 
    
 
    Description
-
    
+
    2
  The va_start macro shall be invoked before any access to the unnamed arguments.
-
    
+
    3
  The va_start macro initializes ap for subsequent use by the va_arg and va_end
  macros. Neither the va_start nor va_copy macro shall be invoked to reinitialize ap
  without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same ap.
-
    
+
    4
  The parameter parmN is the identifier of the rightmost parameter in the variable
  parameter list in the function definition (the one just before the , ...). If the parameter
  parmN is declared with the register storage class, with a function or array type, or
  with a type that is not compatible with the type that results after application of the default
  argument promotions, the behavior is undefined.
 
    Returns
-
    
+
    5
  The va_start macro returns no value.
-
    
+
    6
  EXAMPLE 1 The function f1 gathers into an array a list of arguments that are pointers to strings (but not
  more than MAXARGS arguments), then passes the array as a single argument to function f2. The number of
  pointers is specified by the first argument to f1.
@@ -13125,7 +13125,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           void f1(int, ...);
 
    • 
  
-
    
+
    7
  EXAMPLE 2 The function f3 is similar, but saves the status of the variable argument list after the
  indicated number of arguments; after f2 has been called once with the whole list, the trailing part of the list
  is gathered again and passed to function f4.
@@ -13160,15 +13160,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.16 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <stdbool.h> defines four macros.
-
    
+
    2
  The macro
 
               bool
 
    
  expands to _Bool.
-
    
+
    3
  The remaining three macros are suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. They
  are
 
    @@ -13183,7 +13183,7 @@ unsigned long long int
           __bool_true_false_are_defined
 
    
  which expands to the integer constant 1.
-
    
+
    4
  Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and perhaps then
  redefine the macros bool, true, and false.222)
  
@@ -13198,10 +13198,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.17 Common definitions <stddef.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The following types and macros are defined in the standard header <stddef.h>. Some
  are also defined in other headers, as noted in their respective subclauses.
-
    
+
    2
  The types are
 
             ptrdiff_t
@@ -13220,7 +13220,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  shall have a code value equal to its value when used as the lone character in an integer
  character      constant     if     an      implementation      does      not      define
  __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__.
-
    
+
    3
  The macros are
 
             NULL
@@ -13239,7 +13239,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  then the expression &(t.member-designator) evaluates to an address constant. (If the
  specified member is a bit-field, the behavior is undefined.)
 
    Recommended practice
-
    
+
    4
  The types used for size_t and ptrdiff_t should not have an integer conversion rank
  greater than that of signed long int unless the implementation supports objects
  large enough to make this necessary.
@@ -13248,11 +13248,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18 Integer types <stdint.h>
    
-
    
+
    1
  The header <stdint.h> declares sets of integer types having specified widths, and
  defines corresponding sets of macros.223) It also defines macros that specify limits of
  integer types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.
-
    
+
    2
  Types are defined in the following categories:
 
      
 
    •   integer types having certain exact widths;
@@ -13262,10 +13262,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
    •   integer types having greatest width.
 
    
  (Some of these types may denote the same type.)
-
    
+
    3
  Corresponding macros specify limits of the declared types and construct suitable
  constants.
-
    
+
    4
  For each type described herein that the implementation provides,224) <stdint.h> shall
  declare that typedef name and define the associated macros. Conversely, for each type
  described herein that the implementation does not provide, <stdint.h> shall not
@@ -13281,11 +13281,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1 Integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  When typedef names differing only in the absence or presence of the initial u are defined,
  they shall denote corresponding signed and unsigned types as described in 6.2.5; an
  implementation providing one of these corresponding types shall also provide the other.
-
    
+
    2
  In the following descriptions, the symbol N represents an unsigned decimal integer with
  no leading zeros (e.g., 8 or 24, but not 04 or 048).
  
@@ -13296,30 +13296,30 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1.1 Exact-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  The typedef name intN_t designates a signed integer type with width N , no padding
  bits, and a two's complement representation. Thus, int8_t denotes a signed integer
  type with a width of exactly 8 bits.
-
    
+
    2
  The typedef name uintN_t designates an unsigned integer type with width N . Thus,
  uint24_t denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of exactly 24 bits.
-
    
+
    3
  These types are optional. However, if an implementation provides integer types with
  widths of 8, 16, 32, or 64 bits, no padding bits, and (for the signed types) that have a
  two's complement representation, it shall define the corresponding typedef names.
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1.2 Minimum-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  The typedef name int_leastN_t designates a signed integer type with a width of at
  least N , such that no signed integer type with lesser size has at least the specified width.
  Thus, int_least32_t denotes a signed integer type with a width of at least 32 bits.
-
    
+
    2
  The typedef name uint_leastN_t designates an unsigned integer type with a width
  of at least N , such that no unsigned integer type with lesser size has at least the specified
  width. Thus, uint_least16_t denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of at
  least 16 bits.
-
    
+
    3
  The following types are required:
 
               int_least8_t                                      uint_least8_t
@@ -13331,10 +13331,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1.3 Fastest minimum-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  Each of the following types designates an integer type that is usually fastest225) to operate
  with among all integer types that have at least the specified width.
-
    
+
    2
  The typedef name int_fastN_t designates the fastest signed integer type with a width
  of at least N . The typedef name uint_fastN_t designates the fastest unsigned integer
  type with a width of at least N .
@@ -13343,7 +13343,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
  
 
-
    
+
    3
  The following types are required:
 
             int_fast8_t                                 uint_fast8_t
@@ -13361,7 +13361,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1.4 Integer types capable of holding object pointers
    
-
    
+
    1
  The following type designates a signed integer type with the property that any valid
  pointer to void can be converted to this type, then converted back to pointer to void,
  and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:
@@ -13378,7 +13378,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.1.5 Greatest-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  The following type designates a signed integer type capable of representing any value of
  any signed integer type:
 
    @@ -13393,11 +13393,11 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.2 Limits of specified-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
  The following object-like macros226) specify the minimum and maximum limits of the
  types declared in <stdint.h>. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in
  7.18.1.
-
    
+
    2
  Each instance of any defined macro shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable
  for use in #if preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type as
  would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to
@@ -13414,7 +13414,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
    Contents
 
    7.18.2.1 Limits of exact-width integer types
    
-
    
+
    1
 
      
 
    •   minimum values of exact-width signed integer types
 
      @@ -13432,7 +13432,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
      Contents
 
      7.18.2.2 Limits of minimum-width integer types
      
-
      
+
      1
 
        
 
      •   minimum values of minimum-width signed integer types
 
        @@ -13450,7 +13450,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.18.2.3 Limits of fastest minimum-width integer types
        
-
        
+
        1
 
          
 
        •   minimum values of fastest minimum-width signed integer types
 
          @@ -13468,7 +13468,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.18.2.4 Limits of integer types capable of holding object pointers
          
-
          
+
          1
 
            
 
          •   minimum value of pointer-holding signed integer type
 
            @@ -13487,7 +13487,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.18.2.5 Limits of greatest-width integer types
            
-
            
+
            1
 
              
 
            •   minimum value of greatest-width signed integer type
 
              @@ -13505,10 +13505,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
              Contents
 
              7.18.3 Limits of other integer types
              
-
              
+
              1
  The following object-like macros227) specify the minimum and maximum limits of
  integer types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.
-
              
+
              2
  Each instance of these macros shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable for use
  in #if preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type as would an
  expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to the integer
@@ -13544,18 +13544,18 @@ unsigned long long int
    WINT_MAX                                               see below
 
              
 
            
-
            
+
            3
  If sig_atomic_t (see 7.14) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of
  SIG_ATOMIC_MIN shall be no greater than -127 and the value of SIG_ATOMIC_MAX
  shall be no less than 127; otherwise, sig_atomic_t is defined as an unsigned integer
  type, and the value of SIG_ATOMIC_MIN shall be 0 and the value of
  SIG_ATOMIC_MAX shall be no less than 255.
-
            
+
            4
  If wchar_t (see 7.17) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of WCHAR_MIN
  shall be no greater than -127 and the value of WCHAR_MAX shall be no less than 127;
  otherwise, wchar_t is defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of
  WCHAR_MIN shall be 0 and the value of WCHAR_MAX shall be no less than 255.229)
-
            
+
            5
  If wint_t (see 7.24) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of WINT_MIN shall
  be no greater than -32767 and the value of WINT_MAX shall be no less than 32767;
  otherwise, wint_t is defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of WINT_MIN
@@ -13573,15 +13573,15 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.18.4 Macros for integer constants
            
-
            
+
            1
  The following function-like macros230) expand to integer constants suitable for
  initializing objects that have integer types corresponding to types defined in
  <stdint.h>. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in 7.18.1.2 or
  7.18.1.5.
-
            
+
            2
  The argument in any instance of these macros shall be an unsuffixed integer constant (as
  defined in 6.4.4.1) with a value that does not exceed the limits for the corresponding type.
-
            
+
            3
  Each invocation of one of these macros shall expand to an integer constant expression
  suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. The type of the expression shall have
  the same type as would an expression of the corresponding type converted according to
@@ -13599,7 +13599,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.18.4.1 Macros for minimum-width integer constants
            
-
            
+
            1
  The macro INTN_C(value) shall expand to an integer constant expression
  corresponding to the type int_leastN_t. The macro UINTN_C(value) shall expand
  to an integer constant expression corresponding to the type uint_leastN_t. For
@@ -13608,7 +13608,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.18.4.2 Macros for greatest-width integer constants
            
-
            
+
            1
  The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having the value specified
  by its argument and the type intmax_t:
 
            @@ -13626,10 +13626,10 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.19.1 Introduction
            
-
            
+
            1
  The header <stdio.h> declares three types, several macros, and many functions for
  performing input and output.
-
            
+
            2
  The types declared are size_t (described in 7.17);
 
                     FILE
@@ -13643,7 +13643,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
            
  which is an object type other than an array type capable of recording all the information
  needed to specify uniquely every position within a file.
-
            
+
            3
  The macros are NULL (described in 7.17);
 
                     _IOFBF
@@ -13700,14 +13700,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
            
  which are expressions of type ''pointer to FILE'' that point to the FILE objects
  associated, respectively, with the standard error, input, and output streams.
-
            
+
            4
  The header <wchar.h> declares a number of functions useful for wide character input
  and output. The wide character input/output functions described in that subclause
  provide operations analogous to most of those described here, except that the
  fundamental units internal to the program are wide characters. The external
  representation (in the file) is a sequence of ''generalized'' multibyte characters, as
  described further in 7.19.3.
-
            
+
            5
  The input/output functions are given the following collective terms:
 
              
 
            •   The wide character input functions -- those functions described in 7.24 that perform
@@ -13738,13 +13738,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
              Contents
 
              7.19.2 Streams
              
-
              
+
              1
  Input and output, whether to or from physical devices such as terminals and tape drives,
  or whether to or from files supported on structured storage devices, are mapped into
  logical data streams, whose properties are more uniform than their various inputs and
  outputs. Two forms of mapping are supported, for text streams and for binary
  streams.232)
-
              
+
              2
  A text stream is an ordered sequence of characters composed into lines, each line
  consisting of zero or more characters plus a terminating new-line character. Whether the
  last line requires a terminating new-line character is implementation-defined. Characters
@@ -13757,13 +13757,13 @@ unsigned long long int
  immediately preceded by space characters; and the last character is a new-line character.
  Whether space characters that are written out immediately before a new-line character
  appear when read in is implementation-defined.
-
              
+
              3
  A binary stream is an ordered sequence of characters that can transparently record
  internal data. Data read in from a binary stream shall compare equal to the data that were
  earlier written out to that stream, under the same implementation. Such a stream may,
  however, have an implementation-defined number of null characters appended to the end
  of the stream.
-
              
+
              4
  Each stream has an orientation. After a stream is associated with an external file, but
  before any operations are performed on it, the stream is without orientation. Once a wide
  character input/output function has been applied to a stream without orientation, the
@@ -13774,7 +13774,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  been applied to a stream without orientation, the stream becomes a byte-oriented stream.
  Only a call to the freopen function or the fwide function can otherwise alter the
  orientation of a stream. (A successful call to freopen removes any orientation.)233)
-
              
+
              5
  Byte input/output functions shall not be applied to a wide-oriented stream and wide
  character input/output functions shall not be applied to a byte-oriented stream. The
  remaining stream operations do not affect, and are not affected by, a stream's orientation,
@@ -13787,14 +13787,14 @@ unsigned long long int
  function can overwrite a partial multibyte character; any file contents beyond the
  byte(s) written are henceforth indeterminate.
 
            
-
            
+
            6
  Each wide-oriented stream has an associated mbstate_t object that stores the current
  parse state of the stream. A successful call to fgetpos stores a representation of the
  value of this mbstate_t object as part of the value of the fpos_t object. A later
  successful call to fsetpos using the same stored fpos_t value restores the value of
  the associated mbstate_t object as well as the position within the controlled stream.
 
            Environmental limits
-
            
+
            7
  An implementation shall support text files with lines containing at least 254 characters,
  including the terminating new-line character. The value of the macro BUFSIZ shall be at
  least 256.
@@ -13817,7 +13817,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
            Contents
 
            7.19.3 Files
            
-
            
+
            1
  A stream is associated with an external file (which may be a physical device) by opening
  a file, which may involve creating a new file. Creating an existing file causes its former
  contents to be discarded, if necessary. If a file can support positioning requests (such as a
@@ -13827,11 +13827,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  position indicator is initially positioned at the beginning or the end of the file. The file
  position indicator is maintained by subsequent reads, writes, and positioning requests, to
  facilitate an orderly progression through the file.
-
            
+
            2
  Binary files are not truncated, except as defined in 7.19.5.3. Whether a write on a text
  stream causes the associated file to be truncated beyond that point is implementation-
  defined.
-
            
+
            3
  When a stream is unbuffered, characters are intended to appear from the source or at the
  destination as soon as possible. Otherwise characters may be accumulated and
  transmitted to or from the host environment as a block. When a stream is fully buffered,
@@ -13843,36 +13843,36 @@ unsigned long long int
  when input is requested on a line buffered stream that requires the transmission of
  characters from the host environment. Support for these characteristics is
  implementation-defined, and may be affected via the setbuf and setvbuf functions.
-
            
+
            4
  A file may be disassociated from a controlling stream by closing the file. Output streams
  are flushed (any unwritten buffer contents are transmitted to the host environment) before
  the stream is disassociated from the file. The value of a pointer to a FILE object is
  indeterminate after the associated file is closed (including the standard text streams).
  Whether a file of zero length (on which no characters have been written by an output
  stream) actually exists is implementation-defined.
-
            
+
            5
  The file may be subsequently reopened, by the same or another program execution, and
  its contents reclaimed or modified (if it can be repositioned at its start). If the main
  function returns to its original caller, or if the exit function is called, all open files are
  closed (hence all output streams are flushed) before program termination. Other paths to
  program termination, such as calling the abort function, need not close all files
  properly.
-
            
+
            6
  The address of the FILE object used to control a stream may be significant; a copy of a
  FILE object need not serve in place of the original.
 
-
            
+
            7
  At program startup, three text streams are predefined and need not be opened explicitly
  -- standard input (for reading conventional input), standard output (for writing
  conventional output), and standard error (for writing diagnostic output). As initially
  opened, the standard error stream is not fully buffered; the standard input and standard
  output streams are fully buffered if and only if the stream can be determined not to refer
  to an interactive device.
-
            
+
            8
  Functions that open additional (nontemporary) files require a file name, which is a string.
  The rules for composing valid file names are implementation-defined. Whether the same
  file can be simultaneously open multiple times is also implementation-defined.
-
            
+
            9
  Although both text and binary wide-oriented streams are conceptually sequences of wide
  characters, the external file associated with a wide-oriented stream is a sequence of
  multibyte characters, generalized as follows:
@@ -13881,26 +13881,26 @@ unsigned long long int
  encodings valid for use internal to the program).
 
          •   A file need not begin nor end in the initial shift state.234)
 
          
-
          
+
          10
  Moreover, the encodings used for multibyte characters may differ among files. Both the
  nature and choice of such encodings are implementation-defined.
-
          
+
          11
  The wide character input functions read multibyte characters from the stream and convert
  them to wide characters as if they were read by successive calls to the fgetwc function.
  Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the mbrtowc function, with the conversion state
  described by the stream's own mbstate_t object. The byte input functions read
  characters from the stream as if by successive calls to the fgetc function.
-
          
+
          12
  The wide character output functions convert wide characters to multibyte characters and
  write them to the stream as if they were written by successive calls to the fputwc
  function. Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the wcrtomb function, with the
  conversion state described by the stream's own mbstate_t object. The byte output
  functions write characters to the stream as if by successive calls to the fputc function.
-
          
+
          13
  In some cases, some of the byte input/output functions also perform conversions between
  multibyte characters and wide characters. These conversions also occur as if by calls to
  the mbrtowc and wcrtomb functions.
-
          
+
          14
  An encoding error occurs if the character sequence presented to the underlying
  mbrtowc function does not form a valid (generalized) multibyte character, or if the code
  value passed to the underlying wcrtomb does not correspond to a valid (generalized)
@@ -13911,7 +13911,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  functions store the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno if and only if an encoding error
  occurs.
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          15
  The value of FOPEN_MAX shall be at least eight, including the three standard text
  streams.
 
           Forward references: the exit function (7.20.4.3), the fgetc function (7.19.7.1), the
@@ -13932,38 +13932,38 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.4.1 The remove function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         int remove(const char *filename);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The remove function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
  to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that
  name will fail, unless it is created anew. If the file is open, the behavior of the remove
  function is implementation-defined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The remove function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.4.2 The rename function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         int rename(const char *old, const char *new);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The rename function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by old to be
  henceforth known by the name given by the string pointed to by new. The file named
  old is no longer accessible by that name. If a file named by the string pointed to by new
  exists prior to the call to the rename function, the behavior is implementation-defined.
 
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The rename function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails,235) in
  which case if the file existed previously it is still known by its original name.
 
@@ -13975,25 +13975,25 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.4.3 The tmpfile function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          FILE *tmpfile(void);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The tmpfile function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other
  existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program
  termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is
  removed is implementation-defined. The file is opened for update with "wb+" mode.
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          3
  It should be possible to open at least TMP_MAX temporary files during the lifetime of the
  program (this limit may be shared with tmpnam) and there should be no limit on the
  number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open
  files (FOPEN_MAX).
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The tmpfile function returns a pointer to the stream of the file that it created. If the file
  cannot be created, the tmpfile function returns a null pointer.
 
           Forward references: the fopen function (7.19.5.3).
@@ -14001,13 +14001,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.4.4 The tmpnam function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          char *tmpnam(char *s);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The tmpnam function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the same
  as the name of an existing file.236) The function is potentially capable of generating
  
@@ -14015,12 +14015,12 @@ unsigned long long int
 
  TMP_MAX different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by existing files
  and thus not be suitable return values.
-
          
+
          3
  The tmpnam function generates a different string each time it is called.
-
          
+
          4
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the tmpnam function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          5
  If no suitable string can be generated, the tmpnam function returns a null pointer.
  Otherwise, if the argument is a null pointer, the tmpnam function leaves its result in an
  internal static object and returns a pointer to that object (subsequent calls to the tmpnam
@@ -14028,7 +14028,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  to point to an array of at least L_tmpnam chars; the tmpnam function writes its result
  in that array and returns the argument as its value.
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          6
  The value of the macro TMP_MAX shall be at least 25.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -14044,13 +14044,13 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.1 The fclose function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         int fclose(FILE *stream);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  A successful call to the fclose function causes the stream pointed to by stream to be
  flushed and the associated file to be closed. Any unwritten buffered data for the stream
  are delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; any unread buffered data
@@ -14058,30 +14058,30 @@ unsigned long long int
  and any buffer set by the setbuf or setvbuf function is disassociated from the stream
  (and deallocated if it was automatically allocated).
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The fclose function returns zero if the stream was successfully closed, or EOF if any
  errors were detected.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.2 The fflush function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         int fflush(FILE *stream);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If stream points to an output stream or an update stream in which the most recent
  operation was not input, the fflush function causes any unwritten data for that stream
  to be delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; otherwise, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
          
+
          3
  If stream is a null pointer, the fflush function performs this flushing action on all
  streams for which the behavior is defined above.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The fflush function sets the error indicator for the stream and returns EOF if a write
  error occurs, otherwise it returns zero.
 
           Forward references: the fopen function (7.19.5.3).
@@ -14089,17 +14089,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.3 The fopen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          FILE *fopen(const char * restrict filename,
               const char * restrict mode);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename,
  and associates a stream with it.
-
          
+
          3
  The argument mode points to a string. If the string is one of the following, the file is
  open in the indicated mode. Otherwise, the behavior is undefined.237)
 
          
@@ -14118,17 +14118,17 @@ unsigned long long int
 
           w+b or wb+ 
          truncate to zero length or create binary file for update
 
           a+b or ab+ 
          append; open or create binary file for update, writing at end-of-file
 
          
-
          
+
          4
  Opening a file with read mode ('r' as the first character in the mode argument) fails if
  the file does not exist or cannot be read.
-
          
+
          5
  Opening a file with append mode ('a' as the first character in the mode argument)
  causes all subsequent writes to the file to be forced to the then current end-of-file,
  regardless of intervening calls to the fseek function. In some implementations, opening
  a binary file with append mode ('b' as the second or third character in the above list of
  mode argument values) may initially position the file position indicator for the stream
  beyond the last data written, because of null character padding.
-
          
+
          6
  When a file is opened with update mode ('+' as the second or third character in the
  above list of mode argument values), both input and output may be performed on the
  associated stream. However, output shall not be directly followed by input without an
@@ -14137,11 +14137,11 @@ unsigned long long int
  intervening call to a file positioning function, unless the input operation encounters end-
  of-file. Opening (or creating) a text file with update mode may instead open (or create) a
  binary stream in some implementations.
-
          
+
          7
  When opened, a stream is fully buffered if and only if it can be determined not to refer to
  an interactive device. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          8
  The fopen function returns a pointer to the object controlling the stream. If the open
  operation fails, fopen returns a null pointer.
 
           Forward references: file positioning functions (7.19.9).
@@ -14155,7 +14155,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.4 The freopen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         FILE *freopen(const char * restrict filename,
@@ -14163,22 +14163,22 @@ unsigned long long int
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The freopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
  and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode argument is used just
 
  as in the fopen function.238)
-
          
+
          3
  If filename is a null pointer, the freopen function attempts to change the mode of
  the stream to that specified by mode, as if the name of the file currently associated with
  the stream had been used. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are
  permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.
-
          
+
          4
  The freopen function first attempts to close any file that is associated with the specified
  stream. Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the
  stream are cleared.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          5
  The freopen function returns a null pointer if the open operation fails. Otherwise,
  freopen returns the value of stream.
 
@@ -14191,26 +14191,26 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.5 The setbuf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          void setbuf(FILE * restrict stream,
               char * restrict buf);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  Except that it returns no value, the setbuf function is equivalent to the setvbuf
  function invoked with the values _IOFBF for mode and BUFSIZ for size, or (if buf
  is a null pointer), with the value _IONBF for mode.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The setbuf function returns no value.
 
           Forward references: the setvbuf function (7.19.5.6).
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.5.6 The setvbuf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          int setvbuf(FILE * restrict stream,
@@ -14223,7 +14223,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  
 
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The setvbuf function may be used only after the stream pointed to by stream has
  been associated with an open file and before any other operation (other than an
  unsuccessful call to setvbuf) is performed on the stream. The argument mode
@@ -14235,7 +14235,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  allocated by the setvbuf function. The contents of the array at any time are
  indeterminate.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The setvbuf function returns zero on success, or nonzero if an invalid value is given
  for mode or if the request cannot be honored.
 
@@ -14246,7 +14246,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.6 Formatted input/output functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The formatted input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence point after the
  actions associated with each specifier.240)
 
@@ -14257,21 +14257,21 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.6.1 The fprintf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          int fprintf(FILE * restrict stream,
               const char * restrict format, ...);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The fprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under control
  of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are
  converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is
  undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are
  evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fprintf function returns when
  the end of the format string is encountered.
-
          
+
          3
  The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial
  shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary multibyte
  characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion
@@ -14281,7 +14281,7 @@ unsigned long long int
  specifications, each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments,
  converting them, if applicable, according to the corresponding conversion specifier, and
  then writing the result to the output stream.
-
          
+
          4
  Each conversion specification is introduced by the character %. After the %, the following
  appear in sequence:
 
            
@@ -14302,14 +14302,14 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          •   An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument.
 
          •   A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
 
          
-
          
+
          5
  As noted above, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In
  this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments
  specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the
  argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag
  followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the
  precision were omitted.
-
          
+
          6
  The flag characters and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           -    
              The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if
@@ -14338,7 +14338,7 @@ unsigned long long int
            conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other
            conversions, the behavior is undefined.
 
          
-
          
+
          7
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           hh        
              Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a
@@ -14381,7 +14381,7 @@ unsigned long long int
 
          
 If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          8
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           d,i    
               The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The
@@ -14494,11 +14494,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
           %      
                  A % character is written. No argument is converted. The complete
                 conversion specification shall be %%.
 
          
-
          
+
          9
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.248) If any argument is
  not the correct type for the corresponding conversion specification, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
          
+
          10
  In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result
  of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the
  conversion result.
@@ -14507,16 +14507,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
  
 
-
          
+
          11
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
  to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          12
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
  representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
  in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the
  error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-
          
+
          13
  For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most
  DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded.249) If the number of
  significant decimal digits is more than DECIMAL_DIG but the source value is exactly
@@ -14526,14 +14526,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
  the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          14
  The fprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
  if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          15
  The number of characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at least
  4095.
-
          
+
          16
  EXAMPLE 1 To print a date and time in the form ''Sunday, July 3, 10:02'' followed by pi to five decimal
  places:
 
          @@ -14547,7 +14547,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
 
          
  
-
          
+
          17
  EXAMPLE 2 In this example, multibyte characters do not have a state-dependent encoding, and the
  members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes,
  the first of which is denoted here by a and the second by an uppercase letter.
@@ -14556,7 +14556,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
  
 
-
          
+
          18
  Given the following wide string with length seven,
 
                     static wchar_t wstr[] = L" X Yabc Z W";
@@ -14615,21 +14615,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.19.6.2 The fscanf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <stdio.h>
           int fscanf(FILE * restrict stream,
                const char * restrict format, ...);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The fscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under control
  of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how
  they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments as pointers to the
  objects to receive the converted input. If there are insufficient arguments for the format,
  the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess
  arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored.
-
          
+
          3
  The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial
  shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space
  characters, an ordinary multibyte character (neither % nor a white-space character), or a
@@ -14643,29 +14643,29 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        •   An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving object.
 
        •   A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
 
        
-
        
+
        4
  The fscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. If a directive fails, as
  detailed below, the function returns. Failures are described as input failures (due to the
  occurrence of an encoding error or the unavailability of input characters), or matching
  failures (due to inappropriate input).
-
        
+
        5
  A directive composed of white-space character(s) is executed by reading input up to the
  first non-white-space character (which remains unread), or until no more characters can
  be read.
-
        
+
        6
  A directive that is an ordinary multibyte character is executed by reading the next
  characters of the stream. If any of those characters differ from the ones composing the
  directive, the directive fails and the differing and subsequent characters remain unread.
  Similarly, if end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a character from being
  read, the directive fails.
-
        
+
        7
  A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as
  described below for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the
  following steps:
-
        
+
        8
  Input white-space characters (as specified by the isspace function) are skipped, unless
  the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.250)
-
        
+
        9
  An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An
  input item is defined as the longest sequence of input characters which does not exceed
  any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input sequence.251)
@@ -14673,7 +14673,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a matching failure unless
  end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input from the stream, in which
  case it is an input failure.
-
        
+
        10
  Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the
  count of input characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion specifier. If
  the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails: this
@@ -14685,7 +14685,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
 
  in the object, the behavior is undefined.
-
        
+
        11
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
 
        
 
         hh       
            Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies
@@ -14714,7 +14714,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
        
+
        12
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
 
        
 
         d      
             Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as
@@ -14810,22 +14810,22 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
         %      
                Matches a single % character; no conversion or assignment occurs. The
                 complete conversion specification shall be %%.
 
        
-
        
+
        13
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.253)
-
        
+
        14
  The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as,
  respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.
-
        
+
        15
  Trailing white space (including new-line characters) is left unread unless matched by a
  directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
  determinable other than via the %n directive.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        16
  The fscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items
  assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early
  matching failure.
-
        
+
        17
  EXAMPLE 1        The call:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14840,7 +14840,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence
  thompson\0.
  
-
        
+
        18
  EXAMPLE 2        The call:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14859,7 +14859,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  will assign to i the value 56 and to x the value 789.0, will skip 0123, and will assign to name the
  sequence 56\0. The next character read from the input stream will be a.
  
-
        
+
        19
  EXAMPLE 3         To accept repeatedly from stdin a quantity, a unit of measure, and an item name:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14870,7 +14870,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                   fscanf(stdin,"%*[^\n]");
           } while (!feof(stdin) && !ferror(stdin));
 
        
-
        
+
        20
  If the stdin stream contains the following lines:
 
                   2 quarts of oil
@@ -14893,7 +14893,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
           count     =    EOF;
 
        
  
-
        
+
        21
  EXAMPLE 4         In:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14904,13 +14904,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  the value 123 is assigned to d1 and the value 3 to n1. Because %n can never get an input failure the value
  of 3 is also assigned to n2. The value of d2 is not affected. The value 1 is assigned to i.
  
-
        
+
        22
  EXAMPLE 5 In these examples, multibyte characters do have a state-dependent encoding, and the
  members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes,
  the first of which is denoted here by a and the second by an uppercase letter, but are only recognized as
  such when in the alternate shift state. The shift sequences are denoted by (uparrow) and (downarrow), in which the first causes
  entry into the alternate shift state.
-
        
+
        23
  After the call:
 
 
        @@ -14925,7 +14925,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  str will contain (uparrow) X Y(downarrow)\0 assuming that none of the bytes of the shift sequences (or of the multibyte
  characters, in the more general case) appears to be a single-byte white-space character.
-
        
+
        24
  In contrast, after the call:
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14936,7 +14936,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  with the same input line, wstr will contain the two wide characters that correspond to X and Y and a
  terminating null wide character.
-
        
+
        25
  However, the call:
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
@@ -14947,7 +14947,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  with the same input line will return zero due to a matching failure against the (downarrow) sequence in the format
  string.
-
        
+
        26
  Assuming that the first byte of the multibyte character X is the same as the first byte of the multibyte
  character Y, after the call:
 
        @@ -14981,34 +14981,34 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.3 The printf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The printf function is equivalent to fprintf with the argument stdout interposed
  before the arguments to printf.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The printf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if
  an output or encoding error occurred.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.4 The scanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int scanf(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The scanf function is equivalent to fscanf with the argument stdin interposed
  before the arguments to scanf.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The scanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before
  any conversion. Otherwise, the scanf function returns the number of input items
  assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early
@@ -15017,14 +15017,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.5 The snprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n,
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The snprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
  an array (specified by argument s) rather than to a stream. If n is zero, nothing is written,
  and s may be a null pointer. Otherwise, output characters beyond the n-1st are
@@ -15033,7 +15033,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The snprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
  had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
  value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been
@@ -15042,40 +15042,40 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.6 The sprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int sprintf(char * restrict s,
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The sprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
  an array (specified by the argument s) rather than to a stream. A null character is written
  at the end of the characters written; it is not counted as part of the returned value. If
  copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The sprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.7 The sscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int sscanf(const char * restrict s,
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The sscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, except that input is obtained from a
  string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the
  string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf function. If copying
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The sscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the sscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -15085,7 +15085,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.8 The vfprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15094,16 +15094,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vfprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vfprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
-
        
+
        4
  EXAMPLE       The following shows the use of the vfprintf function in a general error-reporting routine.
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -15133,7 +15133,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.9 The vfscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15142,13 +15142,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vfscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vfscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vfscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -15157,7 +15157,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.10 The vprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15165,13 +15165,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vprintf function is equivalent to printf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
  if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
@@ -15179,7 +15179,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.11 The vscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15187,13 +15187,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vscanf function is equivalent to scanf, with the variable argument list replaced
  by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly
  subsequent va_arg calls). The vscanf function does not invoke the va_end
  macro.254)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -15202,7 +15202,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.12 The vsnprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15211,14 +15211,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vsnprintf function is equivalent to snprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsnprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vsnprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
  had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
  value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been
@@ -15228,7 +15228,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.13 The vsprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15237,21 +15237,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vsprintf function is equivalent to sprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vsprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.6.14 The vsscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -15260,13 +15260,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vsscanf function is equivalent to sscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.254)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vsscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vsscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -15279,19 +15279,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.1 The fgetc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          int fgetc(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
  next character is present, the fgetc function obtains that character as an unsigned
  char converted to an int and advances the associated file position indicator for the
  stream (if defined).
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
  of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function returns EOF. Otherwise, the
  fgetc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by stream.
@@ -15305,20 +15305,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.2 The fgets function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          char *fgets(char * restrict s, int n,
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fgets function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n
  from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No additional
  characters are read after a new-line character (which is retained) or after end-of-file. A
  null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fgets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
  characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
  null pointer is returned. If a read error occurs during the operation, the array contents are
@@ -15332,57 +15332,57 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.3 The fputc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fputc function writes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
  char) to the output stream pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the
  associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator
  appropriately. If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened
  with append mode, the character is appended to the output stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fputc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and fputc returns EOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.4 The fputs function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int fputs(const char * restrict s,
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fputs function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
  stream. The terminating null character is not written.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fputs function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a
  nonnegative value.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.5 The getc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int getc(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The getc function is equivalent to fgetc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
  may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an expression
  with side effects.
 
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The getc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
  stream. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
  getc returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and
@@ -15391,16 +15391,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.6 The getchar function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int getchar(void);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The getchar function is equivalent to getc with the argument stdin.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The getchar function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
  stdin. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
  getchar returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and
@@ -15409,19 +15409,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.7 The gets function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         char *gets(char *s);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The gets function reads characters from the input stream pointed to by stdin, into the
  array pointed to by s, until end-of-file is encountered or a new-line character is read.
  Any new-line character is discarded, and a null character is written immediately after the
  last character read into the array.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The gets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
  characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
  null pointer is returned. If a read error occurs during the operation, the array contents are
@@ -15432,52 +15432,52 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.8 The putc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The putc function is equivalent to fputc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
  may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an expression
  with side effects.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The putc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and putc returns EOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.9 The putchar function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int putchar(int c);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The putchar function is equivalent to putc with the second argument stdout.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The putchar function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and putchar returns EOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.10 The puts function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int puts(const char *s);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The puts function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stdout,
  and appends a new-line character to the output. The terminating null character is not
  written.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The puts function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a nonnegative
  value.
 
@@ -15485,27 +15485,27 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.7.11 The ungetc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
           int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The ungetc function pushes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
  char) back onto the input stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back characters will be
  returned by subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A
  successful intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning
  function (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back characters for the
  stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.
-
        
+
        3
  One character of pushback is guaranteed. If the ungetc function is called too many
  times on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that
  stream, the operation may fail.
-
        
+
        4
  If the value of c equals that of the macro EOF, the operation fails and the input stream is
  unchanged.
-
        
+
        5
  A successful call to the ungetc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream.
  The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all
  pushed-back characters shall be the same as it was before the characters were pushed
@@ -15515,7 +15515,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  the ungetc function; if its value was zero before a call, it is indeterminate after the
  call.256)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        6
  The ungetc function returns the character pushed back after conversion, or EOF if the
  operation fails.
 
         Forward references: file positioning functions (7.19.9).
@@ -15535,7 +15535,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.8.1 The fread function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         size_t fread(void * restrict ptr,
@@ -15543,7 +15543,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fread function reads, into the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
  whose size is specified by size, from the stream pointed to by stream. For each
  object, size calls are made to the fgetc function and the results stored, in the order
@@ -15552,7 +15552,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  read. If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator for the stream is
  indeterminate. If a partial element is read, its value is indeterminate.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fread function returns the number of elements successfully read, which may be
  less than nmemb if a read error or end-of-file is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
  fread returns zero and the contents of the array and the state of the stream remain
@@ -15561,7 +15561,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.8.2 The fwrite function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         size_t fwrite(const void * restrict ptr,
@@ -15569,7 +15569,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fwrite function writes, from the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
  whose size is specified by size, to the stream pointed to by stream. For each object,
  size calls are made to the fputc function, taking the values (in order) from an array of
@@ -15579,7 +15579,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  indeterminate.
 
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fwrite function returns the number of elements successfully written, which will be
  less than nmemb only if a write error is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
  fwrite returns zero and the state of the stream remains unchanged.
@@ -15590,20 +15590,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.9.1 The fgetpos function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int fgetpos(FILE * restrict stream,
              fpos_t * restrict pos);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fgetpos function stores the current values of the parse state (if any) and file
  position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by pos.
  The values stored contain unspecified information usable by the fsetpos function for
  repositioning the stream to its position at the time of the call to the fgetpos function.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  If successful, the fgetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fgetpos function
  returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
 
         Forward references: the fsetpos function (7.19.9.3).
@@ -15611,71 +15611,71 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.9.2 The fseek function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int fseek(FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fseek function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
  If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fseek fails.
-
        
+
        3
  For a binary stream, the new position, measured in characters from the beginning of the
  file, is obtained by adding offset to the position specified by whence. The specified
  position is the beginning of the file if whence is SEEK_SET, the current value of the file
  position indicator if SEEK_CUR, or end-of-file if SEEK_END. A binary stream need not
  meaningfully support fseek calls with a whence value of SEEK_END.
-
        
+
        4
  For a text stream, either offset shall be zero, or offset shall be a value returned by
  an earlier successful call to the ftell function on a stream associated with the same file
  and whence shall be SEEK_SET.
 
-
        
+
        5
  After determining the new position, a successful call to the fseek function undoes any
  effects of the ungetc function on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the
  stream, and then establishes the new position. After a successful fseek call, the next
  operation on an update stream may be either input or output.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        6
  The fseek function returns nonzero only for a request that cannot be satisfied.
 
         Forward references: the ftell function (7.19.9.4).
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.9.3 The fsetpos function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int fsetpos(FILE *stream, const fpos_t *pos);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fsetpos function sets the mbstate_t object (if any) and file position indicator
  for the stream pointed to by stream according to the value of the object pointed to by
  pos, which shall be a value obtained from an earlier successful call to the fgetpos
  function on a stream associated with the same file. If a read or write error occurs, the
  error indicator for the stream is set and fsetpos fails.
-
        
+
        3
  A successful call to the fsetpos function undoes any effects of the ungetc function
  on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, and then establishes the new
  parse state and position. After a successful fsetpos call, the next operation on an
  update stream may be either input or output.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        4
  If successful, the fsetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fsetpos function
  returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.9.4 The ftell function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         long int ftell(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The ftell function obtains the current value of the file position indicator for the stream
  pointed to by stream. For a binary stream, the value is the number of characters from
  the beginning of the file. For a text stream, its file position indicator contains unspecified
@@ -15685,7 +15685,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
  or read.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  If successful, the ftell function returns the current value of the file position indicator
  for the stream. On failure, the ftell function returns -1L and stores an
  implementation-defined positive value in errno.
@@ -15693,13 +15693,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.9.5 The rewind function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         void rewind(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The rewind function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by
  stream to the beginning of the file. It is equivalent to
 
        @@ -15707,7 +15707,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  except that the error indicator for the stream is also cleared.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The rewind function returns no value.
 
 
        Contents
@@ -15716,62 +15716,62 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.10.1 The clearerr function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         void clearerr(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The clearerr function clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream pointed
  to by stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The clearerr function returns no value.
 
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.10.2 The feof function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int feof(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The feof function tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The feof function returns nonzero if and only if the end-of-file indicator is set for
  stream.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.10.3 The ferror function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         int ferror(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The ferror function tests the error indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The ferror function returns nonzero if and only if the error indicator is set for
  stream.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.19.10.4 The perror function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         void perror(const char *s);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The perror function maps the error number in the integer expression errno to an
  error message. It writes a sequence of characters to the standard error stream thus: first
  (if s is not a null pointer and the character pointed to by s is not the null character), the
@@ -15779,17 +15779,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  message string followed by a new-line character. The contents of the error message
  strings are the same as those returned by the strerror function with argument errno.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The perror function returns no value.
 
         Forward references: the strerror function (7.21.6.2).
 
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.20 General utilities <stdlib.h>
        
-
        
+
        1
  The header <stdlib.h> declares five types and several functions of general utility, and
  defines several macros.257)
-
        
+
        2
  The types declared are size_t and wchar_t (both described in 7.17),
 
                   div_t
@@ -15803,7 +15803,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
           lldiv_t
 
        
  which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the lldiv function.
-
        
+
        3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.17);
 
                   EXIT_FAILURE
@@ -15838,7 +15838,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.20.1 Numeric conversion functions
        
-
        
+
        1
  The functions atof, atoi, atol, and atoll need not affect the value of the integer
  expression errno on an error. If the value of the result cannot be represented, the
  behavior is undefined.
@@ -15846,27 +15846,27 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.20.1.1 The atof function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdlib.h>
         double atof(const char *nptr);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The atof function converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to
  double representation. Except for the behavior on error, it is equivalent to
 
                 strtod(nptr, (char **)NULL)
 
        
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The atof function returns the converted value.
 
         Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.20.1.3).
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.20.1.2 The atoi, atol, and atoll functions
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdlib.h>
         int atoi(const char *nptr);
@@ -15874,7 +15874,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         long long int atoll(const char *nptr);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The atoi, atol, and atoll functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed
  to by nptr to int, long int, and long long int representation, respectively.
  Except for the behavior on error, they are equivalent to
@@ -15884,7 +15884,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         atoll: strtoll(nptr, (char **)NULL, 10)
 
        
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The atoi, atol, and atoll functions return the converted value.
 
         Forward references: the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions
  (7.20.1.4).
@@ -15893,7 +15893,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.20.1.3 The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdlib.h>
         double strtod(const char * restrict nptr,
@@ -15904,7 +15904,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              char ** restrict endptr);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions convert the initial portion of the string
  pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
  respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly
@@ -15913,7 +15913,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null
  character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a
  floating-point number, and return the result.
-
        
+
        3
  The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of
  the following:
 
          
@@ -15934,7 +15934,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string,
  starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject
  sequence contains no characters if the input string is not of the expected form.
-
          
+
          4
  If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of
  characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point character (whichever occurs
  first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.2, except that the
@@ -15951,24 +15951,24 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  the expected form; the meaning of the n-char sequences is implementation-defined.259) A
  pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that
  endptr is not a null pointer.
-
          
+
          5
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the
  value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.
-
          
+
          6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
          
+
          7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          8
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
  the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
  appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value,
  with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding
  direction.
-
          
+
          9
  If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG (defined in
  <float.h>) significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject
  sequence D has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG significant digits,
@@ -15981,7 +15981,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
  rounding direction.260)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          10
  The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
  zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, plus or
  minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the return
@@ -16006,7 +16006,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.1.4 The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          long int strtol(
@@ -16027,7 +16027,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               int base);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions convert the initial
  portion of the string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int, unsigned
  long int, and unsigned long long int representation, respectively. First,
@@ -16040,7 +16040,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null
  character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
  integer, and return the result.
-
          
+
          3
  If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an
  integer constant as described in 6.4.4.1, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but
  not including an integer suffix. If the value of base is between 2 and 36 (inclusive), the
@@ -16050,13 +16050,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  ascribed the values 10 through 35; only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less
  than that of base are permitted. If the value of base is 16, the characters 0x or 0X may
  optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present.
-
          
+
          4
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string,
  starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject
  sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white
  space, or if the first non-white-space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter
  or digit.
-
          
+
          5
  If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence
  of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant according to
  the rules of 6.4.4.1. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base
@@ -16064,15 +16064,15 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  as given above. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the value resulting from
  the conversion is negated (in the return type). A pointer to the final string is stored in the
  object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.
-
          
+
          6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
          
+
          7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          8
  The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions return the converted
  value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
  is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN,
@@ -16086,45 +16086,45 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.2.1 The rand function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         int rand(void);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The rand function computes a sequence of pseudo-random integers in the range 0 to
  RAND_MAX.
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the rand function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The rand function returns a pseudo-random integer.
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          5
  The value of the RAND_MAX macro shall be at least 32767.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.2.2 The srand function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         void srand(unsigned int seed);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The srand function uses the argument as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo-random
  numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to rand. If srand is then called with the
  same seed value, the sequence of pseudo-random numbers shall be repeated. If rand is
  called before any calls to srand have been made, the same sequence shall be generated
  as when srand is first called with a seed value of 1.
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the srand function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The srand function returns no value.
-
          
+
          5
  EXAMPLE       The following functions define a portable implementation of rand and srand.
 
 
          @@ -16143,7 +16143,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.3 Memory management functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to the calloc,
  malloc, and realloc functions is unspecified. The pointer returned if the allocation
  succeeds is suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to a pointer to any type of object
@@ -16159,17 +16159,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.3.1 The calloc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The calloc function allocates space for an array of nmemb objects, each of whose size
  is size. The space is initialized to all bits zero.261)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The calloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -16180,13 +16180,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.3.2 The free function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          void free(void *ptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The free function causes the space pointed to by ptr to be deallocated, that is, made
  available for further allocation. If ptr is a null pointer, no action occurs. Otherwise, if
  the argument does not match a pointer earlier returned by the calloc, malloc, or
@@ -16196,48 +16196,48 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  realloc function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc,
  the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The free function returns no value.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.3.3 The malloc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         void *malloc(size_t size);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The malloc function allocates space for an object whose size is specified by size and
  whose value is indeterminate.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The malloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.3.4 The realloc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The realloc function deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a
  pointer to a new object that has the size specified by size. The contents of the new
  object shall be the same as that of the old object prior to deallocation, up to the lesser of
  the new and old sizes. Any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object have
  indeterminate values.
-
          
+
          3
  If ptr is a null pointer, the realloc function behaves like the malloc function for the
  specified size. Otherwise, if ptr does not match a pointer earlier returned by the
  calloc, malloc, or realloc function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call
  to the free or realloc function, the behavior is undefined. If memory for the new
  object cannot be allocated, the old object is not deallocated and its value is unchanged.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The realloc function returns a pointer to the new object (which may have the same
  value as a pointer to the old object), or a null pointer if the new object could not be
  allocated.
@@ -16249,13 +16249,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.1 The abort function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         void abort(void);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The abort function causes abnormal program termination to occur, unless the signal
  SIGABRT is being caught and the signal handler does not return. Whether open streams
  with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed, or temporary files are
@@ -16263,59 +16263,59 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  unsuccessful termination is returned to the host environment by means of the function
  call raise(SIGABRT).
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The abort function does not return to its caller.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.2 The atexit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         int atexit(void (*func)(void));
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The atexit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called without
  arguments at normal program termination.
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The atexit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
 
           Forward references: the exit function (7.20.4.3).
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.3 The exit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         void exit(int status);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The exit function causes normal program termination to occur. If more than one call to
  the exit function is executed by a program, the behavior is undefined.
 
-
          
+
          3
  First, all functions registered by the atexit function are called, in the reverse order of
  their registration,262) except that a function is called after any previously registered
  functions that had already been called at the time it was registered. If, during the call to
  any such function, a call to the longjmp function is made that would terminate the call
  to the registered function, the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          4
  Next, all open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, all open streams are
  closed, and all files created by the tmpfile function are removed.
-
          
+
          5
  Finally, control is returned to the host environment. If the value of status is zero or
  EXIT_SUCCESS, an implementation-defined form of the status successful termination is
  returned. If the value of status is EXIT_FAILURE, an implementation-defined form
  of the status unsuccessful termination is returned. Otherwise the status returned is
  implementation-defined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          6
  The exit function cannot return to its caller.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -16326,13 +16326,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.4 The _Exit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          void _Exit(int status);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The _Exit function causes normal program termination to occur and control to be
  returned to the host environment. No functions registered by the atexit function or
  signal handlers registered by the signal function are called. The status returned to the
@@ -16340,7 +16340,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  Whether open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed,
  or temporary files are removed is implementation-defined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The _Exit function cannot return to its caller.
  
  
@@ -16351,20 +16351,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.5 The getenv function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         char *getenv(const char *name);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The getenv function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment,
  for a string that matches the string pointed to by name. The set of environment names
  and the method for altering the environment list are implementation-defined.
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the getenv function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The getenv function returns a pointer to a string associated with the matched list
  member. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the getenv function. If the specified name cannot
@@ -16373,20 +16373,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.4.6 The system function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         int system(const char *string);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If string is a null pointer, the system function determines whether the host
  environment has a command processor. If string is not a null pointer, the system
  function passes the string pointed to by string to that command processor to be
  executed in a manner which the implementation shall document; this might then cause the
  program calling system to behave in a non-conforming manner or to terminate.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  If the argument is a null pointer, the system function returns nonzero only if a
  command processor is available. If the argument is not a null pointer, and the system
  function does return, it returns an implementation-defined value.
@@ -16394,29 +16394,29 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.5 Searching and sorting utilities
          
-
          
+
          1
  These utilities make use of a comparison function to search or sort arrays of unspecified
  type. Where an argument declared as size_t nmemb specifies the length of the array
  for a function, nmemb can have the value zero on a call to that function; the comparison
  function is not called, a search finds no matching element, and sorting performs no
  rearrangement. Pointer arguments on such a call shall still have valid values, as described
  in 7.1.4.
-
          
+
          2
  The implementation shall ensure that the second argument of the comparison function
  (when called from bsearch), or both arguments (when called from qsort), are
  pointers to elements of the array.263) The first argument when called from bsearch
  shall equal key.
-
          
+
          3
  The comparison function shall not alter the contents of the array. The implementation
  may reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function, but shall not
  alter the contents of any individual element.
-
          
+
          4
  When the same objects (consisting of size bytes, irrespective of their current positions
  in the array) are passed more than once to the comparison function, the results shall be
  consistent with one another. That is, for qsort they shall define a total ordering on the
  array, and for bsearch the same object shall always compare the same way with the
  key.
-
          
+
          5
  A sequence point occurs immediately before and immediately after each call to the
  comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any
  movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.
@@ -16434,7 +16434,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.5.1 The bsearch function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <stdlib.h>
           void *bsearch(const void *key, const void *base,
@@ -16442,14 +16442,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The bsearch function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which
  is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key. The
  
  
 
  size of each element of the array is specified by size.
-
          
+
          3
  The comparison function pointed to by compar is called with two arguments that point
  to the key object and to an array element, in that order. The function shall return an
  integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the key object is considered,
@@ -16457,7 +16457,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  shall consist of: all the elements that compare less than, all the elements that compare
  equal to, and all the elements that compare greater than the key object, in that order.264)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The bsearch function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null
  pointer if no match is found. If two elements compare as equal, which element is
  matched is unspecified.
@@ -16469,26 +16469,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.5.2 The qsort function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <stdlib.h>
           void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
                int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The qsort function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is
  pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.
-
          
+
          3
  The contents of the array are sorted into ascending order according to a comparison
  function pointed to by compar, which is called with two arguments that point to the
  objects being compared. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or
  greater than zero if the first argument is considered to be respectively less than, equal to,
  or greater than the second.
-
          
+
          4
  If two elements compare as equal, their order in the resulting sorted array is unspecified.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          5
  The qsort function returns no value.
  
  
@@ -16502,7 +16502,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.6.1 The abs, labs and llabs functions
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          int abs(int j);
@@ -16510,11 +16510,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          long long int llabs(long long int j);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The abs, labs, and llabs functions compute the absolute value of an integer j. If the
  result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.265)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The abs, labs, and llabs, functions return the absolute value.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -16524,7 +16524,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.6.2 The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          div_t div(int numer, int denom);
@@ -16532,11 +16532,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The div, ldiv, and lldiv, functions compute numer / denom and numer %
  denom in a single operation.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions return a structure of type div_t, ldiv_t, and
  lldiv_t, respectively, comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structures
  shall contain (in either order) the members quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder),
@@ -16550,7 +16550,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.7 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The behavior of the multibyte character functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category
  of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, each function is placed into its
  initial conversion state by a call for which its character pointer argument, s, is a null
@@ -16568,23 +16568,23 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.7.1 The mblen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdlib.h>
          int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If s is not a null pointer, the mblen function determines the number of bytes contained
  in the multibyte character pointed to by s. Except that the conversion state of the
  mbtowc function is not affected, it is equivalent to
 
                    mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, s, n);
 
          
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mblen function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If s is a null pointer, the mblen function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the mblen function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character),
@@ -16601,7 +16601,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.7.2 The mbtowc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         int mbtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc,
@@ -16609,7 +16609,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -16617,30 +16617,30 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  corresponding wide character and then, if pwc is not a null pointer, stores that value in
  the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the function is left in the initial conversion state.
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mbtowc function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If s is a null pointer, the mbtowc function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the mbtowc function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character),
  or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the converted multibyte character (if
  the next n or fewer bytes form a valid multibyte character), or returns -1 (if they do not
  form a valid multibyte character).
-
          
+
          5
  In no case will the value returned be greater than n or the value of the MB_CUR_MAX
  macro.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.7.3 The wctomb function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wctomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte
  character corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift
  sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first
@@ -16649,28 +16649,28 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  sequence needed to restore the initial shift state, and the function is left in the initial
  conversion state.
 
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If s is a null pointer, the wctomb function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the wctomb function returns -1 if the value of wc does not correspond
  to a valid multibyte character, or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the
  multibyte character corresponding to the value of wc.
-
          
+
          5
  In no case will the value returned be greater than the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.8 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The behavior of the multibyte string functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of
  the current locale.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.8.1 The mbstowcs function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <stdlib.h>
           size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t * restrict pwcs,
@@ -16678,7 +16678,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The mbstowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
  initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide
  characters and stores not more than n wide characters into the array pointed to by pwcs.
@@ -16686,11 +16686,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  character) will be examined or converted. Each multibyte character is converted as if by
  a call to the mbtowc function, except that the conversion state of the mbtowc function is
  not affected.
-
          
+
          3
  No more than n elements will be modified in the array pointed to by pwcs. If copying
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If an invalid multibyte character is encountered, the mbstowcs function returns
  (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the mbstowcs function returns the number of array
  elements modified, not including a terminating null wide character, if any.267)
@@ -16707,7 +16707,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.20.8.2 The wcstombs function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdlib.h>
         size_t wcstombs(char * restrict s,
@@ -16715,18 +16715,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcstombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed
  to by pwcs into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the
  initial shift state, and stores these multibyte characters into the array pointed to by s,
  stopping if a multibyte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes or if a null
  character is stored. Each wide character is converted as if by a call to the wctomb
  function, except that the conversion state of the wctomb function is not affected.
-
          
+
          3
  No more than n bytes will be modified in the array pointed to by s. If copying takes place
  between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character,
  the wcstombs function returns (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the wcstombs function
  returns the number of bytes modified, not including a terminating null character, if
@@ -16738,14 +16738,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.1 String function conventions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <string.h> declares one type and several functions, and defines one
  macro useful for manipulating arrays of character type and other objects treated as arrays
  of character type.268) The type is size_t and the macro is NULL (both described in
  7.17). Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in all cases
  a char * or void * argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) character of the
  array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          2
  Where an argument declared as size_t n specifies the length of the array for a
  function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated
  otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments
@@ -16753,7 +16753,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  function that locates a character finds no occurrence, a function that compares two
  character sequences returns zero, and a function that copies characters copies zero
  characters.
-
          
+
          3
  For all functions in this subclause, each character shall be interpreted as if it had the type
  unsigned char (and therefore every possible object representation is valid and has a
  different value).
@@ -16768,7 +16768,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.2.1 The memcpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <string.h>
           void *memcpy(void * restrict s1,
@@ -16776,12 +16776,12 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The memcpy function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior
  is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The memcpy function returns the value of s1.
  
  
@@ -16792,44 +16792,44 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.2.2 The memmove function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The memmove function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n characters from the object
  pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not
  overlap the objects pointed to by s1 and s2, and then the n characters from the
  temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The memmove function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.2.3 The strcpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strcpy(char * restrict s1,
              const char * restrict s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strcpy function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null
  character) into the array pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that
  overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strcpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.2.4 The strncpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strncpy(char * restrict s1,
@@ -16837,17 +16837,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strncpy function copies not more than n characters (characters that follow a null
  character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
 
  s1.269) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          3
  If the array pointed to by s2 is a string that is shorter than n characters, null characters
  are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n characters in all have been
  written.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The strncpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -16861,26 +16861,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.3.1 The strcat function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <string.h>
           char *strcat(char * restrict s1,
                const char * restrict s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strcat function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character
  of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. If copying takes place between
  objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strcat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.3.2 The strncat function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <string.h>
           char *strncat(char * restrict s1,
@@ -16888,7 +16888,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strncat function appends not more than n characters (a null character and
  characters that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
  the string pointed to by s1. The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the
@@ -16897,7 +16897,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strncat function returns the value of s1.
 
           Forward references: the strlen function (7.21.6.3).
 
@@ -16908,7 +16908,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4 Comparison functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The sign of a nonzero value returned by the comparison functions memcmp, strcmp,
  and strncmp is determined by the sign of the difference between the values of the first
  pair of characters (both interpreted as unsigned char) that differ in the objects being
@@ -16917,17 +16917,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4.1 The memcmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <string.h>
          int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The memcmp function compares the first n characters of the object pointed to by s1 to
  the first n characters of the object pointed to by s2.271)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The memcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
  pointed to by s2.
@@ -16941,17 +16941,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4.2 The strcmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <string.h>
          int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strcmp function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
  s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
  
@@ -16961,17 +16961,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4.3 The strcoll function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strcoll function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
  s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strcoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
  pointed to by s2 when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.
@@ -16979,18 +16979,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4.4 The strncmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strncmp function compares not more than n characters (characters that follow a
  null character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to
  by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
  to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
@@ -16998,7 +16998,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.4.5 The strxfrm function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         size_t strxfrm(char * restrict s1,
@@ -17006,7 +17006,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strxfrm function transforms the string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting
  string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if the strcmp
  function is applied to two transformed strings, it returns a value greater than, equal to, or
@@ -17017,11 +17017,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  be a null pointer. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strxfrm function returns the length of the transformed string (not including the
  terminating null character). If the value returned is n or more, the contents of the array
  pointed to by s1 are indeterminate.
-
          
+
          4
  EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the size of the array needed to hold the
  transformation of the string pointed to by s.
 
          @@ -17035,36 +17035,36 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.1 The memchr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The memchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to an unsigned
  char) in the initial n characters (each interpreted as unsigned char) of the object
  pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The memchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
  character does not occur in the object.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.2 The strchr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strchr(const char *s, int c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
  string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
  string.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
  character does not occur in the string.
 
@@ -17072,52 +17072,52 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.3 The strcspn function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         size_t strcspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strcspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
  pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters not from the string pointed to by
  s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strcspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.4 The strpbrk function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strpbrk(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strpbrk function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of any
  character from the string pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strpbrk function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if no character
  from s2 occurs in s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.5 The strrchr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strrchr(const char *s, int c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strrchr function locates the last occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
  string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
  string.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strrchr function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if c does not
  occur in the string.
 
@@ -17125,76 +17125,76 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.6 The strspn function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         size_t strspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
  pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.7 The strstr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strstr(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strstr function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of the
  sequence of characters (excluding the terminating null character) in the string pointed to
  by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strstr function returns a pointer to the located string, or a null pointer if the string
  is not found. If s2 points to a string with zero length, the function returns s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.5.8 The strtok function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strtok(char * restrict s1,
              const char * restrict s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  A sequence of calls to the strtok function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a
  sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to
  by s2. The first call in the sequence has a non-null first argument; subsequent calls in the
  sequence have a null first argument. The separator string pointed to by s2 may be
  different from call to call.
-
          
+
          3
  The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character
  that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character
  is found, then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok function
 
  returns a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is the start of the first token.
-
          
+
          4
  The strtok function then searches from there for a character that is contained in the
  current separator string. If no such character is found, the current token extends to the
  end of the string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches for a token will return a null
  pointer. If such a character is found, it is overwritten by a null character, which
  terminates the current token. The strtok function saves a pointer to the following
  character, from which the next search for a token will start.
-
          
+
          5
  Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first argument, starts
  searching from the saved pointer and behaves as described above.
-
          
+
          6
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strtok function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          7
  The strtok function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer
  if there is no token.
-
          
+
          8
  EXAMPLE
 
                    #include <string.h>
@@ -17213,37 +17213,37 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.6.1 The memset function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <string.h>
          void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The memset function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into
  each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The memset function returns the value of s.
 
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.6.2 The strerror function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         char *strerror(int errnum);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strerror function maps the number in errnum to a message string. Typically,
  the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror shall map any value of type
  int to a message.
-
          
+
          3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strerror function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The strerror function returns a pointer to the string, the contents of which are locale-
  specific. The array pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the strerror function.
@@ -17251,26 +17251,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.21.6.3 The strlen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <string.h>
         size_t strlen(const char *s);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strlen function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The strlen function returns the number of characters that precede the terminating null
  character.
 
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.22 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <tgmath.h> includes the headers <math.h> and <complex.h> and
  defines several type-generic macros.
-
          
+
          2
  Of the <math.h> and <complex.h> functions without an f (float) or l (long
  double) suffix, several have one or more parameters whose corresponding real type is
  double. For each such function, except modf, there is a corresponding type-generic
@@ -17278,7 +17278,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  synopsis are generic parameters. Use of the macro invokes a function whose
  corresponding real type and type domain are determined by the arguments for the generic
  parameters.273)
-
          
+
          3
  Use of the macro invokes a function whose generic parameters have the corresponding
  real type determined as follows:
 
            
@@ -17288,7 +17288,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  type, the type determined is double.
 
          •   Otherwise, the type determined is float.
 
          
-
          
+
          4
  For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> for which there is a function in
  <complex.h> with the same name except for a c prefix, the corresponding type-
  generic macro (for both functions) has the same name as the function in <math.h>. The
@@ -17322,7 +17322,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          
  If at least one argument for a generic parameter is complex, then use of the macro invokes
  a complex function; otherwise, use of the macro invokes a real function.
-
          
+
          5
  For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> without a c-prefixed counterpart in
  <complex.h> (except modf), the corresponding type-generic macro has the same
  name as the function. These type-generic macros are:
@@ -17340,7 +17340,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          
  If all arguments for generic parameters are real, then use of the macro invokes a real
  function; otherwise, use of the macro results in undefined behavior.
-
          
+
          6
  For each unsuffixed function in <complex.h> that is not a c-prefixed counterpart to a
  function in <math.h>, the corresponding type-generic macro has the same name as the
  function. These type-generic macros are:
@@ -17350,7 +17350,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          cimag                   cproj
 
          
  Use of the macro with any real or complex argument invokes a complex function.
-
          
+
          7
  EXAMPLE       With the declarations
 
                    #include <tgmath.h>
@@ -17403,21 +17403,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.1 Components of time
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <time.h> defines two macros, and declares several types and functions for
  manipulating time. Many functions deal with a calendar time that represents the current
  date (according to the Gregorian calendar) and time. Some functions deal with local
  time, which is the calendar time expressed for some specific time zone, and with Daylight
  Saving Time, which is a temporary change in the algorithm for determining local time.
  The local time zone and Daylight Saving Time are implementation-defined.
-
          
+
          2
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.17); and
 
                    CLOCKS_PER_SEC
 
          
  which expands to an expression with type clock_t (described below) that is the
  number per second of the value returned by the clock function.
-
          
+
          3
  The types declared are size_t (described in 7.17);
 
                    clock_t
@@ -17431,7 +17431,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          struct tm
 
          
  which holds the components of a calendar time, called the broken-down time.
-
          
+
          4
  The range and precision of times representable in clock_t and time_t are
  implementation-defined. The tm structure shall contain at least the following members,
  in any order. The semantics of the members and their normal ranges are expressed in the
@@ -17464,16 +17464,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.2.1 The clock function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <time.h>
          clock_t clock(void);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The clock function determines the processor time used.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The clock function returns the implementation's best approximation to the processor
  time used by the program since the beginning of an implementation-defined era related
  only to the program invocation. To determine the time in seconds, the value returned by
@@ -17489,17 +17489,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.2.2 The difftime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <time.h>
          double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The difftime function computes the difference between two calendar times: time1 -
  time0.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The difftime function returns the difference expressed in seconds as a double.
  
  
@@ -17510,13 +17510,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.2.3 The mktime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <time.h>
          time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The mktime function converts the broken-down time, expressed as local time, in the
  structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time value with the same encoding as
  that of the values returned by the time function. The original values of the tm_wday
@@ -17527,11 +17527,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  time, but with their values forced to the ranges indicated above; the final value of
  tm_mday is not set until tm_mon and tm_year are determined.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The mktime function returns the specified calendar time encoded as a value of type
  time_t. If the calendar time cannot be represented, the function returns the value
  (time_t)(-1).
-
          
+
          4
  EXAMPLE       What day of the week is July 4, 2001?
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17571,17 +17571,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.2.4 The time function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         time_t time(time_t *timer);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The time function determines the current calendar time. The encoding of the value is
  unspecified.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The time function returns the implementation's best approximation to the current
  calendar time. The value (time_t)(-1) is returned if the calendar time is not
  available. If timer is not a null pointer, the return value is also assigned to the object it
@@ -17589,7 +17589,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3 Time conversion functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  Except for the strftime function, these functions each return a pointer to one of two
  types of static objects: a broken-down time structure or an array of char. Execution of
  any of the functions that return a pointer to one of these object types may overwrite the
@@ -17600,13 +17600,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3.1 The asctime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The asctime function converts the broken-down time in the structure pointed to by
  timeptr into a string in the form
 
@@ -17635,26 +17635,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  }
 
          
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The asctime function returns a pointer to the string.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3.2 The ctime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         char *ctime(const time_t *timer);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The ctime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in the
  form of a string. It is equivalent to
 
                   asctime(localtime(timer))
 
          
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The ctime function returns the pointer returned by the asctime function with that
  broken-down time as argument.
 
           Forward references: the localtime function (7.23.3.4).
@@ -17663,41 +17663,41 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3.3 The gmtime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The gmtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-
  down time, expressed as UTC.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The gmtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if the
  specified time cannot be converted to UTC.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3.4 The localtime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The localtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a
  broken-down time, expressed as local time.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The localtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if
  the specified time cannot be converted to local time.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.23.3.5 The strftime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         size_t strftime(char * restrict s,
@@ -17706,7 +17706,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The strftime function places characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by
  the string pointed to by format. The format shall be a multibyte character sequence,
  beginning and ending in its initial shift state. The format string consists of zero or
@@ -17717,7 +17717,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
  unchanged into the array. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the
  behavior is undefined. No more than maxsize characters are placed into the array.
-
          
+
          3
  Each conversion specifier is replaced by appropriate characters as described in the
  following list. The appropriate characters are determined using the LC_TIME category
  of the current locale and by the values of zero or more members of the broken-down time
@@ -17780,7 +17780,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
       time zone is determinable. [tm_isdst]
 
           %%  
           is replaced by %.
 
-
          
+
          4
  Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the inclusion of an E or O modifier
  character to indicate an alternative format or specification. If the alternative format or
  specification does not exist for the current locale, the modifier is ignored.
@@ -17818,7 +17818,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
           %Oy 
          is replaced by the last 2 digits of the year, using the locale's alternative numeric
      symbols.
 
-
          
+
          5
  %g, %G, and %V give values according to the ISO 8601 week-based year. In this system,
  weeks begin on a Monday and week 1 of the year is the week that includes January 4th,
  which is also the week that includes the first Thursday of the year, and is also the first
@@ -17828,9 +17828,9 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  December 29th, 30th, or 31st is a Monday, it and any following days are part of week 1 of
  the following year. Thus, for Tuesday 30th December 1997, %G is replaced by 1998 and
  %V is replaced by 01.
-
          
+
          6
  If a conversion specifier is not one of the above, the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          7
  In the "C" locale, the E and O modifiers are ignored and the replacement strings for the
  following specifiers are:
 
          
@@ -17847,7 +17847,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          
 
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          8
  If the total number of resulting characters including the terminating null character is not
  more than maxsize, the strftime function returns the number of characters placed
  into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null character. Otherwise,
@@ -17859,10 +17859,10 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.1 Introduction
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <wchar.h> declares four data types, one tag, four macros, and many
  functions.277)
-
          
+
          2
  The types declared are wchar_t and size_t (both described in 7.17);
 
                     mbstate_t
@@ -17881,7 +17881,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
           struct tm
 
          
  which is declared as an incomplete structure type (the contents are described in 7.23.1).
-
          
+
          3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.17); WCHAR_MIN and WCHAR_MAX
  (described in 7.18.3); and
 
          @@ -17892,7 +17892,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  by several functions in this subclause to indicate end-of-file, that is, no more input from a
  stream. It is also used as a wide character value that does not correspond to any member
  of the extended character set.
-
          
+
          4
  The functions declared are grouped as follows:
 
            
 
          •   Functions that perform input and output of wide characters, or multibyte characters,
@@ -17906,7 +17906,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          •   Functions that provide extended capabilities for conversion between multibyte and
  wide character sequences.
 
          
-
          
+
          5
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this
  subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
@@ -17921,7 +17921,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.2 Formatted wide character input/output functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The formatted wide character input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence
  point after the actions associated with each specifier.280)
 
@@ -17932,7 +17932,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.2.1 The fwprintf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -17940,20 +17940,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The fwprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under
  control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments
  are converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior
  is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments
  are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fwprintf function returns
  when the end of the format string is encountered.
-
          
+
          3
  The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary wide characters (not %),
  which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion specifications, each of
  which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments, converting them, if
  applicable, according to the corresponding conversion specifier, and then writing the
  result to the output stream.
-
          
+
          4
  Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide character %. After the %, the
  following appear in sequence:
 
            
@@ -17979,14 +17979,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          •   A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be
  applied.
 
          
-
          
+
          5
  As noted above, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In
  this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments
  specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the
  argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag
  followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the
  precision were omitted.
-
          
+
          6
  The flag wide characters and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           -   
               The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if
@@ -18015,7 +18015,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
            conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other
            conversions, the behavior is undefined.
 
          
-
          
+
          7
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           hh     
                  Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a
@@ -18058,7 +18058,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          8
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
 
          
 
           d,i   
               The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The
@@ -18166,24 +18166,24 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
           %      
                  A % wide character is written. No argument is converted. The complete
                 conversion specification shall be %%.
 
          
-
          
+
          9
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.286) If any argument is
  not the correct type for the corresponding conversion specification, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
          
+
          10
  In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result
  of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the
  conversion result.
-
          
+
          11
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
  to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          12
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
  representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
  in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the
  error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-
          
+
          13
  For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most
  DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded.287) If the number of
  significant decimal digits is more than DECIMAL_DIG but the source value is exactly
@@ -18193,16 +18193,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
  the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          14
  The fwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
  
 
 
          Environmental limits
-
          
+
          15
  The number of wide characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at
  least 4095.
-
          
+
          16
  EXAMPLE       To print a date and time in the form ''Sunday, July 3, 10:02'' followed by pi to five decimal
  places:
 
          @@ -18247,7 +18247,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.2.2 The fwscanf function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18255,7 +18255,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The fwscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under
  control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input
  sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments
@@ -18263,7 +18263,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while
  arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise
  ignored.
-
          
+
          3
  The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space wide
  characters, an ordinary wide character (neither % nor a white-space wide character), or a
  conversion specification. Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide
@@ -18277,29 +18277,29 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        •   A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be
  applied.
 
        
-
        
+
        4
  The fwscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. If a directive fails,
  as detailed below, the function returns. Failures are described as input failures (due to the
  occurrence of an encoding error or the unavailability of input characters), or matching
  failures (due to inappropriate input).
-
        
+
        5
  A directive composed of white-space wide character(s) is executed by reading input up to
  the first non-white-space wide character (which remains unread), or until no more wide
  characters can be read.
-
        
+
        6
  A directive that is an ordinary wide character is executed by reading the next wide
  character of the stream. If that wide character differs from the directive, the directive
  fails and the differing and subsequent wide characters remain unread. Similarly, if end-
  of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a wide character from being read, the
  directive fails.
-
        
+
        7
  A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as
  described below for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the
  following steps:
-
        
+
        8
  Input white-space wide characters (as specified by the iswspace function) are skipped,
  unless the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.288)
-
        
+
        9
  An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An
  input item is defined as the longest sequence of input wide characters which does not
  exceed any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input
@@ -18307,7 +18307,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  length of the input item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a
  matching failure unless end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input
  from the stream, in which case it is an input failure.
-
        
+
        10
  Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the
  count of input wide characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion
  specifier. If the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails:
@@ -18319,7 +18319,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
  object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of the conversion cannot be
  represented in the object, the behavior is undefined.
-
        
+
        11
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
 
        
 
         hh      
            Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies
@@ -18348,7 +18348,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
        
+
        12
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
 
        
 
         d   
               Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as
@@ -18443,22 +18443,22 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
         %      
                Matches a single % wide character; no conversion or assignment occurs. The
                 complete conversion specification shall be %%.
 
        
-
        
+
        13
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.290)
-
        
+
        14
  The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as,
  respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.
-
        
+
        15
  Trailing white space (including new-line wide characters) is left unread unless matched
  by a directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
  determinable other than via the %n directive.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        16
  The fwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items
  assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early
  matching failure.
-
        
+
        17
  EXAMPLE 1        The call:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -18474,7 +18474,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence
  thompson\0.
  
-
        
+
        18
  EXAMPLE 2        The call:
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
@@ -18508,7 +18508,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.3 The swprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         int swprintf(wchar_t * restrict s,
@@ -18516,13 +18516,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The swprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, except that the argument s
  specifies an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be written,
  rather than written to a stream. No more than n wide characters are written, including a
  terminating null wide character, which is always added (unless n is zero).
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The swprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
  occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written.
@@ -18530,20 +18530,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.4 The swscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s,
              const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The swscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, except that the argument s specifies a
  wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream. Reaching
  the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fwscanf
  function.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The swscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the swscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -18553,7 +18553,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.5 The vfwprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -18563,16 +18563,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vfwprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vfwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.
-
        
+
        4
  EXAMPLE       The following shows the use of the vfwprintf function in a general error-reporting
  routine.
 
        @@ -18604,7 +18604,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.6 The vfwscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -18614,13 +18614,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vfwscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vfwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vfwscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -18629,7 +18629,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.7 The vswprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18639,13 +18639,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vswprintf function is equivalent to swprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vswprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
  occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be generated.
@@ -18654,7 +18654,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.8 The vswscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18663,13 +18663,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vswscanf function is equivalent to swscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vswscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vswscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -18678,7 +18678,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.9 The vwprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18686,13 +18686,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vwprintf function is equivalent to wprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
@@ -18700,7 +18700,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.10 The vwscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18708,13 +18708,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              va_list arg);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The vwscanf function is equivalent to wscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.291)
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The vwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the vwscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -18723,35 +18723,35 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.11 The wprintf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The wprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf with the argument stdout
  interposed before the arguments to wprintf.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The wprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.2.12 The wscanf function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The wscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf with the argument stdin interposed
  before the arguments to wscanf.
 
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The wscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion. Otherwise, the wscanf function returns the number of input
  items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an
@@ -18763,20 +18763,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.1 The fgetwc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
  next wide character is present, the fgetwc function obtains that wide character as a
  wchar_t converted to a wint_t and advances the associated file position indicator for
  the stream (if defined).
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
  of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetwc function returns WEOF. Otherwise,
  the fgetwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by
@@ -18792,7 +18792,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.2 The fgetws function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18800,7 +18800,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               int n, FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fgetws function reads at most one less than the number of wide characters
  specified by n from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No
  
@@ -18810,7 +18810,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  after end-of-file. A null wide character is written immediately after the last wide
  character read into the array.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fgetws function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
  characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
  null pointer is returned. If a read or encoding error occurs during the operation, the array
@@ -18819,21 +18819,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.3 The fputwc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fputwc function writes the wide character specified by c to the output stream
  pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the associated file position indicator
  for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If the file cannot
  support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened with append mode, the
  character is appended to the output stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fputwc function returns the wide character written. If a write error occurs, the
  error indicator for the stream is set and fputwc returns WEOF. If an encoding error
  occurs, the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and fputwc returns WEOF.
@@ -18841,7 +18841,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.4 The fputws function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -18849,11 +18849,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fputws function writes the wide string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
  stream. The terminating null wide character is not written.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fputws function returns EOF if a write or encoding error occurs; otherwise, it
  returns a nonnegative value.
 
@@ -18861,20 +18861,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.5 The fwide function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The fwide function determines the orientation of the stream pointed to by stream. If
  mode is greater than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream wide oriented. If
  mode is less than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream byte oriented.293)
  Otherwise, mode is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The fwide function returns a value greater than zero if, after the call, the stream has
  wide orientation, a value less than zero if the stream has byte orientation, or zero if the
  stream has no orientation.
@@ -18886,26 +18886,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.6 The getwc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The getwc function is equivalent to fgetwc, except that if it is implemented as a
  macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an
  expression with side effects.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The getwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by
  stream, or WEOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.7 The getwchar function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                  #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t getwchar(void);
@@ -18916,57 +18916,57 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
 
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The getwchar function is equivalent to getwc with the argument stdin.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The getwchar function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to
  by stdin, or WEOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.8 The putwc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The putwc function is equivalent to fputwc, except that if it is implemented as a
  macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an
  expression with side effects.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The putwc function returns the wide character written, or WEOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.9 The putwchar function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The putwchar function is equivalent to putwc with the second argument stdout.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        3
  The putwchar function returns the character written, or WEOF.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.3.10 The ungetwc function
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The ungetwc function pushes the wide character specified by c back onto the input
  stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back wide characters will be returned by
  subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful
@@ -18974,16 +18974,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning function
  (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back wide characters for the
  stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.
-
        
+
        3
  One wide character of pushback is guaranteed, even if the call to the ungetwc function
  follows just after a call to a formatted wide character input function fwscanf,
  vfwscanf, vwscanf, or wscanf. If the ungetwc function is called too many times
  on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that
  stream, the operation may fail.
-
        
+
        4
  If the value of c equals that of the macro WEOF, the operation fails and the input stream is
  unchanged.
-
        
+
        5
  A successful call to the ungetwc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream.
  The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all
  pushed-back wide characters is the same as it was before the wide characters were pushed
@@ -18991,18 +18991,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  call to the ungetwc function is unspecified until all pushed-back wide characters are
  read or discarded.
 
        Returns
-
        
+
        6
  The ungetwc function returns the wide character pushed back, or WEOF if the operation
  fails.
 
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.4 General wide string utilities
        
-
        
+
        1
  The header <wchar.h> declares a number of functions useful for wide string
  manipulation. Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in
  all cases a wchar_t * argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) element of the
  array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.
-
        
+
        2
  Where an argument declared as size_t n determines the length of the array for a
  function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated
  otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments
@@ -19018,7 +19018,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
        Contents
 
        7.24.4.1.1 The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions
        
 
        Synopsis
-
        
+
        1
 
                 #include <wchar.h>
         double wcstod(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
@@ -19029,7 +19029,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
 
        
 
        Description
-
        
+
        2
  The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions convert the initial portion of the wide
  string pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
  respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly
@@ -19038,7 +19038,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  infinity or NaN; and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide characters,
  including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then, they attempt
  to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.
-
        
+
        3
  The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of
  the following:
 
          
@@ -19064,7 +19064,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
  The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is not of the
  expected form.
-
          
+
          4
  If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of
  wide characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point wide character
  (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of
@@ -19081,18 +19081,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  the meaning of the n-wchar sequences is implementation-defined.295) A pointer to the
  final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is
  not a null pointer.
-
          
+
          5
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the
  value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.
-
          
+
          6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
          
+
          7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          8
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
  the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
  appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value,
@@ -19102,7 +19102,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
  
 
-
          
+
          9
  If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG (defined in
  <float.h>) significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject
  sequence D has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG significant digits,
@@ -19113,7 +19113,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
  rounding direction.296)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          10
  The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
  zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, plus or
  minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the return
@@ -19143,7 +19143,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.1.2 The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         long int wcstol(
@@ -19164,7 +19164,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              int base);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions convert the initial
  portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int,
  unsigned long int, and unsigned long long int representation,
@@ -19174,7 +19174,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  by the value of base, and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide
  characters, including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then,
  they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an integer, and return the result.
-
          
+
          3
  If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an
  integer constant as described for the corresponding single-byte characters in 6.4.4.1,
  optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix. If the
@@ -19186,13 +19186,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  value of base is 16, the wide characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence
  of letters and digits, following the sign if present.
 
-
          
+
          4
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input wide
  string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form.
  The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is empty or
  consists entirely of white space, or if the first non-white-space wide character is other
  than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
-
          
+
          5
  If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence
  of wide characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant
  according to the rules of 6.4.4.1. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the
@@ -19201,15 +19201,15 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  resulting from the conversion is negated (in the return type). A pointer to the final wide
  string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null
  pointer.
-
          
+
          6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
          
+
          7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          8
  The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions return the converted
  value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
  is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN,
@@ -19222,25 +19222,25 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.2.1 The wcscpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
              const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcscpy function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating
  null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcscpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.2.2 The wcsncpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <wchar.h>
           wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -19248,16 +19248,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsncpy function copies not more than n wide characters (those that follow a null
  wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
  s1.297)
-
          
+
          3
  If the array pointed to by s2 is a wide string that is shorter than n wide characters, null
  wide characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n wide
  characters in all have been written.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The wcsncpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -19268,7 +19268,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.2.3 The wmemcpy function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <wchar.h>
           wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -19276,11 +19276,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wmemcpy function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to the
  object pointed to by s1.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wmemcpy function returns the value of s1.
  
  
@@ -19291,21 +19291,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.2.4 The wmemmove function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wmemmove function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to
  the object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n wide characters from the
  object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n wide characters that
  does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n wide characters from
  the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wmemmove function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Contents
@@ -19314,25 +19314,25 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.3.1 The wcscat function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1,
              const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcscat function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial
  wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcscat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.3.2 The wcsncat function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -19340,7 +19340,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsncat function appends not more than n wide characters (a null wide character
  and those that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
 
@@ -19348,7 +19348,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  wide character at the end of s1. A terminating null wide character is always appended to
  the result.298)
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsncat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
          Footnotes
@@ -19358,7 +19358,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4 Wide string comparison functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the functions described in this subclause order two
  wide characters the same way as two integers of the underlying integer type designated
  by wchar_t.
@@ -19366,17 +19366,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4.1 The wcscmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wchar.h>
          int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcscmp function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
  pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcscmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
  wide string pointed to by s2.
@@ -19384,18 +19384,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4.2 The wcscoll function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wchar.h>
          int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcscoll function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
  pointed to by s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the
  current locale.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcscoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
  
@@ -19407,19 +19407,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4.3 The wcsncmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsncmp function compares not more than n wide characters (those that follow a
  null wide character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array
  pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
  to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
@@ -19427,7 +19427,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4.4 The wcsxfrm function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -19435,7 +19435,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsxfrm function transforms the wide string pointed to by s2 and places the
  resulting wide string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if
  the wcscmp function is applied to two transformed wide strings, it returns a value greater
@@ -19444,11 +19444,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  into the resulting array pointed to by s1, including the terminating null wide character. If
  n is zero, s1 is permitted to be a null pointer.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsxfrm function returns the length of the transformed wide string (not including
  the terminating null wide character). If the value returned is n or greater, the contents of
  the array pointed to by s1 are indeterminate.
-
          
+
          4
  EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the length of the array needed to hold the
  transformation of the wide string pointed to by s:
 
@@ -19460,18 +19460,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.4.5 The wmemcmp function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wmemcmp function compares the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by
  s1 to the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wmemcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
  pointed to by s2.
@@ -19482,105 +19482,105 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.1 The wcschr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcschr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcschr function locates the first occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by s.
  The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcschr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
  the wide character does not occur in the wide string.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.2 The wcscspn function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcscspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
  string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters not from the wide
  string pointed to by s2.
 
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcscspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.3 The wcspbrk function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcspbrk function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
  any wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcspbrk function returns a pointer to the wide character in s1, or a null pointer if
  no wide character from s2 occurs in s1.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.4 The wcsrchr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsrchr function locates the last occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by
  s. The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsrchr function returns a pointer to the wide character, or a null pointer if c does
  not occur in the wide string.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.5 The wcsspn function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
  string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters from the wide string
  pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.6 The wcsstr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcsstr(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsstr function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
  the sequence of wide characters (excluding the terminating null wide character) in the
  wide string pointed to by s2.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcsstr function returns a pointer to the located wide string, or a null pointer if the
  wide string is not found. If s2 points to a wide string with zero length, the function
  returns s1.
@@ -19588,7 +19588,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.7 The wcstok function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -19596,41 +19596,41 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  A sequence of calls to the wcstok function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1 into
  a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide string
  pointed to by s2. The third argument points to a caller-provided wchar_t pointer into
  which the wcstok function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the
  same wide string.
-
          
+
          3
  The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and stores an initial value in the
  object pointed to by ptr. Subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument and
  the object pointed to by ptr is required to have the value stored by the previous call in
  the sequence, which is then updated. The separator wide string pointed to by s2 may be
  different from call to call.
-
          
+
          4
  The first call in the sequence searches the wide string pointed to by s1 for the first wide
  character that is not contained in the current separator wide string pointed to by s2. If no
  such wide character is found, then there are no tokens in the wide string pointed to by s1
  and the wcstok function returns a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is
  the start of the first token.
-
          
+
          5
  The wcstok function then searches from there for a wide character that is contained in
  the current separator wide string. If no such wide character is found, the current token
 
  extends to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the
  same wide string for a token return a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is
  overwritten by a null wide character, which terminates the current token.
-
          
+
          6
  In all cases, the wcstok function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed to
  by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer
  value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide
  character (if any).
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          7
  The wcstok function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null
  pointer if there is no token.
-
          
+
          8
  EXAMPLE
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
@@ -19648,18 +19648,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.5.8 The wmemchr function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wmemchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c,
              size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wmemchr function locates the first occurrence of c in the initial n wide characters of
  the object pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wmemchr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
  the wide character does not occur in the object.
 
@@ -19670,33 +19670,33 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.6.1 The wcslen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcslen function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wcslen function returns the number of wide characters that precede the terminating
  null wide character.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.4.6.2 The wmemset function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wmemset function copies the value of c into each of the first n wide characters of
  the object pointed to by s.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wmemset function returns the value of s.
 
 
          Contents
@@ -19705,7 +19705,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.5.1 The wcsftime function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <time.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -19715,7 +19715,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsftime function is equivalent to the strftime function, except that:
 
            
 
          •   The argument s points to the initial element of an array of wide characters into which
@@ -19727,7 +19727,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          •   The return value indicates the number of wide characters.
 
          
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  If the total number of resulting wide characters including the terminating null wide
  character is not more than maxsize, the wcsftime function returns the number of
  wide characters placed into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null
@@ -19736,16 +19736,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6 Extended multibyte/wide character conversion utilities
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <wchar.h> declares an extended set of functions useful for conversion
  between multibyte characters and wide characters.
-
          
+
          2
  Most of the following functions -- those that are listed as ''restartable'', 7.24.6.3 and
  7.24.6.4 -- take as a last argument a pointer to an object of type mbstate_t that is used
  to describe the current conversion state from a particular multibyte character sequence to
  a wide character sequence (or the reverse) under the rules of a particular setting for the
  LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
-
          
+
          3
  The initial conversion state corresponds, for a conversion in either direction, to the
  beginning of a new multibyte character in the initial shift state. A zero-valued
  mbstate_t object is (at least) one way to describe an initial conversion state. A zero-
@@ -19755,7 +19755,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  different multibyte character sequence, or in the other conversion direction, or with a
  different LC_CTYPE category setting than on earlier function calls, the behavior is
  undefined.299)
-
          
+
          4
  On entry, each function takes the described conversion state (either internal or pointed to
  by an argument) as current. The conversion state described by the pointed-to object is
  altered as needed to track the shift state, and the position within a multibyte character, for
@@ -19778,18 +19778,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.1.1 The btowc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t btowc(int c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The btowc function determines whether c constitutes a valid single-byte character in the
  initial shift state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The btowc function returns WEOF if c has the value EOF or if (unsigned char)c
  does not constitute a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it
  returns the wide character representation of that character.
@@ -19797,19 +19797,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.1.2 The wctob function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         int wctob(wint_t c);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wctob function determines whether c corresponds to a member of the extended
  character set whose multibyte character representation is a single byte when in the initial
  shift state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The wctob function returns EOF if c does not correspond to a multibyte character with
  length one in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it returns the single-byte representation of
  that character as an unsigned char converted to an int.
@@ -19820,24 +19820,24 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.2.1 The mbsinit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If ps is not a null pointer, the mbsinit function determines whether the pointed-to
  mbstate_t object describes an initial conversion state.
 
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The mbsinit function returns nonzero if ps is a null pointer or if the pointed-to object
  describes an initial conversion state; otherwise, it returns zero.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.3 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte character functions of 7.20.7
  (mblen, mbtowc, and wctomb) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type
  pointer to mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current
@@ -19845,14 +19845,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  each function uses its own internal mbstate_t object instead, which is initialized at
  program startup to the initial conversion state. The implementation behaves as if no
  library function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.
-
          
+
          2
  Also unlike their corresponding functions, the return value does not represent whether the
  encoding is state-dependent.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.3.1 The mbrlen function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wchar.h>
         size_t mbrlen(const char * restrict s,
@@ -19860,7 +19860,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
              mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The mbrlen function is equivalent to the call:
 
                   mbrtowc(NULL, s, n, ps != NULL ? ps : &internal)
@@ -19868,7 +19868,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  where internal is the mbstate_t object for the mbrlen function, except that the
  expression designated by ps is evaluated only once.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  The mbrlen function returns a value between zero and n, inclusive, (size_t)(-2),
  or (size_t)(-1).
 
           Forward references: the mbrtowc function (7.24.6.3.2).
@@ -19877,7 +19877,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.3.2 The mbrtowc function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wchar.h>
          size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc,
@@ -19886,13 +19886,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If s is a null pointer, the mbrtowc function is equivalent to the call:
 
                            mbrtowc(NULL, "", 1, ps)
 
          
  In this case, the values of the parameters pwc and n are ignored.
-
          
+
          3
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -19901,7 +19901,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The mbrtowc function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current
  conversion state):
 
          
@@ -19928,7 +19928,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.3.3 The wcrtomb function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcrtomb(char * restrict s,
@@ -19936,13 +19936,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb function is equivalent to the call
 
                            wcrtomb(buf, L'\0', ps)
 
          
  where buf is an internal buffer.
-
          
+
          3
  If s is not a null pointer, the wcrtomb function determines the number of bytes needed
  to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by wc
  (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the
@@ -19950,7 +19950,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed
  to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The wcrtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including
  any shift sequences). When wc is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs:
  the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns
@@ -19958,7 +19958,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.4 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte string functions of 7.20.8
  (mbstowcs and wcstombs) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type pointer to
  mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current conversion
@@ -19966,7 +19966,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  uses its own internal mbstate_t object instead, which is initialized at program startup
  to the initial conversion state. The implementation behaves as if no library function calls
  these functions with a null pointer for ps.
-
          
+
          2
  Also unlike their corresponding functions, the conversion source parameter, src, has a
  pointer-to-pointer type. When the function is storing the results of conversions (that is,
  when dst is not a null pointer), the pointer object pointed to by this parameter is updated
@@ -19976,7 +19976,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.4.1 The mbsrtowcs function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                     #include <wchar.h>
           size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t * restrict dst,
@@ -19985,7 +19985,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The mbsrtowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
  conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly
  pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null
@@ -19995,14 +19995,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  not form a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when len wide
  characters have been stored into the array pointed to by dst.301) Each conversion takes
  place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.
-
          
+
          3
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character) or the address
  just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
  reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state
  described is the initial conversion state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte
  character, an encoding error occurs: the mbsrtowcs function stores the value of the
  macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is
@@ -20021,7 +20021,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.24.6.4.2 The wcsrtombs function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcsrtombs(char * restrict dst,
@@ -20030,7 +20030,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wcsrtombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array
  indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that
  begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps. If dst is not a
@@ -20041,14 +20041,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  next multibyte character would exceed the limit of len total bytes to be stored into the
  array pointed to by dst. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the wcrtomb
  function.302)
-
          
+
          3
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character) or the
  address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
  reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial
  conversion state.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If conversion stops because a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a
  valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcsrtombs function stores the
  value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion
@@ -20070,9 +20070,9 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.1 Introduction
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <wctype.h> declares three data types, one macro, and many functions.303)
-
          
+
          2
  The types declared are
 
                     wint_t
@@ -20088,9 +20088,9 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          
  which is a scalar type that can hold values which represent locale-specific character
  classifications.
-
          
+
          3
  The macro defined is WEOF (described in 7.24.1).
-
          
+
          4
  The functions declared are grouped as follows:
 
            
 
          •   Functions that provide wide character classification;
@@ -20098,11 +20098,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          •   Functions that provide wide character case mapping;
 
          •   Extensible functions that provide wide character mapping.
 
          
-
          
+
          5
  For all functions described in this subclause that accept an argument of type wint_t, the
  value shall be representable as a wchar_t or shall equal the value of the macro WEOF. If
  this argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
-
          
+
          6
  The behavior of these functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current
  locale.
  
@@ -20117,10 +20117,10 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2 Wide character classification utilities
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying wide
  characters.
-
          
+
          2
  The term printing wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide
  characters, each of which occupies at least one printing position on a display device. The
  term control wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide characters
@@ -20128,10 +20128,10 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1 Wide character classification functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the
  argument wc conforms to that in the description of the function.
-
          
+
          2
  Each of the following functions returns true for each wide character that corresponds (as
  if by a call to the wctob function) to a single-byte character for which the corresponding
  character classification function from 7.4.1 returns true, except that the iswgraph and
@@ -20149,26 +20149,26 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.1 The iswalnum function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         int iswalnum(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswalnum function tests for any wide character for which iswalpha or
  iswdigit is true.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.2 The iswalpha function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         int iswalpha(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswalpha function tests for any wide character for which iswupper or
  iswlower is true, or any wide character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic
  
@@ -20184,13 +20184,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.3 The iswblank function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswblank(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswblank function tests for any wide character that is a standard blank wide
  character or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which iswspace is true
  and that is used to separate words within a line of text. The standard blank wide
@@ -20200,32 +20200,32 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.4 The iswcntrl function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswcntrl function tests for any control wide character.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.5 The iswdigit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswdigit(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a decimal-digit
  character (as defined in 5.2.1).
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.6 The iswgraph function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswgraph(wint_t wc);
@@ -20236,7 +20236,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
 
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswgraph function tests for any wide character for which iswprint is true and
  iswspace is false.306)
 
@@ -20249,13 +20249,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.7 The iswlower function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswlower(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswlower function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a lowercase
  letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
  iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
@@ -20263,25 +20263,25 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.8 The iswprint function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswprint(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswprint function tests for any printing wide character.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.9 The iswpunct function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswpunct(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswpunct function tests for any printing wide character that is one of a locale-
  specific set of punctuation wide characters for which neither iswspace nor iswalnum
  is true.306)
@@ -20289,7 +20289,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.10 The iswspace function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                    #include <wctype.h>
          int iswspace(wint_t wc);
@@ -20299,7 +20299,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  
 
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswspace function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a locale-specific
  set of white-space wide characters for which none of iswalnum, iswgraph, or
  iswpunct is true.
@@ -20307,13 +20307,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.11 The iswupper function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         int iswupper(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswupper function tests for any wide character that corresponds to an uppercase
  letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
  iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
@@ -20321,19 +20321,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.1.12 The iswxdigit function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswxdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a
  hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.1).
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.2 Extensible wide character classification functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The functions wctype and iswctype provide extensible wide character classification
  as well as testing equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the previous
  subclause (7.25.2.1).
@@ -20341,17 +20341,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.2.1 The iswctype function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The iswctype function determines whether the wide character wc has the property
  described by desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as
  during the call to wctype that returned the value desc.
-
          
+
          3
  Each of the following expressions has a truth-value equivalent to the call to the wide
  character classification function (7.25.2.1) in the comment that follows the expression:
 
@@ -20370,7 +20370,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         iswctype(wc,       wctype("xdigit"))            //   iswxdigit(wc)
 
          
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The iswctype function returns nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the wide
  character wc has the property described by desc.
 
           Forward references: the wctype function (7.25.2.2.2).
@@ -20378,20 +20378,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.2.2.2 The wctype function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         wctype_t wctype(const char *property);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wctype function constructs a value with type wctype_t that describes a class of
  wide characters identified by the string argument property.
-
          
+
          3
  The strings listed in the description of the iswctype function shall be valid in all
  locales as property arguments to the wctype function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
  category of the current locale, the wctype function returns a nonzero value that is valid
  as the second argument to the iswctype function; otherwise, it returns zero.              *
@@ -20399,7 +20399,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3 Wide character case mapping utilities
          
-
          
+
          1
  The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for mapping wide characters.
 
 
          Contents
@@ -20408,16 +20408,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3.1.1 The towlower function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The towlower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  If the argument is a wide character for which iswupper is true and there are one or
  more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
  iswlower is true, the towlower function returns one of the corresponding wide
@@ -20427,16 +20427,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3.1.2 The towupper function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The towupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          3
  If the argument is a wide character for which iswlower is true and there are one or
  more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
  iswupper is true, the towupper function returns one of the corresponding wide
@@ -20445,7 +20445,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3.2 Extensible wide character case mapping functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The functions wctrans and towctrans provide extensible wide character mapping as
  well as case mapping equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the
  previous subclause (7.25.3.1).
@@ -20454,17 +20454,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3.2.1 The towctrans function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The towctrans function maps the wide character wc using the mapping described by
  desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as during the call
  to wctrans that returned the value desc.
-
          
+
          3
  Each of the following expressions behaves the same as the call to the wide character case
  mapping function (7.25.3.1) in the comment that follows the expression:
 
          @@ -20472,27 +20472,27 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         towctrans(wc, wctrans("toupper"))                      // towupper(wc)
 
          
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  The towctrans function returns the mapped value of wc using the mapping described
  by desc.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.25.3.2.2 The wctrans function
          
 
          Synopsis
-
          
+
          1
 
                   #include <wctype.h>
         wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);
 
          
 
          Description
-
          
+
          2
  The wctrans function constructs a value with type wctrans_t that describes a
  mapping between wide characters identified by the string argument property.
-
          
+
          3
  The strings listed in the description of the towctrans function shall be valid in all
  locales as property arguments to the wctrans function.
 
          Returns
-
          
+
          4
  If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
  category of the current locale, the wctrans function returns a nonzero value that is valid
  as the second argument to the towctrans function; otherwise, it returns zero.
@@ -20500,13 +20500,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26 Future library directions
          
-
          
+
          1
  The following names are grouped under individual headers for convenience. All external
  names described below are reserved no matter what headers are included by the program.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.1 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  The function names
 
                 cerf                cexpm1              clog2
@@ -20518,43 +20518,43 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.2 Character handling <ctype.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Function names that begin with either is or to, and a lowercase letter may be added to
  the declarations in the <ctype.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.3 Errors <errno.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Macros that begin with E and a digit or E and an uppercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <errno.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.4 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Macro names beginning with PRI or SCN followed by any lowercase letter or X may be
  added to the macros defined in the <inttypes.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.5 Localization <locale.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Macros that begin with LC_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the definitions in
  the <locale.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.6 Signal handling <signal.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Macros that begin with either SIG and an uppercase letter or SIG_ and an uppercase
  letter may be added to the definitions in the <signal.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.7 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  The ability to undefine and perhaps then redefine the macros bool, true, and false is
  an obsolescent feature.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.8 Integer types <stdint.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Typedef names beginning with int or uint and ending with _t may be added to the
  types defined in the <stdint.h> header. Macro names beginning with INT or UINT
  and ending with _MAX, _MIN, or _C may be added to the macros defined in the
@@ -20563,40 +20563,40 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.9 Input/output <stdio.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in
  fprintf and fscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions.
-
          
+
          2
  The gets function is obsolescent, and is deprecated.
-
          
+
          3
  The use of ungetc on a binary stream where the file position indicator is zero prior to
  the call is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.10 General utilities <stdlib.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Function names that begin with str and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <stdlib.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.11 String handling <string.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Function names that begin with str, mem, or wcs and a lowercase letter may be added
  to the declarations in the <string.h> header.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.12 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>
          
-
          
+
          1
  Function names that begin with wcs and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <wchar.h> header.
-
          
+
          2
  Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in
  fwprintf and fwscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions.
 
 
          Contents
 
          7.26.13 Wide character classification and mapping utilities
          
  <wctype.h>
-
          
+
          1
  Function names that begin with is or to and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <wctype.h> header.
 
@@ -20607,7 +20607,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                               (informative)
                                Language syntax summary
 
          
-
          
+
          1
  NOTE     The notation is described in 6.1.
  
 
@@ -22284,7 +22284,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                      (informative)
                                    Sequence points
 
          
-
          
+
          1
  The following are the sequence points described in 5.1.2.3:
 
            
 
          •   The call to a function, after the arguments have been evaluated (6.5.2.2).
@@ -22311,10 +22311,10 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                      (normative)
                 Universal character names for identifiers
 
          
-
          
+
          1
  This clause lists the hexadecimal code values that are valid in universal character names
  in identifiers.
-
          
+
          2
  This table is reproduced unchanged from ISO/IEC TR 10176:1998, produced by ISO/IEC
  JTC 1/SC 22/WG 20, except for the omission of ranges that are part of the basic character
  sets.
@@ -22387,7 +22387,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                     (informative)
                              Implementation limits
 
          
-
          
+
          1
  The contents of the header <limits.h> are given below, in alphabetical order. The
  minimum magnitudes shown shall be replaced by implementation-defined magnitudes
  with the same sign. The values shall all be constant expressions suitable for use in #if
@@ -22413,19 +22413,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         #define     ULONG_MAX                     4294967295
         #define     ULLONG_MAX          18446744073709551615
 
        
-
        
+
        2
  The contents of the header <float.h> are given below. All integer values, except
  FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant expressions suitable for use in #if preprocessing
  directives; all floating values shall be constant expressions. The components are
  described further in 5.2.4.2.2.
-
        
+
        3
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  expressions:
 
                 #define FLT_EVAL_METHOD
         #define FLT_ROUNDS
 
        
-
        
+
        4
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions that are greater or equal in magnitude (absolute value) to those
  shown, with the same sign:
@@ -22452,7 +22452,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         #define    LDBL_MIN_10_EXP                              -37
         #define    LDBL_MIN_EXP
 
        
-
        
+
        5
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions with values that are greater than or equal to those shown:
 
        @@ -22460,7 +22460,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
         #define FLT_MAX                                      1E+37
         #define LDBL_MAX                                     1E+37
 
        
-
        
+
        6
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions with (positive) values that are less than or equal to those shown:
 
@@ -22482,7 +22482,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
        Contents
 
        F.1 Introduction
        
-
        
+
        1
  This annex specifies C language support for the IEC 60559 floating-point standard. The
  IEC 60559 floating-point standard is specifically Binary floating-point arithmetic for
  microprocessor systems, second edition (IEC 60559:1989), previously designated
@@ -22497,7 +22497,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
        Contents
 
        F.2 Types
        
-
        
+
        1
  The C floating types match the IEC 60559 formats as follows:
 
          
 
        •   The float type matches the IEC 60559 single format.
@@ -22508,7 +22508,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  Any non-IEC 60559 extended format used for the long double type shall have more
  precision than IEC 60559 double and at least the range of IEC 60559 double.308)
 
          Recommended practice
-
          
+
          2
  The long double type should match an IEC 60559 extended format.
  
  
@@ -22526,7 +22526,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          F.2.1 Infinities, signed zeros, and NaNs
          
-
          
+
          1
  This specification does not define the behavior of signaling NaNs.309) It generally uses
  the term NaN to denote quiet NaNs. The NAN and INFINITY macros and the nan
  functions in <math.h> provide designations for IEC 60559 NaNs and infinities.
@@ -22538,7 +22538,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
          Contents
 
          F.3 Operators and functions
          
-
          
+
          1
  C operators and functions provide IEC 60559 required and recommended facilities as
  listed below.
 
            
@@ -22617,7 +22617,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.4 Floating to integer conversion
            
-
            
+
            1
  If the floating value is infinite or NaN or if the integral part of the floating value exceeds
  the range of the integer type, then the ''invalid'' floating-point exception is raised and the
  resulting value is unspecified. Whether conversion of non-integer floating values whose
@@ -22634,16 +22634,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.5 Binary-decimal conversion
            
-
            
+
            1
  Conversion from the widest supported IEC 60559 format to decimal with
  DECIMAL_DIG digits and back is the identity function.311)
-
            
+
            2
  Conversions involving IEC 60559 formats follow all pertinent recommended practice. In
  particular, conversion between any supported IEC 60559 format and decimal with
  DECIMAL_DIG or fewer significant digits is correctly rounded (honoring the current
  rounding mode), which assures that conversion from the widest supported IEC 60559
  format to decimal with DECIMAL_DIG digits and back is the identity function.
-
            
+
            3
  Functions such as strtod that convert character sequences to floating types honor the
  rounding direction. Hence, if the rounding direction might be upward or downward, the
  implementation cannot convert a minus-signed sequence by negating the converted
@@ -22663,19 +22663,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.6 Contracted expressions
            
-
            
+
            1
  A contracted expression treats infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the
  rounding directions in a manner consistent with the basic arithmetic operations covered
  by IEC 60559.
 
            Recommended practice
-
            
+
            2
  A contracted expression should raise floating-point exceptions in a manner generally
  consistent with the basic arithmetic operations. A contracted expression should deliver
  the same value as its uncontracted counterpart, else should be correctly rounded (once).
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.7 Floating-point environment
            
-
            
+
            1
  The floating-point environment defined in <fenv.h> includes the IEC 60559 floating-
  point exception status flags and directed-rounding control modes. It includes also
  IEC 60559 dynamic rounding precision and trap enablement modes, if the
@@ -22687,7 +22687,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.7.1 Environment management
            
-
            
+
            1
  IEC 60559 requires that floating-point operations implicitly raise floating-point exception
  status flags, and that rounding control modes can be set explicitly to affect result values of
  floating-point operations. When the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma (defined in
@@ -22702,7 +22702,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.7.2 Translation
            
-
            
+
            1
  During translation the IEC 60559 default modes are in effect:
 
              
 
            •   The rounding direction mode is rounding to nearest.
@@ -22710,7 +22710,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
            •   Trapping or stopping (if supported) is disabled on all floating-point exceptions.
 
            
 
            Recommended practice
-
            
+
            2
  The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for each translation-time
  
  
@@ -22729,7 +22729,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
            Contents
 
            F.7.3 Execution
            
-
            
+
            1
  At program startup the floating-point environment is initialized as prescribed by
  IEC 60559:
 
              
@@ -22742,13 +22742,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.7.4 Constant expressions
              
-
              
+
              1
  An arithmetic constant expression of floating type, other than one in an initializer for an
  object that has static storage duration, is evaluated (as if) during execution; thus, it is
  affected by any operative floating-point control modes and raises floating-point
  exceptions as required by IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma
  is ''on'').315)
-
              
+
              2
  EXAMPLE
 
                         #include <fenv.h>
@@ -22762,7 +22762,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                 /* ... */
           }
 
              
-
              
+
              3
  For the static initialization, the division is done at translation time, raising no (execution-time) floating-
  point exceptions. On the other hand, for the three automatic initializations the invalid division occurs at
  
@@ -22784,13 +22784,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.7.5 Initialization
              
-
              
+
              1
  All computation for automatic initialization is done (as if) at execution time; thus, it is
  affected by any operative modes and raises floating-point exceptions as required by
  IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on''). All computation
  for initialization of objects that have static storage duration is done (as if) at translation
  time.
-
              
+
              2
  EXAMPLE
 
                         #include <fenv.h>
@@ -22806,7 +22806,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                 /* ... */
           }
 
              
-
              
+
              3
  The static initialization of v raises no (execution-time) floating-point exceptions because its computation is
  done at translation time. The automatic initialization of u and w require an execution-time conversion to
  float of the wider value 1.1e75, which raises floating-point exceptions. The automatic initializations
@@ -22833,12 +22833,12 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.7.6 Changing the environment
              
-
              
+
              1
  Operations defined in 6.5 and functions and macros defined for the standard libraries
  change floating-point status flags and control modes just as indicated by their
  specifications (including conformance to IEC 60559). They do not change flags or modes
  (so as to be detectable by the user) in any other cases.
-
              
+
              2
  If the argument to the feraiseexcept function in <fenv.h> represents IEC 60559
  valid coincident floating-point exceptions for atomic operations (namely ''overflow'' and
  ''inexact'', or ''underflow'' and ''inexact''), then ''overflow'' or ''underflow'' is raised
@@ -22846,19 +22846,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.8 Optimization
              
-
              
+
              1
  This section identifies code transformations that might subvert IEC 60559-specified
  behavior, and others that do not.
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.8.1 Global transformations
              
-
              
+
              1
  Floating-point arithmetic operations and external function calls may entail side effects
  which optimization shall honor, at least where the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is
  ''on''. The flags and modes in the floating-point environment may be regarded as global
  variables; floating-point operations (+, *, etc.) implicitly read the modes and write the
  flags.
-
              
+
              2
  Concern about side effects may inhibit code motion and removal of seemingly useless
  code. For example, in
 
              @@ -22875,7 +22875,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  body might not execute (maybe 0 >= n), x + 1 cannot be moved out of the loop. (Of
  course these optimizations are valid if the implementation can rule out the nettlesome
  cases.)
-
              
+
              3
  This specification does not require support for trap handlers that maintain information
  about the order or count of floating-point exceptions. Therefore, between function calls,
  floating-point exceptions need not be precise: the actual order and number of occurrences
@@ -22888,7 +22888,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.8.2 Expression transformations
              
-
              
+
              1
 
              
 
               x / 2 <-> x * 0.5    
              		                 Although similar transformations involving inexact
                                          constants generally do not yield numerically equivalent
@@ -22943,7 +22943,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.8.3 Relational operators
              
-
              
+
              1
 
              
 
               x != x -> false          
              		                 The statement x != x is true if x is a NaN.
 
               x == x -> true           
              		                 The statement x == x is false if x is a NaN.
@@ -22958,7 +22958,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
              
  The sense of relational operators shall be maintained. This includes handling unordered
  cases as expressed by the source code.
-
              
+
              2
  EXAMPLE
 
                         // calls g and raises ''invalid'' if a and b are unordered
@@ -23003,7 +23003,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.8.4 Constant arithmetic
              
-
              
+
              1
  The implementation shall honor floating-point exceptions raised by execution-time
  constant arithmetic wherever the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on''. (See F.7.4
  and F.7.5.) An operation on constants that raises no floating-point exception can be
@@ -23019,56 +23019,56 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.9 Mathematics <math.h>
              
-
              
+
              1
  This subclause contains specifications of <math.h> facilities that are particularly suited
  for IEC 60559 implementations.
-
              
+
              2
  The Standard C macro HUGE_VAL and its float and long double analogs,
  HUGE_VALF and HUGE_VALL, expand to expressions whose values are positive
  infinities.
-
              
+
              3
  Special cases for functions in <math.h> are covered directly or indirectly by
  IEC 60559. The functions that IEC 60559 specifies directly are identified in F.3. The
  other functions in <math.h> treat infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and
  (provided the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on'') the floating-point status flags
  in a manner consistent with the basic arithmetic operations covered by IEC 60559.
-
              
+
              4
  The expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT shall evaluate to a
  nonzero value.
-
              
+
              5
  The ''invalid'' and ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exceptions are raised as specified in
  subsequent subclauses of this annex.
-
              
+
              6
  The ''overflow'' floating-point exception is raised whenever an infinity -- or, because of
  rounding direction, a maximal-magnitude finite number -- is returned in lieu of a value
  
  
 
  whose magnitude is too large.
-
              
+
              7
  The ''underflow'' floating-point exception is raised whenever a result is tiny (essentially
  subnormal or zero) and suffers loss of accuracy.320)
-
              
+
              8
  Whether or when library functions raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception is
  unspecified, unless explicitly specified otherwise.
-
              
+
              9
  Whether or when library functions raise an undeserved ''underflow'' floating-point
  exception is unspecified.321) Otherwise, as implied by F.7.6, the <math.h> functions do
  not raise spurious floating-point exceptions (detectable by the user), other than the
  ''inexact'' floating-point exception.
-
              
+
              10
  Whether the functions honor the rounding direction mode is implementation-defined,
  unless explicitly specified otherwise.
-
              
+
              11
  Functions with a NaN argument return a NaN result and raise no floating-point exception,
  except where stated otherwise.
-
              
+
              12
  The specifications in the following subclauses append to the definitions in <math.h>.
  For families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only
  the principal function is shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol ''(+-)''
  occurs in both an argument and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.
 
              Recommended practice
-
              
+
              13
  If a function with one or more NaN arguments returns a NaN result, the result should be
  the same as one of the NaN arguments (after possible type conversion), except perhaps
  for the sign.
@@ -23086,7 +23086,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
              Contents
 
              F.9.1.1 The acos functions
              
-
              
+
              1
 
                
 
              •   acos(1) returns +0.
 
              •   acos(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for
@@ -23100,7 +23100,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                Contents
 
                F.9.1.2 The asin functions
                
-
                
+
                1
 
                  
 
                •   asin((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                •   asin(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for
@@ -23109,7 +23109,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                  Contents
 
                  F.9.1.3 The atan functions
                  
-
                  
+
                  1
 
                    
 
                  •   atan((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                  •   atan((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)pi /2.
@@ -23117,7 +23117,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                    Contents
 
                    F.9.1.4 The atan2 functions
                    
-
                    
+
                    1
 
                      
 
                    •   atan2((+-)0, -0) returns (+-)pi .322)
 
                    •   atan2((+-)0, +0) returns (+-)0.
@@ -23139,7 +23139,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                      Contents
 
                      F.9.1.5 The cos functions
                      
-
                      
+
                      1
 
                        
 
                      •   cos((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                      •   cos((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -23147,7 +23147,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                        Contents
 
                        F.9.1.6 The sin functions
                        
-
                        
+
                        1
 
                          
 
                        •   sin((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                        •   sin((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -23160,7 +23160,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                          Contents
 
                          F.9.1.7 The tan functions
                          
-
                          
+
                          1
 
                            
 
                          •   tan((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                          •   tan((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -23171,7 +23171,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                            Contents
 
                            F.9.2.1 The acosh functions
                            
-
                            
+
                            1
 
                              
 
                            •   acosh(1) returns +0.
 
                            •   acosh(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x < 1.
@@ -23180,7 +23180,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                              Contents
 
                              F.9.2.2 The asinh functions
                              
-
                              
+
                              1
 
                                
 
                              •   asinh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                              •   asinh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -23188,7 +23188,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                Contents
 
                                F.9.2.3 The atanh functions
                                
-
                                
+
                                1
 
                                  
 
                                •   atanh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                •   atanh((+-)1) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
@@ -23198,7 +23198,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                  Contents
 
                                  F.9.2.4 The cosh functions
                                  
-
                                  
+
                                  1
 
                                    
 
                                  •   cosh((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                  •   cosh((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
@@ -23206,7 +23206,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                    Contents
 
                                    F.9.2.5 The sinh functions
                                    
-
                                    
+
                                    1
 
                                      
 
                                    •   sinh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                    •   sinh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -23214,7 +23214,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                      Contents
 
                                      F.9.2.6 The tanh functions
                                      
-
                                      
+
                                      1
 
                                        
 
                                      •   tanh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                      •   tanh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)1.
@@ -23226,7 +23226,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                        Contents
 
                                        F.9.3.1 The exp functions
                                        
-
                                        
+
                                        1
 
                                          
 
                                        •   exp((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                        •   exp(-(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -23235,7 +23235,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                          Contents
 
                                          F.9.3.2 The exp2 functions
                                          
-
                                          
+
                                          1
 
                                            
 
                                          •   exp2((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                          •   exp2(-(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -23244,7 +23244,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                            Contents
 
                                            F.9.3.3 The expm1 functions
                                            
-
                                            
+
                                            1
 
                                              
 
                                            •   expm1((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                            •   expm1(-(inf)) returns -1.
@@ -23253,7 +23253,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              F.9.3.4 The frexp functions
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                
 
                                              •   frexp((+-)0, exp) returns (+-)0, and stores 0 in the object pointed to by exp.
 
                                              •   frexp((+-)(inf), exp) returns (+-)(inf), and stores an unspecified value in the object
@@ -23261,9 +23261,9 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                              •   frexp(NaN, exp) stores an unspecified value in the object pointed to by exp
  (and returns a NaN).
 
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  frexp raises no floating-point exceptions.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  On a binary system, the body of the frexp function might be
 
                                                       {
@@ -23274,19 +23274,19 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              F.9.3.5 The ilogb functions
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  If the correct result is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is
  unspecified and the ''invalid'' floating-point exception is raised.
 
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              F.9.3.6 The ldexp functions
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  On a binary system, ldexp(x, exp) is equivalent to scalbn(x, exp).
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              F.9.3.7 The log functions
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                
 
                                              •   log((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                              •   log(1) returns +0.
@@ -23296,7 +23296,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                Contents
 
                                                F.9.3.8 The log10 functions
                                                
-
                                                
+
                                                1
 
                                                  
 
                                                •   log10((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                •   log10(1) returns +0.
@@ -23306,7 +23306,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                  Contents
 
                                                  F.9.3.9 The log1p functions
                                                  
-
                                                  
+
                                                  1
 
                                                    
 
                                                  •   log1p((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                  •   log1p(-1) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
@@ -23317,7 +23317,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9.3.10 The log2 functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   log2((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                    •   log2(1) returns +0.
@@ -23327,7 +23327,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      F.9.3.11 The logb functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   logb((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                      •   logb((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
@@ -23336,14 +23336,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.9.3.12 The modf functions
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
 
                                                          
 
                                                        •   modf((+-)x, iptr) returns a result with the same sign as x.
 
                                                        •   modf((+-)(inf), iptr) returns (+-)0 and stores (+-)(inf) in the object pointed to by iptr.
 
                                                        •   modf(NaN, iptr) stores a NaN in the object pointed to by iptr (and returns a
  NaN).
 
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  modf behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                #include <math.h>
@@ -23363,7 +23363,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.9.3.13 The scalbn and scalbln functions
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
 
                                                          
 
                                                        •   scalbn((+-)0, n) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                        •   scalbn(x, 0) returns x.
@@ -23375,7 +23375,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                          Contents
 
                                                          F.9.4.1 The cbrt functions
                                                          
-
                                                          
+
                                                          1
 
                                                            
 
                                                          •   cbrt((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                          •   cbrt((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -23383,7 +23383,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                            Contents
 
                                                            F.9.4.2 The fabs functions
                                                            
-
                                                            
+
                                                            1
 
                                                              
 
                                                            •   fabs((+-)0) returns +0.
 
                                                            •   fabs((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
@@ -23392,7 +23392,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              F.9.4.3 The hypot functions
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                
 
                                                              •   hypot(x, y), hypot(y, x), and hypot(x, -y) are equivalent.
 
                                                              •   hypot(x, (+-)0) is equivalent to fabs(x).
@@ -23401,7 +23401,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                F.9.4.4 The pow functions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                •   pow((+-)0, y) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception
  for y an odd integer < 0.
@@ -23429,7 +23429,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  F.9.4.5 The sqrt functions
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  sqrt is fully specified as a basic arithmetic operation in IEC 60559.
 
 
                                                                  Contents
@@ -23437,7 +23437,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  F.9.5.1 The erf functions
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                    
 
                                                                  •   erf((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                  •   erf((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)1.
@@ -23445,7 +23445,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                    F.9.5.2 The erfc functions
                                                                    
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    1
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                    •   erfc(-(inf)) returns 2.
 
                                                                    •   erfc(+(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -23453,7 +23453,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      F.9.5.3 The lgamma functions
                                                                      
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   lgamma(1) returns +0.
 
                                                                      •   lgamma(2) returns +0.
@@ -23465,7 +23465,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        F.9.5.4 The tgamma functions
                                                                        
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                        •   tgamma((+-)0) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                        •   tgamma(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x a
@@ -23479,12 +23479,12 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.1 The ceil functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   ceil((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                          •   ceil((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The double version of ceil behaves as though implemented by
 
 
                                                                          @@ -23504,17 +23504,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.2 The floor functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   floor((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                          •   floor((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  See the sample implementation for ceil in F.9.6.1.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.3 The nearbyint functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The nearbyint functions use IEC 60559 rounding according to the current rounding
  direction. They do not raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in
  value from the argument.
@@ -23525,13 +23525,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.4 The rint functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions only in that they do raise the
  ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in value from the argument.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.5 The lrint and llrint functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The lrint and llrint functions provide floating-to-integer conversion as prescribed
  by IEC 60559. They round according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded
  value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and the
@@ -23542,12 +23542,12 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.6 The round functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   round((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                          •   round((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The double version of round behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                                   #include <math.h>
@@ -23572,7 +23572,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.7 The lround and llround functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The lround and llround functions differ from the lrint and llrint functions
  with the default rounding direction just in that the lround and llround functions
  round halfway cases away from zero and need not raise the ''inexact'' floating-point
@@ -23580,7 +23580,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.9.6.8 The trunc functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The trunc functions use IEC 60559 rounding toward zero (regardless of the current
  rounding direction).
 
                                                                            
@@ -23594,14 +23594,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.7.1 The fmod functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
 
                                                                              
 
                                                                            •   fmod((+-)0, y) returns (+-)0 for y not zero.
 
                                                                            •   fmod(x, y) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x
  infinite or y zero.
 
                                                                            •   fmod(x, (+-)(inf)) returns x for x not infinite.
 
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  The double version of fmod behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                                     #include <math.h>
@@ -23618,13 +23618,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.7.2 The remainder functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  The remainder functions are fully specified as a basic arithmetic operation in
  IEC 60559.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.7.3 The remquo functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  The remquo functions follow the specifications for the remainder functions. They
  have no further specifications special to IEC 60559 implementations.
 
@@ -23633,18 +23633,18 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.8.1 The copysign functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  copysign is specified in the Appendix to IEC 60559.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.8.2 The nan functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  All IEC 60559 implementations support quiet NaNs, in all floating formats.
 
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.9.8.3 The nextafter functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
 
                                                                              
 
                                                                            •   nextafter(x, y) raises the ''overflow'' and ''inexact'' floating-point exceptions
  for x finite and the function value infinite.
@@ -23654,7 +23654,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.9.8.4 The nexttoward functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
  No additional requirements beyond those on nextafter.
 
 
                                                                              Contents
@@ -23662,15 +23662,15 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.9.9.1 The fdim functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
  No additional requirements.
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.9.9.2 The fmax functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
  If just one argument is a NaN, the fmax functions return the other argument (if both
  arguments are NaNs, the functions return a NaN).
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              2
  The body of the fmax function might be323)
 
                                                                                       { return (isgreaterequal(x, y) ||
@@ -23684,7 +23684,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.9.9.3 The fmin functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
  The fmin functions are analogous to the fmax functions (see F.9.9.2).
 
 
                                                                              Contents
@@ -23692,7 +23692,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.9.10.1 The fma functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
 
                                                                                
 
                                                                              •   fma(x, y, z) computes xy + z, correctly rounded once.
 
                                                                              •   fma(x, y, z) returns a NaN and optionally raises the ''invalid'' floating-point
@@ -23717,7 +23717,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.1 Introduction
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  This annex supplements annex F to specify complex arithmetic for compatibility with
  IEC 60559 real floating-point arithmetic. Although these specifications have been
  carefully designed, there is little existing practice to validate the design decisions.
@@ -23727,27 +23727,27 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.2 Types
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  There is a new keyword _Imaginary, which is used to specify imaginary types. It is
  used as a type specifier within declaration specifiers in the same way as _Complex is
  (thus, _Imaginary float is a valid type name).
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  There are three imaginary types, designated as float _Imaginary, double
  _Imaginary, and long double _Imaginary. The imaginary types (along with
  the real floating and complex types) are floating types.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                3
  For imaginary types, the corresponding real type is given by deleting the keyword
  _Imaginary from the type name.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                4
  Each imaginary type has the same representation and alignment requirements as the
  corresponding real type. The value of an object of imaginary type is the value of the real
  representation times the imaginary unit.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                5
  The imaginary type domain comprises the imaginary types.
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.3 Conventions
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  A complex or imaginary value with at least one infinite part is regarded as an infinity
  (even if its other part is a NaN). A complex or imaginary value is a finite number if each
  of its parts is a finite number (neither infinite nor NaN). A complex or imaginary value is
@@ -23759,16 +23759,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.4.1 Imaginary types
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  Conversions among imaginary types follow rules analogous to those for real floating
  types.
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.4.2 Real and imaginary
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  When a value of imaginary type is converted to a real type other than _Bool,324) the
  result is a positive zero.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  When a value of real type is converted to an imaginary type, the result is a positive
  imaginary zero.
 
@@ -23778,21 +23778,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.4.3 Imaginary and complex
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  When a value of imaginary type is converted to a complex type, the real part of the
  complex result value is a positive zero and the imaginary part of the complex result value
  is determined by the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  When a value of complex type is converted to an imaginary type, the real part of the
  complex value is discarded and the value of the imaginary part is converted according to
  the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.5 Binary operators
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  The following subclauses supplement 6.5 in order to specify the type of the result for an
  operation with an imaginary operand.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  For most operand types, the value of the result of a binary operator with an imaginary or
  complex operand is completely determined, with reference to real arithmetic, by the usual
  mathematical formula. For some operand types, the usual mathematical formula is
@@ -23808,11 +23808,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.5.1 Multiplicative operators
                                                                                
 
                                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  If one operand has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, then the result has
  imaginary type. If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has real type. (If
  either operand has complex type, then the result has complex type.)
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  If the operands are not both complex, then the result and floating-point exception
  behavior of the * operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                @@ -23830,7 +23830,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                                                                         x + iy       (xu) + i(yu)        (-yv) + i(xv)
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                3
  If the second operand is not complex, then the result and floating-point exception
  behavior of the / operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                @@ -23848,7 +23848,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                                                                         x + iy       (x/u) + i(y/u)        (y/v) + i(-x/v)
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                4
  The * and / operators satisfy the following infinity properties for all real, imaginary, and
  complex operands:325)
 
                                                                                  
@@ -23866,11 +23866,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                                                                •   if the first operand is a nonzero finite number or an infinity and the second operand is
  a zero, then the result of the / operator is an infinity.
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                5
  If both operands of the * operator are complex or if the second operand of the / operator
  is complex, the operator raises floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation
  of the parts of the result, and may raise spurious floating-point exceptions.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                6
  EXAMPLE 1 Multiplication of double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows. Note
  that the imaginary unit I has imaginary type (see G.6).
 
@@ -23923,11 +23923,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                   return x + I * y;
           }
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                7
  This implementation achieves the required treatment of infinities at the cost of only one isnan test in
  ordinary (finite) cases. It is less than ideal in that undue overflow and underflow may occur.
  
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                8
  EXAMPLE 2      Division of two double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows.
 
 
                                                                                @@ -23975,7 +23975,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                   return x + I * y;
          }
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                9
  Scaling the denominator alleviates the main overflow and underflow problem, which is more serious than
  for multiplication. In the spirit of the multiplication example above, this code does not defend against
  overflow and underflow in the calculation of the numerator. Scaling with the scalbn function, instead of
@@ -23990,11 +23990,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.5.2 Additive operators
                                                                                
 
                                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has imaginary type. (If one operand
  has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, or if either operand has complex
  type, then the result has complex type.)
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  In all cases the result and floating-point exception behavior of a + or - operator is defined
  by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                @@ -24015,7 +24015,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.6 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
  The macros
 
                                                                                          imaginary
@@ -24032,33 +24032,33 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  is defined to be _Imaginary_I (not _Complex_I as stated in 7.3). Notwithstanding
  the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and then perhaps redefine the macro
  imaginary.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                2
  This subclause contains specifications for the <complex.h> functions that are
  particularly suited to IEC 60559 implementations. For families of functions, the
  specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the principal function is
 
  shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol ''(+-)'' occurs in both an argument
  and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                3
  The functions are continuous onto both sides of their branch cuts, taking into account the
  sign of zero. For example, csqrt(-2 (+-) i0) = (+-)i(sqrt)(2).
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                4
  Since complex and imaginary values are composed of real values, each function may be
  regarded as computing real values from real values. Except as noted, the functions treat
  real infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the floating-point exception flags in a
  manner consistent with the specifications for real functions in F.9.326)
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                5
  The functions cimag, conj, cproj, and creal are fully specified for all
  implementations, including IEC 60559 ones, in 7.3.9. These functions raise no floating-
  point exceptions.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                6
  Each of the functions cabs and carg is specified by a formula in terms of a real
  function (whose special cases are covered in annex F):
 
                                                                                          cabs(x + iy) = hypot(x, y)
          carg(x + iy) = atan2(y, x)
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                7
  Each of the functions casin, catan, ccos, csin, and ctan is specified implicitly by
  a formula in terms of other complex functions (whose special cases are specified below):
 
                                                                                @@ -24068,7 +24068,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
          csin(z)         =   -i csinh(iz)
          ctan(z)         =   -i ctanh(iz)
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                8
  For the other functions, the following subclauses specify behavior for special cases,
  including treatment of the ''invalid'' and ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exceptions. For
  families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the
@@ -24076,7 +24076,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  specifications for the upper half-plane imply the specifications for the lower half-plane; if
  the function f is also either even, f (-z) = f (z), or odd, f (-z) = - f (z), then the
  specifications for the first quadrant imply the specifications for the other three quadrants.
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                9
  In the following subclauses, cis(y) is defined as cos(y) + i sin(y).
  
  
@@ -24094,7 +24094,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                G.6.1.1 The cacos functions
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
 
                                                                                  
 
                                                                                •   cacos(conj(z)) = conj(cacos(z)).
 
                                                                                •   cacos((+-)0 + i0) returns pi /2 - i0.
@@ -24119,7 +24119,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                  G.6.2.1 The cacosh functions
                                                                                  
-
                                                                                  
+
                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                    
 
                                                                                  •   cacosh(conj(z)) = conj(cacosh(z)).
 
                                                                                  •   cacosh((+-)0 + i0) returns +0 + ipi /2.
@@ -24140,7 +24140,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                    G.6.2.2 The casinh functions
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                      
 
                                                                                    •   casinh(conj(z)) = conj(casinh(z)) and casinh is odd.
 
                                                                                    •   casinh(+0 + i0) returns 0 + i0.
@@ -24160,7 +24160,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                      G.6.2.3 The catanh functions
                                                                                      
-
                                                                                      
+
                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                        
 
                                                                                      •   catanh(conj(z)) = conj(catanh(z)) and catanh is odd.
 
                                                                                      •   catanh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -24183,7 +24183,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                        G.6.2.4 The ccosh functions
                                                                                        
-
                                                                                        
+
                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                          
 
                                                                                        •   ccosh(conj(z)) = conj(ccosh(z)) and ccosh is even.
 
                                                                                        •   ccosh(+0 + i0) returns 1 + i0.
@@ -24209,7 +24209,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                          G.6.2.5 The csinh functions
                                                                                          
-
                                                                                          
+
                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                            
 
                                                                                          •   csinh(conj(z)) = conj(csinh(z)) and csinh is odd.
 
                                                                                          •   csinh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -24236,7 +24236,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                            G.6.2.6 The ctanh functions
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                              
 
                                                                                            •   ctanh(conj(z)) = conj(ctanh(z))and ctanh is odd.
 
                                                                                            •   ctanh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -24261,7 +24261,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                              G.6.3.1 The cexp functions
                                                                                              
-
                                                                                              
+
                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                
 
                                                                                              •   cexp(conj(z)) = conj(cexp(z)).
 
                                                                                              •   cexp((+-)0 + i0) returns 1 + i0.
@@ -24288,7 +24288,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                G.6.3.2 The clog functions
                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                •   clog(conj(z)) = conj(clog(z)).
 
                                                                                                •   clog(-0 + i0) returns -(inf) + ipi and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point
@@ -24315,7 +24315,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                  G.6.4.1 The cpow functions
                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                  1
  The cpow functions raise floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation of
  the parts of the result, and may raise spurious exceptions.327)
 
@@ -24326,7 +24326,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                  G.6.4.2 The csqrt functions
                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                  •   csqrt(conj(z)) = conj(csqrt(z)).
 
                                                                                                  •   csqrt((+-)0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -24350,14 +24350,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    G.7 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  Type-generic macros that accept complex arguments also accept imaginary arguments. If
  an argument is imaginary, the macro expands to an expression whose type is real,
  imaginary, or complex, as appropriate for the particular function: if the argument is
  imaginary, then the types of cos, cosh, fabs, carg, cimag, and creal are real; the
  types of sin, tan, sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, and atanh are imaginary; and
  the types of the others are complex.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  Given an imaginary argument, each of the type-generic macros cos, sin, tan, cosh,
  sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, atanh is specified by a formula in terms of real
  functions:
@@ -24384,27 +24384,27 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.1 Introduction
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  This annex documents the extent to which the C language supports the ISO/IEC 10967-1
  standard for language-independent arithmetic (LIA-1). LIA-1 is more general than
  IEC 60559 (annex F) in that it covers integer and diverse floating-point arithmetics.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2 Types
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The relevant C arithmetic types meet the requirements of LIA-1 types if an
  implementation adds notification of exceptional arithmetic operations and meets the 1
  unit in the last place (ULP) accuracy requirement (LIA-1 subclause 5.2.8).
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.1 Boolean type
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The LIA-1 data type Boolean is implemented by the C data type bool with values of
  true and false, all from <stdbool.h>.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.2 Integer types
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The signed C integer types int, long int, long long int, and the corresponding
  unsigned types are compatible with LIA-1. If an implementation adds support for the
  LIA-1 exceptional values ''integer_overflow'' and ''undefined'', then those types are
@@ -24412,21 +24412,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  in that overflows or out-of-bounds results silently wrap. An implementation that defines
  signed integer types as also being modulo need not detect integer overflow, in which case,
  only integer divide-by-zero need be detected.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  The parameters for the integer data types can be accessed by the following:
 
                                                                                                      maxint        INT_MAX, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MAX, UINT_MAX, ULONG_MAX,
                ULLONG_MAX
  minint        INT_MIN, LONG_MIN, LLONG_MIN
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  The parameter ''bounded'' is always true, and is not provided. The parameter ''minint''
  is always 0 for the unsigned types, and is not provided for those types.
 
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.2.1 Integer operations
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The integer operations on integer types are the following:
 
                                                                                                      addI           x + y
@@ -24447,7 +24447,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.3 Floating-point types
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The C floating-point types float, double, and long double are compatible with
  LIA-1. If an implementation adds support for the LIA-1 exceptional values
  ''underflow'', ''floating_overflow'', and ''"undefined'', then those types are conformant
@@ -24457,7 +24457,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.3.1 Floating-point parameters
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The parameters for a floating point data type can be accessed by the following:
 
                                                                                                      r              FLT_RADIX
@@ -24465,7 +24465,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  emax           FLT_MAX_EXP, DBL_MAX_EXP, LDBL_MAX_EXP
  emin           FLT_MIN_EXP, DBL_MIN_EXP, LDBL_MIN_EXP
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  The derived constants for the floating point types are accessed by the following:
 
 
                                                                                                    @@ -24477,7 +24477,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.3.2 Floating-point operations
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The floating-point operations on floating-point types are the following:
 
                                                                                                      addF          x + y
@@ -24503,10 +24503,10 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.3.3 Rounding styles
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The C Standard requires all floating types to use the same radix and rounding style, so
  that only one identifier for each is provided to map to LIA-1.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  The FLT_ROUNDS parameter can be used to indicate the LIA-1 rounding styles:
 
                                                                                                      truncate      FLT_ROUNDS == 0
@@ -24519,7 +24519,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.2.4 Type conversions
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The LIA-1 type conversions are the following type casts:
 
                                                                                                      cvtI' -> I      (int)i, (long int)i, (long long int)i,
@@ -24531,14 +24531,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  cvtI -> F       (float)i, (double)i, (long double)i
  cvtF' -> F      (float)x, (double)x, (long double)x
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  In the above conversions from floating to integer, the use of (cast)x can be replaced with
  (cast)round(x), (cast)rint(x), (cast)nearbyint(x), (cast)trunc(x),
  (cast)ceil(x), or (cast)floor(x). In addition, C's floating-point to integer
  conversion functions, lrint(), llrint(), lround(), and llround(), can be
  used. They all meet LIA-1's requirements on floating to integer rounding for in-range
  values. For out-of-range values, the conversions shall silently wrap for the modulo types.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  The fmod() function is useful for doing silent wrapping to unsigned integer types, e.g.,
  fmod( fabs(rint(x)), 65536.0 ) or (0.0 <= (y = fmod( rint(x),
  65536.0 )) ? y : 65536.0 + y) will compute an integer value in the range 0.0
@@ -24547,17 +24547,17 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  e.g., remainder( rint(x), 65536.0 ) will compute an integer value in the
  range -32767.0 to +32768.0 which is not, in general, in the range of signed short
  int.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    4
  C's conversions (casts) from floating-point to floating-point can meet LIA-1
  requirements if an implementation uses round-to-nearest (IEC 60559 default).
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    5
  C's conversions (casts) from integer to floating-point can meet LIA-1 requirements if an
  implementation uses round-to-nearest.
 
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.3 Notification
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  Notification is the process by which a user or program is informed that an exceptional
  arithmetic operation has occurred. C's operations are compatible with LIA-1 in that C
  allows an implementation to cause a notification to occur when any arithmetic operation
@@ -24565,20 +24565,20 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.3.1 Notification alternatives
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  LIA-1 requires at least the following two alternatives for handling of notifications:
  setting indicators or trap-and-terminate. LIA-1 allows a third alternative: trap-and-
  resume.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  An implementation need only support a given notification alternative for the entire
  program. An implementation may support the ability to switch between notification
  alternatives during execution, but is not required to do so. An implementation can
  provide separate selection for each kind of notification, but this is not required.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  C allows an implementation to provide notification. C's SIGFPE (for traps) and
  FE_INVALID, FE_DIVBYZERO, FE_OVERFLOW, FE_UNDERFLOW (for indicators)
  can provide LIA-1 notification.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    4
  C's signal handlers are compatible with LIA-1. Default handling of SIGFPE can
  provide trap-and-terminate behavior, except for those LIA-1 operations implemented by
  math library function calls. User-provided signal handlers for SIGFPE allow for trap-
@@ -24586,16 +24586,16 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.3.1.1 Indicators
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  C's <fenv.h> status flags are compatible with the LIA-1 indicators.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  The following mapping is for floating-point types:
 
                                                                                                      undefined                FE_INVALID, FE_DIVBYZERO
  floating_overflow         FE_OVERFLOW
  underflow                FE_UNDERFLOW
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  The floating-point indicator interrogation and manipulation operations are:
 
                                                                                                      set_indicators          feraiseexcept(i)
@@ -24604,29 +24604,29 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
  current_indicators      fetestexcept(FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
 
                                                                                                    
  where i is an expression of type int representing a subset of the LIA-1 indicators.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    4
  C allows an implementation to provide the following LIA-1 required behavior: at
  program termination if any indicator is set the implementation shall send an unambiguous
 
  and ''hard to ignore'' message (see LIA-1 subclause 6.1.2)
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    5
  LIA-1 does not make the distinction between floating-point and integer for ''undefined''.
  This documentation makes that distinction because <fenv.h> covers only the floating-
  point indicators.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    H.3.1.2 Traps
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  C is compatible with LIA-1's trap requirements for arithmetic operations, but not for
  math library functions (which are not permitted to generate any externally visible
  exceptional conditions). An implementation can provide an alternative of notification
  through termination with a ''hard-to-ignore'' message (see LIA-1 subclause 6.1.3).
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  LIA-1 does not require that traps be precise.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  C does require that SIGFPE be the signal corresponding to arithmetic exceptions, if there
  is any signal raised for them.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    4
  C supports signal handlers for SIGFPE and allows trapping of arithmetic exceptions.
  When arithmetic exceptions do trap, C's signal-handler mechanism allows trap-and-
  terminate (either default implementation behavior or user replacement for it) or trap-and-
@@ -24639,11 +24639,11 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                      (informative)
                                 Common warnings
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  An implementation may generate warnings in many situations, none of which are
  specified as part of this International Standard. The following are a few of the more
  common situations.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
 
                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                    •   A new struct or union type appears in a function prototype (6.2.1, 6.7.2.3).
 
                                                                                                    •   A block with initialization of an object that has automatic storage duration is jumped
@@ -24685,13 +24685,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
                                       (informative)
                                    Portability issues
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  This annex collects some information about portability that appears in this International
  Standard.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    J.1 Unspecified behavior
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The following are unspecified:
 
                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                    •   The manner and timing of static initialization (5.1.2).
@@ -24803,7 +24803,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                      J.2 Undefined behavior
                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                      1
  The behavior is undefined in the following circumstances:
 
                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                      •   A ''shall'' or ''shall not'' requirement that appears outside of a constraint is violated
@@ -25263,13 +25263,13 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                        J.3 Implementation-defined behavior
                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                        1
  A conforming implementation is required to document its choice of behavior in each of
  the areas listed in this subclause. The following are implementation-defined:
 
 
                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                        J.3.1 Translation
                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                        •   How a diagnostic is identified (3.10, 5.1.1.3).
 
                                                                                                        •   Whether each nonempty sequence of white-space characters other than new-line is
@@ -25278,7 +25278,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          J.3.2 Environment
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   The mapping between physical source file multibyte characters and the source
  character set in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2).
@@ -25300,7 +25300,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            J.3.3 Identifiers
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                            •   Which additional multibyte characters may appear in identifiers and their
  correspondence to universal character names (6.4.2).
@@ -25310,7 +25310,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                              J.3.4 Characters
                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                              •   The number of bits in a byte (3.6).
 
                                                                                                              •   The values of the members of the execution character set (5.2.1).
@@ -25339,7 +25339,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                J.3.5 Integers
                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                •   Any extended integer types that exist in the implementation (6.2.5).
 
                                                                                                                •   Whether signed integer types are represented using sign and magnitude, two's
@@ -25355,7 +25355,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                  J.3.6 Floating point
                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                                  •   The accuracy of the floating-point operations and of the library functions in
  <math.h> and <complex.h> that return floating-point results (5.2.4.2.2).
@@ -25383,7 +25383,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                    J.3.7 Arrays and pointers
                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                                    •   The result of converting a pointer to an integer or vice versa (6.3.2.3).
 
                                                                                                                    •   The size of the result of subtracting two pointers to elements of the same array
@@ -25393,7 +25393,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                      J.3.8 Hints
                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                                      •   The extent to which suggestions made by using the register storage-class
  specifier are effective (6.7.1).
@@ -25403,7 +25403,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                                        J.3.9 Structures, unions, enumerations, and bit-fields
                                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                        •   Whether a ''plain'' int bit-field is treated as a signed int bit-field or as an
  unsigned int bit-field (6.7.2, 6.7.2.1).
@@ -25418,14 +25418,14 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                          J.3.10 Qualifiers
                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                                          •   What constitutes an access to an object that has volatile-qualified type (6.7.3).
 
                                                                                                                          
 
 
                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                          J.3.11 Preprocessing directives
                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                                          •   The locations within #pragma directives where header name preprocessing tokens
  are recognized (6.4, 6.4.7).
@@ -25453,7 +25453,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                                            J.3.12 Library functions
                                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                                            •   Any library facilities available to a freestanding program, other than the minimal set
  required by clause 4 (5.1.2.1).
@@ -25546,7 +25546,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                                              J.3.13 Architecture
                                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                                              •   The values or expressions assigned to the macros specified in the headers
  <float.h>, <limits.h>, and <stdint.h> (5.2.4.2, 7.18.2, 7.18.3).
@@ -25558,7 +25558,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                J.4 Locale-specific behavior
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The following characteristics of a hosted environment are locale-specific and are required
  to be documented by the implementation:
 
                                                                                                                                  
@@ -25589,7 +25589,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5 Common extensions
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The following extensions are widely used in many systems, but are not portable to all
  implementations. The inclusion of any extension that may cause a strictly conforming
  program to become invalid renders an implementation nonconforming. Examples of such
@@ -25598,7 +25598,7 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.1 Environment arguments
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  In a hosted environment, the main function receives a third argument, char *envp[],
  that points to a null-terminated array of pointers to char, each of which points to a string
  that provides information about the environment for this execution of the program
@@ -25606,31 +25606,31 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.2 Specialized identifiers
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Characters other than the underscore _, letters, and digits, that are not part of the basic
  source character set (such as the dollar sign $, or characters in national character sets)
  may appear in an identifier (6.4.2).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.3 Lengths and cases of identifiers
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  All characters in identifiers (with or without external linkage) are significant (6.4.2).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.4 Scopes of identifiers
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  A function identifier, or the identifier of an object the declaration of which contains the
  keyword extern, has file scope (6.2.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.5 Writable string literals
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  String literals are modifiable (in which case, identical string literals should denote distinct
  objects) (6.4.5).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.6 Other arithmetic types
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Additional arithmetic types, such as __int128 or double double, and their
  appropriate conversions are defined (6.2.5, 6.3.1). Additional floating types may have
  more range or precision than long double, may be used for evaluating expressions of
@@ -25639,29 +25639,29 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.7 Function pointer casts
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  A pointer to an object or to void may be cast to a pointer to a function, allowing data to
  be invoked as a function (6.5.4).
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  A pointer to a function may be cast to a pointer to an object or to void, allowing a
  function to be inspected or modified (for example, by a debugger) (6.5.4).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.8 Extended bit-field types
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  A bit-field may be declared with a type other than _Bool, unsigned int, or
  signed int, with an appropriate maximum width (6.7.2.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.9 The fortran keyword
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The fortran function specifier may be used in a function declaration to indicate that
  calls suitable for FORTRAN should be generated, or that a different representation for the
  external name is to be generated (6.7.4).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.10 The asm keyword
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The asm keyword may be used to insert assembly language directly into the translator
  output (6.8). The most common implementation is via a statement of the form:
 
                                                                                                                                  @@ -25670,21 +25670,21 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.11 Multiple external definitions
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  There may be more than one external definition for the identifier of an object, with or
  without the explicit use of the keyword extern; if the definitions disagree, or more than
  one is initialized, the behavior is undefined (6.9.2).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.12 Predefined macro names
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Macro names that do not begin with an underscore, describing the translation and
  execution environments, are defined by the implementation before translation begins
  (6.10.8).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.13 Floating-point status flags
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  If any floating-point status flags are set on normal termination after all calls to functions
  registered by the atexit function have been made (see 7.20.4.3), the implementation
  writes some diagnostics indicating the fact to the stderr stream, if it is still open,
@@ -25692,28 +25692,28 @@ If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specifi
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.14 Extra arguments for signal handlers
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Handlers for specific signals are called with extra arguments in addition to the signal
  number (7.14.1.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.15 Additional stream types and file-opening modes
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Additional mappings from files to streams are supported (7.19.2).
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  Additional file-opening modes may be specified by characters appended to the mode
  argument of the fopen function (7.19.5.3).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.16 Defined file position indicator
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The file position indicator is decremented by each successful call to the ungetc or
  ungetwc function for a text stream, except if its value was zero before a call (7.19.7.11,
  7.24.3.10).
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.5.17 Math error reporting
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  Functions declared in <complex.h> and <math.h> raise SIGFPE to report errors
  instead of, or in addition to, setting errno or raising floating-point exceptions (7.3,
  7.12).
diff --git a/n1570.html b/n1570.html
index f5e5640..c2dd904 100644
--- a/n1570.html
+++ b/n1570.html
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  Foreword
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  ISO (the International Organization for Standardization) and IEC (the International
  Electrotechnical Commission) form the specialized system for worldwide
  standardization. National bodies that are member of ISO or IEC participate in the
@@ -581,20 +581,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  technical committees collaborate in fields of mutual interest. Other international
  organizations, governmental and non-governmental, in liaison with ISO and IEC, also
  take part in the work.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  International Standards are drafted in accordance with the rules given in the ISO/IEC
  Directives, Part 2. This International Standard was drafted in accordance with the fifth
  edition (2004).
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  In the field of information technology, ISO and IEC have established a joint technical
  committee, ISO/IEC JTC 1. Draft International Standards adopted by the joint technical
  committee are circulated to national bodies for voting. Publication as an International
  Standard requires approval by at least 75% of the national bodies casting a vote.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  4
  Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be
  the subject of patent rights. ISO and IEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any
  or all such patent rights.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  5
  This International Standard was prepared by Joint Technical Committee ISO/IEC JTC 1,
  Information technology, Subcommittee SC 22, Programming languages, their
  environments and system software interfaces. The Working Group responsible for this
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/ containing additional information relevant to this
  standard such as a Rationale for many of the decisions made during its preparation and a
  log of Defect Reports and Responses.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  6
  This third edition cancels and replaces the second edition, ISO/IEC 9899:1999, as
  corrected by ISO/IEC 9899:1999/Cor 1:2001, ISO/IEC 9899:1999/Cor 2:2004, and
  ISO/IEC 9899:1999/Cor 3:2007. Major changes from the previous edition include:
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  ISO/IEC TR 24731-1:2007)
 
                                                                                                                                •   (conditional) support for analyzability
 
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                7
  Major changes in the second edition included:
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                                •   restricted character set support via digraphs and <iso646.h> (originally specified
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                •   return without expression not permitted in function that returns a value (and vice
  versa)
 
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                8
  Annexes D, F, G, K, and L form a normative part of this standard; annexes A, B, C, E, H,
  I, J, the bibliography, and the index are for information only. In accordance with Part 2 of
  the ISO/IEC Directives, this foreword, the introduction, notes, footnotes, and examples
@@ -702,17 +702,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                Introduction
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  With the introduction of new devices and extended character sets, new features may be
  added to this International Standard. Subclauses in the language and library clauses warn
  implementors and programmers of usages which, though valid in themselves, may
  conflict with future additions.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  Certain features are obsolescent, which means that they may be considered for
  withdrawal in future revisions of this International Standard. They are retained because
  of their widespread use, but their use in new implementations (for implementation
  features) or new programs (for language [6.11] or library features [7.31]) is discouraged.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  This International Standard is divided into four major subdivisions:
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                                •   preliminary elements (clauses 1-4);
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                •   the language syntax, constraints, and semantics (clause 6);
 
                                                                                                                                •   the library facilities (clause 7).
 
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                4
  Examples are provided to illustrate possible forms of the constructions described.
  Footnotes are provided to emphasize consequences of the rules described in that
  subclause or elsewhere in this International Standard. References are used to refer to
@@ -728,9 +728,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  implementors. Annexes provide additional information and summarize the information
  contained in this International Standard. A bibliography lists documents that were
  referred to during the preparation of the standard.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                5
  The language clause (clause 6) is derived from ''The C Reference Manual''.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                6
  The library clause (clause 7) is based on the 1984 /usr/group Standard.
 
 
@@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                1. Scope
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  This International Standard specifies the form and establishes the interpretation of
  programs written in the C programming language.1) It specifies
 
                                                                                                                                  
@@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                •   the representation of output data produced by C programs;
 
                                                                                                                                •   the restrictions and limits imposed by a conforming implementation of C.
 
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  This International Standard does not specify
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                                •   the mechanism by which C programs are transformed for use by a data-processing
@@ -780,35 +780,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  2. Normative references
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The following referenced documents are indispensable for the application of this
  document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references,
  the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  ISO 31-11:1992, Quantities and units -- Part 11: Mathematical signs and symbols for
  use in the physical sciences and technology.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  ISO/IEC 646, Information technology -- ISO 7-bit coded character set for information
  interchange.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  4
  ISO/IEC 2382-1:1993, Information technology -- Vocabulary -- Part 1: Fundamental
  terms.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  5
  ISO 4217, Codes for the representation of currencies and funds.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  6
  ISO 8601, Data elements and interchange formats -- Information interchange --
  Representation of dates and times.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  7
  ISO/IEC 10646 (all parts), Information technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded
  Character Set (UCS).
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  8
  IEC 60559:1989, Binary floating-point arithmetic for microprocessor systems (previously
  designated IEC 559:1989).
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3. Terms, definitions, and symbols
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  For the purposes of this International Standard, the following definitions apply. Other
  terms are defined where they appear in italic type or on the left side of a syntax rule.
  Terms explicitly defined in this International Standard are not to be presumed to refer
@@ -818,29 +818,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.1
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  access
                                                                                                                                  
  <execution-time action> to read or modify the value of an object
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE 1   Where only one of these two actions is meant, ''read'' or ''modify'' is used.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  NOTE 2   ''Modify'' includes the case where the new value being stored is the same as the previous value.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  4
  NOTE 3   Expressions that are not evaluated do not access objects.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.2
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  alignment
                                                                                                                                  
  requirement that objects of a particular type be located on storage boundaries with
  addresses that are particular multiples of a byte address
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.3
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  argument
                                                                                                                                  
  actual argument
  actual parameter (deprecated)
@@ -850,80 +850,80 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.4
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  behavior
                                                                                                                                  
  external appearance or action
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.4.1
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  implementation-defined behavior
                                                                                                                                  
  unspecified behavior where each implementation documents how the choice is made
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  EXAMPLE An example of implementation-defined behavior is the propagation of the high-order bit
  when a signed integer is shifted right.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.4.2
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  locale-specific behavior
                                                                                                                                  
  behavior that depends on local conventions of nationality, culture, and language that each
  implementation documents
 
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  EXAMPLE An example of locale-specific behavior is whether the islower function returns true for
  characters other than the 26 lowercase Latin letters.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.4.3
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  undefined behavior
                                                                                                                                  
  behavior, upon use of a nonportable or erroneous program construct or of erroneous data,
  for which this International Standard imposes no requirements
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE Possible undefined behavior ranges from ignoring the situation completely with unpredictable
  results, to behaving during translation or program execution in a documented manner characteristic of the
  environment (with or without the issuance of a diagnostic message), to terminating a translation or
  execution (with the issuance of a diagnostic message).
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  EXAMPLE        An example of undefined behavior is the behavior on integer overflow.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.4.4
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  unspecified behavior
                                                                                                                                  
  use of an unspecified value, or other behavior where this International Standard provides
  two or more possibilities and imposes no further requirements on which is chosen in any
  instance
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  EXAMPLE        An example of unspecified behavior is the order in which the arguments to a function are
  evaluated.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.5
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  bit
                                                                                                                                  
  unit of data storage in the execution environment large enough to hold an object that may
  have one of two values
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE     It need not be possible to express the address of each individual bit of an object.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.6
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  byte
                                                                                                                                  
  addressable unit of data storage large enough to hold any member of the basic character
  set of the execution environment
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE 1     It is possible to express the address of each individual byte of an object uniquely.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  NOTE 2 A byte is composed of a contiguous sequence of bits, the number of which is implementation-
  defined. The least significant bit is called the low-order bit; the most significant bit is called the high-order
  bit.
@@ -931,14 +931,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.7
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  character
                                                                                                                                  
  <abstract> member of a set of elements used for the organization, control, or
  representation of data
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.7.1
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  character
                                                                                                                                  
  single-byte character
  <C> bit representation that fits in a byte
@@ -946,52 +946,52 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.7.2
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  multibyte character
                                                                                                                                  
  sequence of one or more bytes representing a member of the extended character set of
  either the source or the execution environment
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE    The extended character set is a superset of the basic character set.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.7.3
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  wide character
                                                                                                                                  
  value representable by an object of type wchar_t, capable of representing any character
  in the current locale
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.8
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  constraint
                                                                                                                                  
  restriction, either syntactic or semantic, by which the exposition of language elements is
  to be interpreted
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.9
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  correctly rounded result
                                                                                                                                  
  representation in the result format that is nearest in value, subject to the current rounding
  mode, to what the result would be given unlimited range and precision
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.10
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  diagnostic message
                                                                                                                                  
  message belonging to an implementation-defined subset of the implementation's message
  output
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.11
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  forward reference
                                                                                                                                  
  reference to a later subclause of this International Standard that contains additional
  information relevant to this subclause
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.12
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  implementation
                                                                                                                                  
  particular set of software, running in a particular translation environment under particular
  control options, that performs translation of programs for, and supports execution of
@@ -999,22 +999,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.13
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  implementation limit
                                                                                                                                  
  restriction imposed upon programs by the implementation
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.14
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  memory location
                                                                                                                                  
  either an object of scalar type, or a maximal sequence of adjacent bit-fields all having
  nonzero width
 
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE 1 Two threads of execution can update and access separate memory locations without interfering
  with each other.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  NOTE 2 A bit-field and an adjacent non-bit-field member are in separate memory locations. The same
  applies to two bit-fields, if one is declared inside a nested structure declaration and the other is not, or if the
  two are separated by a zero-length bit-field declaration, or if they are separated by a non-bit-field member
@@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  members declared between them are also (non-zero-length) bit-fields, no matter what the sizes of those
  intervening bit-fields happen to be.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  4
  EXAMPLE        A structure declared as
 
                                                                                                                                             struct {
@@ -1039,17 +1039,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.15
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  object
                                                                                                                                  
  region of data storage in the execution environment, the contents of which can represent
  values
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE      When referenced, an object may be interpreted as having a particular type; see 6.3.2.1.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.16
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  parameter
                                                                                                                                  
  formal parameter
  formal argument (deprecated)
@@ -1059,65 +1059,65 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.17
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  recommended practice
                                                                                                                                  
  specification that is strongly recommended as being in keeping with the intent of the
  standard, but that may be impractical for some implementations
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.18
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  runtime-constraint
                                                                                                                                  
  requirement on a program when calling a library function
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE 1 Despite the similar terms, a runtime-constraint is not a kind of constraint as defined by 3.8, and
  need not be diagnosed at translation time.
  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  NOTE 2 Implementations that support the extensions in annex K are required to verify that the runtime-
  constraints for a library function are not violated by the program; see K.3.1.4.
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  value
                                                                                                                                  
  precise meaning of the contents of an object when interpreted as having a specific type
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19.1
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  implementation-defined value
                                                                                                                                  
  unspecified value where each implementation documents how the choice is made
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19.2
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  indeterminate value
                                                                                                                                  
  either an unspecified value or a trap representation
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19.3
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  unspecified value
                                                                                                                                  
  valid value of the relevant type where this International Standard imposes no
  requirements on which value is chosen in any instance
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE     An unspecified value cannot be a trap representation.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19.4
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  trap representation
                                                                                                                                  
  an object representation that need not represent a value of the object type
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.19.5
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  perform a trap
                                                                                                                                  
  interrupt execution of the program such that no further operations are performed
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  NOTE In this International Standard, when the word ''trap'' is not immediately followed by
  ''representation'', this is the intended usage.2)
  
@@ -1129,19 +1129,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.20
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  [^ x^]
                                                                                                                                  
  ceiling of x: the least integer greater than or equal to x
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  EXAMPLE       [^2.4^] is 3, [^-2.4^] is -2.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  3.21
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  [_ x_]
                                                                                                                                  
  floor of x: the greatest integer less than or equal to x
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  EXAMPLE       [_2.4_] is 2, [_-2.4_] is -3.
  
  
@@ -1151,29 +1151,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  4. Conformance
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  In this International Standard, ''shall'' is to be interpreted as a requirement on an
  implementation or on a program; conversely, ''shall not'' is to be interpreted as a
  prohibition.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  If a ''shall'' or ''shall not'' requirement that appears outside of a constraint or runtime-
  constraint is violated, the behavior is undefined. Undefined behavior is otherwise
  indicated in this International Standard by the words ''undefined behavior'' or by the
  omission of any explicit definition of behavior. There is no difference in emphasis among
  these three; they all describe ''behavior that is undefined''.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  3
  A program that is correct in all other aspects, operating on correct data, containing
  unspecified behavior shall be a correct program and act in accordance with 5.1.2.3.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  4
  The implementation shall not successfully translate a preprocessing translation unit
  containing a #error preprocessing directive unless it is part of a group skipped by
  conditional inclusion.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  5
  A strictly conforming program shall use only those features of the language and library
  specified in this International Standard.3) It shall not produce output dependent on any
  unspecified, undefined, or implementation-defined behavior, and shall not exceed any
  minimum implementation limit.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  6
  The two forms of conforming implementation are hosted and freestanding. A conforming
  hosted implementation shall accept any strictly conforming program. A conforming
  freestanding implementation shall accept any strictly conforming program in which the *
@@ -1187,9 +1187,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  7
  A conforming program is one that is acceptable to a conforming implementation.5)
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  8
  An implementation shall be accompanied by a document that defines all implementation-
  defined and locale-specific characteristics and all extensions.
 
                                                                                                                                   Forward references: conditional inclusion (6.10.1), error directive (6.10.5),
@@ -1227,7 +1227,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  5. Environment
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  An implementation translates C source files and executes C programs in two data-
  processing-system environments, which will be called the translation environment and
  the execution environment in this International Standard. Their characteristics define and
@@ -1244,7 +1244,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  5.1.1.1 Program structure
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  A C program need not all be translated at the same time. The text of the program is kept
  in units called source files, (or preprocessing files) in this International Standard. A
  source file together with all the headers and source files included via the preprocessing
@@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  5.1.1.2 Translation phases
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The precedence among the syntax rules of translation is specified by the following
  phases.6)
 
                                                                                                                                    
@@ -1326,13 +1326,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.1.1.3 Diagnostics
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  A conforming implementation shall produce at least one diagnostic message (identified in
  an implementation-defined manner) if a preprocessing translation unit or translation unit
  contains a violation of any syntax rule or constraint, even if the behavior is also explicitly
  specified as undefined or implementation-defined. Diagnostic messages need not be
  produced in other circumstances.9)
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    2
  EXAMPLE        An implementation shall issue a diagnostic for the translation unit:
 
                                                                                                                                               char i;
@@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.1.2 Execution environments
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  Two execution environments are defined: freestanding and hosted. In both cases,
  program startup occurs when a designated C function is called by the execution
  environment. All objects with static storage duration shall be initialized (set to their
@@ -1361,18 +1361,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.1.2.1 Freestanding environment
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  In a freestanding environment (in which C program execution may take place without any
  benefit of an operating system), the name and type of the function called at program
  startup are implementation-defined. Any library facilities available to a freestanding
  program, other than the minimal set required by clause 4, are implementation-defined.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    2
  The effect of program termination in a freestanding environment is implementation-
  defined.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.1.2.2 Hosted environment
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  A hosted environment need not be provided, but shall conform to the following
  specifications if present.
  
@@ -1383,7 +1383,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.1.2.2.1 Program startup
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  The function called at program startup is named main. The implementation declares no
  prototype for this function. It shall be defined with a return type of int and with no
  parameters:
@@ -1396,7 +1396,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { /* ... */ }
 
                                                                                                                                    
  or equivalent;10) or in some other implementation-defined manner.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    2
  If they are declared, the parameters to the main function shall obey the following
  constraints:
 
                                                                                                                                      
@@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                                      5.1.2.2.2 Program execution
                                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      1
  In a hosted environment, a program may use all the functions, macros, type definitions,
  and objects described in the library clause (clause 7).
  
@@ -1437,7 +1437,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                                      5.1.2.2.3 Program termination
                                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      1
  If the return type of the main function is a type compatible with int, a return from the
  initial call to the main function is equivalent to calling the exit function with the value
  returned by the main function as its argument;11) reaching the } that terminates the
@@ -1452,16 +1452,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                                      5.1.2.3 Program execution
                                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      1
  The semantic descriptions in this International Standard describe the behavior of an
  abstract machine in which issues of optimization are irrelevant.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      2
  Accessing a volatile object, modifying an object, modifying a file, or calling a function
  that does any of those operations are all side effects,12) which are changes in the state of
  the execution environment. Evaluation of an expression in general includes both value
  computations and initiation of side effects. Value computation for an lvalue expression
  includes determining the identity of the designated object.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      3
  Sequenced before is an asymmetric, transitive, pair-wise relation between evaluations
  executed by a single thread, which induces a partial order among those evaluations.
  Given any two evaluations A and B, if A is sequenced before B, then the execution of A
@@ -1472,14 +1472,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  between the evaluation of expressions A and B implies that every value computation and
  side effect associated with A is sequenced before every value computation and side effect
  associated with B. (A summary of the sequence points is given in annex C.)
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      4
  In the abstract machine, all expressions are evaluated as specified by the semantics. An
  actual implementation need not evaluate part of an expression if it can deduce that its
  value is not used and that no needed side effects are produced (including any caused by
  
 
  calling a function or accessing a volatile object).
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      5
  When the processing of the abstract machine is interrupted by receipt of a signal, the
  values of objects that are neither lock-free atomic objects nor of type volatile
  sig_atomic_t are unspecified, as is the state of the floating-point environment. The
@@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  type volatile sig_atomic_t becomes indeterminate when the handler exits, as
  does the state of the floating-point environment if it is modified by the handler and not
  restored to its original state.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      6
  The least requirements on a conforming implementation are:
 
                                                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                                                      •   Accesses to volatile objects are evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract
@@ -1500,16 +1500,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  a program waiting for input.
 
                                                                                                                                      
  This is the observable behavior of the program.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      7
  What constitutes an interactive device is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      8
  More stringent correspondences between abstract and actual semantics may be defined by
  each implementation.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      9
  EXAMPLE 1 An implementation might define a one-to-one correspondence between abstract and actual
  semantics: at every sequence point, the values of the actual objects would agree with those specified by the
  abstract semantics. The keyword volatile would then be redundant.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      10
  Alternatively, an implementation might perform various optimizations within each translation unit, such
  that the actual semantics would agree with the abstract semantics only when making function calls across
  translation unit boundaries. In such an implementation, at the time of each function entry and function
@@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  would require explicit specification of volatile storage, as well as other implementation-defined
  restrictions.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      11
  EXAMPLE 2       In executing the fragment
 
                                                                                                                                                 char c1, c2;
@@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  overflow, or with overflow wrapping silently to produce the correct result, the actual execution need only
  produce the same result, possibly omitting the promotions.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      12
  EXAMPLE 3       Similarly, in the fragment
 
                                                                                                                                                 float f1, f2;
@@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  that the result would be the same as if it were executed using double-precision arithmetic (for example, if d
  were replaced by the constant 2.0, which has type double).
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      13
  EXAMPLE 4 Implementations employing wide registers have to take care to honor appropriate
  semantics. Values are independent of whether they are represented in a register or in memory. For
  example, an implicit spilling of a register is not permitted to alter the value. Also, an explicit store and load
@@ -1560,7 +1560,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                      
  the values assigned to d1 and d2 are required to have been converted to float.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      14
  EXAMPLE 5 Rearrangement for floating-point expressions is often restricted because of limitations in
  precision as well as range. The implementation cannot generally apply the mathematical associative rules
  for addition or multiplication, nor the distributive rule, because of roundoff error, even in the absence of
@@ -1576,7 +1576,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           y = x / 5.0;                //   not equivalent to y   = x * 0.2;
 
                                                                                                                                      
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      15
  EXAMPLE 6       To illustrate the grouping behavior of expressions, in the following fragment
 
                                                                                                                                                 int a, b;
@@ -1609,7 +1609,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  above expression statement can be rewritten by the implementation in any of the above ways because the
  same result will occur.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      16
  EXAMPLE 7 The grouping of an expression does not completely determine its evaluation. In the
  following fragment
 
                                                                                                                                      @@ -1644,28 +1644,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                                      5.1.2.4 Multi-threaded executions and data races
                                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      1
  Under a hosted implementation, a program can have more than one thread of execution
  (or thread) running concurrently. The execution of each thread proceeds as defined by
  the remainder of this standard. The execution of the entire program consists of an
  execution of all of its threads.14) Under a freestanding implementation, it is
  implementation-defined whether a program can have more than one thread of execution.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      2
  The value of an object visible to a thread T at a particular point is the initial value of the
  object, a value stored in the object by T , or a value stored in the object by another thread,
  according to the rules below.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      3
  NOTE 1 In some cases, there may instead be undefined behavior. Much of this section is motivated by
  the desire to support atomic operations with explicit and detailed visibility constraints. However, it also
  implicitly supports a simpler view for more restricted programs.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      4
  Two expression evaluations conflict if one of them modifies a memory location and the
  other one reads or modifies the same memory location.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      5
  The library defines a number of atomic operations (7.17) and operations on mutexes
  (7.26.4) that are specially identified as synchronization operations. These operations play
  a special role in making assignments in one thread visible to another. A synchronization
@@ -1675,7 +1675,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  either an acquire fence, a release fence, or both an acquire and release fence. In addition,
  there are relaxed atomic operations, which are not synchronization operations, and
  atomic read-modify-write operations, which have special characteristics.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      6
  NOTE 2 For example, a call that acquires a mutex will perform an acquire operation on the locations
  composing the mutex. Correspondingly, a call that releases the same mutex will perform a release
  operation on those same locations. Informally, performing a release operation on A forces prior side effects
@@ -1683,39 +1683,39 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  operation on A. We do not include relaxed atomic operations as synchronization operations although, like
  synchronization operations, they cannot contribute to data races.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      7
  All modifications to a particular atomic object M occur in some particular total order,
  called the modification order of M. If A and B are modifications of an atomic object M,
  and A happens before B, then A shall precede B in the modification order of M, which is
  defined below.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      8
  NOTE 3     This states that the modification orders must respect the ''happens before'' relation.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      9
  NOTE 4 There is a separate order for each atomic object. There is no requirement that these can be
  combined into a single total order for all objects. In general this will be impossible since different threads
  may observe modifications to different variables in inconsistent orders.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      10
  A release sequence headed by a release operation A on an atomic object M is a maximal
  contiguous sub-sequence of side effects in the modification order of M, where the first
  operation is A and every subsequent operation either is performed by the same thread that
  performed the release or is an atomic read-modify-write operation.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      11
  Certain library calls synchronize with other library calls performed by another thread. In
  particular, an atomic operation A that performs a release operation on an object M
  synchronizes with an atomic operation B that performs an acquire operation on M and
  reads a value written by any side effect in the release sequence headed by A.
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      12
  NOTE 5 Except in the specified cases, reading a later value does not necessarily ensure visibility as
  described below. Such a requirement would sometimes interfere with efficient implementation.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      13
  NOTE 6 The specifications of the synchronization operations define when one reads the value written by
  another. For atomic variables, the definition is clear. All operations on a given mutex occur in a single total
  order. Each mutex acquisition ''reads the value written'' by the last mutex release.
  
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      14
  An evaluation A carries a dependency 15) to an evaluation B if:
  
  
@@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  is sequenced before B, or
 
                                                                                                                                    •   for some evaluation X, A carries a dependency to X and X carries a dependency to B.
 
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    15
  An evaluation A is dependency-ordered before16) an evaluation B if:
 
                                                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                                                    •   A performs a release operation on an atomic object M, and, in another thread, B
@@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                    •   for some evaluation X, A is dependency-ordered before X and X carries a
  dependency to B.
 
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    16
  An evaluation A inter-thread happens before an evaluation B if A synchronizes with B, A
  is dependency-ordered before B, or, for some evaluation X:
 
                                                                                                                                      
@@ -1753,7 +1753,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                    •   A is sequenced before X and X inter-thread happens before B, or
 
                                                                                                                                    •   A inter-thread happens before X and X inter-thread happens before B.
 
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    17
  NOTE 7 The ''inter-thread happens before'' relation describes arbitrary concatenations of ''sequenced
  before'', ''synchronizes with'', and ''dependency-ordered before'' relationships, with two exceptions. The
  first exception is that a concatenation is not permitted to end with ''dependency-ordered before'' followed
@@ -1766,14 +1766,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  transitively closed and (2) the ''happens before'' relation, defined below, provides for relationships
  consisting entirely of ''sequenced before''.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    18
  An evaluation A happens before an evaluation B if A is sequenced before B or A inter-
  thread happens before B.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    19
  A visible side effect A on an object M with respect to a value computation B of M
  satisfies the conditions:
 
                                                                                                                                      
@@ -1783,17 +1783,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                    
  The value of a non-atomic scalar object M, as determined by evaluation B, shall be the
  value stored by the visible side effect A.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    20
  NOTE 8 If there is ambiguity about which side effect to a non-atomic object is visible, then there is a data
  race and the behavior is undefined.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    21
  NOTE 9 This states that operations on ordinary variables are not visibly reordered. This is not actually
  detectable without data races, but it is necessary to ensure that data races, as defined here, and with suitable
  restrictions on the use of atomics, correspond to data races in a simple interleaved (sequentially consistent)
  execution.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    22
  The visible sequence of side effects on an atomic object M, with respect to a value
  computation B of M, is a maximal contiguous sub-sequence of side effects in the
  modification order of M, where the first side effect is visible with respect to B, and for
@@ -1804,23 +1804,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the value computed by A corresponds to the value stored by side effect X, then the value
  computed by B shall either equal the value computed by A, or be the value stored by side
  effect Y , where Y follows X in the modification order of M.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    23
  NOTE 10 This effectively disallows compiler reordering of atomic operations to a single object, even if
  both operations are ''relaxed'' loads. By doing so, we effectively make the ''cache coherence'' guarantee
  provided by most hardware available to C atomic operations.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    24
  NOTE 11 The visible sequence depends on the ''happens before'' relation, which in turn depends on the
  values observed by loads of atomics, which we are restricting here. The intended reading is that there must
  exist an association of atomic loads with modifications they observe that, together with suitably chosen
  modification orders and the ''happens before'' relation derived as described above, satisfy the resulting
  constraints as imposed here.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    25
  The execution of a program contains a data race if it contains two conflicting actions in
  different threads, at least one of which is not atomic, and neither happens before the
  other. Any such data race results in undefined behavior.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    26
  NOTE 12 It can be shown that programs that correctly use simple mutexes and
  memory_order_seq_cst operations to prevent all data races, and use no other synchronization
  operations, behave as though the operations executed by their constituent threads were simply interleaved,
@@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  program semantics. In fact, most single-threaded program transformations continue to be allowed, since
  any program that behaves differently as a result must contain undefined behavior.
 
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    27
  NOTE 13 Compiler transformations that introduce assignments to a potentially shared memory location
  that would not be modified by the abstract machine are generally precluded by this standard, since such an
  assignment might overwrite another assignment by a different thread in cases in which an abstract machine
@@ -1839,7 +1839,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  reordering of atomic loads in cases in which the atomics in question may alias, since this may violate the
  "visible sequence" rules.
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    28
  NOTE 14 Transformations that introduce a speculative read of a potentially shared memory location may
  not preserve the semantics of the program as defined in this standard, since they potentially introduce a data
  race. However, they are typically valid in the context of an optimizing compiler that targets a specific
@@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.2.1 Character sets
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  Two sets of characters and their associated collating sequences shall be defined: the set in
  which source files are written (the source character set), and the set interpreted in the
  execution environment (the execution character set). Each set is further divided into a
@@ -1872,13 +1872,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  locale-specific members (which are not members of the basic character set) called
  extended characters. The combined set is also called the extended character set. The
  values of the members of the execution character set are implementation-defined.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    2
  In a character constant or string literal, members of the execution character set shall be
  represented by corresponding members of the source character set or by escape
  sequences consisting of the backslash \ followed by one or more characters. A byte with
  all bits set to 0, called the null character, shall exist in the basic execution character set; it
  is used to terminate a character string.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    3
  Both the basic source and basic execution character sets shall have the following
  members: the 26 uppercase letters of the Latin alphabet
 
                                                                                                                                    @@ -1911,17 +1911,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  constant, a string literal, a header name, a comment, or a preprocessing token that is never
 
  converted to a token), the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    4
  A letter is an uppercase letter or a lowercase letter as defined above; in this International
  Standard the term does not include other characters that are letters in other alphabets.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    5
  The universal character name construct provides a way to name other characters.
 
                                                                                                                                     Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), character constants (6.4.4.4),
  preprocessing directives (6.10), string literals (6.4.5), comments (6.4.9), string (7.1.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.2.1.1 Trigraph sequences
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  Before any other processing takes place, each occurrence of one of the following
  sequences of three characters (called trigraph sequences17)) is replaced with the
  corresponding single character.
@@ -1932,7 +1932,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                    
  No other trigraph sequences exist. Each ? that does not begin one of the trigraphs listed
  above is not changed.
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    2
  EXAMPLE 1
 
                                                                                                                                                ??=define arraycheck(a, b) a??(b??) ??!??! b??(a??)
@@ -1942,7 +1942,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            #define arraycheck(a, b) a[b] || b[a]
 
                                                                                                                                    
  
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    3
  EXAMPLE 2      The following source line
 
                                                                                                                                                printf("Eh???/n");
@@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    5.2.1.2 Multibyte characters
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
  The source character set may contain multibyte characters, used to represent members of
  the extended character set. The execution character set may also contain multibyte
  characters, which need not have the same encoding as for the source character set. For
@@ -1981,7 +1981,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                  1.   A byte with all bits zero shall be interpreted as a null character independent of shift
  state. Such a byte shall not occur as part of any other multibyte character.
 
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  For source files, the following shall hold:
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                                •   An identifier, comment, string literal, character constant, or header name shall begin
@@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  5.2.2 Character display semantics
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
  The active position is that location on a display device where the next character output by
  the fputc function would appear. The intent of writing a printing character (as defined
  by the isprint function) to a display device is to display a graphic representation of
@@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  position on the current line. The direction of writing is locale-specific. If the active
  position is at the final position of a line (if there is one), the behavior of the display device
  is unspecified.
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  2
  Alphabetic escape sequences representing nongraphic characters in the execution
  character set are intended to produce actions on display devices as follows:
  \a (alert) Produces an audible or visible alert without changing the active position.
@@ -2026,7 +2026,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
     tabulation position. If the active position is at or past the last defined vertical
       tabulation position, the behavior of the display device is unspecified.
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  Each of these escape sequences shall produce a unique implementation-defined value
  which can be stored in a single char object. The external representations in a text file
  need not be identical to the internal representations, and are outside the scope of this
@@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    5.2.3 Signals and interrupts
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  Functions shall be implemented such that they may be interrupted at any time by a signal,
  or may be called by a signal handler, or both, with no alteration to earlier, but still active,
  invocations' control flow (after the interruption), function return values, or objects with
@@ -2045,7 +2045,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    5.2.4 Environmental limits
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  Both the translation and execution environments constrain the implementation of
  language translators and libraries. The following summarizes the language-related
  environmental limits on a conforming implementation; the library-related limits are
@@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    5.2.4.1 Translation limits
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The implementation shall be able to translate and execute at least one program that
  contains at least one instance of every one of the following limits:18)
 
                                                                                                      
@@ -2102,7 +2102,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                      5.2.4.2 Numerical limits
                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                      1
  An implementation is required to document all the limits specified in this subclause,
  which are specified in the headers <limits.h> and <float.h>. Additional limits are
  specified in <stdint.h>.
@@ -2110,7 +2110,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                      5.2.4.2.1 Sizes of integer types <limits.h>
                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                      1
  The values given below shall be replaced by constant expressions suitable for use in #if
  preprocessing directives. Moreover, except for CHAR_BIT and MB_LEN_MAX, the
  following shall be replaced by expressions that have the same type as would an
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                    •   maximum value for an object of type unsigned long long int
  ULLONG_MAX         18446744073709551615 // 264 - 1
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  If the value of an object of type char is treated as a signed integer when used in an
  expression, the value of CHAR_MIN shall be the same as that of SCHAR_MIN and the
  value of CHAR_MAX shall be the same as that of SCHAR_MAX. Otherwise, the value of
@@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    5.2.4.2.2 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
  The characteristics of floating types are defined in terms of a model that describes a
  representation of floating-point numbers and values that provide information about an
  implementation's floating-point arithmetic.21) The following parameters are used to
@@ -2187,7 +2187,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         p          precision (the number of base-b digits in the significand)
          fk        nonnegative integers less than b (the significand digits)
 
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    2
  A floating-point number (x) is defined by the following model:
 
                                                                                                                         p
@@ -2196,7 +2196,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                  emin <= e <= emax
 
                                                                                                    
  
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    3
  In addition to normalized floating-point numbers ( f 1 > 0 if x != 0), floating types may be
  able to contain other kinds of floating-point numbers, such as subnormal floating-point
  numbers (x != 0, e = emin , f 1 = 0) and unnormalized floating-point numbers (x != 0,
@@ -2208,33 +2208,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  arithmetic operand.22)
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    4
  An implementation may give zero and values that are not floating-point numbers (such as
  infinities and NaNs) a sign or may leave them unsigned. Wherever such values are
  unsigned, any requirement in this International Standard to retrieve the sign shall produce
  an unspecified sign, and any requirement to set the sign shall be ignored.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    5
  The minimum range of representable values for a floating type is the most negative finite
  floating-point number representable in that type through the most positive finite floating-
  point number representable in that type. In addition, if negative infinity is representable
  in a type, the range of that type is extended to all negative real numbers; likewise, if
  positive infinity is representable in a type, the range of that type is extended to all positive
  real numbers.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    6
  The accuracy of the floating-point operations (+, -, *, /) and of the library functions in
  <math.h> and <complex.h> that return floating-point results is implementation-
  defined, as is the accuracy of the conversion between floating-point internal
  representations and string representations performed by the library functions in
  <stdio.h>, <stdlib.h>, and <wchar.h>. The implementation may state that the
  accuracy is unknown.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    7
  All integer values in the <float.h> header, except FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant
  expressions suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives; all floating values shall be
  constant expressions. All except DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_EVAL_METHOD, FLT_RADIX,
  and FLT_ROUNDS have separate names for all three floating-point types. The floating-
  point model representation is provided for all values except FLT_EVAL_METHOD and
  FLT_ROUNDS.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    8
  The rounding mode for floating-point addition is characterized by the implementation-
  defined value of FLT_ROUNDS:23)
 
                                                                                                    @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    9
  Except for assignment and cast (which remove all extra range and precision), the values
  yielded by operators with floating operands and values subject to the usual arithmetic
  conversions and of floating constants are evaluated to a format whose range and precision
@@ -2268,7 +2268,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                    
  All other negative values for FLT_EVAL_METHOD characterize implementation-defined
  behavior.
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    10
  The presence or absence of subnormal numbers is characterized by the implementation-
  defined     values     of    FLT_HAS_SUBNORM,          DBL_HAS_SUBNORM,           and
  LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM:
@@ -2277,7 +2277,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          0       absent26) (type does not support subnormal numbers)
          1       present (type does support subnormal numbers)
 
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                11
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with
  implementation-defined values that are greater or equal in magnitude (absolute value) to
  those shown, with the same sign:
@@ -2353,7 +2353,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
     LDBL_MAX_10_EXP                              +37
 
                                                                                
 
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              12
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with
  implementation-defined values that are greater than or equal to those shown:
 
                                                                                
@@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
     LDBL_MAX                                  1E+37
 
                                                                              
 
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            13
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with
  implementation-defined (positive) values that are less than or equal to those shown:
 
                                                                              
@@ -2388,10 +2388,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
    LDBL_TRUE_MIN                                      1E-37
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                            Recommended practice
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            14
  Conversion from (at least) double to decimal with DECIMAL_DIG digits and back
  should be the identity function.
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            15
  EXAMPLE 1 The following describes an artificial floating-point representation that meets the minimum
  requirements of this International Standard, and the appropriate values in a <float.h> header for type
  float:
@@ -2416,7 +2416,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          FLT_MAX_10_EXP                              +38
 
                                                                            
  
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            16
  EXAMPLE 2 The following describes floating-point representations that also meet the requirements for
  single-precision and double-precision numbers in IEC 60559,28) and the appropriate values in a
  <float.h> header for types float and double:
@@ -2519,7 +2519,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.1 Notation
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  In the syntax notation used in this clause, syntactic categories (nonterminals) are
  indicated by italic type, and literal words and character set members (terminals) by bold
  type. A colon (:) following a nonterminal introduces its definition. Alternative
@@ -2529,10 +2529,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           { expressionopt }
 
                                                                          
  indicates an optional expression enclosed in braces.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  When syntactic categories are referred to in the main text, they are not italicized and
  words are separated by spaces instead of hyphens.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A summary of the language syntax is given in annex A.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
@@ -2540,7 +2540,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.1 Scopes of identifiers
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  An identifier can denote an object; a function; a tag or a member of a structure, union, or
  enumeration; a typedef name; a label name; a macro name; or a macro parameter. The
  same identifier can denote different entities at different points in the program. A member
@@ -2548,17 +2548,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  parameters are not considered further here, because prior to the semantic phase of
  program translation any occurrences of macro names in the source file are replaced by the
  preprocessing token sequences that constitute their macro definitions.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  For each different entity that an identifier designates, the identifier is visible (i.e., can be
  used) only within a region of program text called its scope. Different entities designated
  by the same identifier either have different scopes, or are in different name spaces. There
  are four kinds of scopes: function, file, block, and function prototype. (A function
  prototype is a declaration of a function that declares the types of its parameters.)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A label name is the only kind of identifier that has function scope. It can be used (in a
  goto statement) anywhere in the function in which it appears, and is declared implicitly
  by its syntactic appearance (followed by a : and a statement).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  Every other identifier has scope determined by the placement of its declaration (in a
  declarator or type specifier). If the declarator or type specifier that declares the identifier
  appears outside of any block or list of parameters, the identifier has file scope, which
@@ -2574,20 +2574,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  strictly before the scope of the other entity (the outer scope). Within the inner scope, the
  identifier designates the entity declared in the inner scope; the entity declared in the outer
  scope is hidden (and not visible) within the inner scope.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, where this International Standard uses the term
  ''identifier'' to refer to some entity (as opposed to the syntactic construct), it refers to the
  entity in the relevant name space whose declaration is visible at the point the identifier
  occurs.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  Two identifiers have the same scope if and only if their scopes terminate at the same
  point.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  Structure, union, and enumeration tags have scope that begins just after the appearance of
  the tag in a type specifier that declares the tag. Each enumeration constant has scope that
  begins just after the appearance of its defining enumerator in an enumerator list. Any
  other identifier has scope that begins just after the completion of its declarator.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  As a special case, a type name (which is not a declaration of an identifier) is considered to
  have a scope that begins just after the place within the type name where the omitted
  identifier would appear were it not omitted.
@@ -2597,39 +2597,39 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.2 Linkages of identifiers
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  An identifier declared in different scopes or in the same scope more than once can be
  made to refer to the same object or function by a process called linkage.29) There are
  three kinds of linkage: external, internal, and none.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  In the set of translation units and libraries that constitutes an entire program, each
  declaration of a particular identifier with external linkage denotes the same object or
  function. Within one translation unit, each declaration of an identifier with internal
  linkage denotes the same object or function. Each declaration of an identifier with no
  linkage denotes a unique entity.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  If the declaration of a file scope identifier for an object or a function contains the storage-
  class specifier static, the identifier has internal linkage.30)
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  For an identifier declared with the storage-class specifier extern in a scope in which a
  prior declaration of that identifier is visible,31) if the prior declaration specifies internal or
  external linkage, the linkage of the identifier at the later declaration is the same as the
  linkage specified at the prior declaration. If no prior declaration is visible, or if the prior
  declaration specifies no linkage, then the identifier has external linkage.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  If the declaration of an identifier for a function has no storage-class specifier, its linkage
  is determined exactly as if it were declared with the storage-class specifier extern. If
  the declaration of an identifier for an object has file scope and no storage-class specifier,
  its linkage is external.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The following identifiers have no linkage: an identifier declared to be anything other than
  an object or a function; an identifier declared to be a function parameter; a block scope
  identifier for an object declared without the storage-class specifier extern.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  If, within a translation unit, the same identifier appears with both internal and external
  linkage, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                                           Forward references: declarations (6.7), expressions (6.5), external definitions (6.9),
@@ -2646,7 +2646,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.3 Name spaces of identifiers
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  If more than one declaration of a particular identifier is visible at any point in a
  translation unit, the syntactic context disambiguates uses that refer to different entities.
  Thus, there are separate name spaces for various categories of identifiers, as follows:
@@ -2672,22 +2672,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.4 Storage durations of objects
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  An object has a storage duration that determines its lifetime. There are four storage
  durations: static, thread, automatic, and allocated. Allocated storage is described in
  7.22.3.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The lifetime of an object is the portion of program execution during which storage is
  guaranteed to be reserved for it. An object exists, has a constant address,33) and retains
  its last-stored value throughout its lifetime.34) If an object is referred to outside of its
  lifetime, the behavior is undefined. The value of a pointer becomes indeterminate when
  the object it points to (or just past) reaches the end of its lifetime.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  An object whose identifier is declared without the storage-class specifier
  _Thread_local, and either with external or internal linkage or with the storage-class
  specifier static, has static storage duration. Its lifetime is the entire execution of the
  program and its stored value is initialized only once, prior to program startup.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  An object whose identifier is declared with the storage-class specifier _Thread_local
  has thread storage duration. Its lifetime is the entire execution of the thread for which it
  is created, and its stored value is initialized when the thread is started. There is a distinct
@@ -2695,12 +2695,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  associated with the thread evaluating the expression. The result of attempting to
  indirectly access an object with thread storage duration from a thread other than the one
  with which the object is associated is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  An object whose identifier is declared with no linkage and without the storage-class
  specifier static has automatic storage duration, as do some compound literals. The
  result of attempting to indirectly access an object with automatic storage duration from a
  thread other than the one with which the object is associated is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  For such an object that does not have a variable length array type, its lifetime extends
  from entry into the block with which it is associated until execution of that block ends in
  any way. (Entering an enclosed block or calling a function suspends, but does not end,
@@ -2713,12 +2713,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  For such an object that does have a variable length array type, its lifetime extends from
  the declaration of the object until execution of the program leaves the scope of the
  declaration.35) If the scope is entered recursively, a new instance of the object is created
  each time. The initial value of the object is indeterminate.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  A non-lvalue expression with structure or union type, where the structure or union
  contains a member with array type (including, recursively, members of all contained
  structures and unions) refers to an object with automatic storage duration and temporary
@@ -2744,7 +2744,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.5 Types
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The meaning of a value stored in an object or returned by a function is determined by the
  type of the expression used to access it. (An identifier declared to be an object is the
  simplest such expression; the type is specified in the declaration of the identifier.) Types
@@ -2752,15 +2752,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  that describe functions). At various points within a translation unit an object type may be
  incomplete (lacking sufficient information to determine the size of objects of that type) or
  complete (having sufficient information).37)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An object declared as type _Bool is large enough to store the values 0 and 1.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  An object declared as type char is large enough to store any member of the basic
  execution character set. If a member of the basic execution character set is stored in a
  char object, its value is guaranteed to be nonnegative. If any other character is stored in
  a char object, the resulting value is implementation-defined but shall be within the range
  of values that can be represented in that type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  There are five standard signed integer types, designated as signed char, short
  int, int, long int, and long long int. (These and other types may be
  designated in several additional ways, as described in 6.7.2.) There may also be
@@ -2768,12 +2768,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  signed integer types are collectively called signed integer types.39)
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  An object declared as type signed char occupies the same amount of storage as a
  ''plain'' char object. A ''plain'' int object has the natural size suggested by the
  architecture of the execution environment (large enough to contain any value in the range
  INT_MIN to INT_MAX as defined in the header <limits.h>).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  For each of the signed integer types, there is a corresponding (but different) unsigned
  integer type (designated with the keyword unsigned) that uses the same amount of
  storage (including sign information) and has the same alignment requirements. The type
@@ -2782,22 +2782,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  correspond to the extended signed integer types are the extended unsigned integer types.
  The standard and extended unsigned integer types are collectively called unsigned integer
  types.40)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  The standard signed integer types and standard unsigned integer types are collectively
  called the standard integer types, the extended signed integer types and extended
  unsigned integer types are collectively called the extended integer types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  For any two integer types with the same signedness and different integer conversion rank
  (see 6.3.1.1), the range of values of the type with smaller integer conversion rank is a
  subrange of the values of the other type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          9
  The range of nonnegative values of a signed integer type is a subrange of the
  corresponding unsigned integer type, and the representation of the same value in each
  type is the same.41) A computation involving unsigned operands can never overflow,
  because a result that cannot be represented by the resulting unsigned integer type is
  reduced modulo the number that is one greater than the largest value that can be
  represented by the resulting type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          10
  There are three real floating types, designated as float, double, and long
  double.42) The set of values of the type float is a subset of the set of values of the
  type double; the set of values of the type double is a subset of the set of values of the
@@ -2805,48 +2805,48 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          11
  There are three complex types, designated as float _Complex, double
  _Complex, and long double _Complex.43) (Complex types are a conditional
  feature that implementations need not support; see 6.10.8.3.) The real floating and
  complex types are collectively called the floating types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          12
  For each floating type there is a corresponding real type, which is always a real floating
  type. For real floating types, it is the same type. For complex types, it is the type given
  by deleting the keyword _Complex from the type name.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          13
  Each complex type has the same representation and alignment requirements as an array
  type containing exactly two elements of the corresponding real type; the first element is
  equal to the real part, and the second element to the imaginary part, of the complex
  number.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          14
  The type char, the signed and unsigned integer types, and the floating types are
  collectively called the basic types. The basic types are complete object types. Even if the
  implementation defines two or more basic types to have the same representation, they are
  nevertheless different types.44)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          15
  The three types char, signed char, and unsigned char are collectively called
  the character types. The implementation shall define char to have the same range,
  representation, and behavior as either signed char or unsigned char.45)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          16
  An enumeration comprises a set of named integer constant values. Each distinct
  enumeration constitutes a different enumerated type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          17
  The type char, the signed and unsigned integer types, and the enumerated types are
  collectively called integer types. The integer and real floating types are collectively called
  real types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          18
  Integer and floating types are collectively called arithmetic types. Each arithmetic type
  belongs to one type domain: the real type domain comprises the real types, the complex
  type domain comprises the complex types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          19
  The void type comprises an empty set of values; it is an incomplete object type that
  cannot be completed.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          20
  Any number of derived types can be constructed from the object and function types, as
  follows:
 
                                                                            
@@ -2878,10 +2878,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  support; see 6.10.8.3.)
 
                                                                          
  These methods of constructing derived types can be applied recursively.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          21
  Arithmetic types and pointer types are collectively called scalar types. Array and
  structure types are collectively called aggregate types.46)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          22
  An array type of unknown size is an incomplete type. It is completed, for an identifier of
  that type, by specifying the size in a later declaration (with internal or external linkage).
  A structure or union type of unknown content (as described in 6.7.2.3) is an incomplete
@@ -2890,26 +2890,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  type. It is completed, for all declarations of that type, by declaring the same structure or
  union tag with its defining content later in the same scope.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          23
  A type has known constant size if the type is not incomplete and is not a variable length
  array type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          24
  Array, function, and pointer types are collectively called derived declarator types. A
  declarator type derivation from a type T is the construction of a derived declarator type
  from T by the application of an array-type, a function-type, or a pointer-type derivation to
  T.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          25
  A type is characterized by its type category, which is either the outermost derivation of a
  derived type (as noted above in the construction of derived types), or the type itself if the
  type consists of no derived types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          26
  Any type so far mentioned is an unqualified type. Each unqualified type has several
  qualified versions of its type,47) corresponding to the combinations of one, two, or all
  three of the const, volatile, and restrict qualifiers. The qualified or unqualified
  versions of a type are distinct types that belong to the same type category and have the
  same representation and alignment requirements.48) A derived type is not qualified by the
  qualifiers (if any) of the type from which it is derived.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          27
  Further, there is the _Atomic qualifier. The presence of the _Atomic qualifier
  designates an atomic type. The size, representation, and alignment of an atomic type
  need not be the same as those of the corresponding unqualified type. Therefore, this
@@ -2917,7 +2917,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  atomic version of a type is permitted along with the other qualified versions of a type.
  The phrase ''qualified or unqualified type'', without specific mention of atomic, does not
  include the atomic types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          28
  A pointer to void shall have the same representation and alignment requirements as a
  pointer to a character type.48) Similarly, pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of
  compatible types shall have the same representation and alignment requirements. All
@@ -2925,7 +2925,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  as each other. All pointers to union types shall have the same representation and
  alignment requirements as each other. Pointers to other types need not have the same
  representation or alignment requirements.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          29
  EXAMPLE 1 The type designated as ''float *'' has type ''pointer to float''. Its type category is
  pointer, not a floating type. The const-qualified version of this type is designated as ''float * const''
  whereas the type designated as ''const float *'' is not a qualified type -- its type is ''pointer to const-
@@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  qualified float'' and is a pointer to a qualified type.
  
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          30
  EXAMPLE 2 The type designated as ''struct tag (*[5])(float)'' has type ''array of pointer to
  function returning struct tag''. The array has length five and the function has a single parameter of type
  float. Its type category is array.
@@ -2984,16 +2984,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.6.1 General
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The representations of all types are unspecified except as stated in this subclause.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  Except for bit-fields, objects are composed of contiguous sequences of one or more bytes,
  the number, order, and encoding of which are either explicitly specified or
  implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Values stored in unsigned bit-fields and objects of type unsigned char shall be
  represented using a pure binary notation.49)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  Values stored in non-bit-field objects of any other object type consist of n x CHAR_BIT
  bits, where n is the size of an object of that type, in bytes. The value may be copied into
  an object of type unsigned char [n] (e.g., by memcpy); the resulting set of bytes is
@@ -3002,14 +3002,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  bits the bit-field comprises in the addressable storage unit holding it. Two values (other
  than NaNs) with the same object representation compare equal, but values that compare
  equal may have different object representations.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  Certain object representations need not represent a value of the object type. If the stored
  value of an object has such a representation and is read by an lvalue expression that does
  not have character type, the behavior is undefined. If such a representation is produced
  by a side effect that modifies all or any part of the object by an lvalue expression that
  does not have character type, the behavior is undefined.50) Such a representation is called
  a trap representation.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  When a value is stored in an object of structure or union type, including in a member
  object, the bytes of the object representation that correspond to any padding bytes take
  unspecified values.51) The value of a structure or union object is never a trap
@@ -3018,17 +3018,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  representation, even though the value of a member of the structure or union object may be
  a trap representation.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  When a value is stored in a member of an object of union type, the bytes of the object
  representation that do not correspond to that member but do correspond to other members
  take unspecified values.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  Where an operator is applied to a value that has more than one object representation,
  which object representation is used shall not affect the value of the result.52) Where a
  value is stored in an object using a type that has more than one object representation for
  that value, it is unspecified which representation is used, but a trap representation shall
  not be generated.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          9
  Loads and stores of objects with                            atomic       types     are     done      with
  memory_order_seq_cst semantics.
 
                                                                           Forward references: declarations (6.7), expressions (6.5), lvalues, arrays, and function
@@ -3060,14 +3060,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.6.2 Integer types
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  For unsigned integer types other than unsigned char, the bits of the object
  representation shall be divided into two groups: value bits and padding bits (there need
  not be any of the latter). If there are N value bits, each bit shall represent a different
  power of 2 between 1 and 2 N -1 , so that objects of that type shall be capable of
  representing values from 0 to 2 N - 1 using a pure binary representation; this shall be
  known as the value representation. The values of any padding bits are unspecified.53)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  For signed integer types, the bits of the object representation shall be divided into three
  groups: value bits, padding bits, and the sign bit. There need not be any padding bits;
  signed char shall not have any padding bits. There shall be exactly one sign bit.
@@ -3088,7 +3088,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  complement), is a trap representation or a normal value. In the case of sign and
  magnitude and ones' complement, if this representation is a normal value it is called a
  negative zero.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  If the implementation supports negative zeros, they shall be generated only by:
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   the &, |, ^, ~, <<, and >> operators with operands that produce such a value;
@@ -3098,16 +3098,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          
  It is unspecified whether these cases actually generate a negative zero or a normal zero,
  and whether a negative zero becomes a normal zero when stored in an object.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  If the implementation does not support negative zeros, the behavior of the &, |, ^, ~, <<,
  and >> operators with operands that would produce such a value is undefined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  The values of any padding bits are unspecified.54) A valid (non-trap) object representation
  of a signed integer type where the sign bit is zero is a valid object representation of the
  corresponding unsigned type, and shall represent the same value. For any integer type,
  the object representation where all the bits are zero shall be a representation of the value
  zero in that type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The precision of an integer type is the number of bits it uses to represent values,
  excluding any sign and padding bits. The width of an integer type is the same but
  including any sign bit; thus for unsigned integer types the two values are the same, while
@@ -3134,7 +3134,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.7 Compatible type and composite type
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  Two types have compatible type if their types are the same. Additional rules for
  determining whether two types are compatible are described in 6.7.2 for type specifiers,
  in 6.7.3 for type qualifiers, and in 6.7.6 for declarators.55) Moreover, two structure,
@@ -3149,10 +3149,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  with the same name. For two structures, corresponding members shall be declared in the
  same order. For two structures or unions, corresponding bit-fields shall have the same
  widths. For two enumerations, corresponding members shall have the same values.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  All declarations that refer to the same object or function shall have compatible type;
  otherwise, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A composite type can be constructed from two types that are compatible; it is a type that
  is compatible with both of the two types and satisfies the following conditions:
 
                                                                            
@@ -3181,13 +3181,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  parameters.
 
                                                                          
  These rules apply recursively to the types from which the two types are derived.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  For an identifier with internal or external linkage declared in a scope in which a prior
  declaration of that identifier is visible,56) if the prior declaration specifies internal or
  external linkage, the type of the identifier at the later declaration becomes the composite
  type.
 
                                                                           Forward references: array declarators (6.7.6.2).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  EXAMPLE        Given the following two file scope declarations:
 
                                                                                     int f(int (*)(), double (*)[3]);
@@ -3207,23 +3207,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.2.8 Alignment of objects
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  Complete object types have alignment requirements which place restrictions on the
  addresses at which objects of that type may be allocated. An alignment is an
  implementation-defined integer value representing the number of bytes between
  successive addresses at which a given object can be allocated. An object type imposes an
  alignment requirement on every object of that type: stricter alignment can be requested
  using the _Alignas keyword.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A fundamental alignment is represented by an alignment less than or equal to the greatest
  alignment supported by the implementation in all contexts, which is equal to
  _Alignof (max_align_t).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  An extended alignment is represented by an alignment greater than
  _Alignof (max_align_t). It is implementation-defined whether any extended
  alignments are supported and the contexts in which they are supported. A type having an
  extended alignment requirement is an over-aligned type.57)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  Alignments are represented as values of the type size_t. Valid alignments include only
  those values returned by an _Alignof expression for fundamental types, plus an
  additional implementation-defined set of values, which may be empty. Every valid
@@ -3231,15 +3231,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  Alignments have an order from weaker to stronger or stricter alignments. Stricter
  alignments have larger alignment values. An address that satisfies an alignment
  requirement also satisfies any weaker valid alignment requirement.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The alignment requirement of a complete type can be queried using an _Alignof
  expression. The types char, signed char, and unsigned char shall have the
  weakest alignment requirement.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  Comparing alignments is meaningful and provides the obvious results:
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   Two alignments are equal when their numeric values are equal.
@@ -3255,13 +3255,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3 Conversions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  Several operators convert operand values from one type to another automatically. This
  subclause specifies the result required from such an implicit conversion, as well as those
  that result from a cast operation (an explicit conversion). The list in 6.3.1.8 summarizes
  the conversions performed by most ordinary operators; it is supplemented as required by
  the discussion of each operator in 6.5.
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  Conversion of an operand value to a compatible type causes no change to the value or the
  representation.
 
                                                                             Forward references: cast operators (6.5.4).
@@ -3271,7 +3271,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.1 Boolean, characters, and integers
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  Every integer type has an integer conversion rank defined as follows:
 
                                                                              
 
                                                                            •   No two signed integer types shall have the same rank, even if they have the same
@@ -3295,7 +3295,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                            •   For all integer types T1, T2, and T3, if T1 has greater rank than T2 and T2 has
  greater rank than T3, then T1 has greater rank than T3.
 
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  The following may be used in an expression wherever an int or unsigned int may
  be used:
 
@@ -3309,7 +3309,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  bit-field), the value is converted to an int; otherwise, it is converted to an unsigned
  int. These are called the integer promotions.58) All other types are unchanged by the
  integer promotions.
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            3
  The integer promotions preserve value including sign. As discussed earlier, whether a
  ''plain'' char is treated as signed is implementation-defined.
 
                                                                             Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.2.2), structure and union specifiers
@@ -3323,7 +3323,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.2 Boolean type
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When any scalar value is converted to _Bool, the result is 0 if the value compares equal
  to 0; otherwise, the result is 1.59)
 
@@ -3333,14 +3333,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.3 Signed and unsigned integers
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When a value with integer type is converted to another integer type other than _Bool, if
  the value can be represented by the new type, it is unchanged.
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  Otherwise, if the new type is unsigned, the value is converted by repeatedly adding or
  subtracting one more than the maximum value that can be represented in the new type
  until the value is in the range of the new type.60)
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            3
  Otherwise, the new type is signed and the value cannot be represented in it; either the
  result is implementation-defined or an implementation-defined signal is raised.
 
@@ -3350,14 +3350,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.4 Real floating and integer
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When a finite value of real floating type is converted to an integer type other than _Bool,
  the fractional part is discarded (i.e., the value is truncated toward zero). If the value of
  the integral part cannot be represented by the integer type, the behavior is undefined.61)
  
  
 
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  When a value of integer type is converted to a real floating type, if the value being
  converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged. If the value being
  converted is in the range of values that can be represented but cannot be represented
@@ -3375,7 +3375,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.5 Real floating types
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When a value of real floating type is converted to a real floating type, if the value being
  converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged. If the value being
  converted is in the range of values that can be represented but cannot be represented
@@ -3387,24 +3387,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.6 Complex types
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When a value of complex type is converted to another complex type, both the real and
  imaginary parts follow the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.7 Real and complex
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  When a value of real type is converted to a complex type, the real part of the complex
  result value is determined by the rules of conversion to the corresponding real type and
  the imaginary part of the complex result value is a positive zero or an unsigned zero.
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            2
  When a value of complex type is converted to a real type, the imaginary part of the
  complex value is discarded and the value of the real part is converted according to the
  conversion rules for the corresponding real type.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            6.3.1.8 Usual arithmetic conversions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
  Many operators that expect operands of arithmetic type cause conversions and yield result
  types in a similar way. The purpose is to determine a common real type for the operands
  and result. For the specified operands, each operand is converted, without change of type
@@ -3440,7 +3440,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                Otherwise, both operands are converted to the unsigned integer type
                corresponding to the type of the operand with signed integer type.
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The values of floating operands and of the results of floating expressions may be
  represented in greater range and precision than that required by the type; the types are not
  changed thereby.63)
@@ -3462,7 +3462,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.3.2.1 Lvalues, arrays, and function designators
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  An lvalue is an expression (with an object type other than void) that potentially
  designates an object;64) if an lvalue does not designate an object when it is evaluated, the
  behavior is undefined. When an object is said to have a particular type, the type is
@@ -3471,7 +3471,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  qualified type, and if it is a structure or union, does not have any member (including,
  recursively, any member or element of all contained aggregates or unions) with a const-
  qualified type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator, the _Alignof operator, the
  unary & operator, the ++ operator, the -- operator, or the left operand of the . operator
  or an assignment operator, an lvalue that does not have array type is converted to the
@@ -3484,13 +3484,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  declared with the register storage class (never had its address taken), and that object
  is uninitialized (not declared with an initializer and no assignment to it has been
  performed prior to use), the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator, the _Alignof operator, or the
  unary & operator, or is a string literal used to initialize an array, an expression that has
  type ''array of type'' is converted to an expression with type ''pointer to type'' that points
  to the initial element of the array object and is not an lvalue. If the array object has
  register storage class, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  A function designator is an expression that has function type. Except when it is the
  operand of the sizeof operator, the _Alignof operator,65) or the unary & operator, a
  function designator with type ''function returning type'' is converted to an expression that
@@ -3518,7 +3518,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.3.2.2 void
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The (nonexistent) value of a void expression (an expression that has type void) shall not
  be used in any way, and implicit or explicit conversions (except to void) shall not be
  applied to such an expression. If an expression of any other type is evaluated as a void
@@ -3527,27 +3527,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.3.2.3 Pointers
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  A pointer to void may be converted to or from a pointer to any object type. A pointer to
  any object type may be converted to a pointer to void and back again; the result shall
  compare equal to the original pointer.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  For any qualifier q, a pointer to a non-q-qualified type may be converted to a pointer to
  the q-qualified version of the type; the values stored in the original and converted pointers
  shall compare equal.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  An integer constant expression with the value 0, or such an expression cast to type
  void *, is called a null pointer constant.66) If a null pointer constant is converted to a
  pointer type, the resulting pointer, called a null pointer, is guaranteed to compare unequal
  to a pointer to any object or function.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  Conversion of a null pointer to another pointer type yields a null pointer of that type.
  Any two null pointers shall compare equal.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  An integer may be converted to any pointer type. Except as previously specified, the
  result is implementation-defined, might not be correctly aligned, might not point to an
  entity of the referenced type, and might be a trap representation.67)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  Any pointer type may be converted to an integer type. Except as previously specified, the
  result is implementation-defined. If the result cannot be represented in the integer type,
  the behavior is undefined. The result need not be in the range of values of any integer
@@ -3555,14 +3555,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  A pointer to an object type may be converted to a pointer to a different object type. If the
  resulting pointer is not correctly aligned68) for the referenced type, the behavior is
  undefined. Otherwise, when converted back again, the result shall compare equal to the
  original pointer. When a pointer to an object is converted to a pointer to a character type,
  the result points to the lowest addressed byte of the object. Successive increments of the
  result, up to the size of the object, yield pointers to the remaining bytes of the object.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  A pointer to a function of one type may be converted to a pointer to a function of another
  type and back again; the result shall compare equal to the original pointer. If a converted
  pointer is used to call a function whose type is not compatible with the referenced type,
@@ -3589,7 +3589,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4 Lexical elements
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     token:
                    keyword
@@ -3607,11 +3607,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  each non-white-space character that cannot be one of the above
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  Each preprocessing token that is converted to a token shall have the lexical form of a
  keyword, an identifier, a constant, a string literal, or a punctuator.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation phases 7 and 8. The
  categories of tokens are: keywords, identifiers, constants, string literals, and punctuators.
  A preprocessing token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation
@@ -3630,7 +3630,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  If the input stream has been parsed into preprocessing tokens up to a given character, the
  next preprocessing token is the longest sequence of characters that could constitute a
  preprocessing token. There is one exception to this rule: header name preprocessing
@@ -3638,14 +3638,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives. In such contexts, a
  sequence of characters that could be either a header name or a string literal is recognized
  as the former.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  EXAMPLE 1 The program fragment 1Ex is parsed as a preprocessing number token (one that is not a
  valid floating or integer constant token), even though a parse as the pair of preprocessing tokens 1 and Ex
  might produce a valid expression (for example, if Ex were a macro defined as +1). Similarly, the program
  fragment 1E1 is parsed as a preprocessing number (one that is a valid floating constant token), whether or
  not E is a macro name.
  
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  EXAMPLE 2 The program fragment x+++++y is parsed as x ++ ++ + y, which violates a constraint on
  increment operators, even though the parse x ++ + ++ y might yield a correct expression.
  
@@ -3663,7 +3663,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.1 Keywords
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     keyword: one of
                 auto                        * if                             unsigned
@@ -3683,7 +3683,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 goto                          union
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The above tokens (case sensitive) are reserved (in translation phases 7 and 8) for use as
  keywords, and shall not be used otherwise. The keyword _Imaginary is reserved for
 
@@ -3699,7 +3699,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.2.1 General
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     identifier:
                  identifier-nondigit
@@ -3718,12 +3718,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  0 1        2     3    4    5    6     7    8    9
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An identifier is a sequence of nondigit characters (including the underscore _, the
  lowercase and uppercase Latin letters, and other characters) and digits, which designates
  one or more entities as described in 6.2.1. Lowercase and uppercase letters are distinct.
  There is no specific limit on the maximum length of an identifier.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Each universal character name in an identifier shall designate a character whose encoding
  in ISO/IEC 10646 falls into one of the ranges specified in D.1.71) The initial character
  shall not be a universal character name designating a character whose encoding falls into
@@ -3734,18 +3734,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  When preprocessing tokens are converted to tokens during translation phase 7, if a
  preprocessing token could be converted to either a keyword or an identifier, it is converted
  to a keyword.
 
                                                                          Implementation limits
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  As discussed in 5.2.4.1, an implementation may limit the number of significant initial
  characters in an identifier; the limit for an external name (an identifier that has external
  linkage) may be more restrictive than that for an internal name (a macro name or an
  identifier that does not have external linkage). The number of significant characters in an
  identifier is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  Any identifiers that differ in a significant character are different identifiers. If two
  identifiers differ only in nonsignificant characters, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                                           Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), macro replacement (6.10.3).
@@ -3760,18 +3760,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.2.2 Predefined identifiers
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The identifier __func__ shall be implicitly declared by the translator as if,
  immediately following the opening brace of each function definition, the declaration
 
                                                                                     static const char __func__[] = "function-name";
 
                                                                          
  appeared, where function-name is the name of the lexically-enclosing function.72)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  This name is encoded as if the implicit declaration had been written in the source
  character set and then translated into the execution character set as indicated in translation
  phase 5.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  EXAMPLE        Consider the code fragment:
 
                                                                                     #include <stdio.h>
@@ -3801,7 +3801,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.3 Universal character names
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     universal-character-name:
                  \u hex-quad
@@ -3811,16 +3811,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                               hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A universal character name shall not specify a character whose short identifier is less than
  00A0 other than 0024 ($), 0040 (@), or 0060 ('), nor one in the range D800 through
  DFFF inclusive.73)
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Universal character names may be used in identifiers, character constants, and string
  literals to designate characters that are not in the basic character set.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  The universal character name \Unnnnnnnn designates the character whose eight-digit
  short identifier (as specified by ISO/IEC 10646) is nnnnnnnn.74) Similarly, the universal
  character name \unnnn designates the character whose four-digit short identifier is nnnn
@@ -3843,7 +3843,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.4 Constants
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     constant:
                  integer-constant
@@ -3852,17 +3852,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  character-constant
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  Each constant shall have a type and the value of a constant shall be in the range of
  representable values for its type.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Each constant has a type, determined by its form and value, as detailed later.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.4.1 Integer constants
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
 
                                                                                     integer-constant:
@@ -3901,20 +3901,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 ll LL
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An integer constant begins with a digit, but has no period or exponent part. It may have a
  prefix that specifies its base and a suffix that specifies its type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A decimal constant begins with a nonzero digit and consists of a sequence of decimal
  digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix 0 optionally followed by a sequence of the
  digits 0 through 7 only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
  by a sequence of the decimal digits and the letters a (or A) through f (or F) with values
  10 through 15 respectively.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  The value of a decimal constant is computed base 10; that of an octal constant, base 8;
  that of a hexadecimal constant, base 16. The lexically first digit is the most significant.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  The type of an integer constant is the first of the corresponding list in which its value can
  be represented.
 
@@ -3955,7 +3955,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  Both u or U         unsigned long long int                 unsigned long long int
  and ll or LL
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  If an integer constant cannot be represented by any type in its list, it may have an
  extended integer type, if the extended integer type can represent its value. If all of the
  types in the list for the constant are signed, the extended integer type shall be signed. If
@@ -3968,7 +3968,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.4.2 Floating constants
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
 
                                                                                     floating-constant:
@@ -4007,7 +4007,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  f l F L
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A floating constant has a significand part that may be followed by an exponent part and a
  suffix that specifies its type. The components of the significand part may include a digit
  sequence representing the whole-number part, followed by a period (.), followed by a
@@ -4016,7 +4016,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  Either the whole-number part or the fraction part has to be present; for decimal floating
  constants, either the period or the exponent part has to be present.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  The significand part is interpreted as a (decimal or hexadecimal) rational number; the
  digit sequence in the exponent part is interpreted as a decimal integer. For decimal
  floating constants, the exponent indicates the power of 10 by which the significand part is
@@ -4027,20 +4027,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  adjacent to the nearest representable value, chosen in an implementation-defined manner.
  For hexadecimal floating constants when FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the result is
  correctly rounded.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  An unsuffixed floating constant has type double. If suffixed by the letter f or F, it has
  type float. If suffixed by the letter l or L, it has type long double.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  Floating constants are converted to internal format as if at translation-time. The
  conversion of a floating constant shall not raise an exceptional condition or a floating-
  point exception at execution time. All floating constants of the same source form75) shall
  convert to the same internal format with the same value.
 
                                                                          Recommended practice
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The implementation should produce a diagnostic message if a hexadecimal constant
  cannot be represented exactly in its evaluation format; the implementation should then
  proceed with the translation of the program.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  The translation-time conversion of floating constants should match the execution-time
  conversion of character strings by library functions, such as strtod, given matching
  inputs suitable for both conversions, the same result format, and default execution-time
@@ -4059,20 +4059,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.4.3 Enumeration constants
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     enumeration-constant:
                 identifier
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An identifier declared as an enumeration constant has type int.
 
                                                                           Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.2.2).
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.4.4 Character constants
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
 
                                                                                     character-constant:
@@ -4104,13 +4104,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               hexadecimal-escape-sequence hexadecimal-digit
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An integer character constant is a sequence of one or more multibyte characters enclosed
  in single-quotes, as in 'x'. A wide character constant is the same, except prefixed by the
  letter L, u, or U. With a few exceptions detailed later, the elements of the sequence are
  any members of the source character set; they are mapped in an implementation-defined
  manner to members of the execution character set.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  The single-quote ', the double-quote ", the question-mark ?, the backslash \, and
  arbitrary integer values are representable according to the following table of escape
  sequences:
@@ -4122,32 +4122,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
        octal character           \octal digits
        hexadecimal character     \x hexadecimal digits
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  The double-quote " and question-mark ? are representable either by themselves or by the
  escape sequences \" and \?, respectively, but the single-quote ' and the backslash \
  shall be represented, respectively, by the escape sequences \' and \\.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  The octal digits that follow the backslash in an octal escape sequence are taken to be part
  of the construction of a single character for an integer character constant or of a single
  wide character for a wide character constant. The numerical value of the octal integer so
  formed specifies the value of the desired character or wide character.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The hexadecimal digits that follow the backslash and the letter x in a hexadecimal escape
  sequence are taken to be part of the construction of a single character for an integer
  character constant or of a single wide character for a wide character constant. The
  numerical value of the hexadecimal integer so formed specifies the value of the desired
  character or wide character.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  Each octal or hexadecimal escape sequence is the longest sequence of characters that can
  constitute the escape sequence.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  In addition, characters not in the basic character set are representable by universal
  character names and certain nongraphic characters are representable by escape sequences
  consisting of the backslash \ followed by a lowercase letter: \a, \b, \f, \n, \r, \t,
  and \v.77)
 
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          9
  The value of an octal or hexadecimal escape sequence shall be in the range of
  representable values for the corresponding type:
 
                                                                          @@ -4158,7 +4158,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         U          char32_t
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          10
  An integer character constant has type int. The value of an integer character constant
  containing a single character that maps to a single-byte execution character is the
  numerical value of the representation of the mapped character interpreted as an integer.
@@ -4168,7 +4168,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  a single character or escape sequence, its value is the one that results when an object with
  type char whose value is that of the single character or escape sequence is converted to
  type int.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          11
  A wide character constant prefixed by the letter L has type wchar_t, an integer type
  defined in the <stddef.h> header; a wide character constant prefixed by the letter u or
  U has type char16_t or char32_t, respectively, unsigned integer types defined in the
@@ -4181,10 +4181,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  members of the extended execution character set, or containing a multibyte character or
  escape sequence not represented in the extended execution character set, is
  implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          12
  EXAMPLE 1      The construction '\0' is commonly used to represent the null character.
  
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          13
  EXAMPLE 2 Consider implementations that use two's complement representation for integers and eight
  bits for objects that have type char. In an implementation in which type char has the same range of
  values as signed char, the integer character constant '\xFF' has the value -1; if type char has the
@@ -4194,7 +4194,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          14
  EXAMPLE 3 Even if eight bits are used for objects that have type char, the construction '\x123'
  specifies an integer character constant containing only one character, since a hexadecimal escape sequence
  is terminated only by a non-hexadecimal character. To specify an integer character constant containing the
@@ -4202,7 +4202,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  escape sequence is terminated after three octal digits. (The value of this two-character integer character
  constant is implementation-defined.)
  
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          15
  EXAMPLE 4 Even if 12 or more bits are used for objects that have type wchar_t, the construction
  L'\1234' specifies the implementation-defined value that results from the combination of the values
  0123 and '4'.
@@ -4218,7 +4218,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.5 String literals
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     string-literal:
                   encoding-prefixopt " s-char-sequenceopt "
@@ -4236,15 +4236,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                     escape-sequence
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A sequence of adjacent string literal tokens shall not include both a wide string literal and
  a UTF-8 string literal.
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A character string literal is a sequence of zero or more multibyte characters enclosed in
  double-quotes, as in "xyz". A UTF-8 string literal is the same, except prefixed by u8.
  A wide string literal is the same, except prefixed by the letter L, u, or U.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  The same considerations apply to each element of the sequence in a string literal as if it
  were in an integer character constant (for a character or UTF-8 string literal) or a wide
  character constant (for a wide string literal), except that the single-quote ' is
@@ -4252,7 +4252,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  be represented by the escape sequence \".
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  In translation phase 6, the multibyte character sequences specified by any sequence of
  adjacent character and identically-prefixed string literal tokens are concatenated into a
  single multibyte character sequence. If any of the tokens has an encoding prefix, the
@@ -4260,7 +4260,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  is treated as a character string literal. Whether differently-prefixed wide string literal
  tokens can be concatenated and, if so, the treatment of the resulting multibyte character
  sequence are implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  In translation phase 7, a byte or code of value zero is appended to each multibyte
  character sequence that results from a string literal or literals.78) The multibyte character
  sequence is then used to initialize an array of static storage duration and length just
@@ -4278,11 +4278,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  its type, with an implementation-defined current locale. The value of a string literal
  containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the execution
  character set is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  It is unspecified whether these arrays are distinct provided their elements have the
  appropriate values. If the program attempts to modify such an array, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  EXAMPLE 1      This pair of adjacent character string literals
 
                                                                                     "\x12" "3"
@@ -4291,7 +4291,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  because escape sequences are converted into single members of the execution character set just prior to
  adjacent string literal concatenation.
  
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          9
  EXAMPLE 2      Each of the sequences of adjacent string literal tokens
  
  
@@ -4330,7 +4330,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.6 Punctuators
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     punctuator: one of
                  [ ] ( ) { } . ->
@@ -4342,14 +4342,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  <: :> <% %> %: %:%:
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A punctuator is a symbol that has independent syntactic and semantic significance.
  Depending on context, it may specify an operation to be performed (which in turn may
  yield a value or a function designator, produce a side effect, or some combination thereof)
  in which case it is known as an operator (other forms of operator also exist in some
  contexts). An operand is an entity on which an operator acts.
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  In all aspects of the language, the six tokens79)
 
                                                                                     <:    :>      <%    %>     %:     %:%:
@@ -4372,7 +4372,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.7 Header names
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     header-name:
                  < h-char-sequence >
@@ -4391,10 +4391,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                  the new-line character and "
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  The sequences in both forms of header names are mapped in an implementation-defined
  manner to headers or external source file names as specified in 6.10.2.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  If the characters ', \, ", //, or /* occur in the sequence between the < and > delimiters,
  the behavior is undefined. Similarly, if the characters ', \, //, or /* occur in the
  
@@ -4405,7 +4405,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  sequence between the " delimiters, the behavior is undefined.81) Header name
  preprocessing tokens are recognized only within #include preprocessing directives and
  in implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives.82)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  EXAMPLE       The following sequence of characters:
 
                                                                                     0x3<1/a.h>1e2
@@ -4431,7 +4431,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.8 Preprocessing numbers
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     pp-number:
                 digit
@@ -4445,14 +4445,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 pp-number       .
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Description
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A preprocessing number begins with a digit optionally preceded by a period (.) and may
  be followed by valid identifier characters and the character sequences e+, e-, E+, E-,
  p+, p-, P+, or P-.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Preprocessing number tokens lexically include all floating and integer constant tokens.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  A preprocessing number does not have type or a value; it acquires both after a successful
  conversion (as part of translation phase 7) to a floating constant token or an integer
  constant token.
@@ -4462,16 +4462,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.4.9 Comments
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters /*
  introduce a comment. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify
  multibyte characters and to find the characters */ that terminate it.83)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters //
  introduce a comment that includes all multibyte characters up to, but not including, the
  next new-line character. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify
  multibyte characters and to find the terminating new-line character.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                                     "a//b"                             //   four-character string literal
@@ -4500,26 +4500,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5 Expressions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  An expression is a sequence of operators and operands that specifies computation of a
  value, or that designates an object or a function, or that generates side effects, or that
  performs a combination thereof. The value computations of the operands of an operator
  are sequenced before the value computation of the result of the operator.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  If a side effect on a scalar object is unsequenced relative to either a different side effect
  on the same scalar object or a value computation using the value of the same scalar
  object, the behavior is undefined. If there are multiple allowable orderings of the
  subexpressions of an expression, the behavior is undefined if such an unsequenced side
  effect occurs in any of the orderings.84)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  The grouping of operators and operands is indicated by the syntax.85) Except as specified
  later, side effects and value computations of subexpressions are unsequenced.86)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  Some operators (the unary operator ~, and the binary operators <<, >>, &, ^, and |,
  collectively described as bitwise operators) are required to have operands that have
  integer type. These operators yield values that depend on the internal representations of
  integers, and have implementation-defined and undefined aspects for signed types.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  If an exceptional condition occurs during the evaluation of an expression (that is, if the
  result is not mathematically defined or not in the range of representable values for its
  type), the behavior is undefined.
@@ -4527,7 +4527,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  The effective type of an object for an access to its stored value is the declared type of the
  object, if any.87) If a value is stored into an object having no declared type through an
  lvalue having a type that is not a character type, then the type of the lvalue becomes the
@@ -4538,7 +4538,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  value is the effective type of the object from which the value is copied, if it has one. For
  all other accesses to an object having no declared type, the effective type of the object is
  simply the type of the lvalue used for the access.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          7
  An object shall have its stored value accessed only by an lvalue expression that has one of
  the following types:88)
 
                                                                            
@@ -4552,7 +4552,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  members (including, recursively, a member of a subaggregate or contained union), or
 
                                                                          •   a character type.
 
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          8
  A floating expression may be contracted, that is, evaluated as though it were a single
  operation, thereby omitting rounding errors implied by the source code and the
  expression evaluation method.89) The FP_CONTRACT pragma in <math.h> provides a
@@ -4609,7 +4609,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5.1 Primary expressions
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     primary-expression:
                  identifier
@@ -4619,21 +4619,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  generic-selection
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  An identifier is a primary expression, provided it has been declared as designating an
  object (in which case it is an lvalue) or a function (in which case it is a function
  designator).91)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A constant is a primary expression. Its type depends on its form and value, as detailed in
  6.4.4.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  A string literal is a primary expression. It is an lvalue with type as detailed in 6.4.5.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  A parenthesized expression is a primary expression. Its type and value are identical to
  those of the unparenthesized expression. It is an lvalue, a function designator, or a void
  expression if the unparenthesized expression is, respectively, an lvalue, a function
  designator, or a void expression.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  A generic selection is a primary expression. Its type and value depend on the selected
  generic association, as detailed in the following subclause.
 
                                                                           Forward references: declarations (6.7).
@@ -4645,7 +4645,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5.1.1 Generic selection
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                                     generic-selection:
                  _Generic ( assignment-expression , generic-assoc-list )
@@ -4661,7 +4661,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A generic selection shall have no more than one default generic association. The type
  name in a generic association shall specify a complete object type other than a variably
  modified type. No two generic associations in the same generic selection shall specify
@@ -4670,18 +4670,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  generic selection has no default generic association, its controlling expression shall
  have type compatible with exactly one of the types named in its generic association list.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  The controlling expression of a generic selection is not evaluated. If a generic selection
  has a generic association with a type name that is compatible with the type of the
  controlling expression, then the result expression of the generic selection is the
  expression in that generic association. Otherwise, the result expression of the generic
  selection is the expression in the default generic association. None of the expressions
  from any other generic association of the generic selection is evaluated.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  The type and value of a generic selection are identical to those of its result expression. It
  is an lvalue, a function designator, or a void expression if its result expression is,
  respectively, an lvalue, a function designator, or a void expression.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  EXAMPLE      The cbrt type-generic macro could be implemented as follows:
 
                                                                                     #define cbrt(X) _Generic((X),                                      \
@@ -4695,7 +4695,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5.2 Postfix operators
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Syntax
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
 
                                                                                     postfix-expression:
@@ -4716,18 +4716,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5.2.1 Array subscripting
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  One of the expressions shall have type ''pointer to complete object type'', the other
  expression shall have integer type, and the result has type ''type''.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  A postfix expression followed by an expression in square brackets [] is a subscripted
  designation of an element of an array object. The definition of the subscript operator []
  is that E1[E2] is identical to (*((E1)+(E2))). Because of the conversion rules that
  apply to the binary + operator, if E1 is an array object (equivalently, a pointer to the
  initial element of an array object) and E2 is an integer, E1[E2] designates the E2-th
  element of E1 (counting from zero).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  Successive subscript operators designate an element of a multidimensional array object.
  If E is an n-dimensional array (n >= 2) with dimensions i x j x . . . x k, then E (used as
  other than an lvalue) is converted to a pointer to an (n - 1)-dimensional array with
@@ -4735,7 +4735,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  implicitly as a result of subscripting, the result is the referenced (n - 1)-dimensional
  array, which itself is converted into a pointer if used as other than an lvalue. It follows
  from this that arrays are stored in row-major order (last subscript varies fastest).
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  EXAMPLE        Consider the array object defined by the declaration
 
                                                                                     int x[3][5];
@@ -4755,28 +4755,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          6.5.2.2 Function calls
                                                                          
 
                                                                          Constraints
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
  The expression that denotes the called function92) shall have type pointer to function
  returning void or returning a complete object type other than an array type.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          2
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that includes a prototype, the
  number of arguments shall agree with the number of parameters. Each argument shall
  have a type such that its value may be assigned to an object with the unqualified version
  of the type of its corresponding parameter.
 
                                                                          Semantics
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          3
  A postfix expression followed by parentheses () containing a possibly empty, comma-
  separated list of expressions is a function call. The postfix expression denotes the called
  function. The list of expressions specifies the arguments to the function.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          4
  An argument may be an expression of any complete object type. In preparing for the call
  to a function, the arguments are evaluated, and each parameter is assigned the value of the
  corresponding argument.93)
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          5
  If the expression that denotes the called function has type pointer to function returning an
  object type, the function call expression has the same type as that object type, and has the
  value determined as specified in 6.8.6.4. Otherwise, the function call has type void.
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          6
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that does not include a
  prototype, the integer promotions are performed on each argument, and arguments that
  have type float are promoted to double. These are called the default argument
@@ -4797,31 +4797,31 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        •   both types are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of a character type or
  void.
 
                                                                        
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        7
  If the expression that denotes the called function has a type that does include a prototype,
  the arguments are implicitly converted, as if by assignment, to the types of the
  corresponding parameters, taking the type of each parameter to be the unqualified version
  of its declared type. The ellipsis notation in a function prototype declarator causes
  argument type conversion to stop after the last declared parameter. The default argument
  promotions are performed on trailing arguments.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        8
  No other conversions are performed implicitly; in particular, the number and types of
  arguments are not compared with those of the parameters in a function definition that
  does not include a function prototype declarator.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        9
  If the function is defined with a type that is not compatible with the type (of the
  expression) pointed to by the expression that denotes the called function, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        10
  There is a sequence point after the evaluations of the function designator and the actual
  arguments but before the actual call. Every evaluation in the calling function (including
  other function calls) that is not otherwise specifically sequenced before or after the
  execution of the body of the called function is indeterminately sequenced with respect to
  the execution of the called function.94)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        11
  Recursive function calls shall be permitted, both directly and indirectly through any chain
  of other functions.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        12
  EXAMPLE        In the function call
 
                                                                                   (*pf[f1()]) (f2(), f3() + f4())
@@ -4846,10 +4846,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.2.3 Structure and union members
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The first operand of the . operator shall have an atomic, qualified, or unqualified
  structure or union type, and the second operand shall name a member of that type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The first operand of the -> operator shall have type ''pointer to atomic, qualified, or
  unqualified structure'' or ''pointer to atomic, qualified, or unqualified union'', and the
  second operand shall name a member of the type pointed to.
@@ -4857,21 +4857,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  A postfix expression followed by the . operator and an identifier designates a member of
  a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member,95) and is an lvalue if
  the first expression is an lvalue. If the first expression has qualified type, the result has
  the so-qualified version of the type of the designated member.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  A postfix expression followed by the -> operator and an identifier designates a member
  of a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member of the object to
  which the first expression points, and is an lvalue.96) If the first expression is a pointer to
  a qualified type, the result has the so-qualified version of the type of the designated
  member.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  Accessing a member of an atomic structure or union object results in undefined
  behavior.97)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        6
  One special guarantee is made in order to simplify the use of unions: if a union contains
  several structures that share a common initial sequence (see below), and if the union
  object currently contains one of these structures, it is permitted to inspect the common
@@ -4879,11 +4879,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  is visible. Two structures share a common initial sequence if corresponding members
  have compatible types (and, for bit-fields, the same widths) for a sequence of one or more
  initial members.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        7
  EXAMPLE 1 If f is a function returning a structure or union, and x is a member of that structure or
  union, f().x is a valid postfix expression but is not an lvalue.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        8
  EXAMPLE 2       In:
 
                                                                                   struct s { int i; const int ci; };
@@ -4906,7 +4906,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           vs.ci      volatile const int
 
                                                                        
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        9
  EXAMPLE 3       The following is a valid fragment:
 
                                                                                   union {
@@ -4971,11 +4971,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.2.4 Postfix increment and decrement operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The operand of the postfix increment or decrement operator shall have atomic, qualified,
  or unqualified real or pointer type, and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The result of the postfix ++ operator is the value of the operand. As a side effect, the
  value of the operand object is incremented (that is, the value 1 of the appropriate type is
  added to it). See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment for
@@ -4985,7 +4985,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  function call, the operation of postfix ++ is a single evaluation. Postfix ++ on an object
  with atomic type is a read-modify-write operation with memory_order_seq_cst
  memory order semantics.98)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The postfix -- operator is analogous to the postfix ++ operator, except that the value of
  the operand is decremented (that is, the value 1 of the appropriate type is subtracted from
  it).
@@ -5010,35 +5010,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.2.5 Compound literals
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The type name shall specify a complete object type or an array of unknown size, but not a
  variable length array type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  All the constraints for initializer lists in 6.7.9 also apply to compound literals.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  A postfix expression that consists of a parenthesized type name followed by a brace-
  enclosed list of initializers is a compound literal. It provides an unnamed object whose
  
 
  value is given by the initializer list.99)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  If the type name specifies an array of unknown size, the size is determined by the
  initializer list as specified in 6.7.9, and the type of the compound literal is that of the
  completed array type. Otherwise (when the type name specifies an object type), the type
  of the compound literal is that specified by the type name. In either case, the result is an
  lvalue.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  The value of the compound literal is that of an unnamed object initialized by the
  initializer list. If the compound literal occurs outside the body of a function, the object
  has static storage duration; otherwise, it has automatic storage duration associated with
  the enclosing block.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        6
  All the semantic rules for initializer lists in 6.7.9 also apply to compound literals.100)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        7
  String literals, and compound literals with const-qualified types, need not designate
  distinct objects.101)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        8
  EXAMPLE 1       The file scope definition
 
                                                                                   int *p = (int []){2, 4};
@@ -5047,7 +5047,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  second, four. The expressions in this compound literal are required to be constant. The unnamed object
  has static storage duration.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        9
  EXAMPLE 2       In contrast, in
 
                                                                                   void f(void)
@@ -5062,7 +5062,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointed to by p and the second, zero. The expressions in this compound literal need not be constant. The
  unnamed object has automatic storage duration.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        10
  EXAMPLE 3 Initializers with designations can be combined with compound literals. Structure objects
  created using compound literals can be passed to functions without depending on member order:
 
                                                                        @@ -5079,13 +5079,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 &(struct point){.x=3, .y=4});
 
                                                                        
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        11
  EXAMPLE 4        A read-only compound literal can be specified through constructions like:
 
                                                                                   (const float []){1e0, 1e1, 1e2, 1e3, 1e4, 1e5, 1e6}
 
                                                                        
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        12
  EXAMPLE 5        The following three expressions have different meanings:
 
                                                                                   "/tmp/fileXXXXXX"
@@ -5096,7 +5096,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  two have automatic storage duration when they occur within the body of a function, and the first of these
  two is modifiable.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        13
  EXAMPLE 6 Like string literals, const-qualified compound literals can be placed into read-only memory
  and can even be shared. For example,
 
                                                                        @@ -5104,7 +5104,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        
  might yield 1 if the literals' storage is shared.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        14
  EXAMPLE 7 Since compound literals are unnamed, a single compound literal cannot specify a circularly
  linked object. For example, there is no way to write a self-referential compound literal that could be used
  as the function argument in place of the named object endless_zeros below:
@@ -5114,7 +5114,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           eval(endless_zeros);
 
                                                                        
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        15
  EXAMPLE 8        Each compound literal creates only a single object in a given scope:
 
                                                                                   struct s { int i; };
@@ -5129,7 +5129,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           }
 
                                                                        
  The function f() always returns the value 1.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        16
  Note that if an iteration statement were used instead of an explicit goto and a labeled statement, the
  lifetime of the unnamed object would be the body of the loop only, and on entry next time around p would
  have an indeterminate value, which would result in undefined behavior.
@@ -5150,7 +5150,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.3 Unary operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Syntax
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                                   unary-expression:
                  postfix-expression
@@ -5167,16 +5167,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.3.1 Prefix increment and decrement operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The operand of the prefix increment or decrement operator shall have atomic, qualified,
  or unqualified real or pointer type, and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The value of the operand of the prefix ++ operator is incremented. The result is the new
  value of the operand after incrementation. The expression ++E is equivalent to (E+=1).
  See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment for information on
  constraints, types, side effects, and conversions and the effects of operations on pointers.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The prefix -- operator is analogous to the prefix ++ operator, except that the value of the
  operand is decremented.
 
                                                                         Forward references: additive operators (6.5.6), compound assignment (6.5.16.2).
@@ -5184,14 +5184,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.3.2 Address and indirection operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The operand of the unary & operator shall be either a function designator, the result of a
  [] or unary * operator, or an lvalue that designates an object that is not a bit-field and is
  not declared with the register storage-class specifier.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The operand of the unary * operator shall have pointer type.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The unary & operator yields the address of its operand. If the operand has type ''type'',
  the result has type ''pointer to type''. If the operand is the result of a unary * operator,
  neither that operator nor the & operator is evaluated and the result is as if both were
@@ -5201,7 +5201,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the unary * that is implied by the [] is evaluated and the result is as if the & operator
  were removed and the [] operator were changed to a + operator. Otherwise, the result is
  a pointer to the object or function designated by its operand.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  The unary * operator denotes indirection. If the operand points to a function, the result is
  a function designator; if it points to an object, the result is an lvalue designating the
  object. If the operand has type ''pointer to type'', the result has type ''type''. If an
@@ -5223,23 +5223,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.3.3 Unary arithmetic operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The operand of the unary + or - operator shall have arithmetic type; of the ~ operator,
  integer type; of the ! operator, scalar type.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The result of the unary + operator is the value of its (promoted) operand. The integer
  promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The result of the unary - operator is the negative of its (promoted) operand. The integer
  promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  The result of the ~ operator is the bitwise complement of its (promoted) operand (that is,
  each bit in the result is set if and only if the corresponding bit in the converted operand is
  not set). The integer promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the
  promoted type. If the promoted type is an unsigned type, the expression ~E is equivalent
  to the maximum value representable in that type minus E.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  The result of the logical negation operator ! is 0 if the value of its operand compares
  unequal to 0, 1 if the value of its operand compares equal to 0. The result has type int.
  The expression !E is equivalent to (0==E).
@@ -5251,32 +5251,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.3.4 The sizeof and _Alignof operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
  The sizeof operator shall not be applied to an expression that has function type or an
  incomplete type, to the parenthesized name of such a type, or to an expression that
  designates a bit-field member. The _Alignof operator shall not be applied to a
  function type or an incomplete type.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  The sizeof operator yields the size (in bytes) of its operand, which may be an
  expression or the parenthesized name of a type. The size is determined from the type of
  the operand. The result is an integer. If the type of the operand is a variable length array
  type, the operand is evaluated; otherwise, the operand is not evaluated and the result is an
  integer constant.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The _Alignof operator yields the alignment requirement of its operand type. The
  operand is not evaluated and the result is an integer constant. When applied to an array
  type, the result is the alignment requirement of the element type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  When sizeof is applied to an operand that has type char, unsigned char, or
  signed char, (or a qualified version thereof) the result is 1. When applied to an
  operand that has array type, the result is the total number of bytes in the array.103) When
  applied to an operand that has structure or union type, the result is the total number of
  bytes in such an object, including internal and trailing padding.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  The value of the result of both operators is implementation-defined, and its type (an
  unsigned integer type) is size_t, defined in <stddef.h> (and other headers).
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        6
  EXAMPLE 1 A principal use of the sizeof operator is in communication with routines such as storage
  allocators and I/O systems. A storage-allocation function might accept a size (in bytes) of an object to
  allocate and return a pointer to void. For example:
@@ -5287,13 +5287,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  The implementation of the alloc function should ensure that its return value is aligned suitably for
  conversion to a pointer to double.
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        7
  EXAMPLE 2      Another use of the sizeof operator is to compute the number of elements in an array:
 
                                                                                  sizeof array / sizeof array[0]
 
                                                                        
  
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        8
  EXAMPLE 3      In this example, the size of a variable length array is computed and returned from a
  function:
 
                                                                        @@ -5328,28 +5328,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.4 Cast operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Syntax
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                                   cast-expression:
                  unary-expression
                  ( type-name ) cast-expression
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  Unless the type name specifies a void type, the type name shall specify atomic, qualified,
  or unqualified scalar type, and the operand shall have scalar type.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  Conversions that involve pointers, other than where permitted by the constraints of
  6.5.16.1, shall be specified by means of an explicit cast.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  A pointer type shall not be converted to any floating type. A floating type shall not be
  converted to any pointer type.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  Preceding an expression by a parenthesized type name converts the value of the
  expression to the named type. This construction is called a cast.104) A cast that specifies
  no conversion has no effect on the type or value of an expression.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        6
  If the value of the expression is represented with greater range or precision than required
  by the type named by the cast (6.3.1.8), then the cast specifies a conversion even if the
  type of the expression is the same as the named type and removes any extra range and
@@ -5367,7 +5367,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.5 Multiplicative operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Syntax
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                                   multiplicative-expression:
                   cast-expression
@@ -5376,19 +5376,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   multiplicative-expression % cast-expression
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  Each of the operands shall have arithmetic type. The operands of the % operator shall
  have integer type.
 
                                                                        Semantics
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        4
  The result of the binary * operator is the product of the operands.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        5
  The result of the / operator is the quotient from the division of the first operand by the
  second; the result of the % operator is the remainder. In both operations, if the value of
  the second operand is zero, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        6
  When integers are divided, the result of the / operator is the algebraic quotient with any
  fractional part discarded.105) If the quotient a/b is representable, the expression
  (a/b)*b + a%b shall equal a; otherwise, the behavior of both a/b and a%b is
@@ -5401,7 +5401,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        6.5.6 Additive operators
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Syntax
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                                   additive-expression:
                  multiplicative-expression
@@ -5409,11 +5409,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  additive-expression - multiplicative-expression
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                        Constraints
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        2
  For addition, either both operands shall have arithmetic type, or one operand shall be a
  pointer to a complete object type and the other shall have integer type. (Incrementing is
  equivalent to adding 1.)
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        3
  For subtraction, one of the following shall hold:
  
  
@@ -5429,19 +5429,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      
  (Decrementing is equivalent to subtracting 1.)
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  If both operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed on
  them.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  The result of the binary + operator is the sum of the operands.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  The result of the binary - operator is the difference resulting from the subtraction of the
  second operand from the first.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      7
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      8
  When an expression that has integer type is added to or subtracted from a pointer, the
  result has the type of the pointer operand. If the pointer operand points to an element of
  an array object, and the array is large enough, the result points to an element offset from
@@ -5457,7 +5457,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  element of the array object, the evaluation shall not produce an overflow; otherwise, the
  behavior is undefined. If the result points one past the last element of the array object, it
  shall not be used as the operand of a unary * operator that is evaluated.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      9
  When two pointers are subtracted, both shall point to elements of the same array object,
  or one past the last element of the array object; the result is the difference of the
  subscripts of the two array elements. The size of the result is implementation-defined,
@@ -5472,7 +5472,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  value as ((Q)-(P))+1 and as -((P)-((Q)+1)), and has the value zero if the
  expression P points one past the last element of the array object, even though the
  expression (Q)+1 does not point to an element of the array object.106)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      10
  EXAMPLE        Pointer arithmetic is well defined with pointers to variable length array types.
 
                                                                                 {
@@ -5484,7 +5484,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                    n = p - a;                  //   n == 1
           }
 
                                                                      
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      11
  If array a in the above example were declared to be an array of known constant size, and pointer p were
  declared to be a pointer to an array of the same known constant size (pointing to a), the results would be
  the same.
@@ -5506,7 +5506,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.7 Bitwise shift operators
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 shift-expression:
                   additive-expression
@@ -5514,22 +5514,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   shift-expression >> additive-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The integer promotions are performed on each of the operands. The type of the result is
  that of the promoted left operand. If the value of the right operand is negative or is
  
 
  greater than or equal to the width of the promoted left operand, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  The result of E1 << E2 is E1 left-shifted E2 bit positions; vacated bits are filled with
  zeros. If E1 has an unsigned type, the value of the result is E1 x 2E2 , reduced modulo
  one more than the maximum value representable in the result type. If E1 has a signed
  type and nonnegative value, and E1 x 2E2 is representable in the result type, then that is
  the resulting value; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  The result of E1 >> E2 is E1 right-shifted E2 bit positions. If E1 has an unsigned type
  or if E1 has a signed type and a nonnegative value, the value of the result is the integral
  part of the quotient of E1 / 2E2 . If E1 has a signed type and a negative value, the
@@ -5538,7 +5538,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.8 Relational operators
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 relational-expression:
                   shift-expression
@@ -5548,7 +5548,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   relational-expression   >=   shift-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  One of the following shall hold:
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   both operands have real type; or
@@ -5556,14 +5556,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  types.
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are
  performed.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  When two pointers are compared, the result depends on the relative locations in the
  address space of the objects pointed to. If two pointers to object types both point to the
  same object, or both point one past the last element of the same array object, they
@@ -5576,7 +5576,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expression P points to an element of an array object and the expression Q points to the
  last element of the same array object, the pointer expression Q+1 compares greater than
  P. In all other cases, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  Each of the operators < (less than), > (greater than), <= (less than or equal to), and >=
  (greater than or equal to) shall yield 1 if the specified relation is true and 0 if it is
  false.107) The result has type int.
@@ -5589,7 +5589,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.9 Equality operators
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 equality-expression:
                  relational-expression
@@ -5597,7 +5597,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  equality-expression != relational-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  One of the following shall hold:
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   both operands have arithmetic type;
@@ -5607,12 +5607,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      •   one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant.
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The == (equal to) and != (not equal to) operators are analogous to the relational
  operators except for their lower precedence.108) Each of the operators yields 1 if the
  specified relation is true and 0 if it is false. The result has type int. For any pair of
  operands, exactly one of the relations is true.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are
  performed. Values of complex types are equal if and only if both their real parts are equal
  and also their imaginary parts are equal. Any two values of arithmetic types from
@@ -5622,19 +5622,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  Otherwise, at least one operand is a pointer. If one operand is a pointer and the other is a
  null pointer constant, the null pointer constant is converted to the type of the pointer. If
  one operand is a pointer to an object type and the other is a pointer to a qualified or
  unqualified version of void, the former is converted to the type of the latter.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  Two pointers compare equal if and only if both are null pointers, both are pointers to the
  same object (including a pointer to an object and a subobject at its beginning) or function,
  both are pointers to one past the last element of the same array object, or one is a pointer
  to one past the end of one array object and the other is a pointer to the start of a different
  array object that happens to immediately follow the first array object in the address
  space.109)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      7
  For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an
  array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
  type of the object as its element type.
@@ -5652,19 +5652,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.10 Bitwise AND operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 AND-expression:
                 equality-expression
                 AND-expression & equality-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  The result of the binary & operator is the bitwise AND of the operands (that is, each bit in
  the result is set if and only if each of the corresponding bits in the converted operands is
  set).
@@ -5677,19 +5677,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.11 Bitwise exclusive OR operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 exclusive-OR-expression:
                   AND-expression
                   exclusive-OR-expression ^ AND-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  The result of the ^ operator is the bitwise exclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit
  in the result is set if and only if exactly one of the corresponding bits in the converted
  operands is set).
@@ -5697,19 +5697,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.12 Bitwise inclusive OR operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 inclusive-OR-expression:
                   exclusive-OR-expression
                   inclusive-OR-expression | exclusive-OR-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have integer type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  The result of the | operator is the bitwise inclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit in
  the result is set if and only if at least one of the corresponding bits in the converted
  operands is set).
@@ -5718,20 +5718,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.13 Logical AND operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                  logical-AND-expression:
                    inclusive-OR-expression
                    logical-AND-expression && inclusive-OR-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The && operator shall yield 1 if both of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
  yields 0. The result has type int.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  Unlike the bitwise binary & operator, the && operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation;
  if the second operand is evaluated, there is a sequence point between the evaluations of
  the first and second operands. If the first operand compares equal to 0, the second
@@ -5740,20 +5740,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.14 Logical OR operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                  logical-OR-expression:
                    logical-AND-expression
                    logical-OR-expression || logical-AND-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  The || operator shall yield 1 if either of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
  yields 0. The result has type int.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  Unlike the bitwise | operator, the || operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation; if the
  second operand is evaluated, there is a sequence point between the evaluations of the first
  and second operands. If the first operand compares unequal to 0, the second operand is
@@ -5763,16 +5763,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.15 Conditional operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 conditional-expression:
                  logical-OR-expression
                  logical-OR-expression ? expression : conditional-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  The first operand shall have scalar type.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  One of the following shall hold for the second and third operands:
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   both operands have arithmetic type;
@@ -5784,18 +5784,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  unqualified version of void.
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  The first operand is evaluated; there is a sequence point between its evaluation and the
  evaluation of the second or third operand (whichever is evaluated). The second operand
  is evaluated only if the first compares unequal to 0; the third operand is evaluated only if
  the first compares equal to 0; the result is the value of the second or third operand
  (whichever is evaluated), converted to the type described below.110)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  If both the second and third operands have arithmetic type, the result type that would be
  determined by the usual arithmetic conversions, were they applied to those two operands,
  is the type of the result. If both the operands have structure or union type, the result has
  that type. If both operands have void type, the result has void type.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  If both the second and third operands are pointers or one is a null pointer constant and the
  other is a pointer, the result type is a pointer to a type qualified with all the type qualifiers
  of the types referenced by both operands. Furthermore, if both operands are pointers to
@@ -5806,11 +5806,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointer to an appropriately qualified version of void.
  
 
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      7
  EXAMPLE The common type that results when the second and third operands are pointers is determined
  in two independent stages. The appropriate qualifiers, for example, do not depend on whether the two
  pointers have compatible types.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      8
  Given the declarations
 
                                                                                  const void *c_vp;
@@ -5839,7 +5839,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.16 Assignment operators
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 assignment-expression:
                  conditional-expression
@@ -5848,10 +5848,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  = *= /= %= +=                       -=     <<=      >>=      &=     ^=     |=
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  An assignment operator shall have a modifiable lvalue as its left operand.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  An assignment operator stores a value in the object designated by the left operand. An
  assignment expression has the value of the left operand after the assignment,111) but is not
  an lvalue. The type of an assignment expression is the type the left operand would have
@@ -5872,7 +5872,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.16.1 Simple assignment
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
  One of the following shall hold:112)
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   the left operand has atomic, qualified, or unqualified arithmetic type, and the right has
@@ -5894,16 +5894,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointer.
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  In simple assignment (=), the value of the right operand is converted to the type of the
  assignment expression and replaces the value stored in the object designated by the left
  operand.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  If the value being stored in an object is read from another object that overlaps in any way
  the storage of the first object, then the overlap shall be exact and the two objects shall
  have qualified or unqualified versions of a compatible type; otherwise, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  EXAMPLE 1       In the program fragment
  
  
@@ -5923,7 +5923,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  negative, so the operands of the comparison can never compare equal. Therefore, for full portability, the
  variable c should be declared as int.
  
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  EXAMPLE 2       In the fragment:
 
                                                                                char c;
@@ -5935,7 +5935,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of the expression enclosed in parentheses is then converted to the type of the outer assignment expression,
  that is, long int type.
  
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  EXAMPLE 3       Consider the fragment:
 
                                                                                const char **cpp;
@@ -5959,18 +5959,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.16.2 Compound assignment
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
  For the operators += and -= only, either the left operand shall be an atomic, qualified, or
  unqualified pointer to a complete object type, and the right shall have integer type; or the
  left operand shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified arithmetic type, and the right
  shall have arithmetic type.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  For the other operators, the left operand shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified
  arithmetic type, and (considering the type the left operand would have after lvalue
  conversion) each operand shall have arithmetic type consistent with those allowed by the
  corresponding binary operator.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  A compound assignment of the form E1 op = E2 is equivalent to the simple assignment
  expression E1 = E1 op (E2), except that the lvalue E1 is evaluated only once, and with
  respect to an indeterminately-sequenced function call, the operation of a compound
@@ -6028,18 +6028,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.5.17 Comma operator
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 expression:
                  assignment-expression
                  expression , assignment-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  The left operand of a comma operator is evaluated as a void expression; there is a
  sequence point between its evaluation and that of the right operand. Then the right
  operand is evaluated; the result has its type and value.114)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  EXAMPLE As indicated by the syntax, the comma operator (as described in this subclause) cannot
  appear in contexts where a comma is used to separate items in a list (such as arguments to functions or lists
  of initializers). On the other hand, it can be used within a parenthesized expression or within the second
@@ -6063,37 +6063,37 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.6 Constant expressions
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 constant-expression:
                  conditional-expression
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Description
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  A constant expression can be evaluated during translation rather than runtime, and
  accordingly may be used in any place that a constant may be.
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  Constant expressions shall not contain assignment, increment, decrement, function-call,
  or comma operators, except when they are contained within a subexpression that is not
  evaluated.115)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      4
  Each constant expression shall evaluate to a constant that is in the range of representable
  values for its type.
 
                                                                      Semantics
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      5
  An expression that evaluates to a constant is required in several contexts. If a floating
  expression is evaluated in the translation environment, the arithmetic range and precision
  shall be at least as great as if the expression were being evaluated in the execution
  environment.116)
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      6
  An integer constant expression117) shall have integer type and shall only have operands
  that are integer constants, enumeration constants, character constants, sizeof
  expressions whose results are integer constants, _Alignof expressions, and floating
  constants that are the immediate operands of casts. Cast operators in an integer constant
  expression shall only convert arithmetic types to integer types, except as part of an
  operand to the sizeof or _Alignof operator.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      7
  More latitude is permitted for constant expressions in initializers. Such a constant
  expression shall be, or evaluate to, one of the following:
 
                                                                        
@@ -6107,14 +6107,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      •   an address constant for a complete object type plus or minus an integer constant
  expression.
 
                                                                      
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      8
  An arithmetic constant expression shall have arithmetic type and shall only have
  operands that are integer constants, floating constants, enumeration constants, character
  constants, sizeof expressions whose results are integer constants, and _Alignof
  expressions. Cast operators in an arithmetic constant expression shall only convert
  arithmetic types to arithmetic types, except as part of an operand to a sizeof or
  _Alignof operator.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      9
  An address constant is a null pointer, a pointer to an lvalue designating an object of static
  storage duration, or a pointer to a function designator; it shall be created explicitly using
  the unary & operator or an integer constant cast to pointer type, or implicitly by the use of
@@ -6122,9 +6122,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and -> operators, the address & and indirection * unary operators, and pointer casts may
  be used in the creation of an address constant, but the value of an object shall not be
  accessed by use of these operators.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      10
  An implementation may accept other forms of constant expressions.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      11
  The semantic rules for the evaluation of a constant expression are the same as for
  nonconstant expressions.118)
 
                                                                       Forward references: array declarators (6.7.6.2), initialization (6.7.9).
@@ -6156,7 +6156,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      6.7 Declarations
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Syntax
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                                 declaration:
                  declaration-specifiers init-declarator-listopt ;
@@ -6175,11 +6175,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   declarator = initializer
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                      Constraints
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      2
  A declaration other than a static_assert declaration shall declare at least a declarator
  (other than the parameters of a function or the members of a structure or union), a tag, or
  the members of an enumeration.
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      3
  If an identifier has no linkage, there shall be no more than one declaration of the identifier
  (in a declarator or type specifier) with the same scope and in the same name space, except
  that:
@@ -6188,11 +6188,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  provided that type is not a variably modified type;
 
                                                                    •   tags may be redeclared as specified in 6.7.2.3.
 
                                                                    
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    4
  All declarations in the same scope that refer to the same object or function shall specify
  compatible types.
 
                                                                    Semantics
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    5
  A declaration specifies the interpretation and attributes of a set of identifiers. A definition
  of an identifier is a declaration for that identifier that:
 
                                                                      
@@ -6202,13 +6202,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                    •   for an enumeration constant, is the (only) declaration of the identifier;
 
                                                                    •   for a typedef name, is the first (or only) declaration of the identifier.
 
                                                                    
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    6
  The declaration specifiers consist of a sequence of specifiers that indicate the linkage,
  storage duration, and part of the type of the entities that the declarators denote. The init-
  declarator-list is a comma-separated sequence of declarators, each of which may have
  additional type information, or an initializer, or both. The declarators contain the
  identifiers (if any) being declared.
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    7
  If an identifier for an object is declared with no linkage, the type for the object shall be
  complete by the end of its declarator, or by the end of its init-declarator if it has an
  initializer; in the case of function parameters (including in prototypes), it is the adjusted
@@ -6223,7 +6223,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                    6.7.1 Storage-class specifiers
                                                                    
 
                                                                    Syntax
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    1
 
                                                                               storage-class-specifier:
                  typedef
@@ -6234,15 +6234,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  register
 
                                                                    
 
                                                                    Constraints
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    2
  At most, one storage-class specifier may be given in the declaration specifiers in a
  declaration, except that _Thread_local may appear with static or extern.120)
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    3
  In the declaration of an object with block scope, if the declaration specifiers include
  _Thread_local, they shall also include either static or extern. If
  _Thread_local appears in any declaration of an object, it shall be present in every
  declaration of that object.
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    4
  _Thread_local shall not appear in the declaration specifiers of a function declaration.
  
  
@@ -6250,18 +6250,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                    Semantics
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    5
  The typedef specifier is called a ''storage-class specifier'' for syntactic convenience
  only; it is discussed in 6.7.8. The meanings of the various linkages and storage durations
  were discussed in 6.2.2 and 6.2.4.
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    6
  A declaration of an identifier for an object with storage-class specifier register
  suggests that access to the object be as fast as possible. The extent to which such
  suggestions are effective is implementation-defined.121)
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    7
  The declaration of an identifier for a function that has block scope shall have no explicit
  storage-class specifier other than extern.
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    8
  If an aggregate or union object is declared with a storage-class specifier other than
  typedef, the properties resulting from the storage-class specifier, except with respect to
  linkage, also apply to the members of the object, and so on recursively for any aggregate
@@ -6287,7 +6287,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                    6.7.2 Type specifiers
                                                                    
 
                                                                    Syntax
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    1
 
                                                                               type-specifier:
                  void
@@ -6307,7 +6307,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  typedef-name
 
                                                                    
 
                                                                    Constraints
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    2
  At least one type specifier shall be given in the declaration specifiers in each declaration,
  and in the specifier-qualifier list in each struct declaration and type name. Each list of
  type specifiers shall be one of the following multisets (delimited by commas, when there
@@ -6340,15 +6340,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  •   enum specifier
 
                                                                  •   typedef name
 
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The type specifier _Complex shall not be used if the implementation does not support
  complex types (see 6.10.8.3).
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  Specifiers for structures, unions, enumerations, and atomic types are discussed in 6.7.2.1
  through 6.7.2.4. Declarations of typedef names are discussed in 6.7.8. The
  characteristics of the other types are discussed in 6.2.5.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  Each of the comma-separated multisets designates the same type, except that for bit-
  fields, it is implementation-defined whether the specifier int designates the same type as
  signed int or the same type as unsigned int.
@@ -6358,7 +6358,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.2.1 Structure and union specifiers
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
 
                                                                             struct-or-union-specifier:
@@ -6384,53 +6384,53 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  declaratoropt : constant-expression
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  A struct-declaration that does not declare an anonymous structure or anonymous union
  shall contain a struct-declarator-list.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  A structure or union shall not contain a member with incomplete or function type (hence,
  a structure shall not contain an instance of itself, but may contain a pointer to an instance
  of itself), except that the last member of a structure with more than one named member
  may have incomplete array type; such a structure (and any union containing, possibly
  recursively, a member that is such a structure) shall not be a member of a structure or an
  element of an array.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  The expression that specifies the width of a bit-field shall be an integer constant
  expression with a nonnegative value that does not exceed the width of an object of the
  type that would be specified were the colon and expression omitted.122) If the value is
  zero, the declaration shall have no declarator.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  A bit-field shall have a type that is a qualified or unqualified version of _Bool, signed
  int, unsigned int, or some other implementation-defined type. It is
  implementation-defined whether atomic types are permitted.
  
 
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  As discussed in 6.2.5, a structure is a type consisting of a sequence of members, whose
  storage is allocated in an ordered sequence, and a union is a type consisting of a sequence
  of members whose storage overlap.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  Structure and union specifiers have the same form. The keywords struct and union
  indicate that the type being specified is, respectively, a structure type or a union type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  The presence of a struct-declaration-list in a struct-or-union-specifier declares a new type,
  within a translation unit. The struct-declaration-list is a sequence of declarations for the
  members of the structure or union. If the struct-declaration-list does not contain any
  named members, either directly or via an anonymous structure or anonymous union, the
  behavior is undefined. The type is incomplete until immediately after the } that
  terminates the list, and complete thereafter.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  A member of a structure or union may have any complete object type other than a
  variably modified type.123) In addition, a member may be declared to consist of a
  specified number of bits (including a sign bit, if any). Such a member is called a
  bit-field;124) its width is preceded by a colon.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  A bit-field is interpreted as having a signed or unsigned integer type consisting of the
  specified number of bits.125) If the value 0 or 1 is stored into a nonzero-width bit-field of
  type _Bool, the value of the bit-field shall compare equal to the value stored; a _Bool
  bit-field has the semantics of a _Bool.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  An implementation may allocate any addressable storage unit large enough to hold a bit-
  field. If enough space remains, a bit-field that immediately follows another bit-field in a
  structure shall be packed into adjacent bits of the same unit. If insufficient space remains,
@@ -6438,7 +6438,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  implementation-defined. The order of allocation of bit-fields within a unit (high-order to
  low-order or low-order to high-order) is implementation-defined. The alignment of the
  addressable storage unit is unspecified.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  A bit-field declaration with no declarator, but only a colon and a width, indicates an
  unnamed bit-field.126) As a special case, a bit-field structure member with a width of 0
  
@@ -6446,29 +6446,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  indicates that no further bit-field is to be packed into the unit in which the previous bit-
  field, if any, was placed.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  13
  An unnamed member whose type specifier is a structure specifier with no tag is called an
  anonymous structure; an unnamed member whose type specifier is a union specifier with
  no tag is called an anonymous union. The members of an anonymous structure or union
  are considered to be members of the containing structure or union. This applies
  recursively if the containing structure or union is also anonymous.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  14
  Each non-bit-field member of a structure or union object is aligned in an implementation-
  defined manner appropriate to its type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  15
  Within a structure object, the non-bit-field members and the units in which bit-fields
  reside have addresses that increase in the order in which they are declared. A pointer to a
  structure object, suitably converted, points to its initial member (or if that member is a
  bit-field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa. There may be unnamed
  padding within a structure object, but not at its beginning.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  16
  The size of a union is sufficient to contain the largest of its members. The value of at
  most one of the members can be stored in a union object at any time. A pointer to a
  union object, suitably converted, points to each of its members (or if a member is a bit-
  field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  17
  There may be unnamed padding at the end of a structure or union.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  18
  As a special case, the last element of a structure with more than one named member may
  have an incomplete array type; this is called a flexible array member. In most situations,
  the flexible array member is ignored. In particular, the size of the structure is as if the
@@ -6481,7 +6481,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  from that of the replacement array. If this array would have no elements, it behaves as if
  it had one element but the behavior is undefined if any attempt is made to access that
  element or to generate a pointer one past it.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  19
  EXAMPLE 1    The following illustrates anonymous structures and unions:
 
 
                                                                  @@ -6497,7 +6497,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           v1.w.k = 5; // valid
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  20
  EXAMPLE 2          After the declaration:
 
                                                                             struct s { int n; double d[]; };
@@ -6514,7 +6514,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  
  (there are circumstances in which this equivalence is broken; in particular, the offsets of member d might
  not be the same).
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  21
  Following the above declaration:
 
                                                                             struct s t1 = { 0 };                         //   valid
@@ -6529,7 +6529,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  
  in which case the assignment would be legitimate. Nevertheless, it cannot appear in strictly conforming
  code.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  22
  After the further declaration:
 
                                                                             struct ss { int n; };
@@ -6540,7 +6540,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           sizeof (struct s) >= offsetof(struct s, d)
 
                                                                  
  are always equal to 1.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  23
  If sizeof (double) is 8, then after the following code is executed:
 
                                                                             struct s *s1;
@@ -6554,7 +6554,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           struct { int n; double d[8]; } *s1;
           struct { int n; double d[5]; } *s2;
 
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  24
  Following the further successful assignments:
 
 
                                                                  @@ -6573,7 +6573,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           dp = &(s2->d[0]);          //   valid
           *dp = 42;                  //   undefined behavior
 
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  25
  The assignment:
 
                                                                             *s1 = *s2;
@@ -6581,7 +6581,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  only copies the member n; if any of the array elements are within the first sizeof (struct s) bytes
  of the structure, they might be copied or simply overwritten with indeterminate values.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  26
  EXAMPLE 3 Because members of anonymous structures and unions are considered to be members of the
  containing structure or union, struct s in the following example has more than one named member and
  thus the use of a flexible array member is valid:
@@ -6614,7 +6614,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.2.2 Enumeration specifiers
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             enum-specifier:
                 enum identifieropt { enumerator-list }
@@ -6628,12 +6628,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 enumeration-constant = constant-expression
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  The expression that defines the value of an enumeration constant shall be an integer
  constant expression that has a value representable as an int.
 
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The identifiers in an enumerator list are declared as constants that have type int and
  may appear wherever such are permitted.127) An enumerator with = defines its
  enumeration constant as the value of the constant expression. If the first enumerator has
@@ -6642,13 +6642,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  adding 1 to the value of the previous enumeration constant. (The use of enumerators with
  = may produce enumeration constants with values that duplicate other values in the same
  enumeration.) The enumerators of an enumeration are also known as its members.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char, a signed integer type, or an
  unsigned integer type. The choice of type is implementation-defined,128) but shall be
  capable of representing the values of all the members of the enumeration. The
  enumerated type is incomplete until immediately after the } that terminates the list of
  enumerator declarations, and complete thereafter.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  EXAMPLE       The following fragment:
 
                                                                            enum hue { chartreuse, burgundy, claret=20, winedark };
@@ -6674,12 +6674,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.2.3 Tags
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  A specific type shall have its content defined at most once.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  Where two declarations that use the same tag declare the same type, they shall both use
  the same choice of struct, union, or enum.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  A type specifier of the form
 
                                                                            enum identifier
@@ -6689,17 +6689,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  All declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types that have the same scope and
  use the same tag declare the same type. Irrespective of whether there is a tag or what
  other declarations of the type are in the same translation unit, the type is incomplete129)
  until immediately after the closing brace of the list defining the content, and complete
  thereafter.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  Two declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types which are in different scopes or
  use different tags declare distinct types. Each declaration of a structure, union, or
  enumerated type which does not include a tag declares a distinct type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  A type specifier of the form
 
                                                                             struct-or-union identifieropt { struct-declaration-list }
@@ -6715,13 +6715,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  declares a structure, union, or enumerated type. The list defines the structure content,
  union content, or enumeration content. If an identifier is provided,130) the type specifier
  also declares the identifier to be the tag of that type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  A declaration of the form
 
                                                                             struct-or-union identifier ;
 
                                                                  
  specifies a structure or union type and declares the identifier as a tag of that type.131)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  If a type specifier of the form
 
                                                                             struct-or-union identifier
@@ -6733,7 +6733,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  If a type specifier of the form
 
                                                                             struct-or-union identifier
@@ -6745,7 +6745,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  occurs other than as part of one of the above forms, and a declaration of the identifier as a
  tag is visible, then it specifies the same type as that other declaration, and does not
  redeclare the tag.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  EXAMPLE 1       This mechanism allows declaration of a self-referential structure.
 
                                                                             struct tnode {
@@ -6762,7 +6762,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  these declarations, the expression sp->left refers to the left struct tnode pointer of the object to
  which sp points; the expression s.right->count designates the count member of the right struct
  tnode pointed to from s.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  The following alternative formulation uses the typedef mechanism:
 
                                                                             typedef struct tnode TNODE;
@@ -6773,7 +6773,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           TNODE s, *sp;
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  EXAMPLE 2 To illustrate the use of prior declaration of a tag to specify a pair of mutually referential
  structures, the declarations
 
                                                                  @@ -6809,20 +6809,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.2.4 Atomic type specifiers
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             atomic-type-specifier:
                  _Atomic ( type-name )
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  Atomic type specifiers shall not be used if the implementation does not support atomic
  types (see 6.10.8.3).
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The type name in an atomic type specifier shall not refer to an array type, a function type,
  an atomic type, or a qualified type.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  The properties associated with atomic types are meaningful only for expressions that are
  lvalues. If the _Atomic keyword is immediately followed by a left parenthesis, it is
  interpreted as a type specifier (with a type name), not as a type qualifier.
@@ -6830,7 +6830,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.3 Type qualifiers
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             type-qualifier:
                  const
@@ -6839,29 +6839,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  _Atomic
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  Types other than pointer types whose referenced type is an object type shall not be
  restrict-qualified.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The type modified by the _Atomic qualifier shall not be an array type or a function
  type.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  The properties associated with qualified types are meaningful only for expressions that
  are lvalues.132)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  If the same qualifier appears more than once in the same specifier-qualifier-list, either
  directly or via one or more typedefs, the behavior is the same as if it appeared only
  once. If other qualifiers appear along with the _Atomic qualifier in a specifier-qualifier-
  
 
  list, the resulting type is the so-qualified atomic type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  If an attempt is made to modify an object defined with a const-qualified type through use
  of an lvalue with non-const-qualified type, the behavior is undefined. If an attempt is
  made to refer to an object defined with a volatile-qualified type through use of an lvalue
  with non-volatile-qualified type, the behavior is undefined.133)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  An object that has volatile-qualified type may be modified in ways unknown to the
  implementation or have other unknown side effects. Therefore any expression referring
  to such an object shall be evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract machine,
@@ -6869,7 +6869,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  object shall agree with that prescribed by the abstract machine, except as modified by the
  unknown factors mentioned previously.134) What constitutes an access to an object that
  has volatile-qualified type is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  An object that is accessed through a restrict-qualified pointer has a special association
  with that pointer. This association, defined in 6.7.3.1 below, requires that all accesses to
  that object use, directly or indirectly, the value of that particular pointer.135) The intended
@@ -6877,15 +6877,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  optimization, and deleting all instances of the qualifier from all preprocessing translation
  units composing a conforming program does not change its meaning (i.e., observable
  behavior).
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  If the specification of an array type includes any type qualifiers, the element type is so-
  qualified, not the array type. If the specification of a function type includes any type
  qualifiers, the behavior is undefined.136)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  For two qualified types to be compatible, both shall have the identically qualified version
  of a compatible type; the order of type qualifiers within a list of specifiers or qualifiers
  does not affect the specified type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  EXAMPLE 1       An object declared
 
                                                                            extern const volatile int real_time_clock;
@@ -6896,7 +6896,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  may be modifiable by hardware, but cannot be assigned to, incremented, or decremented.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  EXAMPLE 2 The following declarations and expressions illustrate the behavior when type qualifiers
  modify an aggregate type:
 
                                                                  @@ -6914,7 +6914,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           pi = a[0];              //   invalid: a[0] has type ''const int *''
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  13
  EXAMPLE 3       The declaration
 
                                                                             _Atomic volatile int *p;
@@ -6944,20 +6944,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.3.1 Formal definition of restrict
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  Let D be a declaration of an ordinary identifier that provides a means of designating an
  object P as a restrict-qualified pointer to type T.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  If D appears inside a block and does not have storage class extern, let B denote the
  block. If D appears in the list of parameter declarations of a function definition, let B
  denote the associated block. Otherwise, let B denote the block of main (or the block of
  whatever function is called at program startup in a freestanding environment).
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  In what follows, a pointer expression E is said to be based on object P if (at some
  sequence point in the execution of B prior to the evaluation of E) modifying P to point to
  a copy of the array object into which it formerly pointed would change the value of E.137)
  Note that ''based'' is defined only for expressions with pointer types.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  During each execution of B, let L be any lvalue that has &L based on P. If L is used to
  access the value of the object X that it designates, and X is also modified (by any means),
  then the following requirements apply: T shall not be const-qualified. Every other lvalue
@@ -6970,13 +6970,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  object P2, associated with block B2, then either the execution of B2 shall begin before
  the execution of B, or the execution of B2 shall end prior to the assignment. If these
  requirements are not met, then the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  Here an execution of B means that portion of the execution of the program that would
  correspond to the lifetime of an object with scalar type and automatic storage duration
  associated with B.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  A translator is free to ignore any or all aliasing implications of uses of restrict.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  EXAMPLE 1       The file scope declarations
 
                                                                            int * restrict a;
@@ -6986,7 +6986,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  assert that if an object is accessed using one of a, b, or c, and that object is modified anywhere in the
  program, then it is never accessed using either of the other two.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  EXAMPLE 2       The function parameter declarations in the following example
 
                                                                            void f(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q)
@@ -6997,7 +6997,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  
  assert that, during each execution of the function, if an object is accessed through one of the pointer
  parameters, then it is not also accessed through the other.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  The benefit of the restrict qualifiers is that they enable a translator to make an effective dependence
  analysis of function f without examining any of the calls of f in the program. The cost is that the
  programmer has to examine all of those calls to ensure that none give undefined behavior. For example, the
@@ -7012,7 +7012,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           }
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  EXAMPLE 3       The function parameter declarations
 
                                                                            void h(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q, int * restrict r)
@@ -7026,7 +7026,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  are disjoint arrays, a call of the form h(100, a, b, b) has defined behavior, because array b is not
  modified within function h.
 
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  EXAMPLE 4 The rule limiting assignments between restricted pointers does not distinguish between a
  function call and an equivalent nested block. With one exception, only ''outer-to-inner'' assignments
  between restricted pointers declared in nested blocks have defined behavior.
@@ -7043,7 +7043,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                    }
           }
 
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  The one exception allows the value of a restricted pointer to be carried out of the block in which it (or, more
  precisely, the ordinary identifier used to designate it) is declared when that block finishes execution. For
  example, this permits new_vector to return a vector.
@@ -7069,31 +7069,31 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.4 Function specifiers
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             function-specifier:
                  inline
                  _Noreturn
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  Function specifiers shall be used only in the declaration of an identifier for a function.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  An inline definition of a function with external linkage shall not contain a definition of a
  modifiable object with static or thread storage duration, and shall not contain a reference
  to an identifier with internal linkage.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  In a hosted environment, no function specifier(s) shall appear in a declaration of main.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  A function specifier may appear more than once; the behavior is the same as if it
  appeared only once.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  A function declared with an inline function specifier is an inline function. Making a
  function an inline function suggests that calls to the function be as fast as possible.138)
 
  The extent to which such suggestions are effective is implementation-defined.139)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  Any function with internal linkage can be an inline function. For a function with external
  linkage, the following restrictions apply: If a function is declared with an inline
  function specifier, then it shall also be defined in the same translation unit. If all of the
@@ -7104,13 +7104,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  provides an alternative to an external definition, which a translator may use to implement
  any call to the function in the same translation unit. It is unspecified whether a call to the
  function uses the inline definition or the external definition.140)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  A function declared with a _Noreturn function specifier shall not return to its caller.
 
                                                                  Recommended practice
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for a function declared with a
  _Noreturn function specifier that appears to be capable of returning to its caller.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  EXAMPLE 1 The declaration of an inline function with external linkage can result in either an external
  definition, or a definition available for use only within the translation unit. A file scope declaration with
  extern creates an external definition. The following example shows an entire translation unit.
@@ -7137,13 +7137,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 return is_fahr ? cels(temp) : fahr(temp);
           }
 
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  Note that the definition of fahr is an external definition because fahr is also declared with extern, but
  the definition of cels is an inline definition. Because cels has external linkage and is referenced, an
  external definition has to appear in another translation unit (see 6.9); the inline definition and the external
  definition are distinct and either may be used for the call.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  EXAMPLE 2
 
                                                                             _Noreturn void f () {
@@ -7176,35 +7176,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.5 Alignment specifier
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             alignment-specifier:
                 _Alignas ( type-name )
                 _Alignas ( constant-expression )
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  An alignment attribute shall not be specified in a declaration of a typedef, or a bit-field, or
  a function, or a parameter, or an object declared with the register storage-class
  specifier.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The constant expression shall be an integer constant expression. It shall evaluate to a
  valid fundamental alignment, or to a valid extended alignment supported by the
  implementation in the context in which it appears, or to zero.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  The combined effect of all alignment attributes in a declaration shall not specify an
  alignment that is less strict than the alignment that would otherwise be required for the
  type of the object or member being declared.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  The first form is equivalent to _Alignas (_Alignof (type-name)).
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  The alignment requirement of the declared object or member is taken to be the specified
  alignment. An alignment specification of zero has no effect.141) When multiple
  alignment specifiers occur in a declaration, the effective alignment requirement is the
  strictest specified alignment.
 
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  If the definition of an object has an alignment specifier, any other declaration of that
  object shall either specify equivalent alignment or have no alignment specifier. If the
  definition of an object does not have an alignment specifier, any other declaration of that
@@ -7219,7 +7219,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.6 Declarators
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             declarator:
                  pointeropt direct-declarator
@@ -7258,17 +7258,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  identifier-list , identifier
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  Each declarator declares one identifier, and asserts that when an operand of the same
  form as the declarator appears in an expression, it designates a function or object with the
  scope, storage duration, and type indicated by the declaration specifiers.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  A full declarator is a declarator that is not part of another declarator. The end of a full
  declarator is a sequence point. If, in the nested sequence of declarators in a full
  declarator, there is a declarator specifying a variable length array type, the type specified
  by the full declarator is said to be variably modified. Furthermore, any type derived by
  declarator type derivation from a variably modified type is itself variably modified.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  In the following subclauses, consider a declaration
 
                                                                             T D1
@@ -7276,13 +7276,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  where T contains the declaration specifiers that specify a type T (such as int) and D1 is
  a declarator that contains an identifier ident. The type specified for the identifier ident in
  the various forms of declarator is described inductively using this notation.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
                                                                             identifier
 
                                                                  
  then the type specified for ident is T .
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
                                                                             ( D )
@@ -7291,7 +7291,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  parentheses is identical to the unparenthesized declarator, but the binding of complicated
  declarators may be altered by parentheses.
 
                                                                  Implementation limits
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  As discussed in 5.2.4.1, an implementation may limit the number of pointer, array, and
  function declarators that modify an arithmetic, structure, union, or void type, either
  directly or via one or more typedefs.
@@ -7301,7 +7301,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.6.1 Pointer declarators
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
                                                                            * type-qualifier-listopt D
@@ -7309,10 +7309,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list type-qualifier-list
  pointer to T ''. For each type qualifier in the list, ident is a so-qualified pointer.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  For two pointer types to be compatible, both shall be identically qualified and both shall
  be pointers to compatible types.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  EXAMPLE The following pair of declarations demonstrates the difference between a ''variable pointer
  to a constant value'' and a ''constant pointer to a variable value''.
 
                                                                  @@ -7323,7 +7323,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  but ptr_to_constant itself may be changed to point to another object. Similarly, the contents of the
  int pointed to by constant_ptr may be modified, but constant_ptr itself shall always point to the
  same location.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  The declaration of the constant pointer constant_ptr may be clarified by including a definition for the
  type ''pointer to int''.
 
                                                                  @@ -7336,7 +7336,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.6.2 Array declarators
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  In addition to optional type qualifiers and the keyword static, the [ and ] may delimit
  an expression or *. If they delimit an expression (which specifies the size of an array), the
  expression shall have an integer type. If the expression is a constant expression, it shall
@@ -7344,14 +7344,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  type. The optional type qualifiers and the keyword static shall appear only in a
  declaration of a function parameter with an array type, and then only in the outermost
  array type derivation.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  If an identifier is declared as having a variably modified type, it shall be an ordinary
  identifier (as defined in 6.2.3), have no linkage, and have either block scope or function
  prototype scope. If an identifier is declared to be an object with static or thread storage
  duration, it shall not have a variable length array type.
 
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has one of the forms:
 
                                                                             D[ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ]
@@ -7362,7 +7362,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list array of T ''.142)
  (See 6.7.6.3 for the meaning of the optional type qualifiers and the keyword static.)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  If the size is not present, the array type is an incomplete type. If the size is * instead of
  being an expression, the array type is a variable length array type of unspecified size,
  which can only be used in declarations or type names with function prototype scope;143)
@@ -7370,7 +7370,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and the element type has a known constant size, the array type is not a variable length
  array type; otherwise, the array type is a variable length array type. (Variable length
  arrays are a conditional feature that implementations need not support; see 6.10.8.3.)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  If the size is an expression that is not an integer constant expression: if it occurs in a
  declaration at function prototype scope, it is treated as if it were replaced by *; otherwise,
  each time it is evaluated it shall have a value greater than zero. The size of each instance
@@ -7378,20 +7378,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expression is part of the operand of a sizeof operator and changing the value of the
  size expression would not affect the result of the operator, it is unspecified whether or not
  the size expression is evaluated.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  For two array types to be compatible, both shall have compatible element types, and if
  both size specifiers are present, and are integer constant expressions, then both size
  specifiers shall have the same constant value. If the two array types are used in a context
  which requires them to be compatible, it is undefined behavior if the two size specifiers
  evaluate to unequal values.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  EXAMPLE 1
 
                                                                             float fa[11], *afp[17];
 
                                                                  
  declares an array of float numbers and an array of pointers to float numbers.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  EXAMPLE 2       Note the distinction between the declarations
  
  
@@ -7405,7 +7405,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  The first declares x to be a pointer to int; the second declares y to be an array of int of unspecified size
  (an incomplete type), the storage for which is defined elsewhere.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  EXAMPLE 3      The following declarations demonstrate the compatibility rules for variably modified types.
 
                                                                            extern int n;
@@ -7422,7 +7422,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          }
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  EXAMPLE 4 All declarations of variably modified (VM) types have to be at either block scope or
  function prototype scope. Array objects declared with the _Thread_local, static, or extern
  storage-class specifier cannot have a variable length array (VLA) type. However, an object declared with
@@ -7464,19 +7464,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.6.3 Function declarators (including prototypes)
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
  A function declarator shall not specify a return type that is a function type or an array
  type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  The only storage-class specifier that shall occur in a parameter declaration is register.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  An identifier list in a function declarator that is not part of a definition of that function
  shall be empty.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  After adjustment, the parameters in a parameter type list in a function declarator that is
  part of a definition of that function shall not have incomplete type.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
 
                                                                            D( parameter-type-list )
@@ -7488,47 +7488,47 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and the type specified for ident in the declaration ''T D'' is ''derived-declarator-type-list
  T '', then the type specified for ident is ''derived-declarator-type-list function returning
  T ''.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  A parameter type list specifies the types of, and may declare identifiers for, the
  parameters of the function.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  A declaration of a parameter as ''array of type'' shall be adjusted to ''qualified pointer to
  type'', where the type qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of the
  array type derivation. If the keyword static also appears within the [ and ] of the
  array type derivation, then for each call to the function, the value of the corresponding
  actual argument shall provide access to the first element of an array with at least as many
  elements as specified by the size expression.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  A declaration of a parameter as ''function returning type'' shall be adjusted to ''pointer to
  function returning type'', as in 6.3.2.1.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  If the list terminates with an ellipsis (, ...), no information about the number or types
  of the parameters after the comma is supplied.144)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  The special case of an unnamed parameter of type void as the only item in the list
  specifies that the function has no parameters.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  11
  If, in a parameter declaration, an identifier can be treated either as a typedef name or as a
  parameter name, it shall be taken as a typedef name.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  12
  If the function declarator is not part of a definition of that function, parameters may have
  incomplete type and may use the [*] notation in their sequences of declarator specifiers
  to specify variable length array types.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  13
  The storage-class specifier in the declaration specifiers for a parameter declaration, if
  present, is ignored unless the declared parameter is one of the members of the parameter
  type list for a function definition.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  14
  An identifier list declares only the identifiers of the parameters of the function. An empty
  list in a function declarator that is part of a definition of that function specifies that the
  function has no parameters. The empty list in a function declarator that is not part of a
  definition of that function specifies that no information about the number or types of the
  parameters is supplied.145)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  15
  For two function types to be compatible, both shall specify compatible return types.146)
  Moreover, the parameter type lists, if both are present, shall agree in the number of
  parameters and in use of the ellipsis terminator; corresponding parameters shall have
@@ -7544,7 +7544,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  compatibility and of a composite type, each parameter declared with function or array
  type is taken as having the adjusted type and each parameter declared with qualified type
  is taken as having the unqualified version of its declared type.)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  16
  EXAMPLE 1       The declaration
 
                                                                             int f(void), *fip(), (*pfi)();
@@ -7559,13 +7559,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  designator, which is then used to call the function; it returns an int.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  17
  If the declaration occurs outside of any function, the identifiers have file scope and external linkage. If the
  declaration occurs inside a function, the identifiers of the functions f and fip have block scope and either
  internal or external linkage (depending on what file scope declarations for these identifiers are visible), and
  the identifier of the pointer pfi has block scope and no linkage.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  18
  EXAMPLE 2        The declaration
 
                                                                              int (*apfi[3])(int *x, int *y);
@@ -7574,7 +7574,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  parameters that are pointers to int. The identifiers x and y are declared for descriptive purposes only and
  go out of scope at the end of the declaration of apfi.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  19
  EXAMPLE 3        The declaration
 
                                                                              int (*fpfi(int (*)(long), int))(int, ...);
@@ -7584,7 +7584,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  The pointer returned by fpfi points to a function that has one int parameter and accepts zero or more
  additional arguments of any type.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  20
  EXAMPLE 4        The following prototype has a variably modified parameter.
 
                                                                              void addscalar(int n, int m,
@@ -7605,7 +7605,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            }
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  21
  EXAMPLE 5        The following are all compatible function prototype declarators.
 
                                                                              double    maximum(int       n,   int   m,   double     a[n][m]);
@@ -7638,7 +7638,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.7 Type names
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             type-name:
                  specifier-qualifier-list abstract-declaratoropt
@@ -7657,11 +7657,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   direct-abstract-declaratoropt ( parameter-type-listopt )
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  In several contexts, it is necessary to specify a type. This is accomplished using a type
  name, which is syntactically a declaration for a function or an object of that type that
  omits the identifier.147)
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  EXAMPLE        The constructions
 
                                                                             (a)      int
@@ -7692,16 +7692,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.8 Type definitions
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             typedef-name:
                  identifier
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  If a typedef name specifies a variably modified type then it shall have block scope.
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  In a declaration whose storage-class specifier is typedef, each declarator defines an
  identifier to be a typedef name that denotes the type specified for the identifier in the way
  described in 6.7.6. Any array size expressions associated with variable length array
@@ -7717,7 +7717,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  type-list T '' where the derived-declarator-type-list is specified by the declarators of D. A
  typedef name shares the same name space as other identifiers declared in ordinary
  declarators.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  EXAMPLE 1       After
 
                                                                             typedef int MILES, KLICKSP();
@@ -7734,7 +7734,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  parameter specification returning int'', and that of x and z is the specified structure; zp is a pointer to
  such a structure. The object distance has a type compatible with any other int object.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  EXAMPLE 2       After the declarations
 
                                                                             typedef struct s1 { int x; } t1, *tp1;
@@ -7744,7 +7744,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  s1, but not compatible with the types struct s2, t2, the type pointed to by tp2, or int.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  EXAMPLE 3       The following obscure constructions
 
                                                                             typedef signed int t;
@@ -7771,7 +7771,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  with type pointer to function returning signed int with one unnamed parameter with type signed
  int'', and an identifier t with type long int.
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  EXAMPLE 4 On the other hand, typedef names can be used to improve code readability. All three of the
  following declarations of the signal function specify exactly the same type, the first without making use
  of any typedef names.
@@ -7782,7 +7782,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           pfv signal(int, pfv);
 
                                                                  
  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  EXAMPLE 5 If a typedef name denotes a variable length array type, the length of the array is fixed at the
  time the typedef name is defined, not each time it is used:
 
@@ -7801,7 +7801,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  6.7.9 Initialization
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Syntax
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                             initializer:
                    assignment-expression
@@ -7820,19 +7820,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  . identifier
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                  Constraints
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  2
  No initializer shall attempt to provide a value for an object not contained within the entity
  being initialized.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  3
  The type of the entity to be initialized shall be an array of unknown size or a complete
  object type that is not a variable length array type.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  4
  All the expressions in an initializer for an object that has static or thread storage duration
  shall be constant expressions or string literals.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  5
  If the declaration of an identifier has block scope, and the identifier has external or
  internal linkage, the declaration shall have no initializer for the identifier.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  6
  If a designator has the form
 
                                                                             [ constant-expression ]
@@ -7840,7 +7840,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  then the current object (defined below) shall have array type and the expression shall be
  an integer constant expression. If the array is of unknown size, any nonnegative value is
  valid.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  7
  If a designator has the form
 
                                                                             . identifier
@@ -7849,13 +7849,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  identifier shall be the name of a member of that type.
 
 
                                                                  Semantics
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  8
  An initializer specifies the initial value stored in an object.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  9
  Except where explicitly stated otherwise, for the purposes of this subclause unnamed
  members of objects of structure and union type do not participate in initialization.
  Unnamed members of structure objects have indeterminate value even after initialization.
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  10
  If an object that has automatic storage duration is not initialized explicitly, its value is
  indeterminate. If an object that has static or thread storage duration is not initialized
  explicitly, then:
@@ -7867,36 +7867,36 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                •   if it is a union, the first named member is initialized (recursively) according to these
  rules, and any padding is initialized to zero bits;
 
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                11
  The initializer for a scalar shall be a single expression, optionally enclosed in braces. The
  initial value of the object is that of the expression (after conversion); the same type
  constraints and conversions as for simple assignment apply, taking the type of the scalar
  to be the unqualified version of its declared type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                12
  The rest of this subclause deals with initializers for objects that have aggregate or union
  type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                13
  The initializer for a structure or union object that has automatic storage duration shall be
  either an initializer list as described below, or a single expression that has compatible
  structure or union type. In the latter case, the initial value of the object, including
  unnamed members, is that of the expression.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                14
  An array of character type may be initialized by a character string literal or UTF-8 string
  literal, optionally enclosed in braces. Successive bytes of the string literal (including the
  terminating null character if there is room or if the array is of unknown size) initialize the
  elements of the array.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                15
  An array with element type compatible with a qualified or unqualified version of
  wchar_t, char16_t, or char32_t may be initialized by a wide string literal with
  the corresponding encoding prefix (L, u, or U, respectively), optionally enclosed in
  braces. Successive wide characters of the wide string literal (including the terminating
  null wide character if there is room or if the array is of unknown size) initialize the
  elements of the array.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                16
  Otherwise, the initializer for an object that has aggregate or union type shall be a brace-
  enclosed list of initializers for the elements or named members.
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                17
  Each brace-enclosed initializer list has an associated current object. When no
  designations are present, subobjects of the current object are initialized in order according
  to the type of the current object: array elements in increasing subscript order, structure
@@ -7904,18 +7904,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  designation causes the following initializer to begin initialization of the subobject
  described by the designator. Initialization then continues forward in order, beginning
  with the next subobject after that described by the designator.149)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                18
  Each designator list begins its description with the current object associated with the
  closest surrounding brace pair. Each item in the designator list (in order) specifies a
  particular member of its current object and changes the current object for the next
  designator (if any) to be that member.150) The current object that results at the end of the
  designator list is the subobject to be initialized by the following initializer.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                19
  The initialization shall occur in initializer list order, each initializer provided for a
  particular subobject overriding any previously listed initializer for the same subobject;151)
  all subobjects that are not initialized explicitly shall be initialized implicitly the same as
  objects that have static storage duration.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                20
  If the aggregate or union contains elements or members that are aggregates or unions,
  these rules apply recursively to the subaggregates or contained unions. If the initializer of
  a subaggregate or contained union begins with a left brace, the initializers enclosed by
@@ -7924,7 +7924,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  taken to account for the elements or members of the subaggregate or the first member of
  the contained union; any remaining initializers are left to initialize the next element or
  member of the aggregate of which the current subaggregate or contained union is a part.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                21
  If there are fewer initializers in a brace-enclosed list than there are elements or members
  of an aggregate, or fewer characters in a string literal used to initialize an array of known
  size than there are elements in the array, the remainder of the aggregate shall be
@@ -7933,15 +7933,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                22
  If an array of unknown size is initialized, its size is determined by the largest indexed
  element with an explicit initializer. The array type is completed at the end of its
  initializer list.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                23
  The evaluations of the initialization list expressions are indeterminately sequenced with
  respect to one another and thus the order in which any side effects occur is
  unspecified.152)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                24
  EXAMPLE 1       Provided that <complex.h> has been #included, the declarations
 
                                                                           int i = 3.5;
@@ -7949,7 +7949,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  define and initialize i with the value 3 and c with the value 5.0 + i3.0.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                25
  EXAMPLE 2       The declaration
 
                                                                           int x[] = { 1, 3, 5 };
@@ -7957,7 +7957,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  defines and initializes x as a one-dimensional array object that has three elements, as no size was specified
  and there are three initializers.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                26
  EXAMPLE 3       The declaration
 
                                                                           int y[4][3] =         {
@@ -7978,7 +7978,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  The initializer for y[0] does not begin with a left brace, so three items from the list are used. Likewise the
  next three are taken successively for y[1] and y[2].
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                27
  EXAMPLE 4       The declaration
 
                                                                           int z[4][3] = {
@@ -7987,7 +7987,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  initializes the first column of z as specified and initializes the rest with zeros.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                28
  EXAMPLE 5       The declaration
 
                                                                           struct { int a[3], b; } w[] = { { 1 }, 2 };
@@ -7999,7 +7999,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  structures: w[0].a[0] is 1 and w[1].a[0] is 2; all the other elements are zero.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                29
  EXAMPLE 6         The declaration
 
                                                                            short q[4][3][2] = {
@@ -8039,11 +8039,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            };
 
                                                                
  in a fully bracketed form.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                30
  Note that the fully bracketed and minimally bracketed forms of initialization are, in general, less likely to
  cause confusion.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                31
  EXAMPLE 7         One form of initialization that completes array types involves typedef names. Given the
  declaration
 
                                                                @@ -8059,7 +8059,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  due to the rules for incomplete types.
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                32
  EXAMPLE 8       The declaration
 
                                                                           char s[] = "abc", t[3] = "abc";
@@ -8078,7 +8078,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  with length 4 whose elements are initialized with a character string literal. If an attempt is made to use p to
  modify the contents of the array, the behavior is undefined.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                33
  EXAMPLE 9       Arrays can be initialized to correspond to the elements of an enumeration by using
  designators:
 
                                                                @@ -8089,13 +8089,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           };
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                34
  EXAMPLE 10       Structure members can be initialized to nonzero values without depending on their order:
 
                                                                           div_t answer = { .quot = 2, .rem = -1 };
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                35
  EXAMPLE 11 Designators can be used to provide explicit initialization when unadorned initializer lists
  might be misunderstood:
 
                                                                @@ -8103,18 +8103,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 { [0].a = {1}, [1].a[0] = 2 };
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                36
  EXAMPLE 12       Space can be ''allocated'' from both ends of an array by using a single designator:
 
                                                                           int a[MAX] = {
                 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, [MAX-5] = 8, 6, 4, 2, 0
           };
 
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                37
  In the above, if MAX is greater than ten, there will be some zero-valued elements in the middle; if it is less
  than ten, some of the values provided by the first five initializers will be overridden by the second five.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                38
  EXAMPLE 13       Any member of a union can be initialized:
 
                                                                           union { /* ... */ } u = { .any_member = 42 };
@@ -8143,16 +8143,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.7.10 Static assertions
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           static_assert-declaration:
                   _Static_assert ( constant-expression , string-literal ) ;
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The constant expression shall compare unequal to 0.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The constant expression shall be an integer constant expression. If the value of the
  constant expression compares unequal to 0, the declaration has no effect. Otherwise, the
  constraint is violated and the implementation shall produce a diagnostic message that
@@ -8164,7 +8164,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8 Statements and blocks
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           statement:
                  labeled-statement
@@ -8175,17 +8175,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  jump-statement
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A statement specifies an action to be performed. Except as indicated, statements are
  executed in sequence.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A block allows a set of declarations and statements to be grouped into one syntactic unit.
  The initializers of objects that have automatic storage duration, and the variable length
  array declarators of ordinary identifiers with block scope, are evaluated and the values are
  stored in the objects (including storing an indeterminate value in objects without an
  initializer) each time the declaration is reached in the order of execution, as if it were a
  statement, and within each declaration in the order that declarators appear.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  A full expression is an expression that is not part of another expression or of a declarator.
  Each of the following is a full expression: an initializer that is not part of a compound
  literal; the expression in an expression statement; the controlling expression of a selection
@@ -8199,7 +8199,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.1 Labeled statements
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           labeled-statement:
                  identifier : statement
@@ -8207,14 +8207,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  default : statement
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A case or default label shall appear only in a switch statement. Further
  constraints on such labels are discussed under the switch statement.
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  Label names shall be unique within a function.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  Any statement may be preceded by a prefix that declares an identifier as a label name.
  Labels in themselves do not alter the flow of control, which continues unimpeded across
  them.
@@ -8223,7 +8223,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.2 Compound statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           compound-statement:
                 { block-item-listopt }
@@ -8235,24 +8235,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   statement
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A compound statement is a block.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.3 Expression and null statements
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           expression-statement:
                  expressionopt ;
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The expression in an expression statement is evaluated as a void expression for its side
  effects.153)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A null statement (consisting of just a semicolon) performs no operations.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE 1 If a function call is evaluated as an expression statement for its side effects only, the
  discarding of its value may be made explicit by converting the expression to a void expression by means of
  a cast:
@@ -8265,7 +8265,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  EXAMPLE 2       In the program fragment
 
                                                                           char *s;
@@ -8275,7 +8275,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  a null statement is used to supply an empty loop body to the iteration statement.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  EXAMPLE 3       A null statement may also be used to carry a label just before the closing } of a compound
  statement.
 
                                                                @@ -8301,7 +8301,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.4 Selection statements
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           selection-statement:
                   if ( expression ) statement
@@ -8309,10 +8309,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   switch ( expression ) statement
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A selection statement selects among a set of statements depending on the value of a
  controlling expression.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A selection statement is a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope of its
  enclosing block. Each associated substatement is also a block whose scope is a strict
  subset of the scope of the selection statement.
@@ -8320,29 +8320,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.4.1 The if statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The controlling expression of an if statement shall have scalar type.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  In both forms, the first substatement is executed if the expression compares unequal to 0.
  In the else form, the second substatement is executed if the expression compares equal
 
  to 0. If the first substatement is reached via a label, the second substatement is not
  executed.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  An else is associated with the lexically nearest preceding if that is allowed by the
  syntax.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.4.2 The switch statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The controlling expression of a switch statement shall have integer type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  If a switch statement has an associated case or default label within the scope of an
  identifier with a variably modified type, the entire switch statement shall be within the
  scope of that identifier.154)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The expression of each case label shall be an integer constant expression and no two of
  the case constant expressions in the same switch statement shall have the same value
  after conversion. There may be at most one default label in a switch statement.
@@ -8350,12 +8350,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expressions with values that duplicate case constant expressions in the enclosing
  switch statement.)
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  A switch statement causes control to jump to, into, or past the statement that is the
  switch body, depending on the value of a controlling expression, and on the presence of a
  default label and the values of any case labels on or in the switch body. A case or
  default label is accessible only within the closest enclosing switch statement.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The integer promotions are performed on the controlling expression. The constant
  expression in each case label is converted to the promoted type of the controlling
  expression. If a converted value matches that of the promoted controlling expression,
@@ -8364,7 +8364,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expression matches and there is no default label, no part of the switch body is
  executed.
 
                                                                Implementation limits
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  As discussed in 5.2.4.1, the implementation may limit the number of case values in a
  switch statement.
  
@@ -8372,7 +8372,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  EXAMPLE        In the artificial program fragment
 
                                                                           switch (expr)
@@ -8399,7 +8399,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.5 Iteration statements
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           iteration-statement:
                   while ( expression ) statement
@@ -8408,21 +8408,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   for ( declaration expressionopt ; expressionopt ) statement
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The controlling expression of an iteration statement shall have scalar type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The declaration part of a for statement shall only declare identifiers for objects having
  storage class auto or register.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  An iteration statement causes a statement called the loop body to be executed repeatedly
  until the controlling expression compares equal to 0. The repetition occurs regardless of
  whether the loop body is entered from the iteration statement or by a jump.155)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  An iteration statement is a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope of its
  enclosing block. The loop body is also a block whose scope is a strict subset of the scope
  of the iteration statement.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  An iteration statement whose controlling expression is not a constant expression,156) that
  performs no input/output operations, does not access volatile objects, and performs no
  synchronization or atomic operations in its body, controlling expression, or (in the case of
@@ -8443,19 +8443,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.5.1 The while statement
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place before each execution of the loop
  body.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.5.2 The do statement
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place after each execution of the loop
  body.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.5.3 The for statement
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The statement
 
                                                                           for ( clause-1 ; expression-2 ; expression-3 ) statement
@@ -8467,7 +8467,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the entire loop, including the other two expressions; it is reached in the order of execution
  before the first evaluation of the controlling expression. If clause-1 is an expression, it is
  evaluated as a void expression before the first evaluation of the controlling expression.158)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  Both clause-1 and expression-3 can be omitted. An omitted expression-2 is replaced by a
  nonzero constant.
 
@@ -8481,7 +8481,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.6 Jump statements
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           jump-statement:
                  goto identifier ;
@@ -8495,21 +8495,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A jump statement causes an unconditional jump to another place.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.6.1 The goto statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The identifier in a goto statement shall name a label located somewhere in the enclosing
  function. A goto statement shall not jump from outside the scope of an identifier having
  a variably modified type to inside the scope of that identifier.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A goto statement causes an unconditional jump to the statement prefixed by the named
  label in the enclosing function.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  EXAMPLE 1 It is sometimes convenient to jump into the middle of a complicated set of statements. The
  following outline presents one possible approach to a problem based on these three assumptions:
 
                                                                  
@@ -8537,7 +8537,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
     }
 
                                                                
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE 2 A goto statement is not allowed to jump past any declarations of objects with variably
  modified types. A jump within the scope, however, is permitted.
 
                                                                @@ -8559,10 +8559,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.6.2 The continue statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A continue statement shall appear only in or as a loop body.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A continue statement causes a jump to the loop-continuation portion of the smallest
  enclosing iteration statement; that is, to the end of the loop body. More precisely, in each
  of the statements
@@ -8584,10 +8584,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.6.3 The break statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A break statement shall appear only in or as a switch body or loop body.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A break statement terminates execution of the smallest enclosing switch or iteration
  statement.
  
@@ -8598,20 +8598,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.8.6.4 The return statement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A return statement with an expression shall not appear in a function whose return type
  is void. A return statement without an expression shall only appear in a function
  whose return type is void.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A return statement terminates execution of the current function and returns control to
  its caller. A function may have any number of return statements.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  If a return statement with an expression is executed, the value of the expression is
  returned to the caller as the value of the function call expression. If the expression has a
  type different from the return type of the function in which it appears, the value is
  converted as if by assignment to an object having the return type of the function.160)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE       In:
 
                                                                          struct s { double i; } f(void);
@@ -8649,7 +8649,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.9 External definitions
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           translation-unit:
                   external-declaration
@@ -8659,23 +8659,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  declaration
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The storage-class specifiers auto and register shall not appear in the declaration
  specifiers in an external declaration.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  There shall be no more than one external definition for each identifier declared with
  internal linkage in a translation unit. Moreover, if an identifier declared with internal
  linkage is used in an expression (other than as a part of the operand of a sizeof or
  _Alignof operator whose result is an integer constant), there shall be exactly one
  external definition for the identifier in the translation unit.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  As discussed in 5.1.1.1, the unit of program text after preprocessing is a translation unit,
  which consists of a sequence of external declarations. These are described as ''external''
  because they appear outside any function (and hence have file scope). As discussed in
  6.7, a declaration that also causes storage to be reserved for an object or a function named
  by the identifier is a definition.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  An external definition is an external declaration that is also a definition of a function
  (other than an inline definition) or an object. If an identifier declared with external
  linkage is used in an expression (other than as part of the operand of a sizeof or
@@ -8696,7 +8696,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.9.1 Function definitions
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           function-definition:
                  declaration-specifiers declarator declaration-listopt compound-statement
@@ -8705,21 +8705,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  declaration-list declaration
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The identifier declared in a function definition (which is the name of the function) shall
  have a function type, as specified by the declarator portion of the function definition.162)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The return type of a function shall be void or a complete object type other than array
  type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  The storage-class specifier, if any, in the declaration specifiers shall be either extern or
  static.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  If the declarator includes a parameter type list, the declaration of each parameter shall
  include an identifier, except for the special case of a parameter list consisting of a single
  parameter of type void, in which case there shall not be an identifier. No declaration list
  shall follow.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  If the declarator includes an identifier list, each declaration in the declaration list shall
  have at least one declarator, those declarators shall declare only identifiers from the
  identifier list, and every identifier in the identifier list shall be declared. An identifier
@@ -8731,7 +8731,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  The declarator in a function definition specifies the name of the function being defined
  and the identifiers of its parameters. If the declarator includes a parameter type list, the
  list also specifies the types of all the parameters; such a declarator also serves as a
@@ -8740,24 +8740,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  following declaration list. In either case, the type of each parameter is adjusted as
  described in 6.7.6.3 for a parameter type list; the resulting type shall be a complete object
  type.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  If a function that accepts a variable number of arguments is defined without a parameter
  type list that ends with the ellipsis notation, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                9
  Each parameter has automatic storage duration; its identifier is an lvalue.164) The layout
  of the storage for parameters is unspecified.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                10
  On entry to the function, the size expressions of each variably modified parameter are
  evaluated and the value of each argument expression is converted to the type of the
  corresponding parameter as if by assignment. (Array expressions and function
  designators as arguments were converted to pointers before the call.)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                11
  After all parameters have been assigned, the compound statement that constitutes the
  body of the function definition is executed.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                12
  If the } that terminates a function is reached, and the value of the function call is used by
  the caller, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                13
  EXAMPLE 1       In the following:
 
                                                                           extern int max(int a, int b)
@@ -8788,7 +8788,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  that the first form acts as a prototype declaration that forces conversion of the arguments of subsequent calls
  to the function, whereas the second form does not.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                14
  EXAMPLE 2           To pass one function to another, one might say
 
                                                                                       int f(void);
@@ -8838,10 +8838,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.9.2 External object definitions
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  If the declaration of an identifier for an object has file scope and an initializer, the
  declaration is an external definition for the identifier.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A declaration of an identifier for an object that has file scope without an initializer, and
  without a storage-class specifier or with the storage-class specifier static, constitutes a
  tentative definition. If a translation unit contains one or more tentative definitions for an
@@ -8849,11 +8849,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the behavior is exactly as if the translation unit contains a file scope declaration of that
  identifier, with the composite type as of the end of the translation unit, with an initializer
  equal to 0.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  If the declaration of an identifier for an object is a tentative definition and has internal
  linkage, the declared type shall not be an incomplete type.
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE 1
 
                                                                           int i1 = 1;                    // definition, external linkage
@@ -8873,7 +8873,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           extern    int   i5;            // refers to previous, whose linkage is internal
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  EXAMPLE 2       If at the end of the translation unit containing
 
                                                                           int i[];
@@ -8885,7 +8885,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10 Preprocessing directives
                                                                
 
                                                                Syntax
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
 
                                                                           preprocessing-file:
@@ -8941,7 +8941,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  the new-line character
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A preprocessing directive consists of a sequence of preprocessing tokens that satisfies the
  following constraints: The first token in the sequence is a # preprocessing token that (at
  the start of translation phase 4) is either the first character in the source file (optionally
@@ -8952,29 +8952,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  invocation of a function-like macro.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A text line shall not begin with a # preprocessing token. A non-directive shall not begin
  with any of the directive names appearing in the syntax.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  When in a group that is skipped (6.10.1), the directive syntax is relaxed to allow any
  sequence of preprocessing tokens to occur between the directive name and the following
  new-line character.
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The only white-space characters that shall appear between preprocessing tokens within a
  preprocessing directive (from just after the introducing # preprocessing token through
  just before the terminating new-line character) are space and horizontal-tab (including
  spaces that have replaced comments or possibly other white-space characters in
  translation phase 3).
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  The implementation can process and skip sections of source files conditionally, include
  other source files, and replace macros. These capabilities are called preprocessing,
  because conceptually they occur before translation of the resulting translation unit.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  The preprocessing tokens within a preprocessing directive are not subject to macro
  expansion unless otherwise stated.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  EXAMPLE        In:
 
                                                                           #define EMPTY
@@ -8994,7 +8994,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.1 Conditional inclusion
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The expression that controls conditional inclusion shall be an integer constant expression
  except that: identifiers (including those lexically identical to keywords) are interpreted as
  described below;166) and it may contain unary operator expressions of the form
@@ -9011,19 +9011,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  predefined or if it has been the subject of a #define preprocessing directive without an
  intervening #undef directive with the same subject identifier), 0 if it is not.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  Each preprocessing token that remains (in the list of preprocessing tokens that will
  become the controlling expression) after all macro replacements have occurred shall be in
  the lexical form of a token (6.4).
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  Preprocessing directives of the forms
 
                                                                     # if   constant-expression new-line groupopt
     # elif constant-expression new-line groupopt
 
                                                                
  check whether the controlling constant expression evaluates to nonzero.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  Prior to evaluation, macro invocations in the list of preprocessing tokens that will become
  the controlling constant expression are replaced (except for those macro names modified
  by the defined unary operator), just as in normal text. If the token defined is
@@ -9047,7 +9047,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  Preprocessing directives of the forms
 
                                                                     # ifdef identifier new-line groupopt
@@ -9056,7 +9056,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  check whether the identifier is or is not currently defined as a macro name. Their
  conditions are equivalent to #if defined identifier and #if !defined identifier
  respectively.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  Each directive's condition is checked in order. If it evaluates to false (zero), the group
  that it controls is skipped: directives are processed only through the name that determines
  the directive in order to keep track of the level of nested conditionals; the rest of the
@@ -9092,11 +9092,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.2 Source file inclusion
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A #include directive shall identify a header or source file that can be processed by the
  implementation.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # include <h-char-sequence> new-line
@@ -9105,7 +9105,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the specified sequence between the < and > delimiters, and causes the replacement of that
  directive by the entire contents of the header. How the places are specified or the header
  identified is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # include "q-char-sequence" new-line
@@ -9122,7 +9122,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  with the identical contained sequence (including > characters, if any) from the original
  directive.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # include pp-tokens new-line
@@ -9134,17 +9134,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the two previous forms.170) The method by which a sequence of preprocessing tokens
  between a < and a > preprocessing token pair or a pair of " characters is combined into a
  single header name preprocessing token is implementation-defined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The implementation shall provide unique mappings for sequences consisting of one or
  more nondigits or digits (6.4.2.1) followed by a period (.) and a single nondigit. The
  first character shall not be a digit. The implementation may ignore distinctions of
  alphabetical case and restrict the mapping to eight significant characters before the
  period.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  A #include preprocessing directive may appear in a source file that has been read
  because of a #include directive in another file, up to an implementation-defined
  nesting limit (see 5.2.4.1).
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  EXAMPLE 1       The most common uses of #include preprocessing directives are as in the following:
 
                                                                            #include <stdio.h>
@@ -9155,7 +9155,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  EXAMPLE 2     This illustrates macro-replaced #include directives:
 
                                                                         #if VERSION == 1
@@ -9178,11 +9178,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3 Macro replacement
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Two replacement lists are identical if and only if the preprocessing tokens in both have
  the same number, ordering, spelling, and white-space separation, where all white-space
  separations are considered identical.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  An identifier currently defined as an object-like macro shall not be redefined by another
  #define preprocessing directive unless the second definition is an object-like macro
  definition and the two replacement lists are identical. Likewise, an identifier currently
@@ -9190,33 +9190,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  preprocessing directive unless the second definition is a function-like macro definition
  that has the same number and spelling of parameters, and the two replacement lists are
  identical.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  There shall be white-space between the identifier and the replacement list in the definition
  of an object-like macro.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  If the identifier-list in the macro definition does not end with an ellipsis, the number of
  arguments (including those arguments consisting of no preprocessing tokens) in an
  invocation of a function-like macro shall equal the number of parameters in the macro
  definition. Otherwise, there shall be more arguments in the invocation than there are
  parameters in the macro definition (excluding the ...). There shall exist a )
  preprocessing token that terminates the invocation.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The identifier __VA_ARGS__ shall occur only in the replacement-list of a function-like
  macro that uses the ellipsis notation in the parameters.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  A parameter identifier in a function-like macro shall be uniquely declared within its
  scope.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  The identifier immediately following the define is called the macro name. There is one
  name space for macro names. Any white-space characters preceding or following the
  replacement list of preprocessing tokens are not considered part of the replacement list
 
  for either form of macro.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  If a # preprocessing token, followed by an identifier, occurs lexically at the point at which
  a preprocessing directive could begin, the identifier is not subject to macro replacement.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                9
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # define identifier replacement-list new-line
@@ -9225,7 +9225,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  to be replaced by the replacement list of preprocessing tokens that constitute the
  remainder of the directive. The replacement list is then rescanned for more macro names
  as specified below.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                10
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # define identifier lparen identifier-listopt ) replacement-list new-line
@@ -9243,14 +9243,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  left and right parenthesis preprocessing tokens. Within the sequence of preprocessing
  tokens making up an invocation of a function-like macro, new-line is considered a normal
  white-space character.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                11
  The sequence of preprocessing tokens bounded by the outside-most matching parentheses
  forms the list of arguments for the function-like macro. The individual arguments within
  the list are separated by comma preprocessing tokens, but comma preprocessing tokens
  between matching inner parentheses do not separate arguments. If there are sequences of
  preprocessing tokens within the list of arguments that would otherwise act as
  preprocessing directives,172) the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                12
  If there is a ... in the identifier-list in the macro definition, then the trailing arguments,
  including any separating comma preprocessing tokens, are merged to form a single item:
  
@@ -9270,7 +9270,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3.1 Argument substitution
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  After the arguments for the invocation of a function-like macro have been identified,
  argument substitution takes place. A parameter in the replacement list, unless preceded
  by a # or ## preprocessing token or followed by a ## preprocessing token (see below), is
@@ -9278,7 +9278,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expanded. Before being substituted, each argument's preprocessing tokens are
  completely macro replaced as if they formed the rest of the preprocessing file; no other
  preprocessing tokens are available.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  An identifier __VA_ARGS__ that occurs in the replacement list shall be treated as if it
  were a parameter, and the variable arguments shall form the preprocessing tokens used to
  replace it.
@@ -9286,11 +9286,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3.2 The # operator
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Each # preprocessing token in the replacement list for a function-like macro shall be
  followed by a parameter as the next preprocessing token in the replacement list.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  If, in the replacement list, a parameter is immediately preceded by a # preprocessing
  token, both are replaced by a single character string literal preprocessing token that
  contains the spelling of the preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding
@@ -9311,17 +9311,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3.3 The ## operator
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A ## preprocessing token shall not occur at the beginning or at the end of a replacement
  list for either form of macro definition.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  If, in the replacement list of a function-like macro, a parameter is immediately preceded
  or followed by a ## preprocessing token, the parameter is replaced by the corresponding
  argument's preprocessing token sequence; however, if an argument consists of no
  preprocessing tokens, the parameter is replaced by a placemarker preprocessing token
  instead.173)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  For both object-like and function-like macro invocations, before the replacement list is
  reexamined for more macro names to replace, each instance of a ## preprocessing token
  in the replacement list (not from an argument) is deleted and the preceding preprocessing
@@ -9332,7 +9332,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  If the result is not a valid preprocessing token, the behavior is undefined. The resulting
  token is available for further macro replacement. The order of evaluation of ## operators
  is unspecified.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE       In the following fragment:
 
                                                                          #define     hash_hash # ## #
@@ -9363,23 +9363,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3.4 Rescanning and further replacement
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  After all parameters in the replacement list have been substituted and # and ##
  processing has taken place, all placemarker preprocessing tokens are removed. The
  resulting preprocessing token sequence is then rescanned, along with all subsequent
  preprocessing tokens of the source file, for more macro names to replace.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  If the name of the macro being replaced is found during this scan of the replacement list
  (not including the rest of the source file's preprocessing tokens), it is not replaced.
  Furthermore, if any nested replacements encounter the name of the macro being replaced,
  it is not replaced. These nonreplaced macro name preprocessing tokens are no longer
  available for further replacement even if they are later (re)examined in contexts in which
  that macro name preprocessing token would otherwise have been replaced.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The resulting completely macro-replaced preprocessing token sequence is not processed
  as a preprocessing directive even if it resembles one, but all pragma unary operator
  expressions within it are then processed as specified in 6.10.9 below.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE There are cases where it is not clear whether a replacement is nested or not. For example,
  given the following macro definitions:
 
                                                                @@ -9403,18 +9403,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.3.5 Scope of macro definitions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A macro definition lasts (independent of block structure) until a corresponding #undef
  directive is encountered or (if none is encountered) until the end of the preprocessing
  translation unit. Macro definitions have no significance after translation phase 4.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                       # undef identifier new-line
 
                                                                
  causes the specified identifier no longer to be defined as a macro name. It is ignored if
  the specified identifier is not currently defined as a macro name.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  EXAMPLE 1        The simplest use of this facility is to define a ''manifest constant'', as in
 
 
                                                                @@ -9422,7 +9422,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           int table[TABSIZE];
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  EXAMPLE 2 The following defines a function-like macro whose value is the maximum of its arguments.
  It has the advantages of working for any compatible types of the arguments and of generating in-line code
  without the overhead of function calling. It has the disadvantages of evaluating one or the other of its
@@ -9433,7 +9433,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  The parentheses ensure that the arguments and the resulting expression are bound properly.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  EXAMPLE 3      To illustrate the rules for redefinition and reexamination, the sequence
 
                                                                           #define    x          3
@@ -9464,7 +9464,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           char c[2][6] = { "hello", "" };
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  EXAMPLE 4      To illustrate the rules for creating character string literals and concatenating tokens, the
  sequence
 
@@ -9507,7 +9507,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  Space around the # and ## tokens in the macro definition is optional.
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  EXAMPLE 5        To illustrate the rules for placemarker preprocessing tokens, the sequence
 
                                                                           #define t(x,y,z) x ## y ## z
@@ -9520,7 +9520,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                       10, 11, 12, };
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  EXAMPLE 6        To demonstrate the redefinition rules, the following sequence is valid.
 
                                                                           #define      OBJ_LIKE      (1-1)
@@ -9538,7 +9538,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           #define      FUNC_LIKE(b) ( b ) // different parameter spelling
 
                                                                
  
-
                                                                
+
                                                                9
  EXAMPLE 7        Finally, to show the variable argument list macro facilities:
 
 
                                                                @@ -9564,14 +9564,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.4 Line control
                                                                
 
                                                                Constraints
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The string literal of a #line directive, if present, shall be a character string literal.
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The line number of the current source line is one greater than the number of new-line
  characters read or introduced in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2) while processing the source
  file to the current token.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # line digit-sequence new-line
@@ -9580,14 +9580,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  with a source line that has a line number as specified by the digit sequence (interpreted as
  a decimal integer). The digit sequence shall not specify zero, nor a number greater than
  2147483647.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # line digit-sequence "s-char-sequenceopt" new-line
 
                                                                
  sets the presumed line number similarly and changes the presumed name of the source
  file to be the contents of the character string literal.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # line pp-tokens new-line
@@ -9602,7 +9602,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.5 Error directive
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # error pp-tokensopt new-line
@@ -9613,7 +9613,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.6 Pragma directive
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # pragma pp-tokensopt new-line
@@ -9623,7 +9623,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  implementation-defined manner. The behavior might cause translation to fail or cause the
  translator or the resulting program to behave in a non-conforming manner. Any such
  pragma that is not recognized by the implementation is ignored.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  If the preprocessing token STDC does immediately follow pragma in the directive (prior
  to any macro replacement), then no macro replacement is performed on the directive, and
  the directive shall have one of the following forms175) whose meanings are described
@@ -9656,7 +9656,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.7 Null directive
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A preprocessing directive of the form
 
                                                                     # new-line
@@ -9665,15 +9665,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.8 Predefined macro names
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The values of the predefined macros listed in the following subclauses176) (except for
  __FILE__ and __LINE__) remain constant throughout the translation unit.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  None of these macro names, nor the identifier defined, shall be the subject of a
  #define or a #undef preprocessing directive. Any other predefined macro names
  shall begin with a leading underscore followed by an uppercase letter or a second
  underscore.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The implementation shall not predefine the macro __cplusplus, nor shall it define it
  in any standard header.
 
                                                                 Forward references: standard headers (7.1.2).
@@ -9684,7 +9684,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.8.1 Mandatory macros
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The following macro names shall be defined by the implementation:
  __DATE__ The date of translation of the preprocessing translation unit: a character
 
                                                                @@ -9729,7 +9729,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.8.2 Environment macros
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The following macro names are conditionally defined by the implementation:
  __STDC_ISO_10646__ An integer constant of the form yyyymmL (for example,
 
                                                                @@ -9768,7 +9768,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.8.3 Conditional feature macros
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The following macro names are conditionally defined by the implementation:
  __STDC_ANALYZABLE__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate conformance to
 
                                                                @@ -9806,7 +9806,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            implementation does not support variable length arrays or variably
            modified types.
 
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  An implementation that defines __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ shall not define
  __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__.
  
@@ -9823,7 +9823,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.10.9 Pragma operator
                                                                
 
                                                                Semantics
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A unary operator expression of the form:
 
                                                                     _Pragma ( string-literal )
@@ -9835,7 +9835,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  preprocessing tokens that are executed as if they were the pp-tokens in a pragma
  directive. The original four preprocessing tokens in the unary operator expression are
  removed.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  EXAMPLE       A directive of the form:
 
                                                                           #pragma listing on "..\listing.dir"
@@ -9858,55 +9858,55 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.1 Floating types
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Future standardization may include additional floating-point types, including those with
  greater range, precision, or both than long double.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.2 Linkages of identifiers
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Declaring an identifier with internal linkage at file scope without the static storage-
  class specifier is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.3 External names
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Restriction of the significance of an external name to fewer than 255 characters
  (considering each universal character name or extended source character as a single
  character) is an obsolescent feature that is a concession to existing implementations.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.4 Character escape sequences
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Lowercase letters as escape sequences are reserved for future standardization. Other
  characters may be used in extensions.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.5 Storage-class specifiers
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The placement of a storage-class specifier other than at the beginning of the declaration
  specifiers in a declaration is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.6 Function declarators
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The use of function declarators with empty parentheses (not prototype-format parameter
  type declarators) is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.7 Function definitions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The use of function definitions with separate parameter identifier and declaration lists
  (not prototype-format parameter type and identifier declarators) is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.8 Pragma directives
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Pragmas whose first preprocessing token is STDC are reserved for future standardization.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                6.11.9 Predefined macro names
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Macro names beginning with __STDC_ are reserved for future standardization.
 
 
@@ -9918,27 +9918,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.1.1 Definitions of terms
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  A string is a contiguous sequence of characters terminated by and including the first null
  character. The term multibyte string is sometimes used instead to emphasize special
  processing given to multibyte characters contained in the string or to avoid confusion
  with a wide string. A pointer to a string is a pointer to its initial (lowest addressed)
  character. The length of a string is the number of bytes preceding the null character and
  the value of a string is the sequence of the values of the contained characters, in order.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The decimal-point character is the character used by functions that convert floating-point
  numbers to or from character sequences to denote the beginning of the fractional part of
  such character sequences.180) It is represented in the text and examples by a period, but
  may be changed by the setlocale function.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  A null wide character is a wide character with code value zero.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  A wide string is a contiguous sequence of wide characters terminated by and including
  the first null wide character. A pointer to a wide string is a pointer to its initial (lowest
  addressed) wide character. The length of a wide string is the number of wide characters
  preceding the null wide character and the value of a wide string is the sequence of code
  values of the contained wide characters, in order.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  A shift sequence is a contiguous sequence of bytes within a multibyte string that
  (potentially) causes a change in shift state (see 5.2.1.2). A shift sequence shall not have a
  corresponding wide character; it is instead taken to be an adjunct to an adjacent multibyte
@@ -9962,13 +9962,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.1.2 Standard headers
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Each library function is declared, with a type that includes a prototype, in a header,182)
  whose contents are made available by the #include preprocessing directive. The
  header declares a set of related functions, plus any necessary types and additional macros
  needed to facilitate their use. Declarations of types described in this clause shall not
  include type qualifiers, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The standard headers are183)
 
                                                                         <assert.h>                     <math.h>                        <stdlib.h>
@@ -9982,11 +9982,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         <limits.h>                     <stdint.h>                      <wctype.h>
         <locale.h>                     <stdio.h>
 
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  If a file with the same name as one of the above < and > delimited sequences, not
  provided as part of the implementation, is placed in any of the standard places that are
  searched for included source files, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  Standard headers may be included in any order; each may be included more than once in
  a given scope, with no effect different from being included only once, except that the
  effect of including <assert.h> depends on the definition of NDEBUG (see 7.2). If
@@ -9997,16 +9997,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  included after the initial reference to the identifier. The program shall not have any
  macros with names lexically identical to keywords currently defined prior to the inclusion
  of the header or when any macro defined in the header is expanded.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  Any definition of an object-like macro described in this clause shall expand to code that is
  fully protected by parentheses where necessary, so that it groups in an arbitrary
  expression as if it were a single identifier.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  Any declaration of a library function shall have external linkage.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  A summary of the contents of the standard headers is given in annex B.
 
                                                                 Forward references: diagnostics (7.2).
 
@@ -10020,7 +10020,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.1.3 Reserved identifiers
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Each header declares or defines all identifiers listed in its associated subclause, and
  optionally declares or defines identifiers listed in its associated future library directions
  subclause and identifiers which are always reserved either for any use or for use as file
@@ -10040,11 +10040,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  future library directions) is reserved for use as a macro name and as an identifier with
  file scope in the same name space if any of its associated headers is included.
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  No other identifiers are reserved. If the program declares or defines an identifier in a
  context in which it is reserved (other than as allowed by 7.1.4), or defines a reserved
  identifier as a macro name, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  If the program removes (with #undef) any macro definition of an identifier in the first
  group listed above, the behavior is undefined.
  
@@ -10060,7 +10060,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.1.4 Use of library functions
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  Each of the following statements applies unless explicitly stated otherwise in the detailed
  descriptions that follow: If an argument to a function has an invalid value (such as a value
  outside the domain of the function, or a pointer outside the address space of the program,
@@ -10089,16 +10089,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  integer constant expressions shall additionally be suitable for use in #if preprocessing
  directives.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  Provided that a library function can be declared without reference to any type defined in a
  header, it is also permissible to declare the function and use it without including its
  associated header.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  There is a sequence point immediately before a library function returns.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  The functions in the standard library are not guaranteed to be reentrant and may modify
  objects with static or thread storage duration.188)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the detailed descriptions that follow, library
  functions shall prevent data races as follows: A library function shall not directly or
  indirectly access objects accessible by threads other than the current thread unless the
@@ -10107,10 +10107,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the current thread unless the objects are accessed directly or indirectly via the function's
  non-const arguments.189) Implementations may share their own internal objects between
  threads if the objects are not visible to users and are protected against data races.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  Unless otherwise specified, library functions shall perform all operations solely within the
  current thread if those operations have effects that are visible to users.190)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  EXAMPLE        The function atoi may be used in any of several ways:
 
                                                                
 
                                                              •   by use of its associated header (possibly generating a macro expansion)
@@ -10188,7 +10188,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.2 Diagnostics <assert.h>
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The header <assert.h> defines the assert and static_assert macros and
  refers to another macro,
 
                                                                @@ -10202,11 +10202,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  The assert macro is redefined according to the current state of NDEBUG each time that
  <assert.h> is included.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The assert macro shall be implemented as a macro, not as an actual function. If the
  macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The macro
 
                                                                          static_assert
@@ -10219,13 +10219,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.2.1.1 The assert macro
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <assert.h>
          void assert(scalar expression);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The assert macro puts diagnostic tests into programs; it expands to a void expression.
  When it is executed, if expression (which shall have a scalar type) is false (that is,
  compares equal to 0), the assert macro writes information about the particular call that
@@ -10239,7 +10239,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The assert macro returns no value.
 
                                                                 Forward references: the abort function (7.22.4.1).
 
@@ -10254,18 +10254,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.1 Introduction
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The header <complex.h> defines macros and declares functions that support complex
  arithmetic.192)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ need not provide
  this header nor support any of its facilities.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  Each synopsis specifies a family of functions consisting of a principal function with one
  or more double complex parameters and a double complex or double return
  value; and other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes which are
  corresponding functions with float and long double parameters and return values.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  The macro
 
                                                                           complex
@@ -10276,7 +10276,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                
  expands to a constant expression of type const float _Complex, with the value of
  the imaginary unit.193)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The macros
 
                                                                           imaginary
@@ -10288,14 +10288,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  are defined if and only if the implementation supports imaginary types;194) if defined,
  they expand to _Imaginary and a constant expression of type const float
  _Imaginary with the value of the imaginary unit.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  The macro
 
                                                                           I
 
                                                                
  expands to either _Imaginary_I or _Complex_I. If _Imaginary_I is not
  defined, I shall expand to _Complex_I.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and perhaps then
  redefine the macros complex, imaginary, and I.
  
@@ -10312,13 +10312,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.2 Conventions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Values are interpreted as radians, not degrees. An implementation may set errno but is
  not required to.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.3 Branch cuts
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  Some of the functions below have branch cuts, across which the function is
  discontinuous. For implementations with a signed zero (including all IEC 60559
  implementations) that follow the specifications of annex G, the sign of zero distinguishes
@@ -10327,7 +10327,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  function, which has a branch cut along the negative real axis, the top of the cut, with
  imaginary part +0, maps to the positive imaginary axis, and the bottom of the cut, with
  imaginary part -0, maps to the negative imaginary axis.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  Implementations that do not support a signed zero (see annex F) cannot distinguish the
  sides of branch cuts. These implementations shall map a cut so the function is continuous
  as the cut is approached coming around the finite endpoint of the cut in a counter
@@ -10339,13 +10339,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.4 The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           #include <complex.h>
           #pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The usual mathematical formulas for complex multiply, divide, and absolute value are
  problematic because of their treatment of infinities and because of undue overflow and
  underflow. The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma can be used to inform the
@@ -10380,7 +10380,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.1 The cacos functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           #include <complex.h>
           double complex cacos(double complex z);
@@ -10388,11 +10388,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cacos functions compute the complex arc cosine of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cacos functions return the complex arc cosine value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [0, pi ] along the
  real axis.
@@ -10400,7 +10400,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.2 The casin functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           #include <complex.h>
           double complex casin(double complex z);
@@ -10408,11 +10408,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           long double complex casinl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The casin functions compute the complex arc sine of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The casin functions return the complex arc sine value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
  
@@ -10422,7 +10422,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.3 The catan functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex catan(double complex z);
@@ -10430,11 +10430,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex catanl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The catan functions compute the complex arc tangent of z, with branch cuts outside the
  interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The catan functions return the complex arc tangent value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
  along the real axis.
@@ -10442,7 +10442,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.4 The ccos functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex ccos(double complex z);
@@ -10450,16 +10450,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex ccosl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The ccos functions compute the complex cosine of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The ccos functions return the complex cosine value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.5 The csin functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex csin(double complex z);
@@ -10467,17 +10467,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex csinl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The csin functions compute the complex sine of z.
 
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The csin functions return the complex sine value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.5.6 The ctan functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex ctan(double complex z);
@@ -10485,10 +10485,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The ctan functions compute the complex tangent of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The ctan functions return the complex tangent value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
@@ -10497,7 +10497,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.1 The cacosh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex cacosh(double complex z);
@@ -10505,11 +10505,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cacosh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of z, with a branch
  cut at values less than 1 along the real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cacosh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic cosine value, in the range of a
  half-strip of nonnegative values along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along the
  imaginary axis.
@@ -10517,7 +10517,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.2 The casinh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
@@ -10526,11 +10526,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The casinh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine of z, with branch cuts
  outside the interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The casinh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic sine value, in the range of a
  strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
  along the imaginary axis.
@@ -10538,7 +10538,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.3 The catanh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex catanh(double complex z);
@@ -10546,11 +10546,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The catanh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of z, with branch
  cuts outside the interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The catanh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic tangent value, in the range of a
  strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
  along the imaginary axis.
@@ -10558,7 +10558,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.4 The ccosh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex ccosh(double complex z);
@@ -10566,17 +10566,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The ccosh functions compute the complex hyperbolic cosine of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The ccosh functions return the complex hyperbolic cosine value.
 
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.5 The csinh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex csinh(double complex z);
@@ -10584,16 +10584,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The csinh functions compute the complex hyperbolic sine of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The csinh functions return the complex hyperbolic sine value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.6.6 The ctanh functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex ctanh(double complex z);
@@ -10601,10 +10601,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The ctanh functions compute the complex hyperbolic tangent of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The ctanh functions return the complex hyperbolic tangent value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
@@ -10613,7 +10613,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.7.1 The cexp functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex cexp(double complex z);
@@ -10621,17 +10621,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cexp functions compute the complex base-e exponential of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cexp functions return the complex base-e exponential value.
 
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.7.2 The clog functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex clog(double complex z);
@@ -10639,11 +10639,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex clogl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The clog functions compute the complex natural (base-e) logarithm of z, with a branch
  cut along the negative real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The clog functions return the complex natural logarithm value, in the range of a strip
  mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along the
  imaginary axis.
@@ -10654,7 +10654,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.8.1 The cabs functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double cabs(double complex z);
@@ -10662,17 +10662,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double cabsl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cabs functions compute the complex absolute value (also called norm, modulus, or
  magnitude) of z.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cabs functions return the complex absolute value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.8.2 The cpow functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
@@ -10682,17 +10682,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               long double complex y);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cpow functions compute the complex power function xy , with a branch cut for the
  first parameter along the negative real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cpow functions return the complex power function value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.8.3 The csqrt functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex csqrt(double complex z);
@@ -10700,11 +10700,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The csqrt functions compute the complex square root of z, with a branch cut along the
  negative real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The csqrt functions return the complex square root value, in the range of the right half-
  plane (including the imaginary axis).
 
@@ -10714,7 +10714,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.1 The carg functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double carg(double complex z);
@@ -10722,18 +10722,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double cargl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The carg functions compute the argument (also called phase angle) of z, with a branch
  cut along the negative real axis.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The carg functions return the value of the argument in the interval [-pi , +pi ].
 
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.2 The cimag functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double cimag(double complex z);
@@ -10741,10 +10741,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double cimagl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cimag functions compute the imaginary part of z.196)
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cimag functions return the imaginary part value (as a real).
 
 
                                                                Footnotes
@@ -10754,7 +10754,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.3 The CMPLX macros
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <complex.h>
          double complex CMPLX(double x, double y);
@@ -10762,15 +10762,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double complex CMPLXL(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The CMPLX macros expand to an expression of the specified complex type, with the real
  part having the (converted) value of x and the imaginary part having the (converted)
  value of y. The resulting expression shall be suitable for use as an initializer for an object
  with static or thread storage duration, provided both arguments are likewise suitable.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The CMPLX macros return the complex value x + i y.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  NOTE    These macros act as if the implementation supported imaginary types and the definitions were:
 
                                                                       #define CMPLX(x, y)  ((double complex)((double)(x) + \
@@ -10789,7 +10789,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.4 The conj functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex conj(double complex z);
@@ -10797,17 +10797,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex conjl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The conj functions compute the complex conjugate of z, by reversing the sign of its
  imaginary part.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The conj functions return the complex conjugate value.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.5 The cproj functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double complex cproj(double complex z);
@@ -10815,7 +10815,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The cproj functions compute a projection of z onto the Riemann sphere: z projects to
  z except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part and one NaN part)
  project to positive infinity on the real axis. If z has an infinite part, then cproj(z) is
@@ -10824,13 +10824,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The cproj functions return the value of the projection onto the Riemann sphere.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.3.9.6 The creal functions
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <complex.h>
         double creal(double complex z);
@@ -10838,11 +10838,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double creall(long double complex z);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The creal functions compute the real part of z.197)
 
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The creal functions return the real part value.
  
  
@@ -10856,15 +10856,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4 Character handling <ctype.h>
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The header <ctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying and mapping
  characters.198) In all cases the argument is an int, the value of which shall be
  representable as an unsigned char or shall equal the value of the macro EOF. If the
  argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The behavior of these functions is affected by the current locale. Those functions that
  have locale-specific aspects only when not in the "C" locale are noted below.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The term printing character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters, each
  of which occupies one printing position on a display device; the term control character
  refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters that are not printing
@@ -10881,32 +10881,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1 Character classification functions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the
  argument c conforms to that in the description of the function.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.1 The isalnum function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           #include <ctype.h>
           int isalnum(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isalnum function tests for any character for which isalpha or isdigit is true.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.2 The isalpha function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                           #include <ctype.h>
           int isalpha(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isalpha function tests for any character for which isupper or islower is true,
  or any character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic characters for which
  
@@ -10924,13 +10924,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.3 The isblank function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int isblank(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isblank function tests for any character that is a standard blank character or is one
  of a locale-specific set of characters for which isspace is true and that is used to
  separate words within a line of text. The standard blank characters are the following:
@@ -10940,31 +10940,31 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.4 The iscntrl function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int iscntrl(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The iscntrl function tests for any control character.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.5 The isdigit function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int isdigit(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isdigit function tests for any decimal-digit character (as defined in 5.2.1).
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.6 The isgraph function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int isgraph(int c);
@@ -10975,19 +10975,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isgraph function tests for any printing character except space (' ').
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.7 The islower function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <ctype.h>
         int islower(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The islower function tests for any character that is a lowercase letter or is one of a
  locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
  isspace is true. In the "C" locale, islower returns true only for the lowercase
@@ -10996,25 +10996,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.8 The isprint function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <ctype.h>
         int isprint(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isprint function tests for any printing character including space (' ').
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.9 The ispunct function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <ctype.h>
         int ispunct(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The ispunct function tests for any printing character that is one of a locale-specific set
  of punctuation characters for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true. In the "C"
  locale, ispunct returns true for every printing character for which neither isspace
@@ -11023,13 +11023,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.10 The isspace function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <ctype.h>
         int isspace(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isspace function tests for any character that is a standard white-space character or
  is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which isalnum is false. The standard
 
@@ -11040,13 +11040,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.11 The isupper function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int isupper(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isupper function tests for any character that is an uppercase letter or is one of a
  locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
  isspace is true. In the "C" locale, isupper returns true only for the uppercase
@@ -11055,13 +11055,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.1.12 The isxdigit function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int isxdigit(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The isxdigit function tests for any hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.1).
 
 
                                                                Contents
@@ -11070,16 +11070,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.2.1 The tolower function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                          #include <ctype.h>
          int tolower(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The tolower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  If the argument is a character for which isupper is true and there are one or more
  corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which islower is true,
  the tolower function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one
@@ -11089,16 +11089,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.4.2.2 The toupper function
                                                                
 
                                                                Synopsis
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                         #include <ctype.h>
         int toupper(int c);
 
                                                                
 
                                                                Description
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The toupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
 
                                                                Returns
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  If the argument is a character for which islower is true and there are one or more
  corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which isupper is true,
  the toupper function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one
@@ -11107,10 +11107,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.5 Errors <errno.h>
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The header <errno.h> defines several macros, all relating to the reporting of error
  conditions.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The macros are
 
                                                                           EDOM
@@ -11126,13 +11126,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  duration, the value of which is set to a positive error number by several library functions.
  If a macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual object, or a program
  defines an identifier with the name errno, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  The value of errno in the initial thread is zero at program startup (the initial value of
  errno in other threads is an indeterminate value), but is never set to zero by any library
  function.202) The value of errno may be set to nonzero by a library function call
  whether or not there is an error, provided the use of errno is not documented in the
  description of the function in this International Standard.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  Additional macro definitions, beginning with E and a digit or E and an uppercase
  letter,203) may also be specified by the implementation.
  
@@ -11155,7 +11155,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                7.6 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
  The header <fenv.h> defines several macros, and declares types and functions that
  provide access to the floating-point environment. The floating-point environment refers
  collectively to any floating-point status flags and control modes supported by the
@@ -11164,11 +11164,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of exceptional floating-point arithmetic to provide auxiliary information.205) A floating-
  point control mode is a system variable whose value may be set by the user to affect the
  subsequent behavior of floating-point arithmetic.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                2
  The floating-point environment has thread storage duration. The initial state for a
  thread's floating-point environment is the current state of the floating-point environment
  of the thread that creates it at the time of creation.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                3
  Certain programming conventions support the intended model of use for the floating-
  point environment:206)
 
                                                                  
@@ -11180,13 +11180,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                •   a function call is assumed to have the potential for raising floating-point exceptions,
  unless its documentation promises otherwise.
 
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                4
  The type
 
                                                                          fenv_t
 
                                                                
  represents the entire floating-point environment.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                5
  The type
 
                                                                          fexcept_t
@@ -11196,7 +11196,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                6
  Each of the macros
 
                                                                           FE_DIVBYZERO
@@ -11212,14 +11212,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expressions with values such that bitwise ORs of all combinations of the macros result in
  distinct values, and furthermore, bitwise ANDs of all combinations of the macros result in
  zero.209)
-
                                                                
+
                                                                7
  The macro
 
                                                                           FE_ALL_EXCEPT
 
                                                                
  is simply the bitwise OR of all floating-point exception macros defined by the
  implementation. If no such macros are defined, FE_ALL_EXCEPT shall be defined as 0.
-
                                                                
+
                                                                8
  Each of the macros
 
                                                                           FE_DOWNWARD
@@ -11236,7 +11236,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                
+
                                                                9
  The macro
 
                                                                           FE_DFL_ENV
@@ -11246,7 +11246,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              •   and has type ''pointer to const-qualified fenv_t''. It can be used as an argument to
 
                                                              
  <fenv.h> functions that manage the floating-point environment.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              10
  Additional implementation-defined environments, with macro definitions beginning with
  FE_ and an uppercase letter,212) and having type ''pointer to const-qualified fenv_t'',
  may also be specified by the implementation.
@@ -11281,13 +11281,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.1 The FENV_ACCESS pragma
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <fenv.h>
           #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The FENV_ACCESS pragma provides a means to inform the implementation when a
  program might access the floating-point environment to test floating-point status flags or
  run under non-default floating-point control modes.213) The pragma shall occur either
@@ -11310,7 +11310,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
@@ -11325,7 +11325,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                /* ... */
          }
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  If the function g might depend on status flags set as a side effect of the first x + 1, or if the second
  x + 1 might depend on control modes set as a side effect of the call to function g, then the program shall
  contain an appropriately placed invocation of #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON.214)
@@ -11344,7 +11344,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2 Floating-point exceptions
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The following functions provide access to the floating-point status flags.215) The int
  input argument for the functions represents a subset of floating-point exceptions, and can
  be zero or the bitwise OR of one or more floating-point exception macros, for example
@@ -11362,17 +11362,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2.1 The feclearexcept function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int feclearexcept(int excepts);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The feclearexcept function attempts to clear the supported floating-point exceptions
  represented by its argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The feclearexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
  the specified exceptions were successfully cleared. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -11382,39 +11382,39 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2.2 The fegetexceptflag function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <fenv.h>
           int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp,
                int excepts);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fegetexceptflag function attempts to store an implementation-defined
  representation of the states of the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument
  excepts in the object pointed to by the argument flagp.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fegetexceptflag function returns zero if the representation was successfully
  stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2.3 The feraiseexcept function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <fenv.h>
           int feraiseexcept(int excepts);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The feraiseexcept function attempts to raise the supported floating-point exceptions
  represented by its argument.216) The order in which these floating-point exceptions are
  raised is unspecified, except as stated in F.8.6. Whether the feraiseexcept function
  additionally raises the ''inexact'' floating-point exception whenever it raises the
  ''overflow'' or ''underflow'' floating-point exception is implementation-defined.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The feraiseexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
  the specified exceptions were successfully raised. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -11432,14 +11432,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2.4 The fesetexceptflag function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp,
               int excepts);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fesetexceptflag function attempts to set the floating-point status flags
  indicated by the argument excepts to the states stored in the object pointed to by
  flagp. The value of *flagp shall have been set by a previous call to
@@ -11447,7 +11447,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  exceptions represented by the argument excepts. This function does not raise floating-
  point exceptions, but only sets the state of the flags.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fesetexceptflag function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if
  all the specified flags were successfully set to the appropriate state. Otherwise, it returns
  a nonzero value.
@@ -11455,22 +11455,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.2.5 The fetestexcept function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int fetestexcept(int excepts);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fetestexcept function determines which of a specified subset of the floating-
  point exception flags are currently set. The excepts argument specifies the floating-
  point status flags to be queried.217)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fetestexcept function returns the value of the bitwise OR of the floating-point
  exception macros corresponding to the currently set floating-point exceptions included in
  excepts.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  EXAMPLE       Call f if ''invalid'' is set, then g if ''overflow'' is set:
  
  
@@ -11499,23 +11499,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.3 Rounding
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The fegetround and fesetround functions provide control of rounding direction
  modes.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.3.1 The fegetround function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <fenv.h>
         int fegetround(void);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fegetround function gets the current rounding direction.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fegetround function returns the value of the rounding direction macro
  representing the current rounding direction or a negative value if there is no such
  rounding direction macro or the current rounding direction is not determinable.
@@ -11523,22 +11523,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.3.2 The fesetround function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <fenv.h>
         int fesetround(int round);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fesetround function establishes the rounding direction represented by its
  argument round. If the argument is not equal to the value of a rounding direction macro,
  the rounding direction is not changed.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fesetround function returns zero if and only if the requested rounding direction
  was established.
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  EXAMPLE Save, set, and restore the rounding direction. Report an error and abort if setting the
  rounding direction fails.
 
                                                              @@ -11561,44 +11561,44 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.4 Environment
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The functions in this section manage the floating-point environment -- status flags and
  control modes -- as one entity.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.4.1 The fegetenv function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fegetenv function attempts to store the current floating-point environment in the
  object pointed to by envp.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fegetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully stored.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.4.2 The feholdexcept function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The feholdexcept function saves the current floating-point environment in the object
  pointed to by envp, clears the floating-point status flags, and then installs a non-stop
  (continue on floating-point exceptions) mode, if available, for all floating-point
  exceptions.218)
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The feholdexcept function returns zero if and only if non-stop floating-point
  exception handling was successfully installed.
 
@@ -11612,40 +11612,40 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.4.3 The fesetenv function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fesetenv function attempts to establish the floating-point environment represented
  by the object pointed to by envp. The argument envp shall point to an object set by a
  call to fegetenv or feholdexcept, or equal a floating-point environment macro.
  Note that fesetenv merely installs the state of the floating-point status flags
  represented through its argument, and does not raise these floating-point exceptions.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fesetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully established.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.6.4.4 The feupdateenv function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <fenv.h>
          int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The feupdateenv function attempts to save the currently raised floating-point
  exceptions in its automatic storage, install the floating-point environment represented by
  the object pointed to by envp, and then raise the saved floating-point exceptions. The
  argument envp shall point to an object set by a call to feholdexcept or fegetenv,
  or equal a floating-point environment macro.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The feupdateenv function returns zero if all the actions were successfully carried out.
  Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
  
@@ -11653,7 +11653,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  EXAMPLE     Hide spurious underflow floating-point exceptions:
 
 
                                                              @@ -11677,20 +11677,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.7 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <float.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and
  parameters of the standard floating-point types.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed
  in 5.2.4.2.2.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <inttypes.h> includes the header <stdint.h> and extends it with
  additional facilities provided by hosted implementations.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  It declares functions for manipulating greatest-width integers and converting numeric
  character strings to greatest-width integers, and it declares the type
 
                                                              @@ -11708,7 +11708,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8.1 Macros for format specifiers
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  Each of the following object-like macros expands to a character string literal containing a
  conversion specifier, possibly modified by a length modifier, suitable for use within the
  format argument of a formatted input/output function when converting the corresponding
@@ -11718,13 +11718,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  name corresponding to a similar type name in 7.20.1. In these names, N represents the
  width of the type as described in 7.20.1. For example, PRIdFAST32 can be used in a
  format string to print the value of an integer of type int_fast32_t.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fprintf macros for signed integers are:
 
                                                                       PRIdN             PRIdLEASTN                PRIdFASTN          PRIdMAX             PRIdPTR
         PRIiN             PRIiLEASTN                PRIiFASTN          PRIiMAX             PRIiPTR
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fprintf macros for unsigned integers are:
 
                                                                       PRIoN             PRIoLEASTN                PRIoFASTN          PRIoMAX             PRIoPTR
@@ -11732,7 +11732,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         PRIxN             PRIxLEASTN                PRIxFASTN          PRIxMAX             PRIxPTR
         PRIXN             PRIXLEASTN                PRIXFASTN          PRIXMAX             PRIXPTR
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  The fscanf macros for signed integers are:
  
  
@@ -11742,19 +11742,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         SCNdN           SCNdLEASTN               SCNdFASTN              SCNdMAX             SCNdPTR
         SCNiN           SCNiLEASTN               SCNiFASTN              SCNiMAX             SCNiPTR
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  The fscanf macros for unsigned integers are:
 
                                                                       SCNoN           SCNoLEASTN               SCNoFASTN              SCNoMAX             SCNoPTR
         SCNuN           SCNuLEASTN               SCNuFASTN              SCNuMAX             SCNuPTR
         SCNxN           SCNxLEASTN               SCNxFASTN              SCNxMAX             SCNxPTR
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  For each type that the implementation provides in <stdint.h>, the corresponding
  fprintf macros shall be defined and the corresponding fscanf macros shall be
  defined unless the implementation does not have a suitable fscanf length modifier for
  the type.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                        #include <inttypes.h>
@@ -11781,17 +11781,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8.2.1 The imaxabs function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <inttypes.h>
          intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The imaxabs function computes the absolute value of an integer j. If the result cannot
  be represented, the behavior is undefined.221)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The imaxabs function returns the absolute value.
  
  
@@ -11806,17 +11806,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8.2.2 The imaxdiv function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <inttypes.h>
          imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The imaxdiv function computes numer / denom and numer % denom in a single
  operation.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The imaxdiv function returns a structure of type imaxdiv_t comprising both the
  quotient and the remainder. The structure shall contain (in either order) the members
  quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder), each of which has type intmax_t. If
@@ -11825,7 +11825,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8.2.3 The strtoimax and strtoumax functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <inttypes.h>
          intmax_t strtoimax(const char * restrict nptr,
@@ -11834,12 +11834,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               char ** restrict endptr, int base);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The strtoimax and strtoumax functions are equivalent to the strtol, strtoll,
  strtoul, and strtoull functions, except that the initial portion of the string is
  converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The strtoimax and strtoumax functions return the converted value, if any. If no
  conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range
  of representable values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned
@@ -11852,7 +11852,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.8.2.4 The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <stddef.h>           // for wchar_t
         #include <inttypes.h>
@@ -11862,12 +11862,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions are equivalent to the wcstol, wcstoll,
  wcstoul, and wcstoull functions except that the initial portion of the wide string is
  converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The wcstoimax function returns the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be
  performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable
  values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned (according to the
@@ -11879,7 +11879,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.9 Alternative spellings <iso646.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <iso646.h> defines the following eleven macros (on the left) that expand
  to the corresponding tokens (on the right):
 
@@ -11899,19 +11899,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.10 Sizes of integer types <limits.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <limits.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and
  parameters of the standard integer types.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed
  in 5.2.4.2.1.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.11 Localization <locale.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <locale.h> declares two functions, one type, and defines several macros.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The type is
 
                                                                        struct lconv
@@ -11947,7 +11947,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          char   int_p_sign_posn;               //   CHAR_MAX
          char   int_n_sign_posn;               //   CHAR_MAX
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.19); and
 
                                                                         LC_ALL
@@ -11974,13 +11974,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.11.1.1 The setlocale function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <locale.h>
           char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The setlocale function selects the appropriate portion of the program's locale as
  specified by the category and locale arguments. The setlocale function may be
  used to change or query the program's entire current locale or portions thereof. The value
@@ -11993,33 +11993,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  formatted input/output functions and the string conversion functions, as well as the
  nonmonetary formatting information returned by the localeconv function. LC_TIME
  affects the behavior of the strftime and wcsftime functions.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  A value of "C" for locale specifies the minimal environment for C translation; a value
  of "" for locale specifies the locale-specific native environment. Other
  implementation-defined strings may be passed as the second argument to setlocale.
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  At program startup, the equivalent of
 
                                                                        setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
 
                                                              
  is executed.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  A call to the setlocale function may introduce a data race with other calls to the
  setlocale function or with calls to functions that are affected by the current locale.
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the setlocale function.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  If a pointer to a string is given for locale and the selection can be honored, the
  setlocale function returns a pointer to the string associated with the specified
  category for the new locale. If the selection cannot be honored, the setlocale
  function returns a null pointer and the program's locale is not changed.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  A null pointer for locale causes the setlocale function to return a pointer to the
  string associated with the category for the program's current locale; the program's
  locale is not changed.225)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              8
  The pointer to string returned by the setlocale function is such that a subsequent call
  with that string value and its associated category will restore that part of the program's
  locale. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
@@ -12043,13 +12043,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.11.2.1 The localeconv function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <locale.h>
          struct lconv *localeconv(void);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The localeconv function sets the components of an object with type struct lconv
  with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities (monetary and otherwise)
  according to the rules of the current locale.
@@ -12057,7 +12057,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The members of the structure with type char * are pointers to strings, any of which
  (except decimal_point) can point to "", to indicate that the value is not available in
  the current locale or is of zero length. Apart from grouping and mon_grouping, the
@@ -12191,7 +12191,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            Set to a value indicating the positioning of the negative_sign for a
            negative internationally formatted monetary quantity.
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  The elements of grouping and mon_grouping are interpreted according to the
  following:
  CHAR_MAX        No further grouping is to be performed.
@@ -12204,7 +12204,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                  The next element is examined to determine the size of the next group of
                  digits before the current group.
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  The values of p_sep_by_space, n_sep_by_space, int_p_sep_by_space,
  and int_n_sep_by_space are interpreted according to the following:
  0     No space separates the currency symbol and value.
@@ -12218,7 +12218,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              
  For int_p_sep_by_space and int_n_sep_by_space, the fourth character of
  int_curr_symbol is used instead of a space.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  The values of p_sign_posn, n_sign_posn, int_p_sign_posn,                              and
  int_n_sign_posn are interpreted according to the following:
  0     Parentheses surround the quantity and currency symbol.
@@ -12227,17 +12227,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  3     The sign string immediately precedes the currency symbol.
  4     The sign string immediately succeeds the currency symbol.
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the localeconv
  function.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              8
  The localeconv function returns a pointer to the filled-in object. The structure
  pointed to by the return value shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the localeconv function. In addition, calls to the
  setlocale function with categories LC_ALL, LC_MONETARY, or LC_NUMERIC may
  overwrite the contents of the structure.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              9
  EXAMPLE 1 The following table illustrates rules which may well be used by four countries to format
  monetary quantities.
 
                                                              @@ -12250,7 +12250,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  Country2     L.1.234                 -L.1.234                      ITL   1.234            -ITL 1.234
  Country3     fl. 1.234,56              fl. -1.234,56                   NLG   1.234,56         NLG -1.234,56
  Country4     SFrs.1,234.56           SFrs.1,234.56C                CHF   1,234.56         CHF 1,234.56C
-
                                                              
+
                                                              10
  For these four countries, the respective values for the monetary members of the structure returned by
  localeconv could be:
 
                                                              @@ -12279,7 +12279,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  int_p_sign_posn                   1                     1                    1                   1
  int_n_sign_posn                   4                     1                    4                   2
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              11
  EXAMPLE 2 The following table illustrates how the cs_precedes, sep_by_space, and sign_posn members
  affect the formatted value.
 
                                                              @@ -12307,14 +12307,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12 Mathematics <math.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <math.h> declares two types and many mathematical functions and defines
  several macros. Most synopses specify a family of functions consisting of a principal
  function with one or more double parameters, a double return value, or both; and
  other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes, which are corresponding
  functions with float and long double parameters, return values, or both.226)
  Integer arithmetic functions and conversion functions are discussed later.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The types
 
                                                                        float_t
@@ -12326,7 +12326,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 1, they are both double; if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals
  2, they are both long double; and for other values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD, they are
  otherwise implementation-defined.227)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The macro
 
                                                                        HUGE_VAL
@@ -12338,7 +12338,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          HUGE_VALL
 
                                                              
  are respectively float and long double analogs of HUGE_VAL.228)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  The macro
 
                                                                        INFINITY
@@ -12350,14 +12350,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  translation time.229)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  The macro
 
                                                                         NAN
 
                                                              
  is defined if and only if the implementation supports quiet NaNs for the float type. It
  expands to a constant expression of type float representing a quiet NaN.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  The number classification macros
 
                                                                         FP_INFINITE
@@ -12370,7 +12370,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  constant expressions with distinct values. Additional implementation-defined floating-
  point classifications, with macro definitions beginning with FP_ and an uppercase letter,
  may also be specified by the implementation.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  The macro
 
                                                                         FP_FAST_FMA
@@ -12384,7 +12384,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              
  are, respectively, float and long double analogs of FP_FAST_FMA. If defined,
  these macros expand to the integer constant 1.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              8
  The macros
 
                                                                         FP_ILOGB0
@@ -12396,7 +12396,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              9
  The macros
 
                                                                          MATH_ERRNO
@@ -12436,13 +12436,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.1 Treatment of error conditions
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The behavior of each of the functions in <math.h> is specified for all representable
  values of its input arguments, except where stated otherwise. Each function shall execute
  as if it were a single operation without raising SIGFPE and without generating any of the
  floating-point exceptions ''invalid'', ''divide-by-zero'', or ''overflow'' except to reflect
  the result of the function.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  For all functions, a domain error occurs if an input argument is outside the domain over
  which the mathematical function is defined. The description of each function lists any
  required domain errors; an implementation may define additional domain errors, provided
@@ -12451,7 +12451,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression
  errno acquires the value EDOM; if the integer expression math_errhandling &
  MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the ''invalid'' floating-point exception is raised.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  Similarly, a pole error (also known as a singularity or infinitary) occurs if the
  mathematical function has an exact infinite result as the finite input argument(s) are
  approached in the limit (for example, log(0.0)). The description of each function lists
@@ -12464,10 +12464,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression errno
  acquires the value ERANGE; if the integer expression math_errhandling &
  MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception is raised.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  Likewise, a range error occurs if the mathematical result of the function cannot be
  represented in an object of the specified type, due to extreme magnitude.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  A floating result overflows if the magnitude of the mathematical result is finite but so
  large that the mathematical result cannot be represented without extraordinary roundoff
  error in an object of the specified type. If a floating result overflows and default rounding
@@ -12477,7 +12477,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the integer expression errno acquires the value ERANGE; if the integer expression
  math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the ''overflow'' floating-
  point exception is raised.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  The result underflows if the magnitude of the mathematical result is so small that the
  mathematical result cannot be represented, without extraordinary roundoff error, in an
  object of the specified type.232) If the result underflows, the function returns an
@@ -12487,7 +12487,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  value    ERANGE       is    implementation-defined;     if   the  integer   expression
  math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the ''underflow''
  floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  If a domain, pole, or range error occurs and the integer expression
  math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is zero,233) then errno shall either be set to
  the value corresponding to the error or left unmodified. If no such error occurs, errno
@@ -12511,13 +12511,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.2 The FP_CONTRACT pragma
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           #pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The FP_CONTRACT pragma can be used to allow (if the state is ''on'') or disallow (if the
  state is ''off'') the implementation to contract expressions (6.5). Each pragma can occur
  either outside external declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements
@@ -12533,26 +12533,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3 Classification macros
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  In the synopses in this subclause, real-floating indicates that the argument shall be an
  expression of real floating type.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.1 The fpclassify macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           int fpclassify(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fpclassify macro classifies its argument value as NaN, infinite, normal,
  subnormal, zero, or into another implementation-defined category. First, an argument
  represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
  Then classification is based on the type of the argument.234)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fpclassify macro returns the value of the number classification macro
  appropriate to the value of its argument.
  
@@ -12568,50 +12568,50 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.2 The isfinite macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int isfinite(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isfinite macro determines whether its argument has a finite value (zero,
  subnormal, or normal, and not infinite or NaN). First, an argument represented in a
  format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination
  is based on the type of the argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isfinite macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite
  value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.3 The isinf macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int isinf(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isinf macro determines whether its argument value is an infinity (positive or
  negative). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is
  converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isinf macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinite
  value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.4 The isnan macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int isnan(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isnan macro determines whether its argument value is a NaN. First, an argument
  represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
  Then determination is based on the type of the argument.235)
@@ -12619,7 +12619,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isnan macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a NaN value.
 
 
                                                              Footnotes
@@ -12630,35 +12630,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.5 The isnormal macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int isnormal(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isnormal macro determines whether its argument value is normal (neither zero,
  subnormal, infinite, nor NaN). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its
  semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type
  of the argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isnormal macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a normal
  value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.3.6 The signbit macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int signbit(real-floating x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The signbit macro determines whether the sign of its argument value is negative.236)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The signbit macro returns a nonzero value if and only if the sign of its argument value
  is negative.
  
@@ -12678,7 +12678,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.1 The acos functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double acos(double x);
@@ -12686,17 +12686,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double acosl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The acos functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of x. A domain error
  occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The acos functions return arccos x in the interval [0, pi ] radians.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.2 The asin functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double asin(double x);
@@ -12704,17 +12704,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double asinl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The asin functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of x. A domain error
  occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The asin functions return arcsin x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.3 The atan functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double atan(double x);
@@ -12722,17 +12722,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double atanl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The atan functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of x.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The atan functions return arctan x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.4 The atan2 functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double atan2(double y, double x);
@@ -12740,18 +12740,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double atan2l(long double y, long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The atan2 functions compute the value of the arc tangent of y/x, using the signs of both
  arguments to determine the quadrant of the return value. A domain error may occur if
  both arguments are zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The atan2 functions return arctan y/x in the interval [-pi , +pi ] radians.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.5 The cos functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double cos(double x);
@@ -12759,16 +12759,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double cosl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The cos functions compute the cosine of x (measured in radians).
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The cos functions return cos x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.6 The sin functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double sin(double x);
@@ -12776,17 +12776,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double sinl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The sin functions compute the sine of x (measured in radians).
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The sin functions return sin x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.4.7 The tan functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double tan(double x);
@@ -12794,10 +12794,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double tanl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The tan functions return the tangent of x (measured in radians).
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The tan functions return tan x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
@@ -12806,7 +12806,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.1 The acosh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double acosh(double x);
@@ -12814,17 +12814,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double acoshl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The acosh functions compute the (nonnegative) arc hyperbolic cosine of x. A domain
  error occurs for arguments less than 1.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The acosh functions return arcosh x in the interval [0, +(inf)].
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.2 The asinh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double asinh(double x);
@@ -12832,17 +12832,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double asinhl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The asinh functions compute the arc hyperbolic sine of x.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The asinh functions return arsinh x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.3 The atanh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double atanh(double x);
@@ -12850,18 +12850,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double atanhl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The atanh functions compute the arc hyperbolic tangent of x. A domain error occurs
  for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1]. A pole error may occur if the argument equals
  -1 or +1.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The atanh functions return artanh x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.4 The cosh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double cosh(double x);
@@ -12869,17 +12869,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double coshl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The cosh functions compute the hyperbolic cosine of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The cosh functions return cosh x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.5 The sinh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double sinh(double x);
@@ -12887,18 +12887,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double sinhl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The sinh functions compute the hyperbolic sine of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The sinh functions return sinh x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.5.6 The tanh functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double tanh(double x);
@@ -12906,10 +12906,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double tanhl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The tanh functions compute the hyperbolic tangent of x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The tanh functions return tanh x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
@@ -12918,7 +12918,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.1 The exp functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double exp(double x);
@@ -12926,17 +12926,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double expl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The exp functions compute the base-e exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The exp functions return ex .
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.2 The exp2 functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double exp2(double x);
@@ -12944,18 +12944,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double exp2l(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The exp2 functions compute the base-2 exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
  magnitude of x is too large.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The exp2 functions return 2x .
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.3 The expm1 functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double expm1(double x);
@@ -12963,11 +12963,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double expm1l(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The expm1 functions compute the base-e exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range
  error occurs if x is too large.237)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The expm1 functions return ex - 1.
 
 
                                                              Footnotes
@@ -12977,7 +12977,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.4 The frexp functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double frexp(double value, int *exp);
@@ -12985,11 +12985,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double frexpl(long double value, int *exp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The frexp functions break a floating-point number into a normalized fraction and an
  integral power of 2. They store the integer in the int object pointed to by exp.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  If value is not a floating-point number or if the integral power of 2 is outside the range
  of int, the results are unspecified. Otherwise, the frexp functions return the value x,
  such that x has a magnitude in the interval [1/2, 1) or zero, and value equals x x 2*exp .
@@ -13003,7 +13003,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.5 The ilogb functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         int ilogb(double x);
@@ -13011,7 +13011,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         int ilogbl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The ilogb functions extract the exponent of x as a signed int value. If x is zero they
  compute the value FP_ILOGB0; if x is infinite they compute the value INT_MAX; if x is
  a NaN they compute the value FP_ILOGBNAN; otherwise, they are equivalent to calling
@@ -13019,14 +13019,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  error or range error may occur if x is zero, infinite, or NaN. If the correct value is outside
  the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The ilogb functions return the exponent of x as a signed int value.
 
                                                               Forward references: the logb functions (7.12.6.11).
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.6 The ldexp functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double ldexp(double x, int exp);
@@ -13034,17 +13034,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double ldexpl(long double x, int exp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The ldexp functions multiply a floating-point number by an integral power of 2. A
  range error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The ldexp functions return x x 2exp .
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.7 The log functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
@@ -13053,17 +13053,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double logl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The log functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if
  the argument is negative. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The log functions return loge x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.8 The log10 functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double log10(double x);
@@ -13071,17 +13071,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double log10l(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The log10 functions compute the base-10 (common) logarithm of x. A domain error
  occurs if the argument is negative. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The log10 functions return log10 x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.9 The log1p functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double log1p(double x);
@@ -13089,12 +13089,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double log1pl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The log1p functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of 1 plus the argument.238)
  A domain error occurs if the argument is less than -1. A pole error may occur if the
  argument equals -1.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The log1p functions return loge (1 + x).
  
  
@@ -13109,7 +13109,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.10 The log2 functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double log2(double x);
@@ -13117,17 +13117,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double log2l(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The log2 functions compute the base-2 logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the
  argument is less than zero. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The log2 functions return log2 x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.11 The logb functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double logb(double x);
@@ -13135,7 +13135,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double logbl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The logb functions extract the exponent of x, as a signed integer value in floating-point
  format. If x is subnormal it is treated as though it were normalized; thus, for positive
  finite x,
@@ -13144,13 +13144,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              
  A domain error or pole error may occur if the argument is zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The logb functions return the signed exponent of x.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.12 The modf functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double modf(double value, double *iptr);
@@ -13158,19 +13158,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The modf functions break the argument value into integral and fractional parts, each of
  which has the same type and sign as the argument. They store the integral part (in
 
  floating-point format) in the object pointed to by iptr.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The modf functions return the signed fractional part of value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.6.13 The scalbn and scalbln functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double scalbn(double x, int n);
@@ -13181,11 +13181,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The scalbn and scalbln functions compute x x FLT_RADIXn efficiently, not
  normally by computing FLT_RADIXn explicitly. A range error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The scalbn and scalbln functions return x x FLT_RADIXn .
 
 
                                                              Contents
@@ -13194,7 +13194,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.7.1 The cbrt functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double cbrt(double x);
@@ -13202,17 +13202,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double cbrtl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The cbrt functions compute the real cube root of x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The cbrt functions return x1/3 .
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.7.2 The fabs functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double fabs(double x);
@@ -13220,16 +13220,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double fabsl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fabs functions compute the absolute value of a floating-point number x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fabs functions return | x |.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.7.3 The hypot functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double hypot(double x, double y);
@@ -13237,12 +13237,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The hypot functions compute the square root of the sum of the squares of x and y,
  without undue overflow or underflow. A range error may occur.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  The hypot functions return (sqrt)x2 + y2 .
 
                                                                                           -
@@ -13252,7 +13252,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.7.4 The pow functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double pow(double x, double y);
@@ -13260,20 +13260,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double powl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The pow functions compute x raised to the power y. A domain error occurs if x is finite
  and negative and y is finite and not an integer value. A range error may occur. A domain
  error may occur if x is zero and y is zero. A domain error or pole error may occur if x is
  zero and y is less than zero.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The pow functions return xy .
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.7.5 The sqrt functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double sqrt(double x);
@@ -13281,11 +13281,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double sqrtl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The sqrt functions compute the nonnegative square root of x. A domain error occurs if
  the argument is less than zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The sqrt functions return (sqrt)x.
 
                                                                                          -
@@ -13298,7 +13298,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.8.1 The erf functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double erf(double x);
@@ -13306,10 +13306,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double erfl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The erf functions compute the error function of x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
 
                                                                                                   2        x
                                          (integral)       e-t dt.
@@ -13326,7 +13326,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.8.2 The erfc functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double erfc(double x);
@@ -13334,12 +13334,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double erfcl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The erfc functions compute the complementary error function of x. A range error
  occurs if x is too large.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
 
                                                                                                                    2       (inf)
                                                          (integral)       e-t dt.
@@ -13356,7 +13356,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.8.3 The lgamma functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double lgamma(double x);
@@ -13364,18 +13364,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double lgammal(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The lgamma functions compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of gamma of
  x. A range error occurs if x is too large. A pole error may occur if x is a negative integer
  or zero.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The lgamma functions return loge | (Gamma)(x) |.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.8.4 The tgamma functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double tgamma(double x);
@@ -13383,12 +13383,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double tgammal(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The tgamma functions compute the gamma function of x. A domain error or pole error
  may occur if x is a negative integer or zero. A range error occurs if the magnitude of x is
  too large and may occur if the magnitude of x is too small.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The tgamma functions return (Gamma)(x).
 
 
@@ -13398,7 +13398,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.1 The ceil functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double ceil(double x);
@@ -13406,16 +13406,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double ceill(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The ceil functions compute the smallest integer value not less than x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The ceil functions return [^x^], expressed as a floating-point number.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.2 The floor functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double floor(double x);
@@ -13423,16 +13423,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double floorl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The floor functions compute the largest integer value not greater than x.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The floor functions return [_x_], expressed as a floating-point number.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.3 The nearbyint functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double nearbyint(double x);
@@ -13440,19 +13440,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double nearbyintl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The nearbyint functions round their argument to an integer value in floating-point
  format, using the current rounding direction and without raising the ''inexact'' floating-
  point exception.
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The nearbyint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.4 The rint functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         double rint(double x);
@@ -13460,18 +13460,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long double rintl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions (7.12.9.3) only in that the
  rint functions may raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in
  value from the argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The rint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.5 The lrint and llrint functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                       #include <math.h>
         long int lrint(double x);
@@ -13482,20 +13482,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         long long int llrintl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The lrint and llrint functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
  rounding according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the
  range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range
  error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The lrint and llrint functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.6 The round functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double round(double x);
@@ -13503,18 +13503,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double roundl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The round functions round their argument to the nearest integer value in floating-point
  format, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding
  direction.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The round functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.7 The lround and llround functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          long int lround(double x);
@@ -13525,19 +13525,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long long int llroundl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The lround and llround functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
  rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding direction. If
  the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified
  and a domain error or range error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The lround and llround functions return the rounded integer value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.9.8 The trunc functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
@@ -13546,11 +13546,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double truncl(long double x);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The trunc functions round their argument to the integer value, in floating format,
  nearest to but no larger in magnitude than the argument.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The trunc functions return the truncated integer value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
@@ -13559,7 +13559,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.10.1 The fmod functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           double fmod(double x, double y);
@@ -13567,10 +13567,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fmod functions compute the floating-point remainder of x/y.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fmod functions return the value x - ny, for some integer n such that, if y is nonzero,
  the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y. If y is zero,
  whether a domain error occurs or the fmod functions return zero is implementation-
@@ -13579,7 +13579,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.10.2 The remainder functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           double remainder(double x, double y);
@@ -13587,7 +13587,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The remainder functions compute the remainder x REM y required by IEC 60559.239)
  
  
@@ -13595,7 +13595,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The remainder functions return x REM y. If y is zero, whether a domain error occurs
  or the functions return zero is implementation defined.
 
@@ -13609,7 +13609,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.10.3 The remquo functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double remquo(double x, double y, int *quo);
@@ -13618,13 +13618,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               int *quo);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The remquo functions compute the same remainder as the remainder functions. In
  the object pointed to by quo they store a value whose sign is the sign of x/y and whose
  magnitude is congruent modulo 2n to the magnitude of the integral quotient of x/y, where
  n is an implementation-defined integer greater than or equal to 3.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The remquo functions return x REM y. If y is zero, the value stored in the object
  pointed to by quo is unspecified and whether a domain error occurs or the functions
  return zero is implementation defined.
@@ -13635,7 +13635,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.11.1 The copysign functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double copysign(double x, double y);
@@ -13643,20 +13643,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The copysign functions produce a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
  They produce a NaN (with the sign of y) if x is a NaN. On implementations that
  represent a signed zero but do not treat negative zero consistently in arithmetic
  operations, the copysign functions regard the sign of zero as positive.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The copysign functions return a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.11.2 The nan functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double nan(const char *tagp);
@@ -13664,7 +13664,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double nanl(const char *tagp);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The call nan("n-char-sequence") is equivalent to strtod("NAN(n-char-
  sequence)",     (char**)       NULL); the call nan("") is equivalent to
  strtod("NAN()", (char**) NULL). If tagp does not point to an n-char
@@ -13672,7 +13672,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  NULL). Calls to nanf and nanl are equivalent to the corresponding calls to strtof
  and strtold.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The nan functions return a quiet NaN, if available, with content indicated through tagp.
  If the implementation does not support quiet NaNs, the functions return zero.
 
                                                               Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.22.1.3).
@@ -13680,7 +13680,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.11.3 The nextafter functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double nextafter(double x, double y);
@@ -13688,14 +13688,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The nextafter functions determine the next representable value, in the type of the
  function, after x in the direction of y, where x and y are first converted to the type of the
  function.240) The nextafter functions return y if x equals y. A range error may occur
  if the magnitude of x is the largest finite value representable in the type and the result is
  infinite or not representable in the type.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The nextafter functions return the next representable value in the specified format
  after x in the direction of y.
  
@@ -13710,7 +13710,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.11.4 The nexttoward functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double nexttoward(double x, long double y);
@@ -13718,7 +13718,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The nexttoward functions are equivalent to the nextafter functions except that the
  second parameter has type long double and the functions return y converted to the
  type of the function if x equals y.241)
@@ -13734,7 +13734,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.12.1 The fdim functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double fdim(double x, double y);
@@ -13742,7 +13742,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fdim functions determine the positive difference between their arguments:
 
                                                                      {x - y if x > y
@@ -13751,13 +13751,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              
  A range error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fdim functions return the positive difference value.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.12.2 The fmax functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double fmax(double x, double y);
@@ -13769,10 +13769,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fmax functions determine the maximum numeric value of their arguments.242)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fmax functions return the maximum numeric value of their arguments.
 
 
                                                              Footnotes
@@ -13783,7 +13783,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.12.3 The fmin functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double fmin(double x, double y);
@@ -13791,10 +13791,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long double fminl(long double x, long double y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fmin functions determine the minimum numeric value of their arguments.243)
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fmin functions return the minimum numeric value of their arguments.
 
 
                                                              Footnotes
@@ -13807,7 +13807,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.13.1 The fma functions
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          double fma(double x, double y, double z);
@@ -13816,12 +13816,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               long double z);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The fma functions compute (x x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation: they compute
  the value (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the result format, according to the
  current rounding mode. A range error may occur.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The fma functions return (x x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation.
  
  
@@ -13831,7 +13831,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14 Comparison macros
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical relationships
  between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric values exactly one of the
  relationships -- less, greater, and equal -- is true. Relational operators may raise the
@@ -13858,25 +13858,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.1 The isgreater macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isgreater macro determines whether its first argument is greater than its second
  argument. The value of isgreater(x, y) is always equal to (x) > (y); however,
  unlike (x) > (y), isgreater(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
  exception when x and y are unordered.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isgreater macro returns the value of (x) > (y).
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.2 The isgreaterequal macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <math.h>
           int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
@@ -13887,93 +13887,93 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isgreaterequal macro determines whether its first argument is greater than or
  equal to its second argument. The value of isgreaterequal(x, y) is always equal
  to (x) >= (y); however, unlike (x) >= (y), isgreaterequal(x, y) does
  not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isgreaterequal macro returns the value of (x) >= (y).
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.3 The isless macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                      #include <math.h>
        int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isless macro determines whether its first argument is less than its second
  argument. The value of isless(x, y) is always equal to (x) < (y); however,
  unlike (x) < (y), isless(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
  exception when x and y are unordered.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isless macro returns the value of (x) < (y).
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.4 The islessequal macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                      #include <math.h>
        int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The islessequal macro determines whether its first argument is less than or equal to
  its second argument. The value of islessequal(x, y) is always equal to
  (x) <= (y); however, unlike (x) <= (y), islessequal(x, y) does not raise
  the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The islessequal macro returns the value of (x) <= (y).
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.5 The islessgreater macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The islessgreater macro determines whether its first argument is less than or
  greater than its second argument. The islessgreater(x, y) macro is similar to
  (x) < (y) || (x) > (y); however, islessgreater(x, y) does not raise
  the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered (nor does it evaluate x
  and y twice).
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The islessgreater macro returns the value of (x) < (y) || (x) > (y).
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.12.14.6 The isunordered macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <math.h>
          int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The isunordered macro determines whether its arguments are unordered.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The isunordered macro returns 1 if its arguments are unordered and 0 otherwise.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.13 Nonlocal jumps <setjmp.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <setjmp.h> defines the macro setjmp, and declares one function and
  one type, for bypassing the normal function call and return discipline.247)
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The type declared is
 
                                                                        jmp_buf
@@ -13984,7 +13984,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  invocation of that block, were it called recursively. It does not include the state of the
  floating-point status flags, of open files, or of any other component of the abstract
  machine.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  It is unspecified whether setjmp is a macro or an identifier declared with external
  linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, or a
  program defines an external identifier with the name setjmp, the behavior is undefined.
@@ -14000,22 +14000,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.13.1.1 The setjmp macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <setjmp.h>
          int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The setjmp macro saves its calling environment in its jmp_buf argument for later use
  by the longjmp function.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  If the return is from a direct invocation, the setjmp macro returns the value zero. If the
  return is from a call to the longjmp function, the setjmp macro returns a nonzero
  value.
 
                                                              Environmental limits
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  An invocation of the setjmp macro shall appear only in one of the following contexts:
 
                                                                
 
                                                              •   the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement;
@@ -14029,7 +14029,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement; or
 
                                                              •   the entire expression of an expression statement (possibly cast to void).
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  If the invocation appears in any other context, the behavior is undefined.
 
 
                                                              Contents
@@ -14038,13 +14038,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.13.2.1 The longjmp function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                         #include <setjmp.h>
           _Noreturn void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The longjmp function restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of
  the setjmp macro in the same invocation of the program with the corresponding
  jmp_buf argument. If there has been no such invocation, or if the invocation was from
@@ -14052,7 +14052,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  macro has terminated execution248) in the interim, or if the invocation of the setjmp
  macro was within the scope of an identifier with variably modified type and execution has
  left that scope in the interim, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  All accessible objects have values, and all other components of the abstract machine249)
  have state, as of the time the longjmp function was called, except that the values of
  objects of automatic storage duration that are local to the function containing the
@@ -14060,12 +14060,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and have been changed between the setjmp invocation and longjmp call are
  indeterminate.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  After longjmp is completed, thread execution continues as if the corresponding
  invocation of the setjmp macro had just returned the value specified by val. The
  longjmp function cannot cause the setjmp macro to return the value 0; if val is 0,
  the setjmp macro returns the value 1.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  EXAMPLE The longjmp function that returns control back to the point of the setjmp invocation
  might cause memory associated with a variable length array object to be squandered.
  
@@ -14106,17 +14106,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.14 Signal handling <signal.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <signal.h> declares a type and two functions and defines several macros,
  for handling various signals (conditions that may be reported during program execution).
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The type defined is
 
                                                                         sig_atomic_t
 
                                                              
  which is the (possibly volatile-qualified) integer type of an object that can be accessed as
  an atomic entity, even in the presence of asynchronous interrupts.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The macros defined are
 
                                                                         SIG_DFL
@@ -14137,7 +14137,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           SIGSEGV an invalid access to storage
           SIGTERM a termination request sent to the program
 
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  An implementation need not generate any of these signals, except as a result of explicit
  calls to the raise function. Additional signals and pointers to undeclarable functions,
  with macro definitions beginning, respectively, with the letters SIG and an uppercase
@@ -14162,13 +14162,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.14.1.1 The signal function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <signal.h>
          void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The signal function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal number
  sig is to be subsequently handled. If the value of func is SIG_DFL, default handling
  for that signal will occur. If the value of func is SIG_IGN, the signal will be ignored.
@@ -14176,7 +14176,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  invocation of such a function because of a signal, or (recursively) of any further functions
  called by that invocation (other than functions in the standard library),251) is called a
  signal handler.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  When a signal occurs and func points to a function, it is implementation-defined
  whether the equivalent of signal(sig, SIG_DFL); is executed or the
  implementation prevents some implementation-defined set of signals (at least including
@@ -14186,10 +14186,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  value of sig is SIGFPE, SIGILL, SIGSEGV, or any other implementation-defined
  value corresponding to a computational exception, the behavior is undefined; otherwise
  the program will resume execution at the point it was interrupted.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              4
  If the signal occurs as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the signal
  handler shall not call the raise function.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              5
  If the signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the
  behavior is undefined if the signal handler refers to any object with static or thread
  storage duration that is not a lock-free atomic object other than by assigning a value to an
@@ -14202,7 +14202,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                              
+
                                                              6
  At program startup, the equivalent of
 
                                                                        signal(sig, SIG_IGN);
@@ -14213,11 +14213,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          signal(sig, SIG_DFL);
 
                                                              
  is executed for all other signals defined by the implementation.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              7
  Use of this function in a multi-threaded program results in undefined behavior. The
  implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the signal function.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              8
  If the request can be honored, the signal function returns the value of func for the
  most recent successful call to signal for the specified signal sig. Otherwise, a value of
  SIG_ERR is returned and a positive value is stored in errno.
@@ -14237,26 +14237,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.14.2.1 The raise function
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <signal.h>
          int raise(int sig);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The raise function carries out the actions described in 7.14.1.1 for the signal sig. If a
  signal handler is called, the raise function shall not return until after the signal handler
  does.
 
                                                              Returns
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The raise function returns zero if successful, nonzero if unsuccessful.
 
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.15 Alignment <stdalign.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <stdalign.h> defines four macros.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The macro
 
                                                                       alignas
@@ -14266,7 +14266,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         alignof
 
                                                              
  expands to _Alignof.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The remaining macros are suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. They are
 
                                                                       __alignas_is_defined
@@ -14280,16 +14280,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.16 Variable arguments <stdarg.h>
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The header <stdarg.h> declares a type and defines four macros, for advancing
  through a list of arguments whose number and types are not known to the called function
  when it is translated.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  A function may be called with a variable number of arguments of varying types. As
  described in 6.9.1, its parameter list contains one or more parameters. The rightmost
  parameter plays a special role in the access mechanism, and will be designated parmN in
  this description.
-
                                                              
+
                                                              3
  The type declared is
 
                                                                        va_list
@@ -14309,7 +14309,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.16.1 Variable argument list access macros
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
  The va_start and va_arg macros described in this subclause shall be implemented
  as macros, not functions. It is unspecified whether va_copy and va_end are macros or
  identifiers declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed in order to
@@ -14321,13 +14321,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              7.16.1.1 The va_arg macro
                                                              
 
                                                              Synopsis
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                        #include <stdarg.h>
          type va_arg(va_list ap, type);
 
                                                              
 
                                                              Description
-
                                                              
+
                                                              2
  The va_arg macro expands to an expression that has the specified type and the value of
  the next argument in the call. The parameter ap shall have been initialized by the
  va_start or va_copy macro (without an intervening invocation of the va_end
@@ -14346,7 +14346,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                            •   one type is pointer to void and the other is a pointer to a character type.
 
                                                            
 
                                                            Returns
-
                                                            
+
                                                            3
  The first invocation of the va_arg macro after that of the va_start macro returns the
  value of the argument after that specified by parmN . Successive invocations return the
  values of the remaining arguments in succession.
@@ -14354,32 +14354,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                            Contents
 
                                                            7.16.1.2 The va_copy macro
                                                            
 
                                                            Synopsis
-
                                                            
+
                                                            1
 
                                                                     #include <stdarg.h>
         void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);
 
                                                            
 
                                                            Description
-
                                                            
+
                                                            2
  The va_copy macro initializes dest as a copy of src, as if the va_start macro had
  been applied to dest followed by the same sequence of uses of the va_arg macro as
  had previously been used to reach the present state of src. Neither the va_copy nor
  va_start macro shall be invoked to reinitialize dest without an intervening
  invocation of the va_end macro for the same dest.
 
                                                            Returns
-
                                                            
+
                                                            3
  The va_copy macro returns no value.
 
 
                                                            Contents
 
                                                            7.16.1.3 The va_end macro
                                                            
 
                                                            Synopsis
-
                                                            
+
                                                            1
 
                                                                     #include <stdarg.h>
         void va_end(va_list ap);
 
                                                            
 
                                                            Description
-
                                                            
+
                                                            2
  The va_end macro facilitates a normal return from the function whose variable
  argument list was referred to by the expansion of the va_start macro, or the function
  containing the expansion of the va_copy macro, that initialized the va_list ap. The
@@ -14389,34 +14389,34 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  va_start or va_copy macro, or if the va_end macro is not invoked before the
  return, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                            Returns
-
                                                            
+
                                                            3
  The va_end macro returns no value.
 
 
                                                            Contents
 
                                                            7.16.1.4 The va_start macro
                                                            
 
                                                            Synopsis
-
                                                            
+
                                                            1
 
                                                                      #include <stdarg.h>
          void va_start(va_list ap, parmN);
 
                                                            
 
                                                            Description
-
                                                            
+
                                                            2
  The va_start macro shall be invoked before any access to the unnamed arguments.
-
                                                            
+
                                                            3
  The va_start macro initializes ap for subsequent use by the va_arg and va_end
  macros. Neither the va_start nor va_copy macro shall be invoked to reinitialize ap
  without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same ap.
-
                                                            
+
                                                            4
  The parameter parmN is the identifier of the rightmost parameter in the variable
  parameter list in the function definition (the one just before the , ...). If the parameter
  parmN is declared with the register storage class, with a function or array type, or
  with a type that is not compatible with the type that results after application of the default
  argument promotions, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                            Returns
-
                                                            
+
                                                            5
  The va_start macro returns no value.
-
                                                            
+
                                                            6
  EXAMPLE 1 The function f1 gathers into an array a list of arguments that are pointers to strings (but not
  more than MAXARGS arguments), then passes the array as a single argument to function f2. The number of
  pointers is specified by the first argument to f1.
@@ -14443,7 +14443,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           void f1(int, ...);
 
                                                        
  
-
                                                        
+
                                                        7
  EXAMPLE 2 The function f3 is similar, but saves the status of the variable argument list after the
  indicated number of arguments; after f2 has been called once with the whole list, the trailing part of the list
  is gathered again and passed to function f4.
@@ -14481,13 +14481,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.17.1 Introduction
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  The header <stdatomic.h> defines several macros and declares several types and
  functions for performing atomic operations on data shared between threads.254)
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ need not provide
  this header nor support any of its facilities.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  The macros defined are the atomic lock-free macros
 
                                                                   ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE
@@ -14507,7 +14507,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT
 
                                                        
  which expands to an initializer for an object of type atomic_flag.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        4
  The types include
 
                                                                    memory_order
@@ -14518,7 +14518,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                        
  which is a structure type representing a lock-free, primitive atomic flag; and several *
  atomic analogs of integer types.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        5
  In the following synopses:
 
                                                          
 
                                                        •   An A refers to one of the atomic types.
@@ -14531,7 +14531,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  corresponding _explicit function with memory_order_seq_cst for the
  memory_order argument.
 
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        6
  NOTE Many operations are volatile-qualified. The ''volatile as device register'' semantics have not
  changed in the standard. This qualification means that volatility is preserved when applying these
  operations to volatile objects.
@@ -14547,23 +14547,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.17.2.1 The ATOMIC_VAR_INIT macro
                                                        
 
                                                        Synopsis
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
 
                                                                  #include <stdatomic.h>
          #define ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(C value)
 
                                                        
 
                                                        Description
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  The ATOMIC_VAR_INIT macro expands to a token sequence suitable for initializing an
  atomic object of a type that is initialization-compatible with value. An atomic object
  with automatic storage duration that is not explicitly initialized using
  ATOMIC_VAR_INIT is initially in an indeterminate state; however, the default (zero)
  initialization for objects with static or thread-local storage duration is guaranteed to
  produce a valid state.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  Concurrent access to the variable being initialized, even via an atomic operation,
  constitutes a data race.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        4
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                  atomic_int guide = ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(42);
@@ -14573,25 +14573,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.17.2.2 The atomic_init generic function
                                                        
 
                                                        Synopsis
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
 
                                                                  #include <stdatomic.h>
          void atomic_init(volatile A *obj, C value);
 
                                                        
 
                                                        Description
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  The atomic_init generic function initializes the atomic object pointed to by obj to
  the value value, while also initializing any additional state that the implementation
  might need to carry for the atomic object.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  Although this function initializes an atomic object, it does not avoid data races;
  concurrent access to the variable being initialized, even via an atomic operation,
  constitutes a data race.
 
 
                                                        Returns
-
                                                        
+
                                                        4
  The atomic_init generic function returns no value.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        5
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                    atomic_int guide;
@@ -14601,7 +14601,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.17.3 Order and consistency
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  The enumerated type memory_order specifies the detailed regular (non-atomic)
  memory synchronization operations as defined in 5.1.2.4 and may provide for operation
  ordering. Its enumeration constants are as follows:255)
@@ -14613,20 +14613,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           memory_order_acq_rel
           memory_order_seq_cst
 
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  For memory_order_relaxed, no operation orders memory.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  For       memory_order_release,       memory_order_acq_rel,             and
  memory_order_seq_cst, a store operation performs a release operation on the
  affected memory location.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        4
  For       memory_order_acquire,       memory_order_acq_rel,             and
  memory_order_seq_cst, a load operation performs an acquire operation on the
  affected memory location.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        5
  For memory_order_consume, a load operation performs a consume operation on the
  affected memory location.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        6
  There shall be a single total order S on all memory_order_seq_cst operations,
  consistent with the ''happens before'' order and modification orders for all affected
  locations, such that each memory_order_seq_cst operation B that loads a value
@@ -14644,35 +14644,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      •   if A does not exist, the result of some modification of M in the visible sequence of
   side effects with respect to B that is not memory_order_seq_cst.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  NOTE 1 Although it is not explicitly required that S include lock operations, it can always be extended to
  an order that does include lock and unlock operations, since the ordering between those is already included
  in the ''happens before'' ordering.
  
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  NOTE 2 Atomic operations specifying memory_order_relaxed are relaxed only with respect to
  memory ordering. Implementations must still guarantee that any given atomic access to a particular atomic
  object be indivisible with respect to all other atomic accesses to that object.
  
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  For an atomic operation B that reads the value of an atomic object M, if there is a
  memory_order_seq_cst fence X sequenced before B, then B observes either the
  last memory_order_seq_cst modification of M preceding X in the total order S or
  a later modification of M in its modification order.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      10
  For atomic operations A and B on an atomic object M, where A modifies M and B takes
  its value, if there is a memory_order_seq_cst fence X such that A is sequenced
  before X and B follows X in S, then B observes either the effects of A or a later
  modification of M in its modification order.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      11
  For atomic operations A and B on an atomic object M, where A modifies M and B takes
  its value, if there are memory_order_seq_cst fences X and Y such that A is
  sequenced before X, Y is sequenced before B, and X precedes Y in S, then B observes
  either the effects of A or a later modification of M in its modification order.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      12
  Atomic read-modify-write operations shall always read the last value (in the modification
  order) stored before the write associated with the read-modify-write operation.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      13
  An atomic store shall only store a value that has been computed from constants and
  program input values by a finite sequence of program evaluations, such that each
  evaluation observes the values of variables as computed by the last prior assignment in
@@ -14683,7 +14683,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    •   If an evaluation A is included in the sequence, then all evaluations that assign to the
  same variable and happen before A are also included.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    14
  NOTE 3 The second requirement disallows ''out-of-thin-air'', or ''speculative'' stores of atomics when
  relaxed atomics are used. Since unordered operations are involved, evaluations may appear in this
  sequence out of thread order. For example, with x and y initially zero,
@@ -14727,7 +14727,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  weaker than memory_order_acq_rel ordering, the second requirement has no impact.
  
 
                                                    Recommended practice
-
                                                    
+
                                                    15
  The requirements do not forbid r1 == 42 && r2 == 42 in the following example,
  with x and y initially zero:
 
                                                    @@ -14744,7 +14744,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               atomic_store_explicit(&x, 42, memory_order_relaxed);
 
                                                    
  However, this is not useful behavior, and implementations should not allow it.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    16
  Implementations should make atomic stores visible to atomic loads within a reasonable
  amount of time.
 
@@ -14758,38 +14758,38 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.3.1 The kill_dependency macro
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdatomic.h>
         type kill_dependency(type y);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The kill_dependency macro terminates a dependency chain; the argument does not
  carry a dependency to the return value.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The kill_dependency macro returns the value of y.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.4 Fences
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  This subclause introduces synchronization primitives called fences. Fences can have
  acquire semantics, release semantics, or both. A fence with acquire semantics is called
  an acquire fence; a fence with release semantics is called a release fence.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  A release fence A synchronizes with an acquire fence B if there exist atomic operations
  X and Y , both operating on some atomic object M, such that A is sequenced before X, X
  modifies M, Y is sequenced before B, and Y reads the value written by X or a value
  written by any side effect in the hypothetical release sequence X would head if it were a
  release operation.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  A release fence A synchronizes with an atomic operation B that performs an acquire
  operation on an atomic object M if there exists an atomic operation X such that A is
  sequenced before X, X modifies M, and B reads the value written by X or a value written
  by any side effect in the hypothetical release sequence X would head if it were a release
  operation.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  An atomic operation A that is a release operation on an atomic object M synchronizes
  with an acquire fence B if there exists some atomic operation X on M such that X is
  sequenced before B and reads the value written by A or a value written by any side effect
@@ -14798,13 +14798,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.4.1 The atomic_thread_fence function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdatomic.h>
         void atomic_thread_fence(memory_order order);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Depending on the value of order, this operation:
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   has no effects, if order == memory_order_relaxed;
@@ -14818,42 +14818,42 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  memory_order_seq_cst.
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The atomic_thread_fence function returns no value.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.4.2 The atomic_signal_fence function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdatomic.h>
          void atomic_signal_fence(memory_order order);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Equivalent to atomic_thread_fence(order), except that the resulting ordering
  constraints are established only between a thread and a signal handler executed in the
  same thread.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  NOTE 1 The atomic_signal_fence function can be used to specify the order in which actions
  performed by the thread become visible to the signal handler.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  NOTE 2 Compiler optimizations and reorderings of loads and stores are inhibited in the same way as with
  atomic_thread_fence, but the hardware fence instructions that atomic_thread_fence would
  have inserted are not emitted.
  
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  The atomic_signal_fence function returns no value.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.5 Lock-free property
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The atomic lock-free macros indicate the lock-free property of integer and address atomic
  types. A value of 0 indicates that the type is never lock-free; a value of 1 indicates that
  the type is sometimes lock-free; a value of 2 indicates that the type is always lock-free.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  NOTE Operations that are lock-free should also be address-free. That is, atomic operations on the same
  memory location via two different addresses will communicate atomically. The implementation should not
  depend on any per-process state. This restriction enables communication via memory mapped into a
@@ -14863,24 +14863,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.5.1 The atomic_is_lock_free generic function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <stdatomic.h>
           _Bool atomic_is_lock_free(const volatile A *obj);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The atomic_is_lock_free generic function indicates whether or not the object
  pointed to by obj is lock-free.                                              *
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The atomic_is_lock_free generic function returns nonzero (true) if and only if the
  object's operations are lock-free. The result of a lock-free query on one object cannot be
  inferred from the result of a lock-free query on another object.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.17.6 Atomic integer types
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  For each line in the following table,257) the atomic type name is declared as a type that
  has the same representation and alignment requirements as the corresponding direct
  type.258)
@@ -14929,10 +14929,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            atomic_intmax_t                    _Atomic    intmax_t
            atomic_uintmax_t                   _Atomic    uintmax_t
 
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The semantics of the operations on these types are defined in 7.17.7.                       *
 
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  NOTE The representation of atomic integer types need not have the same size as their corresponding
  regular types. They should have the same size whenever possible, as it eases effort required to port existing
  code.
@@ -14947,14 +14947,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7 Operations on atomic types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  There are only a few kinds of operations on atomic types, though there are many
  instances of those kinds. This subclause specifies each general kind.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7.1 The atomic_store generic functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                         #include <stdatomic.h>
           void atomic_store(volatile A *object, C desired);
@@ -14962,19 +14962,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                C desired, memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The      order      argument    shall    not    be    memory_order_acquire,
  memory_order_consume, nor memory_order_acq_rel. Atomically replace the
  value pointed to by object with the value of desired. Memory is affected according
  to the value of order.
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The atomic_store generic functions return no value.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7.2 The atomic_load generic functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                         #include <stdatomic.h>
           C atomic_load(volatile A *object);
@@ -14982,7 +14982,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The order argument shall not be memory_order_release nor
  memory_order_acq_rel. Memory is affected according to the value of order.
 
                                              Returns
@@ -14992,7 +14992,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7.3 The atomic_exchange generic functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                         #include <stdatomic.h>
           C atomic_exchange(volatile A *object, C desired);
@@ -15000,18 +15000,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                C desired, memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  Atomically replace the value pointed to by object with desired. Memory is affected
  according to the value of order. These operations are read-modify-write operations
  (5.1.2.4).
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  Atomically returns the value pointed to by object immediately before the effects.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7.4 The atomic_compare_exchange generic functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                         #include <stdatomic.h>
           _Bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong(volatile A *object,
@@ -15026,7 +15026,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                memory_order success, memory_order failure);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The failure argument shall not be memory_order_release nor
  memory_order_acq_rel. The failure argument shall be no stronger than the
  success argument. Atomically, compares the value pointed to by object for equality
@@ -15035,7 +15035,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  object. Further, if the comparison is true, memory is affected according to the value of
  success, and if the comparison is false, memory is affected according to the value of
  failure. These operations are atomic read-modify-write operations (5.1.2.4).
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  NOTE 1    For example, the effect of atomic_compare_exchange_strong is
 
 
                                              @@ -15045,15 +15045,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 memcpy(expected, object, sizeof (*object));
 
                                              
  
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  A weak compare-and-exchange operation may fail spuriously. That is, even when the
  contents of memory referred to by expected and object are equal, it may return zero
  and store back to expected the same memory contents that were originally there.
-
                                              
+
                                              5
  NOTE 2 This spurious failure enables implementation of compare-and-exchange on a broader class of
  machines, e.g. load-locked store-conditional machines.
  
-
                                              
+
                                              6
  EXAMPLE         A consequence of spurious failure is that nearly all uses of weak compare-and-exchange will
  be in a loop.
 
                                              @@ -15067,12 +15067,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  strong one is preferable.
  
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              7
  The result of the comparison.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.7.5 The atomic_fetch and modify generic functions
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The following operations perform arithmetic and bitwise computations. All of these
  operations are applicable to an object of any atomic integer type. None of these *
  operations is applicable to atomic_bool. The key, operator, and computation
@@ -15084,7 +15084,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
   xor            ^       bitwise exclusive or
   and            &       bitwise and
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              2
 
                                                         #include <stdatomic.h>
           C atomic_fetch_key(volatile A *object, M operand);
@@ -15092,7 +15092,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                M operand, memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  Atomically replaces the value pointed to by object with the result of the computation
  applied to the value pointed to by object and the given operand. Memory is affected
 
@@ -15102,9 +15102,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  results. For address types, the result may be an undefined address, but the operations
  otherwise have no undefined behavior.
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  Atomically, the value pointed to by object immediately before the effects.
-
                                              
+
                                              5
  NOTE The operation of the atomic_fetch and modify generic functions are nearly equivalent to the
  operation of the corresponding op= compound assignment operators. The only differences are that the
  compound assignment operators are not guaranteed to operate atomically, and the value yielded by a
@@ -15114,22 +15114,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.8 Atomic flag type and operations
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The atomic_flag type provides the classic test-and-set functionality. It has two
  states, set and clear.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  Operations on an object of type atomic_flag shall be lock free.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  NOTE Hence the operations should also be address-free. No other type requires lock-free operations, so
  the atomic_flag type is the minimum hardware-implemented type needed to conform to this
  International standard. The remaining types can be emulated with atomic_flag, though with less than
  ideal properties.
  
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  The macro ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT may be used to initialize an atomic_flag to the
  clear state. An atomic_flag that is not explicitly initialized with
  ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT is initially in an indeterminate state.
-
                                              
+
                                              5
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                        atomic_flag guard = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;
@@ -15139,7 +15139,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.8.1 The atomic_flag_test_and_set functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                        #include <stdatomic.h>
          _Bool atomic_flag_test_and_set(
@@ -15148,19 +15148,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               volatile atomic_flag *object, memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  Atomically sets the value pointed to by object to true. Memory is affected according
  to the value of order. These operations are atomic read-modify-write operations
  (5.1.2.4).
 
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  Atomically, the value of the object immediately before the effects.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.17.8.2 The atomic_flag_clear functions
                                              
 
                                              Synopsis
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                       #include <stdatomic.h>
         void atomic_flag_clear(volatile atomic_flag *object);
@@ -15168,26 +15168,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              volatile atomic_flag *object, memory_order order);
 
                                              
 
                                              Description
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The order argument shall not be memory_order_acquire nor
  memory_order_acq_rel. Atomically sets the value pointed to by object to false.
  Memory is affected according to the value of order.
 
                                              Returns
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The atomic_flag_clear functions return no value.
 
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.18 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The header <stdbool.h> defines four macros.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The macro
 
                                                         bool
 
                                              
  expands to _Bool.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The remaining three macros are suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. They
  are
 
                                              @@ -15202,7 +15202,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           __bool_true_false_are_defined
 
                                              
  which expands to the integer constant 1.
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and perhaps then
  redefine the macros bool, true, and false.259)
  
@@ -15217,10 +15217,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.19 Common definitions <stddef.h>
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The header <stddef.h> defines the following macros and declares the following types.
  Some are also defined in other headers, as noted in their respective subclauses.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The types are
 
                                                       ptrdiff_t
@@ -15244,7 +15244,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  shall have a code value equal to its value when used as the lone character in an integer
  character      constant     if     an      implementation      does      not      define
  __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The macros are
 
                                                       NULL
@@ -15263,7 +15263,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  then the expression &(t.member-designator) evaluates to an address constant. (If the
  specified member is a bit-field, the behavior is undefined.)
 
                                              Recommended practice
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  The types used for size_t and ptrdiff_t should not have an integer conversion rank
  greater than that of signed long int unless the implementation supports objects
  large enough to make this necessary.                                               *
@@ -15271,11 +15271,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20 Integer types <stdint.h>
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The header <stdint.h> declares sets of integer types having specified widths, and
  defines corresponding sets of macros.260) It also defines macros that specify limits of
  integer types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  Types are defined in the following categories:
 
                                                
 
                                              •   integer types having certain exact widths;
@@ -15285,10 +15285,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                              •   integer types having greatest width.
 
                                              
  (Some of these types may denote the same type.)
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  Corresponding macros specify limits of the declared types and construct suitable
  constants.
-
                                              
+
                                              4
  For each type described herein that the implementation provides,261) <stdint.h> shall
  declare that typedef name and define the associated macros. Conversely, for each type
  described herein that the implementation does not provide, <stdint.h> shall not
@@ -15304,11 +15304,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1 Integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  When typedef names differing only in the absence or presence of the initial u are defined,
  they shall denote corresponding signed and unsigned types as described in 6.2.5; an
  implementation providing one of these corresponding types shall also provide the other.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  In the following descriptions, the symbol N represents an unsigned decimal integer with
  no leading zeros (e.g., 8 or 24, but not 04 or 048).
  
@@ -15319,31 +15319,31 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1.1 Exact-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The typedef name intN_t designates a signed integer type with width N , no padding
  bits, and a two's complement representation. Thus, int8_t denotes such a signed
  integer type with a width of exactly 8 bits.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The typedef name uintN_t designates an unsigned integer type with width N and no
  padding bits. Thus, uint24_t denotes such an unsigned integer type with a width of
  exactly 24 bits.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  These types are optional. However, if an implementation provides integer types with
  widths of 8, 16, 32, or 64 bits, no padding bits, and (for the signed types) that have a
  two's complement representation, it shall define the corresponding typedef names.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1.2 Minimum-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The typedef name int_leastN_t designates a signed integer type with a width of at
  least N , such that no signed integer type with lesser size has at least the specified width.
  Thus, int_least32_t denotes a signed integer type with a width of at least 32 bits.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The typedef name uint_leastN_t designates an unsigned integer type with a width
  of at least N , such that no unsigned integer type with lesser size has at least the specified
  width. Thus, uint_least16_t denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of at
  least 16 bits.
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The following types are required:
 
                                                         int_least8_t                                      uint_least8_t
@@ -15355,10 +15355,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1.3 Fastest minimum-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  Each of the following types designates an integer type that is usually fastest262) to operate
  with among all integer types that have at least the specified width.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  The typedef name int_fastN_t designates the fastest signed integer type with a width
  of at least N . The typedef name uint_fastN_t designates the fastest unsigned integer
  type with a width of at least N .
@@ -15367,7 +15367,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                              
+
                                              3
  The following types are required:
 
                                                        int_fast8_t                                    uint_fast8_t
@@ -15385,7 +15385,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1.4 Integer types capable of holding object pointers
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The following type designates a signed integer type with the property that any valid
  pointer to void can be converted to this type, then converted back to pointer to void,
  and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:
@@ -15402,7 +15402,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.1.5 Greatest-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The following type designates a signed integer type capable of representing any value of
  any signed integer type:
 
                                              @@ -15417,11 +15417,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.2 Limits of specified-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
  The following object-like macros specify the minimum and maximum limits of the types
  declared in <stdint.h>. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in
  7.20.1.
-
                                              
+
                                              2
  Each instance of any defined macro shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable
  for use in #if preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type as
  would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to
@@ -15432,7 +15432,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                              Contents
 
                                              7.20.2.1 Limits of exact-width integer types
                                              
-
                                              
+
                                              1
 
                                                
 
                                              •   minimum values of exact-width signed integer types
 
                                                @@ -15448,7 +15448,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                Contents
 
                                                7.20.2.2 Limits of minimum-width integer types
                                                
-
                                                
+
                                                1
 
                                                  
 
                                                •   minimum values of minimum-width signed integer types
 
                                                  @@ -15464,7 +15464,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                  Contents
 
                                                  7.20.2.3 Limits of fastest minimum-width integer types
                                                  
-
                                                  
+
                                                  1
 
                                                    
 
                                                  •   minimum values of fastest minimum-width signed integer types
 
                                                    @@ -15478,7 +15478,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.20.2.4 Limits of integer types capable of holding object pointers
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   minimum value of pointer-holding signed integer type
 
                                                      @@ -15493,7 +15493,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.20.2.5 Limits of greatest-width integer types
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   minimum value of greatest-width signed integer type
    INTMAX_MIN                                                    -(263 - 1)
@@ -15505,10 +15505,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.20.3 Limits of other integer types
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  The following object-like macros specify the minimum and maximum limits of integer
  types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  Each instance of these macros shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable for use
  in #if preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type as would an
  expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to the integer
@@ -15537,18 +15537,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
    WINT_MIN                                              see below
    WINT_MAX                                              see below
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If sig_atomic_t (see 7.14) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of
  SIG_ATOMIC_MIN shall be no greater than -127 and the value of SIG_ATOMIC_MAX
  shall be no less than 127; otherwise, sig_atomic_t is defined as an unsigned integer
  type, and the value of SIG_ATOMIC_MIN shall be 0 and the value of
  SIG_ATOMIC_MAX shall be no less than 255.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If wchar_t (see 7.19) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of WCHAR_MIN
  shall be no greater than -127 and the value of WCHAR_MAX shall be no less than 127;
  otherwise, wchar_t is defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of
  WCHAR_MIN shall be 0 and the value of WCHAR_MAX shall be no less than 255.264)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  If wint_t (see 7.29) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of WINT_MIN shall
  be no greater than -32767 and the value of WINT_MAX shall be no less than 32767;
  otherwise, wint_t is defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of WINT_MIN
@@ -15563,14 +15563,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.20.4 Macros for integer constants
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The following function-like macros expand to integer constants suitable for initializing
  objects that have integer types corresponding to types defined in <stdint.h>. Each
  macro name corresponds to a similar type name in 7.20.1.2 or 7.20.1.5.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The argument in any instance of these macros shall be an unsuffixed integer constant (as
  defined in 6.4.4.1) with a value that does not exceed the limits for the corresponding type.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  Each invocation of one of these macros shall expand to an integer constant expression
  suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. The type of the expression shall have
  the same type as would an expression of the corresponding type converted according to
@@ -15578,7 +15578,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.20.4.1 Macros for minimum-width integer constants
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The macro INTN_C(value) shall expand to an integer constant expression
  corresponding to the type int_leastN_t. The macro UINTN_C(value) shall expand
  to an integer constant expression corresponding to the type uint_leastN_t. For
@@ -15592,7 +15592,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.20.4.2 Macros for greatest-width integer constants
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having the value specified
  by its argument and the type intmax_t:
 
                                                      @@ -15610,10 +15610,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.1 Introduction
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <stdio.h> defines several macros, and declares three types and many
  functions for performing input and output.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The types declared are size_t (described in 7.19);
 
                                                               FILE
@@ -15627,7 +15627,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  which is a complete object type other than an array type capable of recording all the
  information needed to specify uniquely every position within a file.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The macros are NULL (described in 7.19);
 
                                                               _IOFBF
@@ -15684,14 +15684,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  which are expressions of type ''pointer to FILE'' that point to the FILE objects
  associated, respectively, with the standard error, input, and output streams.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The header <wchar.h> declares a number of functions useful for wide character input
  and output. The wide character input/output functions described in that subclause
  provide operations analogous to most of those described here, except that the
  fundamental units internal to the program are wide characters. The external
  representation (in the file) is a sequence of ''generalized'' multibyte characters, as
  described further in 7.21.3.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The input/output functions are given the following collective terms:
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   The wide character input functions -- those functions described in 7.29 that perform
@@ -15722,13 +15722,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        7.21.2 Streams
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  Input and output, whether to or from physical devices such as terminals and tape drives,
  or whether to or from files supported on structured storage devices, are mapped into
  logical data streams, whose properties are more uniform than their various inputs and
  outputs. Two forms of mapping are supported, for text streams and for binary
  streams.266)
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  A text stream is an ordered sequence of characters composed into lines, each line
  consisting of zero or more characters plus a terminating new-line character. Whether the
  last line requires a terminating new-line character is implementation-defined. Characters
@@ -15741,13 +15741,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  immediately preceded by space characters; and the last character is a new-line character.
  Whether space characters that are written out immediately before a new-line character
  appear when read in is implementation-defined.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  A binary stream is an ordered sequence of characters that can transparently record
  internal data. Data read in from a binary stream shall compare equal to the data that were
  earlier written out to that stream, under the same implementation. Such a stream may,
  however, have an implementation-defined number of null characters appended to the end
  of the stream.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        4
  Each stream has an orientation. After a stream is associated with an external file, but
  before any operations are performed on it, the stream is without orientation. Once a wide
  character input/output function has been applied to a stream without orientation, the
@@ -15758,7 +15758,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  been applied to a stream without orientation, the stream becomes a byte-oriented stream.
  Only a call to the freopen function or the fwide function can otherwise alter the
  orientation of a stream. (A successful call to freopen removes any orientation.)267)
-
                                                        
+
                                                        5
  Byte input/output functions shall not be applied to a wide-oriented stream and wide
  character input/output functions shall not be applied to a byte-oriented stream. The
  remaining stream operations do not affect, and are not affected by, a stream's orientation,
@@ -15771,23 +15771,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  function can overwrite a partial multibyte character; any file contents beyond the
  byte(s) written are henceforth indeterminate.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  Each wide-oriented stream has an associated mbstate_t object that stores the current
  parse state of the stream. A successful call to fgetpos stores a representation of the
  value of this mbstate_t object as part of the value of the fpos_t object. A later
  successful call to fsetpos using the same stored fpos_t value restores the value of
  the associated mbstate_t object as well as the position within the controlled stream.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  Each stream has an associated lock that is used to prevent data races when multiple
  threads of execution access a stream, and to restrict the interleaving of stream operations
  performed by multiple threads. Only one thread may hold this lock at a time. The lock is
  reentrant: a single thread may hold the lock multiple times at a given time.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  All functions that read, write, position, or query the position of a stream lock the stream
  before accessing it. They release the lock associated with the stream when the access is
  complete.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  An implementation shall support text files with lines containing at least 254 characters,
  including the terminating new-line character. The value of the macro BUFSIZ shall be at
  least 256.
@@ -15810,7 +15810,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.3 Files
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  A stream is associated with an external file (which may be a physical device) by opening
  a file, which may involve creating a new file. Creating an existing file causes its former
  contents to be discarded, if necessary. If a file can support positioning requests (such as a
@@ -15820,11 +15820,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  position indicator is initially positioned at the beginning or the end of the file. The file
  position indicator is maintained by subsequent reads, writes, and positioning requests, to
  facilitate an orderly progression through the file.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  Binary files are not truncated, except as defined in 7.21.5.3. Whether a write on a text
  stream causes the associated file to be truncated beyond that point is implementation-
  defined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  When a stream is unbuffered, characters are intended to appear from the source or at the
  destination as soon as possible. Otherwise characters may be accumulated and
  transmitted to or from the host environment as a block. When a stream is fully buffered,
@@ -15836,25 +15836,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  when input is requested on a line buffered stream that requires the transmission of
  characters from the host environment. Support for these characteristics is
  implementation-defined, and may be affected via the setbuf and setvbuf functions.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  A file may be disassociated from a controlling stream by closing the file. Output streams
  are flushed (any unwritten buffer contents are transmitted to the host environment) before
  the stream is disassociated from the file. The value of a pointer to a FILE object is
  indeterminate after the associated file is closed (including the standard text streams).
  Whether a file of zero length (on which no characters have been written by an output
  stream) actually exists is implementation-defined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The file may be subsequently reopened, by the same or another program execution, and
  its contents reclaimed or modified (if it can be repositioned at its start). If the main
  function returns to its original caller, or if the exit function is called, all open files are
  closed (hence all output streams are flushed) before program termination. Other paths to
  program termination, such as calling the abort function, need not close all files
  properly.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The address of the FILE object used to control a stream may be significant; a copy of a
  FILE object need not serve in place of the original.
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  At program startup, three text streams are predefined and need not be opened explicitly
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   standard input (for reading conventional input), standard output (for writing
@@ -15863,11 +15863,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  opened, the standard error stream is not fully buffered; the standard input and standard
  output streams are fully buffered if and only if the stream can be determined not to refer
  to an interactive device.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        8
  Functions that open additional (nontemporary) files require a file name, which is a string.
  The rules for composing valid file names are implementation-defined. Whether the same
  file can be simultaneously open multiple times is also implementation-defined.
-
                                                        
+
                                                        9
  Although both text and binary wide-oriented streams are conceptually sequences of wide
  characters, the external file associated with a wide-oriented stream is a sequence of
  multibyte characters, generalized as follows:
@@ -15876,26 +15876,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  encodings valid for use internal to the program).
 
                                                      •   A file need not begin nor end in the initial shift state.268)
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      10
  Moreover, the encodings used for multibyte characters may differ among files. Both the
  nature and choice of such encodings are implementation-defined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      11
  The wide character input functions read multibyte characters from the stream and convert
  them to wide characters as if they were read by successive calls to the fgetwc function.
  Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the mbrtowc function, with the conversion state
  described by the stream's own mbstate_t object. The byte input functions read
  characters from the stream as if by successive calls to the fgetc function.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      12
  The wide character output functions convert wide characters to multibyte characters and
  write them to the stream as if they were written by successive calls to the fputwc
  function. Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the wcrtomb function, with the
  conversion state described by the stream's own mbstate_t object. The byte output
  functions write characters to the stream as if by successive calls to the fputc function.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      13
  In some cases, some of the byte input/output functions also perform conversions between
  multibyte characters and wide characters. These conversions also occur as if by calls to
  the mbrtowc and wcrtomb functions.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      14
  An encoding error occurs if the character sequence presented to the underlying
  mbrtowc function does not form a valid (generalized) multibyte character, or if the code
  value passed to the underlying wcrtomb does not correspond to a valid (generalized)
@@ -15906,7 +15906,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  functions store the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno if and only if an encoding error
  occurs.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      15
  The value of FOPEN_MAX shall be at least eight, including the three standard text
  streams.
 
                                                       Forward references: the exit function (7.22.4.4), the fgetc function (7.21.7.1), the
@@ -15927,38 +15927,38 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.4.1 The remove function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
         int remove(const char *filename);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The remove function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
  to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that
  name will fail, unless it is created anew. If the file is open, the behavior of the remove
  function is implementation-defined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The remove function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.4.2 The rename function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
         int rename(const char *old, const char *new);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The rename function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by old to be
  henceforth known by the name given by the string pointed to by new. The file named
  old is no longer accessible by that name. If a file named by the string pointed to by new
  exists prior to the call to the rename function, the behavior is implementation-defined.
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The rename function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails,269) in
  which case if the file existed previously it is still known by its original name.
 
@@ -15970,25 +15970,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.4.3 The tmpfile function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          FILE *tmpfile(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tmpfile function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other
  existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program
  termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is
  removed is implementation-defined. The file is opened for update with "wb+" mode.
 
                                                      Recommended practice
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  It should be possible to open at least TMP_MAX temporary files during the lifetime of the
  program (this limit may be shared with tmpnam) and there should be no limit on the
  number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open
  files (FOPEN_MAX).
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The tmpfile function returns a pointer to the stream of the file that it created. If the file
  cannot be created, the tmpfile function returns a null pointer.
 
                                                       Forward references: the fopen function (7.21.5.3).
@@ -15996,13 +15996,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.4.4 The tmpnam function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          char *tmpnam(char *s);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tmpnam function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the same
  as the name of an existing file.270) The function is potentially capable of generating at
  
@@ -16010,14 +16010,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  least TMP_MAX different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by existing
  files and thus not be suitable return values.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The tmpnam function generates a different string each time it is called.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Calls to the tmpnam function with a null pointer argument may introduce data races with
  each other. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the tmpnam
  function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  If no suitable string can be generated, the tmpnam function returns a null pointer.
  Otherwise, if the argument is a null pointer, the tmpnam function leaves its result in an
  internal static object and returns a pointer to that object (subsequent calls to the tmpnam
@@ -16025,7 +16025,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  to point to an array of at least L_tmpnam chars; the tmpnam function writes its result
  in that array and returns the argument as its value.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The value of the macro TMP_MAX shall be at least 25.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -16041,13 +16041,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.1 The fclose function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
         int fclose(FILE *stream);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  A successful call to the fclose function causes the stream pointed to by stream to be
  flushed and the associated file to be closed. Any unwritten buffered data for the stream
  are delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; any unread buffered data
@@ -16055,7 +16055,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and any buffer set by the setbuf or setvbuf function is disassociated from the stream
  (and deallocated if it was automatically allocated).
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The fclose function returns zero if the stream was successfully closed, or EOF if any
  errors were detected.
 
@@ -16063,22 +16063,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.2 The fflush function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          int fflush(FILE *stream);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If stream points to an output stream or an update stream in which the most recent
  operation was not input, the fflush function causes any unwritten data for that stream
  to be delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; otherwise, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If stream is a null pointer, the fflush function performs this flushing action on all
  streams for which the behavior is defined above.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The fflush function sets the error indicator for the stream and returns EOF if a write
  error occurs, otherwise it returns zero.
 
                                                       Forward references: the fopen function (7.21.5.3).
@@ -16086,17 +16086,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.3 The fopen function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          FILE *fopen(const char * restrict filename,
               const char * restrict mode);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename,
  and associates a stream with it.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The argument mode points to a string. If the string is one of the following, the file is
  open in the indicated mode. Otherwise, the behavior is undefined.271)
  r                     open text file for reading
@@ -16118,22 +16118,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  w+b or wb+        truncate to zero length or create binary file for update
  w+bx or wb+x      create binary file for update
  a+b or ab+        append; open or create binary file for update, writing at end-of-file
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Opening a file with read mode ('r' as the first character in the mode argument) fails if
  the file does not exist or cannot be read.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  Opening a file with exclusive mode ('x' as the last character in the mode argument)
  fails if the file already exists or cannot be created. Otherwise, the file is created with
  exclusive (also known as non-shared) access to the extent that the underlying system
  supports exclusive access.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  Opening a file with append mode ('a' as the first character in the mode argument)
  causes all subsequent writes to the file to be forced to the then current end-of-file,
  regardless of intervening calls to the fseek function. In some implementations, opening
  a binary file with append mode ('b' as the second or third character in the above list of
  mode argument values) may initially position the file position indicator for the stream
  beyond the last data written, because of null character padding.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  When a file is opened with update mode ('+' as the second or third character in the
  above list of mode argument values), both input and output may be performed on the
  associated stream. However, output shall not be directly followed by input without an
@@ -16142,11 +16142,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  intervening call to a file positioning function, unless the input operation encounters end-
  of-file. Opening (or creating) a text file with update mode may instead open (or create) a
  binary stream in some implementations.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  When opened, a stream is fully buffered if and only if it can be determined not to refer to
  an interactive device. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  The fopen function returns a pointer to the object controlling the stream. If the open
  operation fails, fopen returns a null pointer.
 
                                                       Forward references: file positioning functions (7.21.9).
@@ -16161,7 +16161,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.4 The freopen function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          FILE *freopen(const char * restrict filename,
@@ -16169,21 +16169,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The freopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
  and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode argument is used just
  as in the fopen function.272)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If filename is a null pointer, the freopen function attempts to change the mode of
  the stream to that specified by mode, as if the name of the file currently associated with
  the stream had been used. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are
  permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The freopen function first attempts to close any file that is associated with the specified
  stream. Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the
  stream are cleared.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The freopen function returns a null pointer if the open operation fails. Otherwise,
  freopen returns the value of stream.
 
@@ -16196,14 +16196,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.5 The setbuf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          void setbuf(FILE * restrict stream,
               char * restrict buf);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  Except that it returns no value, the setbuf function is equivalent to the setvbuf
  function invoked with the values _IOFBF for mode and BUFSIZ for size, or (if buf
  is a null pointer), with the value _IONBF for mode.
@@ -16213,14 +16213,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The setbuf function returns no value.
 
                                                       Forward references: the setvbuf function (7.21.5.6).
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.5.6 The setvbuf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          int setvbuf(FILE * restrict stream,
@@ -16228,7 +16228,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               int mode, size_t size);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The setvbuf function may be used only after the stream pointed to by stream has
  been associated with an open file and before any other operation (other than an
  unsuccessful call to setvbuf) is performed on the stream. The argument mode
@@ -16240,7 +16240,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  allocated by the setvbuf function. The contents of the array at any time are
  indeterminate.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The setvbuf function returns zero on success, or nonzero if an invalid value is given
  for mode or if the request cannot be honored.
  
@@ -16256,7 +16256,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.6 Formatted input/output functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The formatted input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence point after the
  actions associated with each specifier.274)
 
@@ -16267,28 +16267,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.6.1 The fprintf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <stdio.h>
           int fprintf(FILE * restrict stream,
                const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The fprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under control
  of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are
  converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is
  undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are
  evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fprintf function returns when
  the end of the format string is encountered.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial
  shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary multibyte
  characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion
  specifications, each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments,
  converting them, if applicable, according to the corresponding conversion specifier, and
  then writing the result to the output stream.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Each conversion specification is introduced by the character %. After the %, the following
  appear in sequence:
 
                                                        
@@ -16312,14 +16312,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      •   An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument.
 
                                                      •   A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  As noted above, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In
  this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments
  specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the
  argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag
  followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the
  precision were omitted.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The flag characters and their meanings are:
  -       The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if
 
                                                      @@ -16359,7 +16359,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other
            conversions, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
  hh            Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a
 
                                                      @@ -16416,7 +16416,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
  d,i          The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The
 
                                                      @@ -16560,24 +16560,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                       conversion specification shall be %%.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.282) If any argument is
  not the correct type for the corresponding conversion specification, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      10
  In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result
  of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the
  conversion result.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      11
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
  to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
 
                                                      Recommended practice
-
                                                      
+
                                                      12
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
  representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
  in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the
  error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      13
  For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most
  DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded.283) If the number of
  significant decimal digits is more than DECIMAL_DIG but the source value is exactly
@@ -16590,14 +16590,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
  the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      14
  The fprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
  if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      15
  The number of characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at least
  4095.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      16
  EXAMPLE 1         To print a date and time in the form ''Sunday, July 3, 10:02'' followed by pi to five decimal
  places:
 
                                                      @@ -16611,11 +16611,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
 
                                                      
  
-
                                                      
+
                                                      17
  EXAMPLE 2 In this example, multibyte characters do not have a state-dependent encoding, and the
  members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes,
  the first of which is denoted here by a and the second by an uppercase letter.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      18
  Given the following wide string with length seven,
 
                                                                 static wchar_t wstr[] = L" X Yabc Z W";
@@ -16675,21 +16675,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.21.6.2 The fscanf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          int fscanf(FILE * restrict stream,
               const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The fscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under control
  of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how
  they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments as pointers to the
  objects to receive the converted input. If there are insufficient arguments for the format,
  the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess
  arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial
  shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space
  characters, an ordinary multibyte character (neither % nor a white-space character), or a
@@ -16702,30 +16702,30 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    •   An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving object.
 
                                                    •   A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The fscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. When all directives
  have been executed, or if a directive fails (as detailed below), the function returns.
  Failures are described as input failures (due to the occurrence of an encoding error or the
  unavailability of input characters), or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  A directive composed of white-space character(s) is executed by reading input up to the
  first non-white-space character (which remains unread), or until no more characters can
  be read. The directive never fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  A directive that is an ordinary multibyte character is executed by reading the next
  characters of the stream. If any of those characters differ from the ones composing the
  directive, the directive fails and the differing and subsequent characters remain unread.
  Similarly, if end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a character from being
  read, the directive fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as
  described below for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the
 
  following steps:
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  Input white-space characters (as specified by the isspace function) are skipped, unless
  the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.284)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    9
  An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An
  input item is defined as the longest sequence of input characters which does not exceed
  any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input sequence.285)
@@ -16733,7 +16733,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a matching failure unless
  end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input from the stream, in which
  case it is an input failure.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    10
  Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the
  count of input characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion specifier. If
  the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails: this
@@ -16742,7 +16742,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the format argument that has not already received a conversion result. If this object
  does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of the conversion cannot be represented
  in the object, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    11
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
  hh             Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies
 
                                                    @@ -16789,7 +16789,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    12
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
  d           Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as
 
                                                    @@ -16909,26 +16909,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                     complete conversion specification shall be %%.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    13
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.287)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    14
  The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as,
  respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                    
+
                                                    15
  Trailing white space (including new-line characters) is left unread unless matched by a
  directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
  determinable other than via the %n directive.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    16
  The fscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the function returns the
  number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in
  the event of an early matching failure.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    17
  EXAMPLE 1        The call:
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -16943,7 +16943,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence
  thompson\0.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    18
  EXAMPLE 2        The call:
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -16958,7 +16958,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  will assign to i the value 56 and to x the value 789.0, will skip 0123, and will assign to name the
  sequence 56\0. The next character read from the input stream will be a.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    19
  EXAMPLE 3        To accept repeatedly from stdin a quantity, a unit of measure, and an item name:
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -16969,7 +16969,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   fscanf(stdin,"%*[^\n]");
           } while (!feof(stdin) && !ferror(stdin));
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    20
  If the stdin stream contains the following lines:
 
 
                                                    @@ -16993,7 +16993,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            count     =   EOF;
 
                                                    
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    21
  EXAMPLE 4         In:
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17004,7 +17004,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the value 123 is assigned to d1 and the value 3 to n1. Because %n can never get an input failure, the value
  of 3 is also assigned to n2. The value of d2 is not affected. The value 1 is assigned to i.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    22
  EXAMPLE 5         The call:
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17015,13 +17015,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  will assign to n the value 1 and to i the value 42 because input white-space characters are skipped for both
  the % and d conversion specifiers.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    23
  EXAMPLE 6 In these examples, multibyte characters do have a state-dependent encoding, and the
  members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes,
  the first of which is denoted here by a and the second by an uppercase letter, but are only recognized as
  such when in the alternate shift state. The shift sequences are denoted by (uparrow) and (downarrow), in which the first causes
  entry into the alternate shift state.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    24
  After the call:
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17035,7 +17035,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  str will contain (uparrow) X Y(downarrow)\0 assuming that none of the bytes of the shift sequences (or of the multibyte
  characters, in the more general case) appears to be a single-byte white-space character.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    25
  In contrast, after the call:
 
 
                                                    @@ -17047,7 +17047,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  with the same input line, wstr will contain the two wide characters that correspond to X and Y and a
  terminating null wide character.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    26
  However, the call:
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17058,7 +17058,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  with the same input line will return zero due to a matching failure against the (downarrow) sequence in the format
  string.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    27
  Assuming that the first byte of the multibyte character X is the same as the first byte of the multibyte
  character Y, after the call:
 
                                                    @@ -17091,17 +17091,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.3 The printf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The printf function is equivalent to fprintf with the argument stdout interposed
  before the arguments to printf.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The printf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if
  an output or encoding error occurred.
 
@@ -17109,17 +17109,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.4 The scanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int scanf(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The scanf function is equivalent to fscanf with the argument stdin interposed
  before the arguments to scanf.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The scanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before
  the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the scanf function returns the
  number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in
@@ -17128,14 +17128,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.5 The snprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n,
               const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The snprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
  an array (specified by argument s) rather than to a stream. If n is zero, nothing is written,
  and s may be a null pointer. Otherwise, output characters beyond the n-1st are
@@ -17143,7 +17143,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of the characters actually written into the array. If copying takes place between objects
  that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The snprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
  had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
  value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been
@@ -17152,7 +17152,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.6 The sprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17160,33 +17160,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The sprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
  an array (specified by the argument s) rather than to a stream. A null character is written
  at the end of the characters written; it is not counted as part of the returned value. If
  copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The sprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.7 The sscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         int sscanf(const char * restrict s,
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The sscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, except that input is obtained from a
  string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the
  string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf function. If copying
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The sscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the sscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -17195,7 +17195,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.8 The vfprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17204,17 +17204,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vfprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfprintf function does not invoke the
 
  va_end macro.288)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vfprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  EXAMPLE       The following shows the use of the vfprintf function in a general error-reporting routine.
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -17240,7 +17240,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.9 The vfscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17249,13 +17249,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vfscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.288)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vfscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vfscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -17268,7 +17268,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.10 The vprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17276,20 +17276,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vprintf function is equivalent to printf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.288)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
  if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.11 The vscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17297,13 +17297,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vscanf function is equivalent to scanf, with the variable argument list replaced
  by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly
  subsequent va_arg calls). The vscanf function does not invoke the va_end
  macro.288)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -17313,7 +17313,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.12 The vsnprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17322,14 +17322,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vsnprintf function is equivalent to snprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsnprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.288) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vsnprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
  had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
  value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been
@@ -17338,7 +17338,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.13 The vsprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17347,14 +17347,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vsprintf function is equivalent to sprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.288) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vsprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
 
@@ -17362,7 +17362,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.6.14 The vsscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17371,13 +17371,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vsscanf function is equivalent to sscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.288)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vsscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vsscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -17389,19 +17389,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.1 The fgetc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int fgetc(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
  next character is present, the fgetc function obtains that character as an unsigned
  char converted to an int and advances the associated file position indicator for the
  stream (if defined).
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
  of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function returns EOF. Otherwise, the
  fgetc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by stream.
@@ -17418,20 +17418,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.2 The fgets function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          char *fgets(char * restrict s, int n,
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fgets function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n
  from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No additional
  characters are read after a new-line character (which is retained) or after end-of-file. A
  null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fgets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
  characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
  null pointer is returned. If a read error occurs during the operation, the array contents are
@@ -17440,27 +17440,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.3 The fputc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fputc function writes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
  char) to the output stream pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the
  associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator
  appropriately. If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened
  with append mode, the character is appended to the output stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fputc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and fputc returns EOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.4 The fputs function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
@@ -17468,29 +17468,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fputs function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
  stream. The terminating null character is not written.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fputs function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a
  nonnegative value.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.5 The getc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         int getc(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The getc function is equivalent to fgetc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
  may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an expression
  with side effects.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The getc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
  stream. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
  getc returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and
@@ -17499,16 +17499,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.6 The getchar function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         int getchar(void);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The getchar function is equivalent to getc with the argument stdin.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The getchar function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
  stdin. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
  getchar returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and
@@ -17518,52 +17518,52 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.7 The putc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The putc function is equivalent to fputc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
  may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an expression
  with side effects.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The putc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and putc returns EOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.8 The putchar function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int putchar(int c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The putchar function is equivalent to putc with the second argument stdout.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The putchar function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
  indicator for the stream is set and putchar returns EOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.9 The puts function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int puts(const char *s);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The puts function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stdout,
  and appends a new-line character to the output. The terminating null character is not
  written.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The puts function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a nonnegative
  value.
 
@@ -17571,27 +17571,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.7.10 The ungetc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
           int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The ungetc function pushes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
  char) back onto the input stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back characters will be
  returned by subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A
  successful intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning
  function (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back characters for the
  stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  One character of pushback is guaranteed. If the ungetc function is called too many
  times on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that
  stream, the operation may fail.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If the value of c equals that of the macro EOF, the operation fails and the input stream is
  unchanged.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  A successful call to the ungetc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream.
  The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all
  pushed-back characters shall be the same as it was before the characters were pushed
@@ -17601,7 +17601,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the ungetc function; if its value was zero before a call, it is indeterminate after the
  call.290)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The ungetc function returns the character pushed back after conversion, or EOF if the
  operation fails.
 
                                                     Forward references: file positioning functions (7.21.9).
@@ -17621,7 +17621,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.8.1 The fread function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          size_t fread(void * restrict ptr,
@@ -17629,7 +17629,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fread function reads, into the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
  whose size is specified by size, from the stream pointed to by stream. For each
  object, size calls are made to the fgetc function and the results stored, in the order
@@ -17638,7 +17638,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  read. If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator for the stream is
  indeterminate. If a partial element is read, its value is indeterminate.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fread function returns the number of elements successfully read, which may be
  less than nmemb if a read error or end-of-file is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
  fread returns zero and the contents of the array and the state of the stream remain
@@ -17647,7 +17647,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.8.2 The fwrite function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          size_t fwrite(const void * restrict ptr,
@@ -17655,7 +17655,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fwrite function writes, from the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
  whose size is specified by size, to the stream pointed to by stream. For each object,
  size calls are made to the fputc function, taking the values (in order) from an array of
@@ -17665,7 +17665,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  indeterminate.
 
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fwrite function returns the number of elements successfully written, which will be
  less than nmemb only if a write error is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
  fwrite returns zero and the state of the stream remains unchanged.
@@ -17676,20 +17676,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.9.1 The fgetpos function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         int fgetpos(FILE * restrict stream,
              fpos_t * restrict pos);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fgetpos function stores the current values of the parse state (if any) and file
  position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by pos.
  The values stored contain unspecified information usable by the fsetpos function for
  repositioning the stream to its position at the time of the call to the fgetpos function.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If successful, the fgetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fgetpos function
  returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
 
                                                     Forward references: the fsetpos function (7.21.9.3).
@@ -17697,71 +17697,71 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.9.2 The fseek function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         int fseek(FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fseek function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
  If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fseek fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  For a binary stream, the new position, measured in characters from the beginning of the
  file, is obtained by adding offset to the position specified by whence. The specified
  position is the beginning of the file if whence is SEEK_SET, the current value of the file
  position indicator if SEEK_CUR, or end-of-file if SEEK_END. A binary stream need not
  meaningfully support fseek calls with a whence value of SEEK_END.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  For a text stream, either offset shall be zero, or offset shall be a value returned by
  an earlier successful call to the ftell function on a stream associated with the same file
  and whence shall be SEEK_SET.
 
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  After determining the new position, a successful call to the fseek function undoes any
  effects of the ungetc function on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the
  stream, and then establishes the new position. After a successful fseek call, the next
  operation on an update stream may be either input or output.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The fseek function returns nonzero only for a request that cannot be satisfied.
 
                                                     Forward references: the ftell function (7.21.9.4).
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.9.3 The fsetpos function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int fsetpos(FILE *stream, const fpos_t *pos);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fsetpos function sets the mbstate_t object (if any) and file position indicator
  for the stream pointed to by stream according to the value of the object pointed to by
  pos, which shall be a value obtained from an earlier successful call to the fgetpos
  function on a stream associated with the same file. If a read or write error occurs, the
  error indicator for the stream is set and fsetpos fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  A successful call to the fsetpos function undoes any effects of the ungetc function
  on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, and then establishes the new
  parse state and position. After a successful fsetpos call, the next operation on an
  update stream may be either input or output.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If successful, the fsetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fsetpos function
  returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.9.4 The ftell function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          long int ftell(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The ftell function obtains the current value of the file position indicator for the stream
  pointed to by stream. For a binary stream, the value is the number of characters from
  the beginning of the file. For a text stream, its file position indicator contains unspecified
@@ -17771,7 +17771,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  or read.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If successful, the ftell function returns the current value of the file position indicator
  for the stream. On failure, the ftell function returns -1L and stores an
  implementation-defined positive value in errno.
@@ -17779,13 +17779,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.9.5 The rewind function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         void rewind(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The rewind function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by
  stream to the beginning of the file. It is equivalent to
 
                                                    @@ -17793,7 +17793,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  except that the error indicator for the stream is also cleared.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The rewind function returns no value.
 
 
                                                    Contents
@@ -17802,62 +17802,62 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.10.1 The clearerr function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         void clearerr(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The clearerr function clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream pointed
  to by stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The clearerr function returns no value.
 
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.10.2 The feof function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int feof(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The feof function tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The feof function returns nonzero if and only if the end-of-file indicator is set for
  stream.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.10.3 The ferror function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          int ferror(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The ferror function tests the error indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The ferror function returns nonzero if and only if the error indicator is set for
  stream.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.21.10.4 The perror function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          void perror(const char *s);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The perror function maps the error number in the integer expression errno to an
  error message. It writes a sequence of characters to the standard error stream thus: first
  (if s is not a null pointer and the character pointed to by s is not the null character), the
@@ -17865,17 +17865,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  message string followed by a new-line character. The contents of the error message
  strings are the same as those returned by the strerror function with argument errno.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The perror function returns no value.
 
                                                     Forward references: the strerror function (7.24.6.2).
 
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.22 General utilities <stdlib.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <stdlib.h> declares five types and several functions of general utility, and
  defines several macros.291)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The types declared are size_t and wchar_t (both described in 7.19),
 
                                                               div_t
@@ -17889,7 +17889,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           lldiv_t
 
                                                    
  which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the lldiv function.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.19);
 
                                                               EXIT_FAILURE
@@ -17924,7 +17924,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.22.1 Numeric conversion functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The functions atof, atoi, atol, and atoll need not affect the value of the integer
  expression errno on an error. If the value of the result cannot be represented, the
  behavior is undefined.
@@ -17932,27 +17932,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.22.1.1 The atof function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdlib.h>
          double atof(const char *nptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The atof function converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to
  double representation. Except for the behavior on error, it is equivalent to
 
                                                              strtod(nptr, (char **)NULL)
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The atof function returns the converted value.
 
                                                     Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.22.1.3).
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.22.1.2 The atoi, atol, and atoll functions
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdlib.h>
          int atoi(const char *nptr);
@@ -17960,7 +17960,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long long int atoll(const char *nptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The atoi, atol, and atoll functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed
  to by nptr to int, long int, and long long int representation, respectively.
  Except for the behavior on error, they are equivalent to
@@ -17970,7 +17970,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          atoll: strtoll(nptr, (char **)NULL, 10)
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The atoi, atol, and atoll functions return the converted value.
 
                                                     Forward references: the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions
  (7.22.1.4).
@@ -17979,7 +17979,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.22.1.3 The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdlib.h>
         double strtod(const char * restrict nptr,
@@ -17990,7 +17990,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              char ** restrict endptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions convert the initial portion of the string
  pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
  respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly
@@ -17999,7 +17999,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null
  character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a
  floating-point number, and return the result.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of
  the following:
 
                                                      
@@ -18020,7 +18020,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string,
  starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject
  sequence contains no characters if the input string is not of the expected form.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of
  characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point character (whichever occurs
  first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.2, except that the
@@ -18037,24 +18037,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the expected form; the meaning of the n-char sequence is implementation-defined.293) A
  pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that
  endptr is not a null pointer.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the
  value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
                                                      Recommended practice
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
  the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
  appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value,
  with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding
  direction.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG (defined in
  <float.h>) significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject
  sequence D has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG significant digits,
@@ -18067,7 +18067,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
  rounding direction.294)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      10
  The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
  zero is returned. If the correct value overflows and default rounding is in effect (7.12.1),
  plus or minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the
@@ -18092,7 +18092,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.1.4 The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          long int strtol(
@@ -18113,7 +18113,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               int base);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions convert the initial
  portion of the string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int, unsigned
  long int, and unsigned long long int representation, respectively. First,
@@ -18126,7 +18126,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null
  character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
  integer, and return the result.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an
  integer constant as described in 6.4.4.1, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but
  not including an integer suffix. If the value of base is between 2 and 36 (inclusive), the
@@ -18136,13 +18136,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  ascribed the values 10 through 35; only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less
  than that of base are permitted. If the value of base is 16, the characters 0x or 0X may
  optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string,
  starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject
  sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white
  space, or if the first non-white-space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter
  or digit.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence
  of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant according to
  the rules of 6.4.4.1. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base
@@ -18150,15 +18150,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  as given above. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the value resulting from
  the conversion is negated (in the return type). A pointer to the final string is stored in the
  object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions return the converted
  value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
  is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN,
@@ -18172,24 +18172,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.2.1 The rand function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          int rand(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The rand function computes a sequence of pseudo-random integers in the range 0 to
  RAND_MAX.295)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The rand function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to pseudo-random
  sequence generation functions. The implementation shall behave as if no library function
  calls the rand function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The rand function returns a pseudo-random integer.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The value of the RAND_MAX macro shall be at least 32767.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -18201,19 +18201,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.2.2 The srand function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void srand(unsigned int seed);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The srand function uses the argument as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo-random
  numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to rand. If srand is then called with the
  same seed value, the sequence of pseudo-random numbers shall be repeated. If rand is
  called before any calls to srand have been made, the same sequence shall be generated
  as when srand is first called with a seed value of 1.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The srand function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to pseudo-
  random sequence generation functions. The implementation shall behave as if no library
  function calls the srand function.
@@ -18223,9 +18223,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The srand function returns no value.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  EXAMPLE     The following functions define a portable implementation of rand and srand.
 
                                                                static unsigned long int next = 1;
@@ -18243,7 +18243,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3 Memory management functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to the
  aligned_alloc, calloc, malloc, and realloc functions is unspecified. The
  pointer returned if the allocation succeeds is suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to
@@ -18256,7 +18256,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the space requested is zero, the behavior is implementation-defined: either a null pointer
  is returned, or the behavior is as if the size were some nonzero value, except that the
  returned pointer shall not be used to access an object.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  For purposes of determining the existence of a data race, memory allocation functions
  behave as though they accessed only memory locations accessible through their
  arguments and not other static duration storage. These functions may, however, visibly
@@ -18268,37 +18268,37 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3.1 The aligned_alloc function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void *aligned_alloc(size_t alignment, size_t size);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The aligned_alloc function allocates space for an object whose alignment is
  specified by alignment, whose size is specified by size, and whose value is
  indeterminate. The value of alignment shall be a valid alignment supported by the
  implementation and the value of size shall be an integral multiple of alignment.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The aligned_alloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated
  space.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3.2 The calloc function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The calloc function allocates space for an array of nmemb objects, each of whose size
  is size. The space is initialized to all bits zero.296)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The calloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -18309,20 +18309,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3.3 The free function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void free(void *ptr);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The free function causes the space pointed to by ptr to be deallocated, that is, made
  available for further allocation. If ptr is a null pointer, no action occurs. Otherwise, if
  the argument does not match a pointer earlier returned by a memory management
  function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc, the
  behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The free function returns no value.
  
  
@@ -18333,42 +18333,42 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3.4 The malloc function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void *malloc(size_t size);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The malloc function allocates space for an object whose size is specified by size and
  whose value is indeterminate.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The malloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.3.5 The realloc function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The realloc function deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a
  pointer to a new object that has the size specified by size. The contents of the new
  object shall be the same as that of the old object prior to deallocation, up to the lesser of
  the new and old sizes. Any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object have
  indeterminate values.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If ptr is a null pointer, the realloc function behaves like the malloc function for the
  specified size. Otherwise, if ptr does not match a pointer earlier returned by a memory
  management function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to the free or
  realloc function, the behavior is undefined. If memory for the new object cannot be
  allocated, the old object is not deallocated and its value is unchanged.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The realloc function returns a pointer to the new object (which may have the same
  value as a pointer to the old object), or a null pointer if the new object could not be
  allocated.
@@ -18380,13 +18380,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.1 The abort function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdlib.h>
         _Noreturn void abort(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The abort function causes abnormal program termination to occur, unless the signal
  SIGABRT is being caught and the signal handler does not return. Whether open streams
  with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed, or temporary files are
@@ -18394,27 +18394,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  unsuccessful termination is returned to the host environment by means of the function
  call raise(SIGABRT).
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The abort function does not return to its caller.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.2 The atexit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdlib.h>
         int atexit(void (*func)(void));
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The atexit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called without
  arguments at normal program termination.297) It is unspecified whether a call to the
  atexit function that does not happen before the exit function is called will succeed.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The atexit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
 
                                                       Forward references: the at_quick_exit function (7.22.4.3), the exit function
  (7.22.4.4).
@@ -18432,22 +18432,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.3 The at_quick_exit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          int at_quick_exit(void (*func)(void));
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The at_quick_exit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called
  without arguments should quick_exit be called.298) It is unspecified whether a call to
  the at_quick_exit function that does not happen before the quick_exit function
  is called will succeed.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The at_quick_exit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it
  fails.
 
                                                       Forward references: the quick_exit function (7.22.4.7).
@@ -18460,18 +18460,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.4 The exit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          _Noreturn void exit(int status);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The exit function causes normal program termination to occur. No functions registered
  by the at_quick_exit function are called. If a program calls the exit function
  more than once, or calls the quick_exit function in addition to the exit function, the
  behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  First, all functions registered by the atexit function are called, in the reverse order of
  their registration,299) except that a function is called after any previously registered
  functions that had already been called at the time it was registered. If, during the call to
@@ -18481,17 +18481,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Next, all open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, all open streams are
  closed, and all files created by the tmpfile function are removed.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  Finally, control is returned to the host environment. If the value of status is zero or
  EXIT_SUCCESS, an implementation-defined form of the status successful termination is
  returned. If the value of status is EXIT_FAILURE, an implementation-defined form
  of the status unsuccessful termination is returned. Otherwise the status returned is
  implementation-defined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The exit function cannot return to its caller.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -18502,13 +18502,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.5 The _Exit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          _Noreturn void _Exit(int status);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The _Exit function causes normal program termination to occur and control to be
  returned to the host environment. No functions registered by the atexit function, the
  at_quick_exit function, or signal handlers registered by the signal function are
@@ -18517,19 +18517,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  flushed, open streams are closed, or temporary files are removed is implementation-
  defined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The _Exit function cannot return to its caller.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.6 The getenv function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          char *getenv(const char *name);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The getenv function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment,
  for a string that matches the string pointed to by name. The set of environment names
  and the method for altering the environment list are implementation-defined. The
@@ -18537,10 +18537,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the environment list.300)
  
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the getenv function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The getenv function returns a pointer to a string associated with the matched list
  member. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the getenv function. If the specified name cannot
@@ -18553,29 +18553,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.7 The quick_exit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          _Noreturn void quick_exit(int status);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The quick_exit function causes normal program termination to occur. No functions
  registered by the atexit function or signal handlers registered by the signal function
  are called. If a program calls the quick_exit function more than once, or calls the
  exit function in addition to the quick_exit function, the behavior is undefined. If a
  signal is raised while the quick_exit function is executing, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The quick_exit function first calls all functions registered by the at_quick_exit
  function, in the reverse order of their registration,301) except that a function is called after
  any previously registered functions that had already been called at the time it was
  registered. If, during the call to any such function, a call to the longjmp function is
  made that would terminate the call to the registered function, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Then control is returned to the host environment by means of the function call
  _Exit(status).
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The quick_exit function cannot return to its caller.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -18586,13 +18586,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.4.8 The system function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          int system(const char *string);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If string is a null pointer, the system function determines whether the host
  environment has a command processor. If string is not a null pointer, the system
  
@@ -18601,36 +18601,36 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  executed in a manner which the implementation shall document; this might then cause the
  program calling system to behave in a non-conforming manner or to terminate.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If the argument is a null pointer, the system function returns nonzero only if a
  command processor is available. If the argument is not a null pointer, and the system
  function does return, it returns an implementation-defined value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.5 Searching and sorting utilities
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  These utilities make use of a comparison function to search or sort arrays of unspecified
  type. Where an argument declared as size_t nmemb specifies the length of the array
  for a function, nmemb can have the value zero on a call to that function; the comparison
  function is not called, a search finds no matching element, and sorting performs no
  rearrangement. Pointer arguments on such a call shall still have valid values, as described
  in 7.1.4.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The implementation shall ensure that the second argument of the comparison function
  (when called from bsearch), or both arguments (when called from qsort), are
  pointers to elements of the array.302) The first argument when called from bsearch
  shall equal key.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The comparison function shall not alter the contents of the array. The implementation
  may reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function, but shall not
  alter the contents of any individual element.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  When the same objects (consisting of size bytes, irrespective of their current positions
  in the array) are passed more than once to the comparison function, the results shall be
  consistent with one another. That is, for qsort they shall define a total ordering on the
  array, and for bsearch the same object shall always compare the same way with the
  key.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  A sequence point occurs immediately before and immediately after each call to the
  comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any
  movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.
@@ -18653,7 +18653,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.5.1 The bsearch function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <stdlib.h>
           void *bsearch(const void *key, const void *base,
@@ -18661,11 +18661,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The bsearch function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which
  is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key. The
  size of each element of the array is specified by size.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The comparison function pointed to by compar is called with two arguments that point
  to the key object and to an array element, in that order. The function shall return an
  integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the key object is considered,
@@ -18673,7 +18673,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  shall consist of: all the elements that compare less than, all the elements that compare
  equal to, and all the elements that compare greater than the key object, in that order.303)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The bsearch function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null
  pointer if no match is found. If two elements compare as equal, which element is
  matched is unspecified.
@@ -18685,17 +18685,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.5.2 The qsort function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <stdlib.h>
           void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
                int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The qsort function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is
  pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The contents of the array are sorted into ascending order according to a comparison
  function pointed to by compar, which is called with two arguments that point to the
  objects being compared. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or
@@ -18704,10 +18704,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If two elements compare as equal, their order in the resulting sorted array is unspecified.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The qsort function returns no value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
@@ -18716,7 +18716,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.6.1 The abs, labs and llabs functions
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          int abs(int j);
@@ -18724,11 +18724,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          long long int llabs(long long int j);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The abs, labs, and llabs functions compute the absolute value of an integer j. If the
  result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.304)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The abs, labs, and llabs, functions return the absolute value.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -18738,7 +18738,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.6.2 The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          div_t div(int numer, int denom);
@@ -18746,11 +18746,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The div, ldiv, and lldiv, functions compute numer / denom and numer %
  denom in a single operation.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions return a structure of type div_t, ldiv_t, and
  lldiv_t, respectively, comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structures
  shall contain (in either order) the members quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder),
@@ -18764,7 +18764,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.7 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The behavior of the multibyte character functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category
  of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, each function is placed into its
  initial conversion state at program startup and can be returned to that state by a call for
@@ -18782,13 +18782,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.7.1 The mblen function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdlib.h>
          int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is not a null pointer, the mblen function determines the number of bytes contained
  in the multibyte character pointed to by s. Except that the conversion state of the
  mbtowc function is not affected, it is equivalent to
@@ -18796,10 +18796,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, (const char *)0, 0);
          mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, s, n);
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mblen function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If s is a null pointer, the mblen function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the mblen function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character),
@@ -18816,7 +18816,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.7.2 The mbtowc function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdlib.h>
         int mbtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc,
@@ -18824,7 +18824,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -18832,30 +18832,30 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  corresponding wide character and then, if pwc is not a null pointer, stores that value in
  the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the function is left in the initial conversion state.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mbtowc function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If s is a null pointer, the mbtowc function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the mbtowc function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character),
  or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the converted multibyte character (if
  the next n or fewer bytes form a valid multibyte character), or returns -1 (if they do not
  form a valid multibyte character).
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  In no case will the value returned be greater than n or the value of the MB_CUR_MAX
  macro.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.7.3 The wctomb function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdlib.h>
         int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The wctomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte
  character corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift
  sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first
@@ -18864,28 +18864,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  sequence needed to restore the initial shift state, and the function is left in the initial
  conversion state.
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If s is a null pointer, the wctomb function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
  character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
  not a null pointer, the wctomb function returns -1 if the value of wc does not correspond
  to a valid multibyte character, or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the
  multibyte character corresponding to the value of wc.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  In no case will the value returned be greater than the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.8 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The behavior of the multibyte string functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of
  the current locale.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.8.1 The mbstowcs function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <stdlib.h>
           size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t * restrict pwcs,
@@ -18893,7 +18893,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mbstowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
  initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide
  characters and stores not more than n wide characters into the array pointed to by pwcs.
@@ -18901,11 +18901,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  character) will be examined or converted. Each multibyte character is converted as if by
  a call to the mbtowc function, except that the conversion state of the mbtowc function is
  not affected.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  No more than n elements will be modified in the array pointed to by pwcs. If copying
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If an invalid multibyte character is encountered, the mbstowcs function returns
  (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the mbstowcs function returns the number of array
  elements modified, not including a terminating null wide character, if any.306)
@@ -18922,7 +18922,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.22.8.2 The wcstombs function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <stdlib.h>
         size_t wcstombs(char * restrict s,
@@ -18930,18 +18930,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The wcstombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed
  to by pwcs into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the
  initial shift state, and stores these multibyte characters into the array pointed to by s,
  stopping if a multibyte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes or if a null
  character is stored. Each wide character is converted as if by a call to the wctomb
  function, except that the conversion state of the wctomb function is not affected.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  No more than n bytes will be modified in the array pointed to by s. If copying takes place
  between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character,
  the wcstombs function returns (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the wcstombs function
  returns the number of bytes modified, not including a terminating null character, if
@@ -18950,7 +18950,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.23 _Noreturn <stdnoreturn.h>
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <stdnoreturn.h> defines the macro
 
                                                                noreturn
@@ -18963,14 +18963,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.1 String function conventions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <string.h> declares one type and several functions, and defines one
  macro useful for manipulating arrays of character type and other objects treated as arrays
  of character type.307) The type is size_t and the macro is NULL (both described in
  7.19). Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in all cases
  a char * or void * argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) character of the
  array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  Where an argument declared as size_t n specifies the length of the array for a
  function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated
  otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments
@@ -18978,7 +18978,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  function that locates a character finds no occurrence, a function that compares two
  character sequences returns zero, and a function that copies characters copies zero
  characters.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  For all functions in this subclause, each character shall be interpreted as if it had the type
  unsigned char (and therefore every possible object representation is valid and has a
  different value).
@@ -18993,7 +18993,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.2.1 The memcpy function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <string.h>
           void *memcpy(void * restrict s1,
@@ -19001,12 +19001,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The memcpy function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior
  is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The memcpy function returns the value of s1.
  
  
@@ -19017,44 +19017,44 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.2.2 The memmove function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The memmove function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n characters from the object
  pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not
  overlap the objects pointed to by s1 and s2, and then the n characters from the
  temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The memmove function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.2.3 The strcpy function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strcpy(char * restrict s1,
               const char * restrict s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strcpy function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null
  character) into the array pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that
  overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strcpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.2.4 The strncpy function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strncpy(char * restrict s1,
@@ -19062,17 +19062,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strncpy function copies not more than n characters (characters that follow a null
  character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
 
  s1.308) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If the array pointed to by s2 is a string that is shorter than n characters, null characters
  are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n characters in all have been
  written.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The strncpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -19086,26 +19086,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.3.1 The strcat function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <string.h>
           char *strcat(char * restrict s1,
                const char * restrict s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strcat function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character
  of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. If copying takes place between
  objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strcat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.3.2 The strncat function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <string.h>
           char *strncat(char * restrict s1,
@@ -19113,7 +19113,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strncat function appends not more than n characters (a null character and
  characters that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
  the string pointed to by s1. The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the
@@ -19122,7 +19122,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strncat function returns the value of s1.
 
                                                       Forward references: the strlen function (7.24.6.3).
 
@@ -19133,7 +19133,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4 Comparison functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The sign of a nonzero value returned by the comparison functions memcmp, strcmp,
  and strncmp is determined by the sign of the difference between the values of the first
  pair of characters (both interpreted as unsigned char) that differ in the objects being
@@ -19142,17 +19142,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4.1 The memcmp function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The memcmp function compares the first n characters of the object pointed to by s1 to
  the first n characters of the object pointed to by s2.310)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The memcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
  pointed to by s2.
@@ -19166,17 +19166,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4.2 The strcmp function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strcmp function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
  s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
  
@@ -19186,17 +19186,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4.3 The strcoll function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strcoll function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
  s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strcoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
  pointed to by s2 when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.
@@ -19204,18 +19204,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4.4 The strncmp function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strncmp function compares not more than n characters (characters that follow a
  null character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to
  by s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
  to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
@@ -19223,7 +19223,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.4.5 The strxfrm function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         size_t strxfrm(char * restrict s1,
@@ -19231,7 +19231,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strxfrm function transforms the string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting
  string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if the strcmp
  function is applied to two transformed strings, it returns a value greater than, equal to, or
@@ -19242,11 +19242,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  be a null pointer. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strxfrm function returns the length of the transformed string (not including the
  terminating null character). If the value returned is n or more, the contents of the array
  pointed to by s1 are indeterminate.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the size of the array needed to hold the
  transformation of the string pointed to by s.
 
                                                      @@ -19260,169 +19260,169 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.1 The memchr function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The memchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to an unsigned
  char) in the initial n characters (each interpreted as unsigned char) of the object
  pointed to by s. The implementation shall behave as if it reads the characters sequentially
  and stops as soon as a matching character is found.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The memchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
  character does not occur in the object.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.2 The strchr function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strchr(const char *s, int c);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
  string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
  string.
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
  character does not occur in the string.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.3 The strcspn function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         size_t strcspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strcspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
  pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters not from the string pointed to by
  s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strcspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.4 The strpbrk function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         char *strpbrk(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strpbrk function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of any
  character from the string pointed to by s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strpbrk function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if no character
  from s2 occurs in s1.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.5 The strrchr function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         char *strrchr(const char *s, int c);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strrchr function locates the last occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
  string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
  string.
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strrchr function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if c does not
  occur in the string.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.6 The strspn function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          size_t strspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
  pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.7 The strstr function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strstr(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strstr function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of the
  sequence of characters (excluding the terminating null character) in the string pointed to
  by s2.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strstr function returns a pointer to the located string, or a null pointer if the string
  is not found. If s2 points to a string with zero length, the function returns s1.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.5.8 The strtok function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strtok(char * restrict s1,
               const char * restrict s2);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  A sequence of calls to the strtok function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a
  sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to
  by s2. The first call in the sequence has a non-null first argument; subsequent calls in the
  sequence have a null first argument. The separator string pointed to by s2 may be
  different from call to call.
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character
  that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character
  is found, then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok function
  returns a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is the start of the first token.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The strtok function then searches from there for a character that is contained in the
  current separator string. If no such character is found, the current token extends to the
  end of the string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches for a token will return a null
  pointer. If such a character is found, it is overwritten by a null character, which
  terminates the current token. The strtok function saves a pointer to the following
  character, from which the next search for a token will start.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first argument, starts
  searching from the saved pointer and behaves as described above.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The strtok function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to the strtok
  function.311) The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strtok
  function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  The strtok function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer
  if there is no token.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
@@ -19451,38 +19451,38 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.6.1 The memset function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The memset function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into
  each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The memset function returns the value of s.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.6.2 The strerror function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <string.h>
          char *strerror(int errnum);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strerror function maps the number in errnum to a message string. Typically,
  the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror shall map any value of type
  int to a message.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strerror function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to the
  strerror function.312) The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls
  the strerror function.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The strerror function returns a pointer to the string, the contents of which are locale-
  specific. The array pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
  overwritten by a subsequent call to the strerror function.
@@ -19500,26 +19500,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.24.6.3 The strlen function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <string.h>
         size_t strlen(const char *s);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strlen function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The strlen function returns the number of characters that precede the terminating null
  character.
 
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.25 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <tgmath.h> includes the headers <math.h> and <complex.h> and
  defines several type-generic macros.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  Of the <math.h> and <complex.h> functions without an f (float) or l (long
  double) suffix, several have one or more parameters whose corresponding real type is
  double. For each such function, except modf, there is a corresponding type-generic
@@ -19527,7 +19527,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  synopsis are generic parameters. Use of the macro invokes a function whose
  corresponding real type and type domain are determined by the arguments for the generic
  parameters.314)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  Use of the macro invokes a function whose generic parameters have the corresponding
  real type determined as follows:
 
                                                        
@@ -19537,7 +19537,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  type, the type determined is double.
 
                                                      •   Otherwise, the type determined is float.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> for which there is a function in
  <complex.h> with the same name except for a c prefix, the corresponding type-
  generic macro (for both functions) has the same name as the function in <math.h>. The
@@ -19570,7 +19570,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  If at least one argument for a generic parameter is complex, then use of the macro invokes
  a complex function; otherwise, use of the macro invokes a real function.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> without a c-prefixed counterpart in
  <complex.h> (except modf), the corresponding type-generic macro has the same
  name as the function. These type-generic macros are:
@@ -19589,7 +19589,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  If all arguments for generic parameters are real, then use of the macro invokes a real
  function; otherwise, use of the macro results in undefined behavior.
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  For each unsuffixed function in <complex.h> that is not a c-prefixed counterpart to a
  function in <math.h>, the corresponding type-generic macro has the same name as the
  function. These type-generic macros are:
@@ -19598,7 +19598,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          cimag                   cproj
 
                                                      
  Use of the macro with any real or complex argument invokes a complex function.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  EXAMPLE       With the declarations
 
                                                                #include <tgmath.h>
@@ -19650,14 +19650,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.1 Introduction
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <threads.h> includes the header <time.h>, defines macros, and
  declares types, enumeration constants, and functions that support multiple threads of
  execution.315)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_THREADS__ need not provide
  this header nor support any of its facilities.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The macros are
 
                                                                 thread_local
@@ -19673,7 +19673,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  which expands to an integer constant expression representing the maximum number of
  times that destructors will be called when a thread terminates.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The types are
 
                                                                 cnd_t
@@ -19710,7 +19710,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            once_flag
 
                                                      
  which is a complete object type that holds a flag for use by call_once.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  The enumeration constants are
 
                                                                mtx_plain
@@ -19761,19 +19761,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.2.1 The call_once function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The call_once function uses the once_flag pointed to by flag to ensure that
  func is called exactly once, the first time the call_once function is called with that
  value of flag. Completion of an effective call to the call_once function synchronizes
  with all subsequent calls to the call_once function with the same value of flag.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The call_once function returns no value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
@@ -19782,56 +19782,56 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.1 The cnd_broadcast function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int cnd_broadcast(cnd_t *cond);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_broadcast function unblocks all of the threads that are blocked on the
  condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call. If no threads are blocked
  on the condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call, the function does
  nothing.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_broadcast function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error
  if the request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.2 The cnd_destroy function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         void cnd_destroy(cnd_t *cond);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_destroy function releases all resources used by the condition variable
  pointed to by cond. The cnd_destroy function requires that no threads be blocked
  waiting for the condition variable pointed to by cond.
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_destroy function returns no value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.3 The cnd_init function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int cnd_init(cnd_t *cond);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_init function creates a condition variable. If it succeeds it sets the variable
  pointed to by cond to a value that uniquely identifies the newly created condition
  variable. A thread that calls cnd_wait on a newly created condition variable will
  block.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_init function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_nomem if no
  memory could be allocated for the newly created condition, or thrd_error if the
  request could not be honored.
@@ -19839,26 +19839,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.4 The cnd_signal function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int cnd_signal(cnd_t *cond);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_signal function unblocks one of the threads that are blocked on the
  condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call. If no threads are blocked
  on the condition variable at the time of the call, the function does nothing and return
  success.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_signal function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if
  the request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.5 The cnd_timedwait function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
@@ -19867,7 +19867,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const struct timespec *restrict ts);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_timedwait function atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx and
  endeavors to block until the condition variable pointed to by cond is signaled by a call to
  cnd_signal or to cnd_broadcast, or until after the TIME_UTC-based calendar
@@ -19875,7 +19875,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointed to by mtx before it returns. The cnd_timedwait function requires that the
  mutex pointed to by mtx be locked by the calling thread.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_timedwait function returns thrd_success upon success, or
  thrd_timedout if the time specified in the call was reached without acquiring the
  requested resource, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.
@@ -19883,20 +19883,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.3.6 The cnd_wait function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int cnd_wait(cnd_t *cond, mtx_t *mtx);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The cnd_wait function atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx and endeavors
  to block until the condition variable pointed to by cond is signaled by a call to
  cnd_signal or to cnd_broadcast. When the calling thread becomes unblocked it
  locks the mutex pointed to by mtx before it returns. The cnd_wait function requires
  that the mutex pointed to by mtx be locked by the calling thread.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The cnd_wait function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the
  request could not be honored.
 
@@ -19906,66 +19906,66 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.1 The mtx_destroy function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         void mtx_destroy(mtx_t *mtx);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_destroy function releases any resources used by the mutex pointed to by
  mtx. No threads can be blocked waiting for the mutex pointed to by mtx.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mtx_destroy function returns no value.
 
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.2 The mtx_init function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int mtx_init(mtx_t *mtx, int type);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_init function creates a mutex object with properties indicated by type,
  which must have one of the six values:
  mtx_plain for a simple non-recursive mutex,
  mtx_timed for a non-recursive mutex that supports timeout,                      *
  mtx_plain | mtx_recursive for a simple recursive mutex, or
  mtx_timed | mtx_recursive for a recursive mutex that supports timeout.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If the mtx_init function succeeds, it sets the mutex pointed to by mtx to a value that
  uniquely identifies the newly created mutex.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The mtx_init function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error if the
  request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.3 The mtx_lock function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int mtx_lock(mtx_t *mtx);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_lock function blocks until it locks the mutex pointed to by mtx. If the mutex
  is non-recursive, it shall not be locked by the calling thread. Prior calls to mtx_unlock
  on the same mutex shall synchronize with this operation.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mtx_lock function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error if the *
  request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.4 The mtx_timedlock function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
@@ -19973,13 +19973,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const struct timespec *restrict ts);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_timedlock function endeavors to block until it locks the mutex pointed to by
  mtx or until after the TIME_UTC-based calendar time pointed to by ts. The specified
  mutex shall support timeout. If the operation succeeds, prior calls to mtx_unlock on
  the same mutex shall synchronize with this operation.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mtx_timedlock function returns thrd_success on success, or
  thrd_timedout if the time specified was reached without acquiring the requested
  resource, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.
@@ -19987,18 +19987,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.5 The mtx_trylock function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int mtx_trylock(mtx_t *mtx);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_trylock function endeavors to lock the mutex pointed to by mtx. If the *
  mutex is already locked, the function returns without blocking. If the operation succeeds,
  prior calls to mtx_unlock on the same mutex shall synchronize with this operation.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mtx_trylock function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_busy if
  the resource requested is already in use, or thrd_error if the request could not be
  honored.
@@ -20006,17 +20006,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.4.6 The mtx_unlock function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int mtx_unlock(mtx_t *mtx);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mtx_unlock function unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx. The mutex pointed to
  by mtx shall be locked by the calling thread.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mtx_unlock function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if
  the request could not be honored.
 
@@ -20027,14 +20027,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.1 The thrd_create function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int thrd_create(thrd_t *thr, thrd_start_t func,
               void *arg);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_create function creates a new thread executing func(arg). If the
  thrd_create function succeeds, it sets the object pointed to by thr to the identifier of
  the newly created thread. (A thread's identifier may be reused for a different thread once
@@ -20042,7 +20042,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  completion of the thrd_create function synchronizes with the beginning of the
  execution of the new thread.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_create function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_nomem if
  no memory could be allocated for the thread requested, or thrd_error if the request
  could not be honored.
@@ -20050,84 +20050,84 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.2 The thrd_current function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          thrd_t thrd_current(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_current function identifies the thread that called it.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_current function returns the identifier of the thread that called it.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.3 The thrd_detach function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int thrd_detach(thrd_t thr);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_detach function tells the operating system to dispose of any resources
  allocated to the thread identified by thr when that thread terminates. The thread
  identified by thr shall not have been previously detached or joined with another thread.
 
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_detach function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if
  the request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.4 The thrd_equal function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int thrd_equal(thrd_t thr0, thrd_t thr1);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_equal function will determine whether the thread identified by thr0 refers
  to the thread identified by thr1.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_equal function returns zero if the thread thr0 and the thread thr1 refer to
  different threads. Otherwise the thrd_equal function returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.5 The thrd_exit function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         _Noreturn void thrd_exit(int res);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_exit function terminates execution of the calling thread and sets its result
  code to res.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The program shall terminate normally after the last thread has been terminated. The
  behavior shall be as if the program called the exit function with the status
  EXIT_SUCCESS at thread termination time.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The thrd_exit function returns no value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.6 The thrd_join function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int thrd_join(thrd_t thr, int *res);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_join function joins the thread identified by thr with the current thread by
  blocking until the other thread has terminated. If the parameter res is not a null pointer,
  it stores the thread's result code in the integer pointed to by res. The termination of the
@@ -20135,51 +20135,51 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  other thread synchronizes with the completion of the thrd_join function. The thread
  identified by thr shall not have been previously detached or joined with another thread.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_join function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the
  request could not be honored.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.7 The thrd_sleep function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int thrd_sleep(const struct timespec *duration,
               struct timespec *remaining);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_sleep function suspends execution of the calling thread until either the
  interval specified by duration has elapsed or a signal which is not being ignored is
  received. If interrupted by a signal and the remaining argument is not null, the
  amount of time remaining (the requested interval minus the time actually slept) is stored
  in the interval it points to. The duration and remaining arguments may point to the
  same object.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The suspension time may be longer than requested because the interval is rounded up to
  an integer multiple of the sleep resolution or because of the scheduling of other activity
  by the system. But, except for the case of being interrupted by a signal, the suspension
  time shall not be less than that specified, as measured by the system clock TIME_UTC.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The thrd_sleep function returns zero if the requested time has elapsed, -1 if it has
  been interrupted by a signal, or a negative value if it fails.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.5.8 The thrd_yield function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          void thrd_yield(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The thrd_yield function endeavors to permit other threads to run, even if the current
  thread would ordinarily continue to run.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The thrd_yield function returns no value.
 
 
@@ -20189,17 +20189,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.6.1 The tss_create function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         int tss_create(tss_t *key, tss_dtor_t dtor);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tss_create function creates a thread-specific storage pointer with destructor
  dtor, which may be null.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If the tss_create function is successful, it sets the thread-specific storage pointed to
  by key to a value that uniquely identifies the newly created pointer and returns
  thrd_success; otherwise, thrd_error is returned and the thread-specific storage
@@ -20208,33 +20208,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.6.2 The tss_delete function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         void tss_delete(tss_t key);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tss_delete function releases any resources used by the thread-specific storage
  identified by key.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The tss_delete function returns no value.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.6.3 The tss_get function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <threads.h>
         void *tss_get(tss_t key);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tss_get function returns the value for the current thread held in the thread-specific
  storage identified by key.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The tss_get function returns the value for the current thread if successful, or zero if
  unsuccessful.
 
@@ -20242,17 +20242,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.26.6.4 The tss_set function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <threads.h>
          int tss_set(tss_t key, void *val);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The tss_set function sets the value for the current thread held in the thread-specific
  storage identified by key to val.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The tss_set function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the
  request could not be honored.                                             *
 
@@ -20262,14 +20262,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.1 Components of time
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <time.h> defines two macros, and declares several types and functions for
  manipulating time. Many functions deal with a calendar time that represents the current
  date (according to the Gregorian calendar) and time. Some functions deal with local
  time, which is the calendar time expressed for some specific time zone, and with Daylight
  Saving Time, which is a temporary change in the algorithm for determining local time.
  The local time zone and Daylight Saving Time are implementation-defined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.19);                                                            *
 
                                                                CLOCKS_PER_SEC
@@ -20281,7 +20281,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  which expands to an integer constant greater than 0 that designates the UTC time
  base.316)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The types declared are size_t (described in 7.19);
 
                                                                clock_t
@@ -20300,7 +20300,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          struct tm
 
                                                      
  which holds the components of a calendar time, called the broken-down time.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The range and precision of times representable in clock_t and time_t are
  implementation-defined. The timespec structure shall contain at least the following
  members, in any order.317)
@@ -20344,16 +20344,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.2.1 The clock function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          clock_t clock(void);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The clock function determines the processor time used.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The clock function returns the implementation's best approximation to the processor
  time used by the program since the beginning of an implementation-defined era related
  only to the program invocation. To determine the time in seconds, the value returned by
@@ -20374,29 +20374,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.2.2 The difftime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The difftime function computes the difference between two calendar times: time1 -
  time0.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The difftime function returns the difference expressed in seconds as a double.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.2.3 The mktime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The mktime function converts the broken-down time, expressed as local time, in the
  structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time value with the same encoding as
  that of the values returned by the time function. The original values of the tm_wday
@@ -20407,11 +20407,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  time, but with their values forced to the ranges indicated above; the final value of
  tm_mday is not set until tm_mon and tm_year are determined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The mktime function returns the specified calendar time encoded as a value of type
  time_t. If the calendar time cannot be represented, the function returns the value
  (time_t)(-1).
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  EXAMPLE       What day of the week is July 4, 2001?
  
  
@@ -20449,17 +20449,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.2.4 The time function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          time_t time(time_t *timer);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The time function determines the current calendar time. The encoding of the value is
  unspecified.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The time function returns the implementation's best approximation to the current
  calendar time. The value (time_t)(-1) is returned if the calendar time is not
  available. If timer is not a null pointer, the return value is also assigned to the object it
@@ -20468,23 +20468,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.2.5 The timespec_get function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          int timespec_get(struct timespec *ts, int base);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The timespec_get function sets the interval pointed to by ts to hold the current
  calendar time based on the specified time base.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If base is TIME_UTC, the tv_sec member is set to the number of seconds since an
  implementation defined epoch, truncated to a whole value and the tv_nsec member is
  set to the integral number of nanoseconds, rounded to the resolution of the system
 
  clock.321)
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  If the timespec_get function is successful it returns the nonzero value base;
  otherwise, it returns zero.
 
@@ -20495,7 +20495,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3 Time conversion functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  Except for the strftime function, these functions each return a pointer to one of two
  types of static objects: a broken-down time structure or an array of char. Execution of
  any of the functions that return a pointer to one of these object types may overwrite the
@@ -20511,13 +20511,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3.1 The asctime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                 #include <time.h>
           char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The asctime function converts the broken-down time in the structure pointed to by
  timeptr into a string in the form
 
                                                      @@ -20550,13 +20550,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          return result;
 
                                                      
  }
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If any of the members of the broken-down time contain values that are outside their
  normal ranges,323) the behavior of the asctime function is undefined. Likewise, if the
  calculated year exceeds four digits or is less than the year 1000, the behavior is
  undefined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The asctime function returns a pointer to the string.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -20566,20 +20566,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3.2 The ctime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          char *ctime(const time_t *timer);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The ctime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in the
  form of a string. It is equivalent to
 
                                                                asctime(localtime(timer))
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The ctime function returns the pointer returned by the asctime function with that
  broken-down time as argument.
 
                                                       Forward references: the localtime function (7.27.3.4).
@@ -20587,7 +20587,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3.3 The gmtime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <time.h>
          struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);
@@ -20598,35 +20598,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The gmtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-
  down time, expressed as UTC.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The gmtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if the
  specified time cannot be converted to UTC.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3.4 The localtime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <time.h>
         struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The localtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a
  broken-down time, expressed as local time.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The localtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if
  the specified time cannot be converted to local time.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.27.3.5 The strftime function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <time.h>
         size_t strftime(char * restrict s,
@@ -20635,7 +20635,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The strftime function places characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by
  the string pointed to by format. The format shall be a multibyte character sequence,
  beginning and ending in its initial shift state. The format string consists of zero or
@@ -20645,7 +20645,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  All ordinary multibyte characters (including the terminating null character) are copied
  unchanged into the array. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the
  behavior is undefined. No more than maxsize characters are placed into the array.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  Each conversion specifier is replaced by appropriate characters as described in the
  following list. The appropriate characters are determined using the LC_TIME category
 
@@ -20739,7 +20739,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
        time zone is determinable. [tm_isdst]
 
                                                      
  %%    is replaced by %.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the inclusion of an E or O modifier
  character to indicate an alternative format or specification. If the alternative format or
  specification does not exist for the current locale, the modifier is ignored.
@@ -20797,7 +20797,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                            symbols.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  %g, %G, and %V give values according to the ISO 8601 week-based year. In this system,
  weeks begin on a Monday and week 1 of the year is the week that includes January 4th,
  which is also the week that includes the first Thursday of the year, and is also the first
@@ -20807,9 +20807,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  December 29th, 30th, or 31st is a Monday, it and any following days are part of week 1 of
  the following year. Thus, for Tuesday 30th December 1997, %G is replaced by 1998 and
  %V is replaced by 01.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  If a conversion specifier is not one of the above, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  In the "C" locale, the E and O modifiers are ignored and the replacement strings for the
  following specifiers are:
  %a    the first three characters of %A.
@@ -20823,7 +20823,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  %X    equivalent to %T.
  %Z    implementation-defined.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  If the total number of resulting characters including the terminating null character is not
  more than maxsize, the strftime function returns the number of characters placed
  into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null character. Otherwise,
@@ -20832,10 +20832,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28 Unicode utilities <uchar.h>
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <uchar.h> declares types and functions for manipulating Unicode
  characters.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The types declared are mbstate_t (described in 7.30.1) and size_t (described in
  7.19);
 
                                                      @@ -20851,7 +20851,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28.1 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  These functions have a parameter, ps, of type pointer to mbstate_t that points to an
  object that can completely describe the current conversion state of the associated
  multibyte character sequence, which the functions alter as necessary. If ps is a null
@@ -20863,7 +20863,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28.1.1 The mbrtoc16 function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                               #include <uchar.h>
         size_t mbrtoc16(char16_t * restrict pc16,
@@ -20871,13 +20871,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is a null pointer, the mbrtoc16 function is equivalent to the call:
 
                                                                       mbrtoc16(NULL, "", 1, ps)
 
                                                      
  In this case, the values of the parameters pc16 and n are ignored.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtoc16 function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -20889,7 +20889,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  characters have been stored. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The mbrtoc16 function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current
  conversion state):
  0                     if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that
@@ -20925,20 +20925,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28.1.2 The c16rtomb function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <uchar.h>
          size_t c16rtomb(char * restrict s, char16_t c16,
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is a null pointer, the c16rtomb function is equivalent to the call
 
                                                                        c16rtomb(buf, L'\0', ps)
 
                                                      
  where buf is an internal buffer.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If s is not a null pointer, the c16rtomb function determines the number of bytes needed
  to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by c16
  (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the
@@ -20948,7 +20948,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  c16 is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed
  to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The c16rtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including
  any shift sequences). When c16 is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs:
  the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns
@@ -20957,7 +20957,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28.1.3 The mbrtoc32 function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <uchar.h>
          size_t mbrtoc32(char32_t * restrict pc32,
@@ -20965,13 +20965,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is a null pointer, the mbrtoc32 function is equivalent to the call:
 
                                                                        mbrtoc32(NULL, "", 1, ps)
 
                                                      
  In this case, the values of the parameters pc32 and n are ignored.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtoc32 function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -20982,7 +20982,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  characters have been stored. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The mbrtoc32 function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current
  conversion state):
  0                    if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that
@@ -21019,20 +21019,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.28.1.4 The c32rtomb function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <uchar.h>
          size_t c32rtomb(char * restrict s, char32_t c32,
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  If s is a null pointer, the c32rtomb function is equivalent to the call
 
                                                                        c32rtomb(buf, L'\0', ps)
 
                                                      
  where buf is an internal buffer.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  If s is not a null pointer, the c32rtomb function determines the number of bytes needed
  to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by c32
  (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the
@@ -21040,7 +21040,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  c32 is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed
  to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The c32rtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including
  any shift sequences). When c32 is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs:
  the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns
@@ -21056,10 +21056,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.29.1 Introduction
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The header <wchar.h> defines four macros, and declares four data types, one tag, and
  many functions.326)
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The types declared are wchar_t and size_t (both described in 7.19);
 
                                                                 mbstate_t
@@ -21078,7 +21078,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           struct tm
 
                                                      
  which is declared as an incomplete structure type (the contents are described in 7.27.1).
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.19); WCHAR_MIN and WCHAR_MAX
  (described in 7.20.3); and
 
                                                      @@ -21089,7 +21089,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  by several functions in this subclause to indicate end-of-file, that is, no more input from a
  stream. It is also used as a wide character value that does not correspond to any member
  of the extended character set.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  The functions declared are grouped as follows:
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   Functions that perform input and output of wide characters, or multibyte characters,
@@ -21103,14 +21103,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      •   Functions that provide extended capabilities for conversion between multibyte and
  wide character sequences.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  Arguments to the functions in this subclause may point to arrays containing wchar_t
  values that do not correspond to members of the extended character set. Such values
  shall be processed according to the specified semantics, except that it is unspecified
  whether an encoding error occurs if such a value appears in the format string for a
  function in 7.29.2 or 7.29.5 and the specified semantics do not require that value to be
  processed by wcrtomb.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this
  subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
  undefined.
@@ -21125,7 +21125,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.29.2 Formatted wide character input/output functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  The formatted wide character input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence
  point after the actions associated with each specifier.329)
 
@@ -21136,7 +21136,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.29.2.1 The fwprintf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -21144,14 +21144,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The fwprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under
  control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments
  are converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior
  is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments
  are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fwprintf function returns
  when the end of the format string is encountered.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary wide characters (not %),
  which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion specifications, each of
  which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments, converting them, if
@@ -21161,7 +21161,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                      
+
                                                      4
  Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide character %. After the %, the
  following appear in sequence:
 
                                                        
@@ -21184,14 +21184,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      •   A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be
  applied.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      5
  As noted above, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In
  this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments
  specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the
  argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag
  followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the
  precision were omitted.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      6
  The flag wide characters and their meanings are:
  -        The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if
 
                                                      @@ -21233,7 +21233,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
            conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other
            conversions, the behavior is undefined.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      7
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
  hh             Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a
 
                                                      @@ -21294,7 +21294,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      8
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
  d,i         The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The
 
                                                      @@ -21427,24 +21427,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                       conversion specification shall be %%.
 
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      9
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.335) If any argument is
  not the correct type for the corresponding conversion specification, the behavior is
  undefined.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      10
  In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result
  of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the
  conversion result.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      11
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
  to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
 
                                                      Recommended practice
-
                                                      
+
                                                      12
  For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
  representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
  in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the
  error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      13
  For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most
  DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded.336) If the number of
  
@@ -21456,14 +21456,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
  the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
 
                                                      Returns
-
                                                      
+
                                                      14
  The fwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
                                                      Environmental limits
-
                                                      
+
                                                      15
  The number of wide characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at
  least 4095.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      16
  EXAMPLE       To print a date and time in the form ''Sunday, July 3, 10:02'' followed by pi to five decimal
  places:
 
                                                      @@ -21508,7 +21508,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      7.29.2.2 The fwscanf function
                                                      
 
                                                      Synopsis
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                                #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -21516,7 +21516,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                      
 
                                                      Description
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The fwscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under
  control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input
  sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments
@@ -21526,7 +21526,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while
  arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise
  ignored.
-
                                                      
+
                                                      3
  The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space wide
  characters, an ordinary wide character (neither % nor a white-space wide character), or a
  conversion specification. Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide
@@ -21539,29 +21539,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    •   A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be
  applied.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The fwscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. When all directives
  have been executed, or if a directive fails (as detailed below), the function returns.
  Failures are described as input failures (due to the occurrence of an encoding error or the
  unavailability of input characters), or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  A directive composed of white-space wide character(s) is executed by reading input up to
  the first non-white-space wide character (which remains unread), or until no more wide
  characters can be read. The directive never fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  A directive that is an ordinary wide character is executed by reading the next wide
  character of the stream. If that wide character differs from the directive, the directive
  fails and the differing and subsequent wide characters remain unread. Similarly, if end-
  of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a wide character from being read, the
  directive fails.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as
  described below for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the
  following steps:
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  Input white-space wide characters (as specified by the iswspace function) are skipped,
  unless the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.337)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    9
  An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An
  input item is defined as the longest sequence of input wide characters which does not
  exceed any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input
@@ -21572,7 +21572,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  length of the input item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a
  matching failure unless end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input
  from the stream, in which case it is an input failure.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    10
  Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the
  count of input wide characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion
  specifier. If the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails:
@@ -21581,7 +21581,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  following the format argument that has not already received a conversion result. If this
  object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of the conversion cannot be
  represented in the object, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    11
  The length modifiers and their meanings are:
  hh           Specifies that a following d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies
 
                                                    @@ -21627,7 +21627,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above,
  the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    12
  The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
  d           Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as
 
                                                    @@ -21743,22 +21743,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                     complete conversion specification shall be %%.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    13
  If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.339)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    14
  The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as,
  respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    15
  Trailing white space (including new-line wide characters) is left unread unless matched
  by a directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
  determinable other than via the %n directive.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    16
  The fwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the function returns the
  number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in
  the event of an early matching failure.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    17
  EXAMPLE 1       The call:
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -21778,7 +21778,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence
  thompson\0.
  
-
                                                    
+
                                                    18
  EXAMPLE 2        The call:
 
                                                               #include <stdio.h>
@@ -21810,7 +21810,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.3 The swprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <wchar.h>
           int swprintf(wchar_t * restrict s,
@@ -21818,13 +21818,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The swprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, except that the argument s
  specifies an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be written,
  rather than written to a stream. No more than n wide characters are written, including a
  terminating null wide character, which is always added (unless n is zero).
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The swprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
  occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written.
@@ -21833,20 +21833,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.4 The swscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s,
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The swscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, except that the argument s specifies a
  wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream. Reaching
  the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fwscanf
  function.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The swscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the swscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -21855,7 +21855,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.5 The vfwprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -21865,13 +21865,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vfwprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vfwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.
  
@@ -21879,7 +21879,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  EXAMPLE       The following shows the use of the vfwprintf function in a general error-reporting
  routine.
 
                                                    @@ -21907,7 +21907,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.6 The vfwscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -21917,13 +21917,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vfwscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vfwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vfwscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -21933,7 +21933,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.7 The vswprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -21943,13 +21943,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vswprintf function is equivalent to swprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vswprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
  counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
  occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be generated.
@@ -21957,7 +21957,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.8 The vswscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdarg.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -21966,13 +21966,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vswscanf function is equivalent to swscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vswscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vswscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -21982,7 +21982,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.9 The vwprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -21990,20 +21990,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vwprintf function is equivalent to wprintf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwprintf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.10 The vwscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdarg.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -22011,13 +22011,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The vwscanf function is equivalent to wscanf, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwscanf function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.340)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The vwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vwscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -22027,34 +22027,34 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.11 The wprintf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf with the argument stdout
  interposed before the arguments to wprintf.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output or encoding error occurred.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.2.12 The wscanf function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf with the argument stdin interposed
  before the arguments to wscanf.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the wscanf function
  returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even
@@ -22066,21 +22066,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.1 The fgetwc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
  next wide character is present, the fgetwc function obtains that wide character as a
  wchar_t converted to a wint_t and advances the associated file position indicator for
  the stream (if defined).
 
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
  of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetwc function returns WEOF. Otherwise,
  the fgetwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by
@@ -22096,7 +22096,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.2 The fgetws function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -22104,14 +22104,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               int n, FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fgetws function reads at most one less than the number of wide characters
  specified by n from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No
  additional wide characters are read after a new-line wide character (which is retained) or
  after end-of-file. A null wide character is written immediately after the last wide
  character read into the array.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fgetws function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
  characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
  null pointer is returned. If a read or encoding error occurs during the operation, the array
@@ -22120,14 +22120,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.3 The fputwc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fputwc function writes the wide character specified by c to the output stream
  pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the associated file position indicator
  for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If the file cannot
@@ -22136,7 +22136,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened with append mode, the
  character is appended to the output stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fputwc function returns the wide character written. If a write error occurs, the
  error indicator for the stream is set and fputwc returns WEOF. If an encoding error
  occurs, the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and fputwc returns WEOF.
@@ -22144,7 +22144,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.4 The fputws function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -22152,31 +22152,31 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fputws function writes the wide string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
  stream. The terminating null wide character is not written.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fputws function returns EOF if a write or encoding error occurs; otherwise, it
  returns a nonnegative value.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.5 The fwide function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The fwide function determines the orientation of the stream pointed to by stream. If
  mode is greater than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream wide oriented. If
  mode is less than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream byte oriented.342)
  Otherwise, mode is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The fwide function returns a value greater than zero if, after the call, the stream has
  wide orientation, a value less than zero if the stream has byte orientation, or zero if the
  stream has no orientation.
@@ -22191,99 +22191,99 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.6 The getwc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The getwc function is equivalent to fgetwc, except that if it is implemented as a
  macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an
  expression with side effects.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The getwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by
  stream, or WEOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.7 The getwchar function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t getwchar(void);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The getwchar function is equivalent to getwc with the argument stdin.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The getwchar function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to
  by stdin, or WEOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.8 The putwc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <stdio.h>
         #include <wchar.h>
         wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The putwc function is equivalent to fputwc, except that if it is implemented as a
  macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an
  expression with side effects.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The putwc function returns the wide character written, or WEOF.
 
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.9 The putwchar function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The putwchar function is equivalent to putwc with the second argument stdout.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The putwchar function returns the character written, or WEOF.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.3.10 The ungetwc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <stdio.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The ungetwc function pushes the wide character specified by c back onto the input
  stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back wide characters will be returned by
  subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful
  intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning function
  (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back wide characters for the
  stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  One wide character of pushback is guaranteed, even if the call to the ungetwc function
  follows just after a call to a formatted wide character input function fwscanf,
  vfwscanf, vwscanf, or wscanf. If the ungetwc function is called too many times
  on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that
  stream, the operation may fail.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If the value of c equals that of the macro WEOF, the operation fails and the input stream is
  unchanged.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  A successful call to the ungetwc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream.
  The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all
  pushed-back wide characters is the same as it was before the wide characters were pushed
@@ -22292,18 +22292,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  read or discarded.
 
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The ungetwc function returns the wide character pushed back, or WEOF if the operation
  fails.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4 General wide string utilities
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <wchar.h> declares a number of functions useful for wide string
  manipulation. Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in
  all cases a wchar_t * argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) element of the
  array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Where an argument declared as size_t n determines the length of the array for a
  function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated
  otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments
@@ -22318,7 +22318,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.1.1 The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         double wcstod(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
@@ -22329,7 +22329,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions convert the initial portion of the wide
  string pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
  respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly
@@ -22338,7 +22338,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  infinity or NaN; and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide characters,
  including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then, they attempt
  to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of
  the following:
 
@@ -22364,7 +22364,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form.
  The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is not of the
  expected form.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of
  wide characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point wide character
  (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of
@@ -22383,24 +22383,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is
  not a null pointer.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the
  value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
                                                    Recommended practice
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
  the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
  appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value,
  with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding
  direction.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    9
  If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG (defined in
  <float.h>) significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject
  sequence D has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG significant digits,
@@ -22411,7 +22411,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
  rounding direction.345)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    10
  The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
  zero is returned. If the correct value overflows and default rounding is in effect (7.12.1),
  plus or minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the
@@ -22441,7 +22441,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.1.2 The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          long int wcstol(
@@ -22462,7 +22462,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               int base);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions convert the initial
  portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int,
  unsigned long int, and unsigned long long int representation,
@@ -22472,7 +22472,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  by the value of base, and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide
  characters, including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then,
  they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an integer, and return the result.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an
  integer constant as described for the corresponding single-byte characters in 6.4.4.1,
  optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix. If the
@@ -22484,13 +22484,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  value of base is 16, the wide characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence
  of letters and digits, following the sign if present.
 
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input wide
  string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form.
  The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is empty or
  consists entirely of white space, or if the first non-white-space wide character is other
  than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence
  of wide characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant
  according to the rules of 6.4.4.1. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the
@@ -22499,15 +22499,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  resulting from the conversion is negated (in the return type). A pointer to the final wide
  string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null
  pointer.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be
  accepted.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
  performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
  that endptr is not a null pointer.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions return the converted
  value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
  is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN,
@@ -22520,25 +22520,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.2.1 The wcscpy function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
              const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcscpy function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating
  null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcscpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.2.2 The wcsncpy function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <wchar.h>
           wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -22546,16 +22546,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsncpy function copies not more than n wide characters (those that follow a null
  wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
  s1.346)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the array pointed to by s2 is a wide string that is shorter than n wide characters, null
  wide characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n wide
  characters in all have been written.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The wcsncpy function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                    Footnotes
@@ -22566,7 +22566,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.2.3 The wmemcpy function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <wchar.h>
           wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -22574,11 +22574,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wmemcpy function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to the
  object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wmemcpy function returns the value of s1.
  
  
@@ -22589,21 +22589,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.2.4 The wmemmove function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
              size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wmemmove function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to
  the object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n wide characters from the
  object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n wide characters that
  does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n wide characters from
  the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wmemmove function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                    Contents
@@ -22612,25 +22612,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.3.1 The wcscat function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1,
              const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcscat function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial
  wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcscat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.3.2 The wcsncat function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -22638,7 +22638,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsncat function appends not more than n wide characters (a null wide character
  and those that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
 
@@ -22646,7 +22646,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  wide character at the end of s1. A terminating null wide character is always appended to
  the result.347)
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsncat function returns the value of s1.
 
 
                                                    Footnotes
@@ -22656,7 +22656,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4 Wide string comparison functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the functions described in this subclause order two
  wide characters the same way as two integers of the underlying integer type designated
  by wchar_t.
@@ -22664,17 +22664,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4.1 The wcscmp function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcscmp function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
  pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcscmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
  wide string pointed to by s2.
@@ -22682,18 +22682,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4.2 The wcscoll function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcscoll function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
  pointed to by s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the
  current locale.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcscoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
  
@@ -22705,19 +22705,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4.3 The wcsncmp function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
              size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsncmp function compares not more than n wide characters (those that follow a
  null wide character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array
  pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
  to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
@@ -22725,7 +22725,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4.4 The wcsxfrm function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -22733,7 +22733,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsxfrm function transforms the wide string pointed to by s2 and places the
  resulting wide string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if
  the wcscmp function is applied to two transformed wide strings, it returns a value greater
@@ -22742,11 +22742,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  into the resulting array pointed to by s1, including the terminating null wide character. If
  n is zero, s1 is permitted to be a null pointer.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsxfrm function returns the length of the transformed wide string (not including
  the terminating null wide character). If the value returned is n or greater, the contents of
  the array pointed to by s1 are indeterminate.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the length of the array needed to hold the
  transformation of the wide string pointed to by s:
 
@@ -22758,18 +22758,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.4.5 The wmemcmp function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
               size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wmemcmp function compares the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by
  s1 to the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wmemcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
  accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
  pointed to by s2.
@@ -22780,105 +22780,105 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.1 The wcschr function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wchar_t *wcschr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcschr function locates the first occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by s.
  The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcschr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
  the wide character does not occur in the wide string.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.2 The wcscspn function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcscspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
  string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters not from the wide
  string pointed to by s2.
 
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcscspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.3 The wcspbrk function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcspbrk function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
  any wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcspbrk function returns a pointer to the wide character in s1, or a null pointer if
  no wide character from s2 occurs in s1.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.4 The wcsrchr function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsrchr function locates the last occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by
  s. The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsrchr function returns a pointer to the wide character, or a null pointer if c does
  not occur in the wide string.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.5 The wcsspn function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
  string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters from the wide string
  pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsspn function returns the length of the segment.
 
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.6 The wcsstr function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wchar_t *wcsstr(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsstr function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
  the sequence of wide characters (excluding the terminating null wide character) in the
  wide string pointed to by s2.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcsstr function returns a pointer to the located wide string, or a null pointer if the
  wide string is not found. If s2 points to a wide string with zero length, the function
  returns s1.
@@ -22886,7 +22886,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.7 The wcstok function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t * restrict s1,
@@ -22894,41 +22894,41 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  A sequence of calls to the wcstok function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1 into
  a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide string
  pointed to by s2. The third argument points to a caller-provided wchar_t pointer into
  which the wcstok function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the
  same wide string.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and stores an initial value in the
  object pointed to by ptr. Subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument and
  the object pointed to by ptr is required to have the value stored by the previous call in
  the sequence, which is then updated. The separator wide string pointed to by s2 may be
  different from call to call.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The first call in the sequence searches the wide string pointed to by s1 for the first wide
  character that is not contained in the current separator wide string pointed to by s2. If no
  such wide character is found, then there are no tokens in the wide string pointed to by s1
  and the wcstok function returns a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is
  the start of the first token.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  The wcstok function then searches from there for a wide character that is contained in
  the current separator wide string. If no such wide character is found, the current token
 
  extends to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the
  same wide string for a token return a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is
  overwritten by a null wide character, which terminates the current token.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  In all cases, the wcstok function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed to
  by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer
  value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide
  character (if any).
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  The wcstok function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null
  pointer if there is no token.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
@@ -22946,18 +22946,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.5.8 The wmemchr function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         wchar_t *wmemchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c,
              size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wmemchr function locates the first occurrence of c in the initial n wide characters of
  the object pointed to by s.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wmemchr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
  the wide character does not occur in the object.
 
@@ -22968,33 +22968,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.6.1 The wcslen function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcslen function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wcslen function returns the number of wide characters that precede the terminating
  null wide character.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.4.6.2 The wmemset function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wmemset function copies the value of c into each of the first n wide characters of
  the object pointed to by s.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wmemset function returns the value of s.
 
 
                                                    Contents
@@ -23003,7 +23003,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.5.1 The wcsftime function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <time.h>
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -23013,7 +23013,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsftime function is equivalent to the strftime function, except that:
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   The argument s points to the initial element of an array of wide characters into which
@@ -23025,7 +23025,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    •   The return value indicates the number of wide characters.
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the total number of resulting wide characters including the terminating null wide
  character is not more than maxsize, the wcsftime function returns the number of
  wide characters placed into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null
@@ -23034,16 +23034,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6 Extended multibyte/wide character conversion utilities
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <wchar.h> declares an extended set of functions useful for conversion
  between multibyte characters and wide characters.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Most of the following functions -- those that are listed as ''restartable'', 7.29.6.3 and
  7.29.6.4 -- take as a last argument a pointer to an object of type mbstate_t that is used
  to describe the current conversion state from a particular multibyte character sequence to
  a wide character sequence (or the reverse) under the rules of a particular setting for the
  LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The initial conversion state corresponds, for a conversion in either direction, to the
  beginning of a new multibyte character in the initial shift state. A zero-valued
  mbstate_t object is (at least) one way to describe an initial conversion state. A zero-
@@ -23053,7 +23053,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  different multibyte character sequence, or in the other conversion direction, or with a
  different LC_CTYPE category setting than on earlier function calls, the behavior is
  undefined.348)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  On entry, each function takes the described conversion state (either internal or pointed to
  by an argument) as current. The conversion state described by the referenced object is
  altered as needed to track the shift state, and the position within a multibyte character, for
@@ -23076,17 +23076,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.1.1 The btowc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          wint_t btowc(int c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The btowc function determines whether c constitutes a valid single-byte character in the
  initial shift state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The btowc function returns WEOF if c has the value EOF or if (unsigned char)c
  does not constitute a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it
  returns the wide character representation of that character.
@@ -23094,18 +23094,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.1.2 The wctob function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int wctob(wint_t c);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wctob function determines whether c corresponds to a member of the extended
  character set whose multibyte character representation is a single byte when in the initial
  shift state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The wctob function returns EOF if c does not correspond to a multibyte character with
  length one in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it returns the single-byte representation of
  that character as an unsigned char converted to an int.
@@ -23116,24 +23116,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.2.1 The mbsinit function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If ps is not a null pointer, the mbsinit function determines whether the referenced
  mbstate_t object describes an initial conversion state.
 
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The mbsinit function returns nonzero if ps is a null pointer or if the referenced object
  describes an initial conversion state; otherwise, it returns zero.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.3 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte character functions of 7.22.7
  (mblen, mbtowc, and wctomb) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type
  pointer to mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current
@@ -23142,14 +23142,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  program startup to the initial conversion state; the functions are not required to avoid data
  races with other calls to the same function in this case. The implementation behaves as if
  no library function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Also unlike their corresponding functions, the return value does not represent whether the
  encoding is state-dependent.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.3.1 The mbrlen function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wchar.h>
         size_t mbrlen(const char * restrict s,
@@ -23157,7 +23157,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The mbrlen function is equivalent to the call:
 
                                                             mbrtowc(NULL, s, n, ps != NULL ? ps : &internal)
@@ -23165,7 +23165,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  where internal is the mbstate_t object for the mbrlen function, except that the
  expression designated by ps is evaluated only once.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The mbrlen function returns a value between zero and n, inclusive, (size_t)(-2),
  or (size_t)(-1).
 
                                                     Forward references: the mbrtowc function (7.29.6.3.2).
@@ -23174,7 +23174,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.3.2 The mbrtowc function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc,
@@ -23183,13 +23183,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If s is a null pointer, the mbrtowc function is equivalent to the call:
 
                                                                      mbrtowc(NULL, "", 1, ps)
 
                                                    
  In this case, the values of the parameters pwc and n are ignored.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
  the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
  multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
@@ -23198,7 +23198,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
  character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The mbrtowc function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current
  conversion state):
  0                     if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that
@@ -23232,7 +23232,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.3.3 The wcrtomb function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcrtomb(char * restrict s,
@@ -23240,13 +23240,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb function is equivalent to the call
 
                                                                      wcrtomb(buf, L'\0', ps)
 
                                                    
  where buf is an internal buffer.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If s is not a null pointer, the wcrtomb function determines the number of bytes needed
  to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by wc
  (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the
@@ -23254,7 +23254,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed
  to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The wcrtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including
  any shift sequences). When wc is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs:
  the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns
@@ -23262,7 +23262,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.4 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte string functions of 7.22.8
  (mbstowcs and wcstombs) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type pointer to
  mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current conversion
@@ -23271,7 +23271,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  to the initial conversion state; the functions are not required to avoid data races with other
  calls to the same function in this case. The implementation behaves as if no library
  function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Also unlike their corresponding functions, the conversion source parameter, src, has a
  pointer-to-pointer type. When the function is storing the results of conversions (that is,
  when dst is not a null pointer), the pointer object pointed to by this parameter is updated
@@ -23281,7 +23281,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.4.1 The mbsrtowcs function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                               #include <wchar.h>
           size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t * restrict dst,
@@ -23290,7 +23290,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The mbsrtowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
  conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly
  pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null
@@ -23300,14 +23300,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  not form a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when len wide
  characters have been stored into the array pointed to by dst.350) Each conversion takes
  place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character) or the address
  just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
  reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state
  described is the initial conversion state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte
  character, an encoding error occurs: the mbsrtowcs function stores the value of the
  macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is
@@ -23326,7 +23326,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.29.6.4.2 The wcsrtombs function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wchar.h>
          size_t wcsrtombs(char * restrict dst,
@@ -23335,7 +23335,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wcsrtombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array
  indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that
  begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps. If dst is not a
@@ -23346,14 +23346,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  next multibyte character would exceed the limit of len total bytes to be stored into the
  array pointed to by dst. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the wcrtomb
  function.351)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character) or the
  address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
  reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial
  conversion state.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If conversion stops because a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a
  valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcsrtombs function stores the
  value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion
@@ -23375,10 +23375,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.1 Introduction
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <wctype.h> defines one macro, and declares three data types and many
  functions.352)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The types declared are
 
                                                                wint_t
@@ -23394,9 +23394,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  which is a scalar type that can hold values which represent locale-specific character
  classifications.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The macro defined is WEOF (described in 7.29.1).
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The functions declared are grouped as follows:
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   Functions that provide wide character classification;
@@ -23404,11 +23404,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    •   Functions that provide wide character case mapping;
 
                                                    •   Extensible functions that provide wide character mapping.
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  For all functions described in this subclause that accept an argument of type wint_t, the
  value shall be representable as a wchar_t or shall equal the value of the macro WEOF. If
  this argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The behavior of these functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current
  locale.
  
@@ -23423,10 +23423,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2 Wide character classification utilities
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying wide
  characters.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The term printing wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide
  characters, each of which occupies at least one printing position on a display device. The
  term control wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide characters
@@ -23434,10 +23434,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1 Wide character classification functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the
  argument wc conforms to that in the description of the function.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Each of the following functions returns true for each wide character that corresponds (as
  if by a call to the wctob function) to a single-byte character for which the corresponding
  character classification function from 7.4.1 returns true, except that the iswgraph and
@@ -23455,26 +23455,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.1 The iswalnum function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswalnum(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswalnum function tests for any wide character for which iswalpha or
  iswdigit is true.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.2 The iswalpha function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswalpha(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswalpha function tests for any wide character for which iswupper or
  iswlower is true, or any wide character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic
  
@@ -23490,13 +23490,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.3 The iswblank function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswblank(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswblank function tests for any wide character that is a standard blank wide
  character or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which iswspace is true
  and that is used to separate words within a line of text. The standard blank wide
@@ -23506,32 +23506,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.4 The iswcntrl function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswcntrl function tests for any control wide character.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.5 The iswdigit function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswdigit(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a decimal-digit
  character (as defined in 5.2.1).
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.6 The iswgraph function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswgraph(wint_t wc);
@@ -23542,7 +23542,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswgraph function tests for any wide character for which iswprint is true and
  iswspace is false.355)
 
@@ -23555,13 +23555,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.7 The iswlower function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswlower(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswlower function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a lowercase
  letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
  iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
@@ -23569,25 +23569,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.8 The iswprint function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswprint(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswprint function tests for any printing wide character.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.9 The iswpunct function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswpunct(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswpunct function tests for any printing wide character that is one of a locale-
  specific set of punctuation wide characters for which neither iswspace nor iswalnum
  is true.355)
@@ -23595,7 +23595,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.10 The iswspace function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswspace(wint_t wc);
@@ -23605,7 +23605,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswspace function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a locale-specific
  set of white-space wide characters for which none of iswalnum, iswgraph, or
  iswpunct is true.
@@ -23613,13 +23613,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.11 The iswupper function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswupper(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswupper function tests for any wide character that corresponds to an uppercase
  letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
  iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
@@ -23627,19 +23627,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.1.12 The iswxdigit function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswxdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a
  hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.1).
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.2 Extensible wide character classification functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The functions wctype and iswctype provide extensible wide character classification
  as well as testing equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the previous
  subclause (7.30.2.1).
@@ -23647,17 +23647,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.2.1 The iswctype function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The iswctype function determines whether the wide character wc has the property
  described by desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as
  during the call to wctype that returned the value desc.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  Each of the following expressions has a truth-value equivalent to the call to the wide
  character classification function (7.30.2.1) in the comment that follows the expression:
 
@@ -23676,7 +23676,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         iswctype(wc,       wctype("xdigit"))             //   iswxdigit(wc)
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The iswctype function returns nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the wide
  character wc has the property described by desc. If desc is zero, the iswctype
  function returns zero (false).
@@ -23685,20 +23685,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.2.2.2 The wctype function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wctype.h>
         wctype_t wctype(const char *property);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wctype function constructs a value with type wctype_t that describes a class of
  wide characters identified by the string argument property.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The strings listed in the description of the iswctype function shall be valid in all
  locales as property arguments to the wctype function.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
  category of the current locale, the wctype function returns a nonzero value that is valid
  as the second argument to the iswctype function; otherwise, it returns zero.
@@ -23706,7 +23706,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3 Wide character case mapping utilities
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for mapping wide characters.
 
 
                                                    Contents
@@ -23715,16 +23715,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3.1.1 The towlower function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The towlower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the argument is a wide character for which iswupper is true and there are one or
  more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
  iswlower is true, the towlower function returns one of the corresponding wide
@@ -23734,16 +23734,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3.1.2 The towupper function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                              #include <wctype.h>
          wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The towupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  If the argument is a wide character for which iswlower is true and there are one or
  more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
  iswupper is true, the towupper function returns one of the corresponding wide
@@ -23752,7 +23752,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3.2 Extensible wide character case mapping functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The functions wctrans and towctrans provide extensible wide character mapping as
  well as case mapping equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the
  previous subclause (7.30.3.1).
@@ -23761,17 +23761,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3.2.1 The towctrans function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wctype.h>
         wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The towctrans function maps the wide character wc using the mapping described by
  desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as during the call
  to wctrans that returned the value desc.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  Each of the following expressions behaves the same as the call to the wide character case
  mapping function (7.30.3.1) in the comment that follows the expression:
 
                                                    @@ -23779,27 +23779,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         towctrans(wc, wctrans("toupper"))                      // towupper(wc)
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The towctrans function returns the mapped value of wc using the mapping described
  by desc. If desc is zero, the towctrans function returns the value of wc.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.30.3.2.2 The wctrans function
                                                    
 
                                                    Synopsis
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                             #include <wctype.h>
         wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);
 
                                                    
 
                                                    Description
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The wctrans function constructs a value with type wctrans_t that describes a
  mapping between wide characters identified by the string argument property.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The strings listed in the description of the towctrans function shall be valid in all
  locales as property arguments to the wctrans function.
 
                                                    Returns
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
  category of the current locale, the wctrans function returns a nonzero value that is valid
  as the second argument to the towctrans function; otherwise, it returns zero.
@@ -23807,13 +23807,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31 Future library directions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The following names are grouped under individual headers for convenience. All external
  names described below are reserved no matter what headers are included by the program.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.1 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The function names
 
                                                           cerf                cexpm1              clog2
@@ -23825,43 +23825,43 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.2 Character handling <ctype.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names that begin with either is or to, and a lowercase letter may be added to
  the declarations in the <ctype.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.3 Errors <errno.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with E and a digit or E and an uppercase letter may be added to the
  macros defined in the <errno.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.4 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with FE_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined
  in the <fenv.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.5 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with either PRI or SCN, and either a lowercase letter or X may be
  added to the macros defined in the <inttypes.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.6 Localization <locale.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with LC_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined
  in the <locale.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.7 Signal handling <signal.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with either SIG and an uppercase letter or SIG_ and an uppercase
  letter may be added to the macros defined in the <signal.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.8 Atomics <stdatomic.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Macros that begin with ATOMIC_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros
  defined in the <stdatomic.h> header. Typedef names that begin with either
  atomic_ or memory_, and a lowercase letter may be added to the declarations in the
@@ -23873,13 +23873,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.9 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The ability to undefine and perhaps then redefine the macros bool, true, and false is
  an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.10 Integer types <stdint.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Typedef names beginning with int or uint and ending with _t may be added to the
  types defined in the <stdint.h> header. Macro names beginning with INT or UINT
  and ending with _MAX, _MIN, or _C may be added to the macros defined in the
@@ -23887,22 +23887,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.11 Input/output <stdio.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in
  fprintf and fscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The use of ungetc on a binary stream where the file position indicator is zero prior to
  the call is an obsolescent feature.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.12 General utilities <stdlib.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names that begin with str and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <stdlib.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.13 String handling <string.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names that begin with str, mem, or wcs and a lowercase letter may be added
  to the declarations in the <string.h> header.
 
@@ -23913,17 +23913,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.15 Threads <threads.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names, type names, and enumeration constants that begin with either cnd_,
  mtx_, thrd_, or tss_, and a lowercase letter may be added to the declarations in the
  <threads.h> header.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.16 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names that begin with wcs and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <wchar.h> header.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in
  fwprintf and fwscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions.
 
@@ -23931,7 +23931,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    7.31.17 Wide character classification and mapping utilities
                                                    
  <wctype.h>
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Function names that begin with is or to and a lowercase letter may be added to the
  declarations in the <wctype.h> header.
 
@@ -23942,7 +23942,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                             (informative)
                              Language syntax summary
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  NOTE   The notation is described in 6.1.
  
 
@@ -26029,7 +26029,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                      (informative)
                                    Sequence points
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The following are the sequence points described in 5.1.2.3:
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   Between the evaluations of the function designator and actual arguments in a function
@@ -26061,35 +26061,35 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                      (normative)
                 Universal character names for identifiers
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  This clause lists the hexadecimal code values that are valid in universal character names
  in identifiers.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    D.1 Ranges of characters allowed
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  00A8, 00AA, 00AD, 00AF, 00B2-00B5, 00B7-00BA, 00BC-00BE, 00C0-00D6,
  00D8-00F6, 00F8-00FF
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  0100-167F, 1681-180D, 180F-1FFF
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  200B-200D, 202A-202E, 203F-2040, 2054, 2060-206F
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  2070-218F, 2460-24FF, 2776-2793, 2C00-2DFF, 2E80-2FFF
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  3004-3007, 3021-302F, 3031-303F
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  3040-D7FF
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  F900-FD3D, FD40-FDCF, FDF0-FE44, FE47-FFFD
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  10000-1FFFD, 20000-2FFFD, 30000-3FFFD, 40000-4FFFD, 50000-5FFFD,
  60000-6FFFD, 70000-7FFFD, 80000-8FFFD, 90000-9FFFD, A0000-AFFFD,
  B0000-BFFFD, C0000-CFFFD, D0000-DFFFD, E0000-EFFFD
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    D.2 Ranges of characters disallowed initially
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  0300-036F, 1DC0-1DFF, 20D0-20FF, FE20-FE2F
 
 
@@ -26099,7 +26099,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                     (informative)
                              Implementation limits
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The contents of the header <limits.h> are given below, in alphabetical order. The
  minimum magnitudes shown shall be replaced by implementation-defined magnitudes
  with the same sign. The values shall all be constant expressions suitable for use in #if
@@ -26125,19 +26125,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          #define    ULONG_MAX                     4294967295
          #define    ULLONG_MAX          18446744073709551615
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The contents of the header <float.h> are given below. All integer values, except
  FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant expressions suitable for use in #if preprocessing
  directives; all floating values shall be constant expressions. The components are
  described further in 5.2.4.2.2.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  expressions:
 
                                                              #define FLT_EVAL_METHOD
          #define FLT_ROUNDS
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions that are greater or equal in magnitude (absolute value) to those
  shown, with the same sign:
@@ -26167,7 +26167,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         #define    LDBL_MIN_10_EXP                              -37
         #define    LDBL_MIN_EXP
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions with values that are greater than or equal to those shown:
 
                                                    @@ -26175,7 +26175,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
         #define FLT_MAX                                       1E+37
         #define LDBL_MAX                                      1E+37
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined
  constant expressions with (positive) values that are less than or equal to those shown:
 
@@ -26197,7 +26197,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.1 Introduction
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  This annex specifies C language support for the IEC 60559 floating-point standard. The
  IEC 60559 floating-point standard is specifically Binary floating-point arithmetic for
  microprocessor systems, second edition (IEC 60559:1989), previously designated
@@ -26219,7 +26219,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.2 Types
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The C floating types match the IEC 60559 formats as follows:
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   The float type matches the IEC 60559 single format.
@@ -26235,7 +26235,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                      Recommended practice
-
                                                      
+
                                                      2
  The long double type should match an IEC 60559 extended format.
 
 
                                                      Footnotes
@@ -26248,7 +26248,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      F.2.1 Infinities, signed zeros, and NaNs
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  This specification does not define the behavior of signaling NaNs.359) It generally uses
  the term NaN to denote quiet NaNs. The NAN and INFINITY macros and the nan
  functions in <math.h> provide designations for IEC 60559 NaNs and infinities.
@@ -26260,7 +26260,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      F.3 Operators and functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
  C operators and functions provide IEC 60559 required and recommended facilities as
  listed below.
 
                                                        
@@ -26342,7 +26342,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.4 Floating to integer conversion
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  If the integer type is _Bool, 6.3.1.2 applies and no floating-point exceptions are raised
  (even for NaN). Otherwise, if the floating value is infinite or NaN or if the integral part
  of the floating value exceeds the range of the integer type, then the ''invalid'' floating-
@@ -26362,10 +26362,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.5 Binary-decimal conversion
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  Conversion from the widest supported IEC 60559 format to decimal with
  DECIMAL_DIG digits and back is the identity function.361)
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  Conversions involving IEC 60559 formats follow all pertinent recommended practice. In
  particular, conversion between any supported IEC 60559 format and decimal with
  DECIMAL_DIG or fewer significant digits is correctly rounded (honoring the current
@@ -26375,7 +26375,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                        
+
                                                        3
  Functions such as strtod that convert character sequences to floating types honor the
  rounding direction. Hence, if the rounding direction might be upward or downward, the
  implementation cannot convert a minus-signed sequence by negating the converted
@@ -26400,18 +26400,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.7 Contracted expressions
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  A contracted expression is correctly rounded (once) and treats infinities, NaNs, signed
  zeros, subnormals, and the rounding directions in a manner consistent with the basic
  arithmetic operations covered by IEC 60559.
 
                                                        Recommended practice
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  A contracted expression should raise floating-point exceptions in a manner generally
  consistent with the basic arithmetic operations.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.8 Floating-point environment
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  The floating-point environment defined in <fenv.h> includes the IEC 60559 floating-
  point exception status flags and directed-rounding control modes. It includes also
  IEC 60559 dynamic rounding precision and trap enablement modes, if the
@@ -26423,7 +26423,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.8.1 Environment management
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  IEC 60559 requires that floating-point operations implicitly raise floating-point exception
  status flags, and that rounding control modes can be set explicitly to affect result values of
  floating-point operations. When the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma (defined in
@@ -26443,7 +26443,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.8.2 Translation
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  During translation the IEC 60559 default modes are in effect:
 
                                                          
 
                                                        •   The rounding direction mode is rounding to nearest.
@@ -26451,7 +26451,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                        •   Trapping or stopping (if supported) is disabled on all floating-point exceptions.
 
                                                        
 
                                                        Recommended practice
-
                                                        
+
                                                        2
  The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for each translation-time
  floating-point exception, other than ''inexact'';365) the implementation should then
  proceed with the translation of the program.
@@ -26465,7 +26465,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.8.3 Execution
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
  At program startup the floating-point environment is initialized as prescribed by
  IEC 60559:
 
                                                          
@@ -26478,13 +26478,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                          Contents
 
                                                          F.8.4 Constant expressions
                                                          
-
                                                          
+
                                                          1
  An arithmetic constant expression of floating type, other than one in an initializer for an
  object that has static or thread storage duration, is evaluated (as if) during execution; thus,
  it is affected by any operative floating-point control modes and raises floating-point
  exceptions as required by IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma
  is ''on'').366)
-
                                                          
+
                                                          2
  EXAMPLE
  
  
@@ -26502,7 +26502,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 /* ... */
           }
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  For the static initialization, the division is done at translation time, raising no (execution-time) floating-
  point exceptions. On the other hand, for the three automatic initializations the invalid division occurs at
  execution time.
@@ -26521,13 +26521,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.8.5 Initialization
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  All computation for automatic initialization is done (as if) at execution time; thus, it is
  affected by any operative modes and raises floating-point exceptions as required by
  IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on''). All computation
  for initialization of objects that have static or thread storage duration is done (as if) at
  translation time.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                               #include <fenv.h>
@@ -26543,7 +26543,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                 /* ... */
           }
 
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  The static initialization of v raises no (execution-time) floating-point exceptions because its computation is
  done at translation time. The automatic initialization of u and w require an execution-time conversion to
  float of the wider value 1.1e75, which raises floating-point exceptions. The automatic initializations
@@ -26570,12 +26570,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.8.6 Changing the environment
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Operations defined in 6.5 and functions and macros defined for the standard libraries
  change floating-point status flags and control modes just as indicated by their
  specifications (including conformance to IEC 60559). They do not change flags or modes
  (so as to be detectable by the user) in any other cases.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  If the argument to the feraiseexcept function in <fenv.h> represents IEC 60559
  valid coincident floating-point exceptions for atomic operations (namely ''overflow'' and
  ''inexact'', or ''underflow'' and ''inexact''), then ''overflow'' or ''underflow'' is raised
@@ -26583,19 +26583,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9 Optimization
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  This section identifies code transformations that might subvert IEC 60559-specified
  behavior, and others that do not.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9.1 Global transformations
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  Floating-point arithmetic operations and external function calls may entail side effects
  which optimization shall honor, at least where the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is
  ''on''. The flags and modes in the floating-point environment may be regarded as global
  variables; floating-point operations (+, *, etc.) implicitly read the modes and write the
  flags.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  Concern about side effects may inhibit code motion and removal of seemingly useless
  code. For example, in
 
                                                    @@ -26612,7 +26612,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  body might not execute (maybe 0 >= n), x + 1 cannot be moved out of the loop. (Of
  course these optimizations are valid if the implementation can rule out the nettlesome
  cases.)
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  This specification does not require support for trap handlers that maintain information
  about the order or count of floating-point exceptions. Therefore, between function calls,
  floating-point exceptions need not be precise: the actual order and number of occurrences
@@ -26625,7 +26625,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9.2 Expression transformations
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  x/2 <-> x x 0.5          Although similar transformations involving inexact constants
 
                                                                             generally do not yield numerically equivalent expressions, if the
@@ -26694,7 +26694,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9.3 Relational operators
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  x != x -> false           The expression x != x is true if x is a NaN.
  x = x -> true            The expression x = x is false if x is a NaN.
  x < y -> isless(x,y) (and similarly for <=, >, >=) Though numerically equal, these
@@ -26708,7 +26708,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                    
  The sense of relational operators shall be maintained. This includes handling unordered
  cases as expressed by the source code.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                               // calls g and raises ''invalid'' if a and b are unordered
@@ -26753,7 +26753,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.9.4 Constant arithmetic
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  The implementation shall honor floating-point exceptions raised by execution-time
  constant arithmetic wherever the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on''. (See F.8.4
  and F.8.5.) An operation on constants that raises no floating-point exception can be
@@ -26769,56 +26769,56 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.10 Mathematics <math.h>
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
  This subclause contains specifications of <math.h> facilities that are particularly suited
  for IEC 60559 implementations.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    2
  The Standard C macro HUGE_VAL and its float and long double analogs,
  HUGE_VALF and HUGE_VALL, expand to expressions whose values are positive
  infinities.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    3
  Special cases for functions in <math.h> are covered directly or indirectly by
  IEC 60559. The functions that IEC 60559 specifies directly are identified in F.3. The
  other functions in <math.h> treat infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and
  (provided the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on'') the floating-point status flags
  in a manner consistent with the basic arithmetic operations covered by IEC 60559.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    4
  The expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT shall evaluate to a
  nonzero value.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    5
  The ''invalid'' and ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exceptions are raised as specified in
  subsequent subclauses of this annex.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    6
  The ''overflow'' floating-point exception is raised whenever an infinity -- or, because of
  rounding direction, a maximal-magnitude finite number -- is returned in lieu of a value
  whose magnitude is too large.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    7
  The ''underflow'' floating-point exception is raised whenever a result is tiny (essentially
  subnormal or zero) and suffers loss of accuracy.371)
  
  
 
-
                                                    
+
                                                    8
  Whether or when library functions raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception is
  unspecified, unless explicitly specified otherwise.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    9
  Whether or when library functions raise an undeserved ''underflow'' floating-point
  exception is unspecified.372) Otherwise, as implied by F.8.6, the <math.h> functions do
  not raise spurious floating-point exceptions (detectable by the user), other than the
  ''inexact'' floating-point exception.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    10
  Whether the functions honor the rounding direction mode is implementation-defined,
  unless explicitly specified otherwise.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    11
  Functions with a NaN argument return a NaN result and raise no floating-point exception,
  except where stated otherwise.
-
                                                    
+
                                                    12
  The specifications in the following subclauses append to the definitions in <math.h>.
  For families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only
  the principal function is shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol ''(+-)''
  occurs in both an argument and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.
 
                                                    Recommended practice
-
                                                    
+
                                                    13
  If a function with one or more NaN arguments returns a NaN result, the result should be
  the same as one of the NaN arguments (after possible type conversion), except perhaps
  for the sign.
@@ -26836,7 +26836,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                    Contents
 
                                                    F.10.1.1 The acos functions
                                                    
-
                                                    
+
                                                    1
 
                                                      
 
                                                    •   acos(1) returns +0.
 
                                                    •   acos(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for
@@ -26845,7 +26845,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                      Contents
 
                                                      F.10.1.2 The asin functions
                                                      
-
                                                      
+
                                                      1
 
                                                        
 
                                                      •   asin((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                      •   asin(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for
@@ -26859,7 +26859,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                        Contents
 
                                                        F.10.1.3 The atan functions
                                                        
-
                                                        
+
                                                        1
 
                                                          
 
                                                        •   atan((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                        •   atan((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)pi /2.
@@ -26867,7 +26867,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                          Contents
 
                                                          F.10.1.4 The atan2 functions
                                                          
-
                                                          
+
                                                          1
 
                                                            
 
                                                          •   atan2((+-)0, -0) returns (+-)pi .373)
 
                                                          •   atan2((+-)0, +0) returns (+-)0.
@@ -26889,7 +26889,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                            Contents
 
                                                            F.10.1.5 The cos functions
                                                            
-
                                                            
+
                                                            1
 
                                                              
 
                                                            •   cos((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                                            •   cos((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -26897,7 +26897,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                              Contents
 
                                                              F.10.1.6 The sin functions
                                                              
-
                                                              
+
                                                              1
 
                                                                
 
                                                              •   sin((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                              •   sin((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -26905,7 +26905,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                Contents
 
                                                                F.10.1.7 The tan functions
                                                                
-
                                                                
+
                                                                1
 
                                                                  
 
                                                                •   tan((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                •   tan((+-)(inf)) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception.
@@ -26921,7 +26921,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                  F.10.2.1 The acosh functions
                                                                  
-
                                                                  
+
                                                                  1
 
                                                                    
 
                                                                  •   acosh(1) returns +0.
 
                                                                  •   acosh(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x < 1.
@@ -26930,7 +26930,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                    F.10.2.2 The asinh functions
                                                                    
-
                                                                    
+
                                                                    1
 
                                                                      
 
                                                                    •   asinh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                    •   asinh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -26938,7 +26938,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                      F.10.2.3 The atanh functions
                                                                      
-
                                                                      
+
                                                                      1
 
                                                                        
 
                                                                      •   atanh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                      •   atanh((+-)1) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
@@ -26948,7 +26948,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                        F.10.2.4 The cosh functions
                                                                        
-
                                                                        
+
                                                                        1
 
                                                                          
 
                                                                        •   cosh((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                                                        •   cosh((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
@@ -26956,7 +26956,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                          F.10.2.5 The sinh functions
                                                                          
-
                                                                          
+
                                                                          1
 
                                                                            
 
                                                                          •   sinh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                          •   sinh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -26964,7 +26964,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                            F.10.2.6 The tanh functions
                                                                            
-
                                                                            
+
                                                                            1
 
                                                                              
 
                                                                            •   tanh((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                            •   tanh((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)1.
@@ -26975,7 +26975,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                              F.10.3.1 The exp functions
                                                                              
-
                                                                              
+
                                                                              1
 
                                                                                
 
                                                                              •   exp((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                                                              •   exp(-(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -26985,7 +26985,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                F.10.3.2 The exp2 functions
                                                                                
-
                                                                                
+
                                                                                1
 
                                                                                  
 
                                                                                •   exp2((+-)0) returns 1.
 
                                                                                •   exp2(-(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -26994,7 +26994,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                  F.10.3.3 The expm1 functions
                                                                                  
-
                                                                                  
+
                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                    
 
                                                                                  •   expm1((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                  •   expm1(-(inf)) returns -1.
@@ -27003,7 +27003,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                    F.10.3.4 The frexp functions
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                      
 
                                                                                    •   frexp((+-)0, exp) returns (+-)0, and stores 0 in the object pointed to by exp.
 
                                                                                    •   frexp((+-)(inf), exp) returns (+-)(inf), and stores an unspecified value in the object
@@ -27011,12 +27011,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                    •   frexp(NaN, exp) stores an unspecified value in the object pointed to by exp
  (and returns a NaN).
 
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    2
  frexp raises no floating-point exceptions.
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    3
  When the radix of the argument is a power of 2, the returned value is exact and is
  independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    4
  On a binary system, the body of the frexp function might be
 
                                                                                              {
@@ -27027,25 +27027,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                    F.10.3.5 The ilogb functions
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    1
  When the correct result is representable in the range of the return type, the returned value
  is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    2
  If the correct result is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is
  unspecified and the ''invalid'' floating-point exception is raised.
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    3
  ilogb(x), for x zero, infinite, or NaN, raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception and
  returns the value specified in 7.12.6.5.
 
 
 
                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                    F.10.3.6 The ldexp functions
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    1
  On a binary system, ldexp(x, exp) is equivalent to scalbn(x, exp).
 
 
                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                    F.10.3.7 The log functions
                                                                                    
-
                                                                                    
+
                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                      
 
                                                                                    •   log((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                                    •   log(1) returns +0.
@@ -27055,7 +27055,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                      F.10.3.8 The log10 functions
                                                                                      
-
                                                                                      
+
                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                        
 
                                                                                      •   log10((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                                      •   log10(1) returns +0.
@@ -27065,7 +27065,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                        F.10.3.9 The log1p functions
                                                                                        
-
                                                                                        
+
                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                          
 
                                                                                        •   log1p((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                        •   log1p(-1) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
@@ -27076,7 +27076,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                          F.10.3.10 The log2 functions
                                                                                          
-
                                                                                          
+
                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                            
 
                                                                                          •   log2((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                                          •   log2(1) returns +0.
@@ -27086,28 +27086,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                            F.10.3.11 The logb functions
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                              
 
                                                                                            •   logb((+-)0) returns -(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                                            •   logb((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
 
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
 
                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                            F.10.3.12 The modf functions
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                              
 
                                                                                            •   modf((+-)x, iptr) returns a result with the same sign as x.
 
                                                                                            •   modf((+-)(inf), iptr) returns (+-)0 and stores (+-)(inf) in the object pointed to by iptr.
 
                                                                                            •   modf(NaN, iptr) stores a NaN in the object pointed to by iptr (and returns a
  NaN).
 
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            2
  The returned values are exact and are independent of the current rounding direction
  mode.
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            3
  modf behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                                                      #include <math.h>
@@ -27127,13 +27127,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                            F.10.3.13 The scalbn and scalbln functions
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                              
 
                                                                                            •   scalbn((+-)0, n) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                            •   scalbn(x, 0) returns x.
 
                                                                                            •   scalbn((+-)(inf), n) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            2
  If the calculation does not overflow or underflow, the returned value is exact and
  independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
@@ -27143,7 +27143,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                            F.10.4.1 The cbrt functions
                                                                                            
-
                                                                                            
+
                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                              
 
                                                                                            •   cbrt((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                            •   cbrt((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
@@ -27151,17 +27151,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                              F.10.4.2 The fabs functions
                                                                                              
-
                                                                                              
+
                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                
 
                                                                                              •   fabs((+-)0) returns +0.
 
                                                                                              •   fabs((+-)(inf)) returns +(inf).
 
                                                                                              
-
                                                                                              
+
                                                                                              2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                              F.10.4.3 The hypot functions
                                                                                              
-
                                                                                              
+
                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                
 
                                                                                              •   hypot(x, y), hypot(y, x), and hypot(x, -y) are equivalent.
 
                                                                                              •   hypot(x, (+-)0) is equivalent to fabs(x).
@@ -27170,7 +27170,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                F.10.4.4 The pow functions
                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                •   pow((+-)0, y) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception
  for y an odd integer < 0.
@@ -27200,7 +27200,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                  F.10.4.5 The sqrt functions
                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                  1
  sqrt is fully specified as a basic arithmetic operation in IEC 60559. The returned value
  is dependent on the current rounding direction mode.
 
@@ -27209,7 +27209,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                  F.10.5.1 The erf functions
                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                  •   erf((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                                  •   erf((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)1.
@@ -27217,7 +27217,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                    F.10.5.2 The erfc functions
                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                    •   erfc(-(inf)) returns 2.
 
                                                                                                    •   erfc(+(inf)) returns +0.
@@ -27225,7 +27225,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                      F.10.5.3 The lgamma functions
                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                      •   lgamma(1) returns +0.
 
                                                                                                      •   lgamma(2) returns +0.
@@ -27237,7 +27237,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                        F.10.5.4 The tgamma functions
                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                        •   tgamma((+-)0) returns (+-)(inf) and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
 
                                                                                                        •   tgamma(x) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x a
@@ -27252,14 +27252,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.1 The ceil functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   ceil((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                                          •   ceil((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          3
  The double version of ceil behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                                                                   #include <math.h>
@@ -27275,27 +27275,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              return result;
         }
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          4
  The ceil functions may, but are not required to, raise the ''inexact'' floating-point
  exception for finite non-integer arguments, as this implementation does.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.2 The floor functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   floor((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                                          •   floor((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          3
  See the sample implementation for ceil in F.10.6.1. The floor functions may, but are
  not required to, raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception for finite non-integer
  arguments, as that implementation does.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.3 The nearbyint functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The nearbyint functions use IEC 60559 rounding according to the current rounding
  direction. They do not raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in
  value from the argument.
@@ -27307,13 +27307,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.4 The rint functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions only in that they do raise the
  ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in value from the argument.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.5 The lrint and llrint functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The lrint and llrint functions provide floating-to-integer conversion as prescribed
  by IEC 60559. They round according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded
  value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and the
@@ -27323,14 +27323,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.6 The round functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   round((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                                          •   round((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          3
  The double version of round behaves as though implemented by
 
                                                                                                                    #include <math.h>
@@ -27356,7 +27356,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.7 The lround and llround functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The lround and llround functions differ from the lrint and llrint functions
  with the default rounding direction just in that the lround and llround functions
  round halfway cases away from zero and need not raise the ''inexact'' floating-point
@@ -27364,14 +27364,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.6.8 The trunc functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The trunc functions use IEC 60559 rounding toward zero (regardless of the current
  rounding direction). The returned value is exact.
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   trunc((+-)0) returns (+-)0.
 
                                                                                                          •   trunc((+-)(inf)) returns (+-)(inf).
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode. The trunc
  functions may, but are not required to, raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception for
  finite non-integer arguments.
@@ -27381,17 +27381,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.7.1 The fmod functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   fmod((+-)0, y) returns (+-)0 for y not zero.
 
                                                                                                          •   fmod(x, y) returns a NaN and raises the ''invalid'' floating-point exception for x
  infinite or y zero (and neither is a NaN).
 
                                                                                                          •   fmod(x, (+-)(inf)) returns x for x not infinite.
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of
  the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          3
  The double version of fmod behaves as though implemented by
 
 
                                                                                                          @@ -27409,19 +27409,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.7.2 The remainder functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The remainder functions are fully specified as a basic arithmetic operation in
  IEC 60559.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of
  the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.7.3 The remquo functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The remquo functions follow the specifications for the remainder functions. They
  have no further specifications special to IEC 60559 implementations.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of
  the current rounding direction mode.
 
@@ -27430,36 +27430,36 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.8.1 The copysign functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  copysign is specified in the Appendix to IEC 60559.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.8.2 The nan functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  All IEC 60559 implementations support quiet NaNs, in all floating formats.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.8.3 The nextafter functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   nextafter(x, y) raises the ''overflow'' and ''inexact'' floating-point exceptions
  for x finite and the function value infinite.
 
                                                                                                          •   nextafter(x, y) raises the ''underflow'' and ''inexact'' floating-point
  exceptions for the function value subnormal or zero and x != y.
 
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  Even though underflow or overflow can occur, the returned value is independent of the
  current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.8.4 The nexttoward functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  No additional requirements beyond those on nextafter.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  Even though underflow or overflow can occur, the returned value is independent of the
  current rounding direction mode.
 
@@ -27469,17 +27469,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.9.1 The fdim functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  No additional requirements.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.9.2 The fmax functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  If just one argument is a NaN, the fmax functions return the other argument (if both
  arguments are NaNs, the functions return a NaN).
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          3
  The body of the fmax function might be374)
 
                                                                                                                   { return (isgreaterequal(x, y) ||
@@ -27493,9 +27493,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.9.3 The fmin functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
  The fmin functions are analogous to the fmax functions (see F.10.9.2).
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          2
  The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
@@ -27503,7 +27503,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                          F.10.10.1 The fma functions
                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                          •   fma(x, y, z) computes xy + z, correctly rounded once.
 
                                                                                                          •   fma(x, y, z) returns a NaN and optionally raises the ''invalid'' floating-point
@@ -27521,7 +27521,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            F.10.11 Comparison macros
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  Relational operators and their corresponding comparison macros (7.12.14) produce
  equivalent result values, even if argument values are represented in wider formats. Thus,
  comparison macro arguments represented in formats wider than their semantic types are
@@ -27540,7 +27540,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.1 Introduction
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  This annex supplements annex F to specify complex arithmetic for compatibility with
  IEC 60559 real floating-point arithmetic. An implementation that defines
  __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ shall conform to the specifications in this annex.375)
@@ -27552,27 +27552,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.2 Types
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  There is a new keyword _Imaginary, which is used to specify imaginary types. It is
  used as a type specifier within declaration specifiers in the same way as _Complex is
  (thus, _Imaginary float is a valid type name).
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  There are three imaginary types, designated as float _Imaginary, double
  _Imaginary, and long double _Imaginary. The imaginary types (along with
  the real floating and complex types) are floating types.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            3
  For imaginary types, the corresponding real type is given by deleting the keyword
  _Imaginary from the type name.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            4
  Each imaginary type has the same representation and alignment requirements as the
  corresponding real type. The value of an object of imaginary type is the value of the real
  representation times the imaginary unit.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            5
  The imaginary type domain comprises the imaginary types.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.3 Conventions
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  A complex or imaginary value with at least one infinite part is regarded as an infinity
  (even if its other part is a NaN). A complex or imaginary value is a finite number if each
  of its parts is a finite number (neither infinite nor NaN). A complex or imaginary value is
@@ -27588,16 +27588,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.4.1 Imaginary types
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  Conversions among imaginary types follow rules analogous to those for real floating
  types.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.4.2 Real and imaginary
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  When a value of imaginary type is converted to a real type other than _Bool,376) the
  result is a positive zero.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  When a value of real type is converted to an imaginary type, the result is a positive
  imaginary zero.
 
@@ -27607,21 +27607,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.4.3 Imaginary and complex
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  When a value of imaginary type is converted to a complex type, the real part of the
  complex result value is a positive zero and the imaginary part of the complex result value
  is determined by the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  When a value of complex type is converted to an imaginary type, the real part of the
  complex value is discarded and the value of the imaginary part is converted according to
  the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.5 Binary operators
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  The following subclauses supplement 6.5 in order to specify the type of the result for an
  operation with an imaginary operand.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  For most operand types, the value of the result of a binary operator with an imaginary or
  complex operand is completely determined, with reference to real arithmetic, by the usual
  mathematical formula. For some operand types, the usual mathematical formula is
@@ -27637,11 +27637,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.5.1 Multiplicative operators
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                            Semantics
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  If one operand has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, then the result has
  imaginary type. If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has real type. (If
  either operand has complex type, then the result has complex type.)
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  If the operands are not both complex, then the result and floating-point exception
  behavior of the * operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                                            @@ -27659,7 +27659,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                     x + iy       (xu) + i(yu)        (-yv) + i(xv)
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            3
  If the second operand is not complex, then the result and floating-point exception
  behavior of the / operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                                            @@ -27677,7 +27677,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                     x + iy       (x/u) + i(y/u)        (y/v) + i(-x/v)
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            4
  The * and / operators satisfy the following infinity properties for all real, imaginary, and
  complex operands:377)
 
                                                                                                              
@@ -27695,11 +27695,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                            •   if the first operand is a nonzero finite number or an infinity and the second operand is
  a zero, then the result of the / operator is an infinity.
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            5
  If both operands of the * operator are complex or if the second operand of the / operator
  is complex, the operator raises floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation
  of the parts of the result, and may raise spurious floating-point exceptions.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            6
  EXAMPLE 1 Multiplication of double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows. Note
  that the imaginary unit I has imaginary type (see G.6).
 
@@ -27752,11 +27752,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   return x + I * y;
          }
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            7
  This implementation achieves the required treatment of infinities at the cost of only one isnan test in
  ordinary (finite) cases. It is less than ideal in that undue overflow and underflow may occur.
  
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            8
  EXAMPLE 2      Division of two double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows.
 
 
                                                                                                            @@ -27804,7 +27804,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                   return x + I * y;
          }
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            9
  Scaling the denominator alleviates the main overflow and underflow problem, which is more serious than
  for multiplication. In the spirit of the multiplication example above, this code does not defend against
  overflow and underflow in the calculation of the numerator. Scaling with the scalbn function, instead of
@@ -27819,11 +27819,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.5.2 Additive operators
                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                            Semantics
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has imaginary type. (If one operand
  has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, or if either operand has complex
  type, then the result has complex type.)
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  In all cases the result and floating-point exception behavior of a + or - operator is defined
  by the usual mathematical formula:
 
                                                                                                            @@ -27844,7 +27844,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.6 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  The macros
 
                                                                                                                      imaginary
@@ -27861,33 +27861,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  is defined to be _Imaginary_I (not _Complex_I as stated in 7.3). Notwithstanding
  the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and then perhaps redefine the macro
  imaginary.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
  This subclause contains specifications for the <complex.h> functions that are
  particularly suited to IEC 60559 implementations. For families of functions, the
  specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the principal function is
 
  shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol ''(+-)'' occurs in both an argument
  and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            3
  The functions are continuous onto both sides of their branch cuts, taking into account the
  sign of zero. For example, csqrt(-2 (+-) i0) = (+-)i(sqrt)2.  -
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            4
  Since complex and imaginary values are composed of real values, each function may be
  regarded as computing real values from real values. Except as noted, the functions treat
  real infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the floating-point exception flags in a
  manner consistent with the specifications for real functions in F.10.378)
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            5
  The functions cimag, conj, cproj, and creal are fully specified for all
  implementations, including IEC 60559 ones, in 7.3.9. These functions raise no floating-
  point exceptions.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            6
  Each of the functions cabs and carg is specified by a formula in terms of a real
  function (whose special cases are covered in annex F):
 
                                                                                                                      cabs(x + iy) = hypot(x, y)
          carg(x + iy) = atan2(y, x)
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            7
  Each of the functions casin, catan, ccos, csin, and ctan is specified implicitly by
  a formula in terms of other complex functions (whose special cases are specified below):
 
                                                                                                            @@ -27897,7 +27897,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
          csin(z)         =   -i csinh(iz)
          ctan(z)         =   -i ctanh(iz)
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            8
  For the other functions, the following subclauses specify behavior for special cases,
  including treatment of the ''invalid'' and ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exceptions. For
  families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the
@@ -27905,7 +27905,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  specifications for the upper half-plane imply the specifications for the lower half-plane; if
  the function f is also either even, f (-z) = f (z), or odd, f (-z) = - f (z), then the
  specifications for the first quadrant imply the specifications for the other three quadrants.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            9
  In the following subclauses, cis(y) is defined as cos(y) + i sin(y).
  
  
@@ -27923,7 +27923,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            G.6.1.1 The cacos functions
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                            •   cacos(conj(z)) = conj(cacos(z)).
 
                                                                                                            •   cacos((+-)0 + i0) returns pi /2 - i0.
@@ -27948,7 +27948,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                              G.6.2.1 The cacosh functions
                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                              •   cacosh(conj(z)) = conj(cacosh(z)).
 
                                                                                                              •   cacosh((+-)0 + i0) returns +0 + ipi /2.
@@ -27969,7 +27969,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                G.6.2.2 The casinh functions
                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                •   casinh(conj(z)) = conj(casinh(z)) and casinh is odd.
 
                                                                                                                •   casinh(+0 + i0) returns 0 + i0.
@@ -27989,7 +27989,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                  G.6.2.3 The catanh functions
                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                                  •   catanh(conj(z)) = conj(catanh(z)) and catanh is odd.
 
                                                                                                                  •   catanh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -28012,7 +28012,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                    G.6.2.4 The ccosh functions
                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                                    •   ccosh(conj(z)) = conj(ccosh(z)) and ccosh is even.
 
                                                                                                                    •   ccosh(+0 + i0) returns 1 + i0.
@@ -28038,7 +28038,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                      G.6.2.5 The csinh functions
                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                                      •   csinh(conj(z)) = conj(csinh(z)) and csinh is odd.
 
                                                                                                                      •   csinh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -28065,7 +28065,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                                        G.6.2.6 The ctanh functions
                                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                        •   ctanh(conj(z)) = conj(ctanh(z))and ctanh is odd.
 
                                                                                                                        •   ctanh(+0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -28090,7 +28090,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                          G.6.3.1 The cexp functions
                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                                          •   cexp(conj(z)) = conj(cexp(z)).
 
                                                                                                                          •   cexp((+-)0 + i0) returns 1 + i0.
@@ -28117,7 +28117,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                                            G.6.3.2 The clog functions
                                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                                            •   clog(conj(z)) = conj(clog(z)).
 
                                                                                                                            •   clog(-0 + i0) returns -(inf) + ipi and raises the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point
@@ -28144,7 +28144,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                                              G.6.4.1 The cpow functions
                                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                                              1
  The cpow functions raise floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation of
  the parts of the result, and may also raise spurious floating-point exceptions.379)
 
@@ -28155,7 +28155,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                                              G.6.4.2 The csqrt functions
                                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                                              •   csqrt(conj(z)) = conj(csqrt(z)).
 
                                                                                                                              •   csqrt((+-)0 + i0) returns +0 + i0.
@@ -28179,14 +28179,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                G.7 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  Type-generic macros that accept complex arguments also accept imaginary arguments. If
  an argument is imaginary, the macro expands to an expression whose type is real,
  imaginary, or complex, as appropriate for the particular function: if the argument is
  imaginary, then the types of cos, cosh, fabs, carg, cimag, and creal are real; the
  types of sin, tan, sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, and atanh are imaginary; and
  the types of the others are complex.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  Given an imaginary argument, each of the type-generic macros cos, sin, tan, cosh,
  sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, atanh is specified by a formula in terms of real
  functions:
@@ -28213,27 +28213,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.1 Introduction
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  This annex documents the extent to which the C language supports the ISO/IEC 10967-1
  standard for language-independent arithmetic (LIA-1). LIA-1 is more general than
  IEC 60559 (annex F) in that it covers integer and diverse floating-point arithmetics.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2 Types
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The relevant C arithmetic types meet the requirements of LIA-1 types if an
  implementation adds notification of exceptional arithmetic operations and meets the 1
  unit in the last place (ULP) accuracy requirement (LIA-1 subclause 5.2.8).
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.1 Boolean type
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The LIA-1 data type Boolean is implemented by the C data type bool with values of
  true and false, all from <stdbool.h>.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.2 Integer types
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The signed C integer types int, long int, long long int, and the corresponding
  unsigned types are compatible with LIA-1. If an implementation adds support for the
  LIA-1 exceptional values ''integer_overflow'' and ''undefined'', then those types are
@@ -28241,21 +28241,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  in that overflows or out-of-bounds results silently wrap. An implementation that defines
  signed integer types as also being modulo need not detect integer overflow, in which case,
  only integer divide-by-zero need be detected.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  The parameters for the integer data types can be accessed by the following:
  maxint        INT_MAX, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MAX, UINT_MAX, ULONG_MAX,
 
                                                                                                                                                ULLONG_MAX
 
                                                                                                                                
  minint        INT_MIN, LONG_MIN, LLONG_MIN
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  The parameter ''bounded'' is always true, and is not provided. The parameter ''minint''
  is always 0 for the unsigned types, and is not provided for those types.
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.2.1 Integer operations
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The integer operations on integer types are the following:
  addI           x + y
  subI           x - y
@@ -28274,7 +28274,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.3 Floating-point types
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The C floating-point types float, double, and long double are compatible with
  LIA-1. If an implementation adds support for the LIA-1 exceptional values
  ''underflow'', ''floating_overflow'', and ''"undefined'', then those types are conformant
@@ -28284,13 +28284,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.3.1 Floating-point parameters
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The parameters for a floating point data type can be accessed by the following:
  r              FLT_RADIX
  p              FLT_MANT_DIG, DBL_MANT_DIG, LDBL_MANT_DIG
  emax           FLT_MAX_EXP, DBL_MAX_EXP, LDBL_MAX_EXP
  emin           FLT_MIN_EXP, DBL_MIN_EXP, LDBL_MIN_EXP
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  The derived constants for the floating point types are accessed by the following:
 
  fmax          FLT_MAX, DBL_MAX, LDBL_MAX
@@ -28300,7 +28300,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.3.2 Floating-point operations
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The floating-point operations on floating-point types are the following:
  addF          x + y
  subF          x - y
@@ -28326,10 +28326,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.3.3 Rounding styles
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The C Standard requires all floating types to use the same radix and rounding style, so
  that only one identifier for each is provided to map to LIA-1.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  The FLT_ROUNDS parameter can be used to indicate the LIA-1 rounding styles:
  truncate      FLT_ROUNDS == 0
 
@@ -28340,7 +28340,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.2.4 Type conversions
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  The LIA-1 type conversions are the following type casts:
  cvtI' -> I     (int)i, (long int)i, (long long int)i,
 
                                                                                                                                @@ -28354,14 +28354,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                
  cvtI -> F      (float)i, (double)i, (long double)i
  cvtF' -> F     (float)x, (double)x, (long double)x
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  In the above conversions from floating to integer, the use of (cast)x can be replaced with
  (cast)round(x), (cast)rint(x), (cast)nearbyint(x), (cast)trunc(x),
  (cast)ceil(x), or (cast)floor(x). In addition, C's floating-point to integer
  conversion functions, lrint(), llrint(), lround(), and llround(), can be
  used. They all meet LIA-1's requirements on floating to integer rounding for in-range
  values. For out-of-range values, the conversions shall silently wrap for the modulo types.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  The fmod() function is useful for doing silent wrapping to unsigned integer types, e.g.,
  fmod( fabs(rint(x)), 65536.0 ) or (0.0 <= (y = fmod( rint(x),
  65536.0 )) ? y : 65536.0 + y) will compute an integer value in the range 0.0
@@ -28370,17 +28370,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  e.g., remainder( rint(x), 65536.0 ) will compute an integer value in the
  range -32767.0 to +32768.0 which is not, in general, in the range of signed short
  int.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                4
  C's conversions (casts) from floating-point to floating-point can meet LIA-1
  requirements if an implementation uses round-to-nearest (IEC 60559 default).
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                5
  C's conversions (casts) from integer to floating-point can meet LIA-1 requirements if an
  implementation uses round-to-nearest.
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.3 Notification
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  Notification is the process by which a user or program is informed that an exceptional
  arithmetic operation has occurred. C's operations are compatible with LIA-1 in that C
  allows an implementation to cause a notification to occur when any arithmetic operation
@@ -28388,20 +28388,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.3.1 Notification alternatives
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  LIA-1 requires at least the following two alternatives for handling of notifications:
  setting indicators or trap-and-terminate. LIA-1 allows a third alternative: trap-and-
  resume.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  An implementation need only support a given notification alternative for the entire
  program. An implementation may support the ability to switch between notification
  alternatives during execution, but is not required to do so. An implementation can
  provide separate selection for each kind of notification, but this is not required.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  C allows an implementation to provide notification. C's SIGFPE (for traps) and
  FE_INVALID, FE_DIVBYZERO, FE_OVERFLOW, FE_UNDERFLOW (for indicators)
  can provide LIA-1 notification.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                4
  C's signal handlers are compatible with LIA-1. Default handling of SIGFPE can
  provide trap-and-terminate behavior, except for those LIA-1 operations implemented by
  math library function calls. User-provided signal handlers for SIGFPE allow for trap-
@@ -28409,43 +28409,43 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.3.1.1 Indicators
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  C's <fenv.h> status flags are compatible with the LIA-1 indicators.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  The following mapping is for floating-point types:
  undefined                FE_INVALID, FE_DIVBYZERO
  floating_overflow         FE_OVERFLOW
  underflow                FE_UNDERFLOW
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  The floating-point indicator interrogation and manipulation operations are:
  set_indicators          feraiseexcept(i)
  clear_indicators        feclearexcept(i)
  test_indicators         fetestexcept(i)
  current_indicators      fetestexcept(FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
  where i is an expression of type int representing a subset of the LIA-1 indicators.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                4
  C allows an implementation to provide the following LIA-1 required behavior: at
  program termination if any indicator is set the implementation shall send an unambiguous
 
  and ''hard to ignore'' message (see LIA-1 subclause 6.1.2)
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                5
  LIA-1 does not make the distinction between floating-point and integer for ''undefined''.
  This documentation makes that distinction because <fenv.h> covers only the floating-
  point indicators.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                H.3.1.2 Traps
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
  C is compatible with LIA-1's trap requirements for arithmetic operations, but not for
  math library functions (which are not permitted to invoke a user's signal handler for
  SIGFPE). An implementation can provide an alternative of notification through
  termination with a ''hard-to-ignore'' message (see LIA-1 subclause 6.1.3).
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                2
  LIA-1 does not require that traps be precise.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                3
  C does require that SIGFPE be the signal corresponding to LIA-1 arithmetic exceptions,
  if there is any signal raised for them.
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                4
  C supports signal handlers for SIGFPE and allows trapping of LIA-1 arithmetic
  exceptions. When LIA-1 arithmetic exceptions do trap, C's signal-handler mechanism
  allows trap-and-terminate (either default implementation behavior or user replacement for
@@ -28458,11 +28458,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                      (informative)
                                 Common warnings
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  An implementation may generate warnings in many situations, none of which are
  specified as part of this International Standard. The following are a few of the more
  common situations.
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            2
 
                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                            •   A new struct or union type appears in a function prototype (6.2.1, 6.7.2.3).
 
                                                                                                            •   A block with initialization of an object that has automatic storage duration is jumped
@@ -28504,13 +28504,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                                      (informative)
                                   Portability issues
 
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  This annex collects some information about portability that appears in this International
  Standard.
 
 
                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                            J.1 Unspecified behavior
                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                            1
  The following are unspecified:
 
                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                            •   The manner and timing of static initialization (5.1.2).
@@ -28636,7 +28636,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                              J.2 Undefined behavior
                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                              1
  The behavior is undefined in the following circumstances:
 
                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                              •   A ''shall'' or ''shall not'' requirement that appears outside of a constraint is violated
@@ -29127,13 +29127,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                J.3 Implementation-defined behavior
                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                1
  A conforming implementation is required to document its choice of behavior in each of
  the areas listed in this subclause. The following are implementation-defined:
 
 
                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                J.3.1 Translation
                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                •   How a diagnostic is identified (3.10, 5.1.1.3).
 
                                                                                                                •   Whether each nonempty sequence of white-space characters other than new-line is
@@ -29142,7 +29142,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                  J.3.2 Environment
                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                                  •   The mapping between physical source file multibyte characters and the source
  character set in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2).
@@ -29167,7 +29167,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                    J.3.3 Identifiers
                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                                    •   Which additional multibyte characters may appear in identifiers and their
  correspondence to universal character names (6.4.2).
@@ -29176,7 +29176,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                      J.3.4 Characters
                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                                      •   The number of bits in a byte (3.6).
 
                                                                                                                      •   The values of the members of the execution character set (5.2.1).
@@ -29212,7 +29212,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                                        J.3.5 Integers
                                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                                        1
 
                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                        •   Any extended integer types that exist in the implementation (6.2.5).
 
                                                                                                                        •   Whether signed integer types are represented using sign and magnitude, two's
@@ -29227,7 +29227,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                          J.3.6 Floating point
                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                                          •   The accuracy of the floating-point operations and of the library functions in
  <math.h> and <complex.h> that return floating-point results (5.2.4.2.2).
@@ -29256,7 +29256,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                            Contents
 
                                                                                                                            J.3.7 Arrays and pointers
                                                                                                                            
-
                                                                                                                            
+
                                                                                                                            1
 
                                                                                                                              
 
                                                                                                                            •   The result of converting a pointer to an integer or vice versa (6.3.2.3).
 
                                                                                                                            •   The size of the result of subtracting two pointers to elements of the same array
@@ -29265,7 +29265,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                              Contents
 
                                                                                                                              J.3.8 Hints
                                                                                                                              
-
                                                                                                                              
+
                                                                                                                              1
 
                                                                                                                                
 
                                                                                                                              •   The extent to which suggestions made by using the register storage-class
  specifier are effective (6.7.1).
@@ -29275,7 +29275,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                Contents
 
                                                                                                                                J.3.9 Structures, unions, enumerations, and bit-fields
                                                                                                                                
-
                                                                                                                                
+
                                                                                                                                1
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
                                                                                                                                •   Whether a ''plain'' int bit-field is treated as a signed int bit-field or as an
  unsigned int bit-field (6.7.2, 6.7.2.1).
@@ -29291,14 +29291,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.3.10 Qualifiers
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                                                  •   What constitutes an access to an object that has volatile-qualified type (6.7.3).
 
                                                                                                                                  
 
 
                                                                                                                                  Contents
 
                                                                                                                                  J.3.11 Preprocessing directives
                                                                                                                                  
-
                                                                                                                                  
+
                                                                                                                                  1
 
                                                                                                                                    
 
                                                                                                                                  •   The locations within #pragma directives where header name preprocessing tokens
  are recognized (6.4, 6.4.7).
@@ -29326,7 +29326,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                    Contents
 
                                                                                                                                    J.3.12 Library functions
                                                                                                                                    
-
                                                                                                                                    
+
                                                                                                                                    1
 
                                                                                                                                      
 
                                                                                                                                    •   Any library facilities available to a freestanding program, other than the minimal set
  required by clause 4 (5.1.2.1).
@@ -29422,7 +29422,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                      Contents
 
                                                                                                                                      J.3.13 Architecture
                                                                                                                                      
-
                                                                                                                                      
+
                                                                                                                                      1
 
                                                                                                                                        
 
                                                                                                                                      •   The values or expressions assigned to the macros specified in the headers
  <float.h>, <limits.h>, and <stdint.h> (5.2.4.2, 7.20.2, 7.20.3).
@@ -29439,7 +29439,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                        Contents
 
                                                                                                                                        J.4 Locale-specific behavior
                                                                                                                                        
-
                                                                                                                                        
+
                                                                                                                                        1
  The following characteristics of a hosted environment are locale-specific and are required
  to be documented by the implementation:
 
                                                                                                                                          
@@ -29470,7 +29470,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5 Common extensions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The following extensions are widely used in many systems, but are not portable to all
  implementations. The inclusion of any extension that may cause a strictly conforming
  program to become invalid renders an implementation nonconforming. Examples of such
@@ -29479,7 +29479,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.1 Environment arguments
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  In a hosted environment, the main function receives a third argument, char *envp[],
  that points to a null-terminated array of pointers to char, each of which points to a string
  that provides information about the environment for this execution of the program
@@ -29487,32 +29487,32 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.2 Specialized identifiers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Characters other than the underscore _, letters, and digits, that are not part of the basic
  source character set (such as the dollar sign $, or characters in national character sets)
  may appear in an identifier (6.4.2).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.3 Lengths and cases of identifiers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  All characters in identifiers (with or without external linkage) are significant (6.4.2).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.4 Scopes of identifiers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  A function identifier, or the identifier of an object the declaration of which contains the
  keyword extern, has file scope (6.2.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.5 Writable string literals
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  String literals are modifiable (in which case, identical string literals should denote distinct
  objects) (6.4.5).
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.6 Other arithmetic types
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Additional arithmetic types, such as __int128 or double double, and their
  appropriate conversions are defined (6.2.5, 6.3.1). Additional floating types may have
  more range or precision than long double, may be used for evaluating expressions of
@@ -29521,29 +29521,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.7 Function pointer casts
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  A pointer to an object or to void may be cast to a pointer to a function, allowing data to
  be invoked as a function (6.5.4).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  A pointer to a function may be cast to a pointer to an object or to void, allowing a
  function to be inspected or modified (for example, by a debugger) (6.5.4).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.8 Extended bit-field types
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  A bit-field may be declared with a type other than _Bool, unsigned int, or
  signed int, with an appropriate maximum width (6.7.2.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.9 The fortran keyword
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The fortran function specifier may be used in a function declaration to indicate that
  calls suitable for FORTRAN should be generated, or that a different representation for the
  external name is to be generated (6.7.4).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.10 The asm keyword
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The asm keyword may be used to insert assembly language directly into the translator
  output (6.8). The most common implementation is via a statement of the form:
 
                                                                                                                                          @@ -29552,7 +29552,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.11 Multiple external definitions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  There may be more than one external definition for the identifier of an object, with or
  without the explicit use of the keyword extern; if the definitions disagree, or more than
  one is initialized, the behavior is undefined (6.9.2).
@@ -29560,42 +29560,42 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.12 Predefined macro names
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Macro names that do not begin with an underscore, describing the translation and
  execution environments, are defined by the implementation before translation begins
  (6.10.8).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.13 Floating-point status flags
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  If any floating-point status flags are set on normal termination after all calls to functions
  registered by the atexit function have been made (see 7.22.4.4), the implementation
  writes some diagnostics indicating the fact to the stderr stream, if it is still open,
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.14 Extra arguments for signal handlers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Handlers for specific signals are called with extra arguments in addition to the signal
  number (7.14.1.1).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.15 Additional stream types and file-opening modes
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Additional mappings from files to streams are supported (7.21.2).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Additional file-opening modes may be specified by characters appended to the mode
  argument of the fopen function (7.21.5.3).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.16 Defined file position indicator
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The file position indicator is decremented by each successful call to the ungetc or
  ungetwc function for a text stream, except if its value was zero before a call (7.21.7.10,
  7.29.3.10).
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          J.5.17 Math error reporting
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Functions declared in <complex.h> and <math.h> raise SIGFPE to report errors
  instead of, or in addition to, setting errno or raising floating-point exceptions (7.3,
  7.12).
@@ -29610,33 +29610,33 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.1 Background
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Traditionally, the C Library has contained many functions that trust the programmer to
  provide output character arrays big enough to hold the result being produced. Not only
  do these functions not check that the arrays are big enough, they frequently lack the
  information needed to perform such checks. While it is possible to write safe, robust, and
  error-free code using the existing library, the library tends to promote programming styles
  that lead to mysterious failures if a result is too big for the provided array.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  A common programming style is to declare character arrays large enough to handle most
  practical cases. However, if these arrays are not large enough to handle the resulting
  strings, data can be written past the end of the array overwriting other data and program
  structures. The program never gets any indication that a problem exists, and so never has
  a chance to recover or to fail gracefully.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Worse, this style of programming has compromised the security of computers and
  networks. Buffer overflows can often be exploited to run arbitrary code with the
  permissions of the vulnerable (defective) program.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If the programmer writes runtime checks to verify lengths before calling library
  functions, then those runtime checks frequently duplicate work done inside the library
  functions, which discover string lengths as a side effect of doing their job.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  This annex provides alternative library functions that promote safer, more secure
  programming. The alternative functions verify that output buffers are large enough for
  the intended result and return a failure indicator if they are not. Data is never written past
  the end of an array. All string results are null terminated.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  This annex also addresses another problem that complicates writing robust code:
  functions that are not reentrant because they return pointers to static objects owned by the
  function. Such functions can be troublesome since a previously returned result can
@@ -29645,14 +29645,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.2 Scope
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  This annex specifies a series of optional extensions that can be useful in the mitigation of
  security vulnerabilities in programs, and comprise new functions, macros, and types
  declared or defined in existing standard headers.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  An implementation that defines __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ shall conform to the
  specifications in this annex.380)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Subclause K.3 should be read as if it were merged into the parallel structure of named
  subclauses of clause 7.
 
@@ -29669,22 +29669,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.1.1 Standard headers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The functions, macros, and types declared or defined in K.3 and its subclauses are not
  declared or defined by their respective headers if __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is
  defined as a macro which expands to the integer constant 0 at the point in the source file
  where the appropriate header is first included.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The functions, macros, and types declared or defined in K.3 and its subclauses are
  declared and defined by their respective headers if __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is
  defined as a macro which expands to the integer constant 1 at the point in the source file
  where the appropriate header is first included.381)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  It is implementation-defined whether the functions, macros, and types declared or defined
  in K.3 and its subclauses are declared or defined by their respective headers if
  __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is not defined as a macro at the point in the source file
  where the appropriate header is first included.382)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  Within a preprocessing translation unit, __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ shall be
  defined identically for all inclusions of any headers from subclause K.3. If
  __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is defined differently for any such inclusion, the
@@ -29706,45 +29706,45 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.1.2 Reserved identifiers
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Each macro name in any of the following subclauses is reserved for use as specified if it
  is defined by any of its associated headers when included; unless explicitly stated
  otherwise (see 7.1.4).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  All identifiers with external linkage in any of the following subclauses are reserved for
  use as identifiers with external linkage if any of them are used by the program. None of
  them are reserved if none of them are used.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Each identifier with file scope listed in any of the following subclauses is reserved for use
  as a macro name and as an identifier with file scope in the same name space if it is
  defined by any of its associated headers when included.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.1.3 Use of errno
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  An implementation may set errno for the functions defined in this annex, but is not
  required to.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.1.4 Runtime-constraint violations
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Most functions in this annex include as part of their specification a list of runtime-
  constraints. These runtime-constraints are requirements on the program using the
  library.383)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Implementations shall verify that the runtime-constraints for a function are not violated
  by the program. If a runtime-constraint is violated, the implementation shall call the
  currently registered runtime-constraint handler (see set_constraint_handler_s
  in <stdlib.h>). Multiple runtime-constraint violations in the same call to a library
  function result in only one call to the runtime-constraint handler. It is unspecified which
  one of the multiple runtime-constraint violations cause the handler to be called.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If the runtime-constraints section for a function states an action to be performed when a
  runtime-constraint violation occurs, the function shall perform the action before calling
  the runtime-constraint handler. If the runtime-constraints section lists actions that are
  prohibited when a runtime-constraint violation occurs, then such actions are prohibited to
  the function both before calling the handler and after the handler returns.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The runtime-constraint handler might not return. If the handler does return, the library
  function whose runtime-constraint was violated shall return some indication of failure as
  given by the returns section in the function's specification.
@@ -29762,9 +29762,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.2 Errors <errno.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <errno.h> defines a type.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The type is
 
                                                                                                                                                     errno_t
@@ -29779,9 +29779,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.3 Common definitions <stddef.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <stddef.h> defines a type.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The type is
 
                                                                                                                                                     rsize_t
@@ -29794,9 +29794,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.4 Integer types <stdint.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <stdint.h> defines a macro.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The macro is
 
                                                                                                                                                     RSIZE_MAX
@@ -29805,12 +29805,12 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  rsize_t consider it a runtime-constraint violation if the values of those parameters are
  greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Recommended practice
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Extremely large object sizes are frequently a sign that an object's size was calculated
  incorrectly. For example, negative numbers appear as very large positive numbers when
  converted to an unsigned type like size_t. Also, some implementations do not support
  objects as large as the maximum value that can be represented by type size_t.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  For those reasons, it is sometimes beneficial to restrict the range of object sizes to detect
  programming errors. For implementations targeting machines with large address spaces,
  it is recommended that RSIZE_MAX be defined as the smaller of the size of the largest
@@ -29827,9 +29827,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5 Input/output <stdio.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <stdio.h> defines several macros and two types.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The macros are
 
                                                                                                                                                   L_tmpnam_s
@@ -29842,7 +29842,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          
  which expands to an integer constant expression that is the maximum number of unique
  file names that can be generated by the tmpnam_s function.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The types are
 
                                                                                                                                                   errno_t
@@ -29859,19 +29859,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.1.1 The tmpfile_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
         errno_t tmpfile_s(FILE * restrict * restrict streamptr);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  streamptr shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, tmpfile_s does not attempt to create a file.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The tmpfile_s function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other
  existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program
  termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is
@@ -29879,7 +29879,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  with the meaning that mode has in the fopen_s function (including the mode's effect
  on exclusive access and file permissions).
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If the file was created successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr
  will be set to the pointer to the object controlling the opened file. Otherwise, the pointer
  to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to a null pointer.
@@ -29889,44 +29889,44 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open
  files (FOPEN_MAX).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The tmpfile_s function returns zero if it created the file. If it did not create the file or
  there was a runtime-constraint violation, tmpfile_s returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.1.2 The tmpnam_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdio.h>
          errno_t tmpnam_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  s shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall be less than or equal to RSIZE_MAX.
  maxsize shall be greater than the length of the generated file name string.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The tmpnam_s function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the
  same as the name of an existing file.387) The function is potentially capable of generating
  TMP_MAX_S different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by existing
  files and thus not be suitable return values. The lengths of these strings shall be less than
  the value of the L_tmpnam_s macro.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The tmpnam_s function generates a different string each time it is called.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  It is assumed that s points to an array of at least maxsize characters. This array will be
  set to generated string, as specified below.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function except tmpnam calls the
  tmpnam_s function.388)
 
                                                                                                                                          Recommended practice
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  After a program obtains a file name using the tmpnam_s function and before the
  program creates a file with that name, the possibility exists that someone else may create
  a file with that same name. To avoid this race condition, the tmpfile_s function
@@ -29934,15 +29934,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  of the tmpnam_s function is when the program needs to create a temporary directory
  rather than a temporary file.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  If no suitable string can be generated, or if there is a runtime-constraint violation, the
  tmpnam_s function writes a null character to s[0] (only if s is not null and maxsize
  is greater than zero) and returns a nonzero value.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  Otherwise, the tmpnam_s function writes the string in the array pointed to by s and
  returns zero.
 
                                                                                                                                          Environmental limits
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  The value of the macro TMP_MAX_S shall be at least 25.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Footnotes
@@ -29964,7 +29964,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.2.1 The fopen_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -29973,9 +29973,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const char * restrict mode);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  None of streamptr, filename, or mode shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, fopen_s does not attempt to open a file.
  Furthermore, if streamptr is not a null pointer, fopen_s sets *streamptr to the
  null pointer.
@@ -29985,10 +29985,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The fopen_s function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by
  filename, and associates a stream with it.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The mode string shall be as described for fopen, with the addition that modes starting
  with the character 'w' or 'a' may be preceded by the character 'u', see below:
  uw             truncate to zero length or create text file for writing, default
@@ -30027,10 +30027,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                                           default permissions
 
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  Opening a file with exclusive mode ('x' as the last character in the mode argument)
  fails if the file already exists or cannot be created.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  To the extent that the underlying system supports the concepts, files opened for writing
  shall be opened with exclusive (also known as non-shared) access. If the file is being
  created, and the first character of the mode string is not 'u', to the extent that the
@@ -30038,7 +30038,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  users on the system from accessing the file. If the file is being created and first character
  of the mode string is 'u', then by the time the file has been closed, it shall have the
  system default file access permissions.389)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  If the file was opened successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr
  will be set to the pointer to the object controlling the opened file. Otherwise, the pointer
  
@@ -30046,7 +30046,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to a null pointer.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  The fopen_s function returns zero if it opened the file. If it did not open the file or if
  there was a runtime-constraint violation, fopen_s returns a nonzero value.
 
@@ -30057,7 +30057,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.2.2 The freopen_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30067,40 +30067,40 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              FILE * restrict stream);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  None of newstreamptr, mode, and stream shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, freopen_s neither attempts to close any file
  associated with stream nor attempts to open a file. Furthermore, if newstreamptr is
  not a null pointer, fopen_s sets *newstreamptr to the null pointer.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The freopen_s function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by
  filename and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode
  argument has the same meaning as in the fopen_s function (including the mode's effect
  on exclusive access and file permissions).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If filename is a null pointer, the freopen_s function attempts to change the mode of
  the stream to that specified by mode, as if the name of the file currently associated with
  the stream had been used. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are
  permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The freopen_s function first attempts to close any file that is associated with stream.
  Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are
  cleared.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  If the file was opened successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by
  newstreamptr will be set to the value of stream. Otherwise, the pointer to FILE
  pointed to by newstreamptr will be set to a null pointer.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  The freopen_s function returns zero if it opened the file. If it did not open the file or
  there was a runtime-constraint violation, freopen_s returns a nonzero value.
 
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3 Formatted input/output functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this
  subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the objects take on
  unspecified values.
@@ -30108,7 +30108,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.1 The fprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30116,21 +30116,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier390) (modified or
  not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by
  format. Any argument to fprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a
  null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation,391) the fprintf_s function does not attempt
  to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent fprintf_s produced
  output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The fprintf_s function is equivalent to the fprintf function except for the explicit
  runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The fprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
  
@@ -30152,7 +30152,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.2 The fscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30160,15 +30160,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in
  order to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation,392) the fscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent fscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The fscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf except that the c, s, and [ conversion
  specifiers apply to a pair of arguments (unless assignment suppression is indicated by a
  *). The first of these arguments is the same as for fscanf. That argument is
@@ -30176,18 +30176,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  rsize_t and gives the number of elements in the array pointed to by the first argument
  of the pair. If the first argument points to a scalar object, it is considered to be an array of
  one element.393)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  A matching failure occurs if the number of elements in a receiving object is insufficient to
  hold the converted input (including any trailing null character).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The fscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  
 
  fscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
  provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  EXAMPLE 1        The call:
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
@@ -30203,7 +30203,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence
  thompson\0.
  
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  EXAMPLE 2        The call:
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
@@ -30240,18 +30240,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.3 The printf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdio.h>
           int printf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier394) (modified or not by flags, field
  width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument
  to printf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the printf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent printf_s produced output
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
@@ -30259,11 +30259,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The printf_s function is equivalent to the printf function except for the explicit
  runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The printf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -30276,26 +30276,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.4 The scanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
         int scanf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order to store
  converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the scanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent scanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The scanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s with the argument stdin
  interposed before the arguments to scanf_s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The scanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  scanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
@@ -30304,7 +30304,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.5 The snprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30312,26 +30312,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier395) (modified or not by flags, field width, or
  precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to
 
  snprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding
  error shall occur.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the snprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The snprintf_s function is equivalent to the snprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The snprintf_s function, unlike sprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within the
  array pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The snprintf_s function returns the number of characters that would have been
  written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a
  negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated
@@ -30347,7 +30347,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.6 The sprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30355,7 +30355,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The number of characters (including the trailing null) required for the
  result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n
@@ -30366,19 +30366,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the sprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The sprintf_s function is equivalent to the sprintf function except for the
  parameter n and the explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The sprintf_s function, unlike snprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array
  pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the sprintf_s function returns the number
  of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character. If an
  encoding error occurred, sprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other runtime-
@@ -30393,7 +30393,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.7 The sscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30401,21 +30401,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const char * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order
  to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the sscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent sscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The sscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s, except that input is obtained from
  a string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the
  string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf_s function. If copying
  takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The sscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  sscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
@@ -30425,7 +30425,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.8 The vfprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30435,21 +30435,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier397) (modified or
  not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by
  format. Any argument to vfprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a
  null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfprintf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vfprintf_s produced
  output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vfprintf_s function is equivalent to the vfprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vfprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -30462,7 +30462,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.9 The vfscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30477,21 +30477,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in
  order to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vfscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vfscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfscanf_s function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.398)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vfscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vfscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -30506,7 +30506,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.10 The vprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30515,22 +30515,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier399) (modified or not by flags, field
  width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument
  to vprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vprintf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vprintf_s produced output
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vprintf_s function is equivalent to the vprintf function except for the explicit
  runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
  value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -30543,7 +30543,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.11 The vscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30552,21 +30552,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order to store
  converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vscanf_s function is equivalent to scanf_s, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vscanf_s function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.400)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
@@ -30586,7 +30586,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.12 The vsnprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30596,25 +30596,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier401) (modified or not by flags, field width, or
  precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to
  vsnprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding
  error shall occur.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the vsnprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vsnprintf_s function is equivalent to the vsnprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vsnprintf_s function, unlike vsprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within
  the array pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The vsnprintf_s function returns the number of characters that would have been
  written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a
  negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated
@@ -30635,7 +30635,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.13 The vsprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30645,26 +30645,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The number of characters (including the trailing null) required for the
  result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n
  specifier402) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the
  string pointed to by format. Any argument to vsprintf_s corresponding to a %s
  specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the vsprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vsprintf_s function is equivalent to the vsprintf function except for the
  parameter n and the explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vsprintf_s function, unlike vsnprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array
  pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the vsprintf_s function returns the
  number of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character. If
  an encoding error occurred, vsprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other
@@ -30684,7 +30684,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.3.14 The vsscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -30694,21 +30694,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order
  to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vsscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vsscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vsscanf_s function is equivalent to sscanf_s, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf_s function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.403)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vsscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
@@ -30726,7 +30726,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.5.4.1 The gets_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <stdio.h>
@@ -30738,34 +30738,34 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  s shall not be a null pointer. n shall neither be equal to zero nor be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. A new-line character, end-of-file, or read error shall occur within reading
  n-1 characters from stdin.404)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, s[0] is set to the null character, and characters
  are read and discarded from stdin until a new-line character is read, or end-of-file or a
  read error occurs.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The gets_s function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n
  from the stream pointed to by stdin, into the array pointed to by s. No additional
  characters are read after a new-line character (which is discarded) or after end-of-file.
  The discarded new-line character does not count towards number of characters read. A
  null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, or if a read
  error occurs during the operation, then s[0] is set to the null character, and the other
  elements of s take unspecified values.
 
                                                                                                                                          Recommended practice
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The fgets function allows properly-written programs to safely process input lines too
  long to store in the result array. In general this requires that callers of fgets pay
  attention to the presence or absence of a new-line character in the result array. Consider
  using fgets (along with any needed processing based on new-line characters) instead of
  gets_s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The gets_s function returns s if successful. If there was a runtime-constraint violation,
  or if end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, or if a
  read error occurs during the operation, then a null pointer is returned.
@@ -30784,9 +30784,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6 General utilities <stdlib.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <stdlib.h> defines three types.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The types are
 
                                                                                                                                                    errno_t
@@ -30813,7 +30813,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.1.1 The set_constraint_handler_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -30821,13 +30821,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               constraint_handler_t handler);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The set_constraint_handler_s function sets the runtime-constraint handler to
  be handler. The runtime-constraint handler is the function to be called when a library
  function detects a runtime-constraint violation. Only the most recent handler registered
  with set_constraint_handler_s is called when a runtime-constraint violation
  occurs.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  When the handler is called, it is passed the following arguments in the following order:
 
                                                                                                                                            
 
                                                                                                                                          1.   A pointer to a character string describing the runtime-constraint violation.
@@ -30837,15 +30837,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  errno_t is passed.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The implementation has a default constraint handler that is used if no calls to the
  set_constraint_handler_s function have been made. The behavior of the
  default handler is implementation-defined, and it may cause the program to exit or abort.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If the handler argument to set_constraint_handler_s is a null pointer, the
  implementation default handler becomes the current constraint handler.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The set_constraint_handler_s function returns a pointer to the previously
  registered handler.405)
 
@@ -30857,7 +30857,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.1.2 The abort_handler_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -30867,15 +30867,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               errno_t error);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  A pointer to the abort_handler_s function shall be a suitable argument to the
  set_constraint_handler_s function.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The abort_handler_s function writes a message on the standard error stream in an
  implementation-defined format. The message shall include the string pointed to by msg.
  The abort_handler_s function then calls the abort function.406)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The abort_handler_s function does not return to its caller.
  
  
@@ -30890,7 +30890,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.1.3 The ignore_handler_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -30900,13 +30900,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                errno_t error);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  A pointer to the ignore_handler_s function shall be a suitable argument to the
  set_constraint_handler_s function.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The ignore_handler_s function simply returns to its caller.407)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The ignore_handler_s function returns no value.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Footnotes
@@ -30922,7 +30922,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.2.1 The getenv_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -30931,34 +30931,34 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                      const char * restrict name);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  name shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall neither equal zero nor be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. If maxsize is not equal to zero, then value shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the integer pointed to by len is set to 0 (if len
  is not null), and the environment list is not searched.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The getenv_s function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment,
  for a string that matches the string pointed to by name.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If that name is found then getenv_s performs the following actions. If len is not a
  null pointer, the length of the string associated with the matched list member is stored in
  the integer pointed to by len. If the length of the associated string is less than maxsize,
  then the associated string is copied to the array pointed to by value.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If that name is not found then getenv_s performs the following actions. If len is not
  a null pointer, zero is stored in the integer pointed to by len. If maxsize is greater than
  zero, then value[0] is set to the null character.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The set of environment names and the method for altering the environment list are
  implementation-defined. The getenv_s function need not avoid data races with other
  threads of execution that modify the environment list.408)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  The getenv_s function returns zero if the specified name is found and the associated
  string was successfully stored in value. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -30968,22 +30968,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.3 Searching and sorting utilities
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  These utilities make use of a comparison function to search or sort arrays of unspecified
  type. Where an argument declared as size_t nmemb specifies the length of the array
  for a function, if nmemb has the value zero on a call to that function, then the comparison
  function is not called, a search finds no matching element, sorting performs no
  rearrangement, and the pointer to the array may be null.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The implementation shall ensure that the second argument of the comparison function
  (when called from bsearch_s), or both arguments (when called from qsort_s), are
  pointers to elements of the array.409) The first argument when called from bsearch_s
  shall equal key.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The comparison function shall not alter the contents of either the array or search key. The
  implementation may reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison
  function, but shall not otherwise alter the contents of any individual element.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  When the same objects (consisting of size bytes, irrespective of their current positions
  in the array) are passed more than once to the comparison function, the results shall be
  consistent with one another. That is, for qsort_s they shall define a total ordering on
@@ -30991,7 +30991,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  the key.
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  A sequence point occurs immediately before and immediately after each call to the
  comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any
  movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.
@@ -31009,7 +31009,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.3.1 The bsearch_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -31020,18 +31020,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                void *context);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither nmemb nor size shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If nmemb is not equal to
  zero, then none of key, base, or compar shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the bsearch_s function does not search the
  array.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The bsearch_s function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of
  which is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key.
  The size of each element of the array is specified by size.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The comparison function pointed to by compar is called with three arguments. The first
  two point to the key object and to an array element, in that order. The function shall
  return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the key object is considered,
@@ -31047,7 +31047,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The bsearch_s function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null
  pointer if no match is found or there is a runtime-constraint violation. If two elements
  compare as equal, which element is matched is unspecified.
@@ -31062,7 +31062,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.3.2 The qsort_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -31072,16 +31072,16 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               void *context);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither nmemb nor size shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If nmemb is not equal to
  zero, then neither base nor compar shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the qsort_s function does not sort the array.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The qsort_s function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is
  pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The contents of the array are sorted into ascending order according to a comparison
  function pointed to by compar, which is called with three arguments. The first two
  point to the objects being compared. The function shall return an integer less than, equal
@@ -31089,11 +31089,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  equal to, or greater than the second. The third argument to the comparison function is the
  context argument passed to qsort_s. The sole use of context by qsort_s is to
  pass it to the comparison function.412)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If two elements compare as equal, their relative order in the resulting sorted array is
  unspecified.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The qsort_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
  
@@ -31109,7 +31109,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.4 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The behavior of the multibyte character functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category
  of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, each function is placed into its
  initial conversion state by a call for which its character pointer argument, s, is a null
@@ -31127,7 +31127,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.4.1 The wctomb_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -31137,55 +31137,55 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               wchar_t wc);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Let n denote the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character
  corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift sequences).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If s is not a null pointer, then smax shall not be less than n, and smax shall not be
  greater than RSIZE_MAX. If s is a null pointer, then smax shall equal zero.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, wctomb_s does not modify the int pointed to
  by status, and if s is not a null pointer, no more than smax elements in the array
  pointed to by s will be accessed.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The wctomb_s function determines n and stores the multibyte character representation
  of wc in the array whose first element is pointed to by s (if s is not a null pointer). The
  number of characters stored never exceeds MB_CUR_MAX or smax. If wc is a null wide
  character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the
  initial shift state, and the function is left in the initial conversion state.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb_s function.
  
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  If s is a null pointer, the wctomb_s function stores into the int pointed to by status a
  nonzero or zero value, if multibyte character encodings, respectively, do or do not have
  state-dependent encodings.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  If s is not a null pointer, the wctomb_s function stores into the int pointed to by
  status either n or -1 if wc, respectively, does or does not correspond to a valid
  multibyte character.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  In no case will the int pointed to by status be set to a value greater than the
  MB_CUR_MAX macro.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  The wctomb_s function returns zero if successful, and a nonzero value if there was a
  runtime-constraint violation or wc did not correspond to a valid multibyte character.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.5 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The behavior of the multibyte string functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of
  the current locale.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.5.1 The mbstowcs_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #include <stdlib.h>
          errno_t mbstowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval,
@@ -31193,19 +31193,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const char * restrict src, rsize_t len);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither retval nor src shall be a null pointer. If dst is not a null pointer, then
  neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null pointer,
  then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall not equal
  zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then a null character
  shall occur within the first dstmax multibyte characters of the array pointed to by src.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then mbstowcs_s does the following. If
  retval is not a null pointer, then mbstowcs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If
  dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX,
  then mbstowcs_s sets dst[0] to the null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The mbstowcs_s function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in
  the initial shift state from the array pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding
  wide characters. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are stored into the
@@ -31217,21 +31217,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  dst.414) If dst is not a null pointer and no null wide character was stored into the array
  pointed to by dst, then dst[len] is set to the null wide character. Each conversion
  takes place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a
  sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs:
  the mbstowcs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval.
  Otherwise, the mbstowcs_s function stores into *retval the number of multibyte
  characters successfully converted, not including the terminating null character (if any).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  mbstowcs_s in the array of dstmax wide characters pointed to by dst take
  unspecified values when mbstowcs_s returns.415)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified
  values.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  The mbstowcs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no
  encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -31245,7 +31245,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.6.5.2 The wcstombs_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #include <stdlib.h>
           errno_t wcstombs_s(size_t * restrict retval,
@@ -31253,7 +31253,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                const wchar_t * restrict src, rsize_t len);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither retval nor src shall be a null pointer. If dst is not a null pointer, then
  neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null pointer,
  then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall not equal
@@ -31265,13 +31265,13 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcstombs_s does the following. If
  retval is not a null pointer, then wcstombs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If
  dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX,
  then wcstombs_s sets dst[0] to the null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The wcstombs_s function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array
  pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in
  the initial shift state. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are then stored
@@ -31289,25 +31289,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointer, then a null character is stored into the array pointed to by dst immediately
  following any multibyte characters already stored. Each conversion takes place as if by a
  call to the wcrtomb function.416)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a
  wide character that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error
  occurs: the wcstombs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval.
  Otherwise, the wcstombs_s function stores into *retval the number of bytes in the
  resulting multibyte character sequence, not including the terminating null character (if
  any).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by wcstombs_s
  in the array of dstmax elements pointed to by dst take unspecified values when
  wcstombs_s returns.417)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified
  values.
  
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  The wcstombs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no
  encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -31323,9 +31323,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7 String handling <string.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <string.h> defines two types.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The types are
 
                                                                                                                                                   errno_t
@@ -31342,7 +31342,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.1.1 The memcpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <string.h>
@@ -31350,20 +31350,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const void * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max. Copying shall not take place between
  objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the memcpy_s function stores zeros in the first
  s1max characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The memcpy_s function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The memcpy_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -31371,7 +31371,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.1.2 The memmove_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31379,29 +31379,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const void *s2, rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the memmove_s function stores zeros in the
  first s1max characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and
  s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The memmove_s function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
  object pointed to by s1. This copying takes place as if the n characters from the object
  pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not
  overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n characters from the temporary
  array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The memmove_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.1.3 The strcpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31410,25 +31410,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const char * restrict s2);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  s1max shall not equal zero. s1max shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2, s1max).
  Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strcpy_s sets s1[0] to the
  null character.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The strcpy_s function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating
  null character) into the array pointed to by s1.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strcpy_s in
  the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when
  strcpy_s returns.418)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The strcpy_s function returns zero419) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -31444,7 +31444,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.1.4 The strncpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31454,17 +31454,17 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. If n is not less than s1max, then s1max
  shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between
  objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strncpy_s sets s1[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The strncpy_s function copies not more than n successive characters (characters that
  follow a null character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array
  pointed to by s1. If no null character was copied from s2, then s1[n] is set to a null
@@ -31472,15 +31472,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strncpy_s in
  the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when
  strncpy_s returns.420)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The strncpy_s function returns zero421) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  EXAMPLE 1 The strncpy_s function can be used to copy a string without the danger that the result
  will not be null terminated or that characters will be written past the end of the destination array.
 
                                                                                                                                          @@ -31515,7 +31515,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.2.1 The strcat_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31524,7 +31524,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const char * restrict s2);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Let m denote the value s1max - strnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to
  strcat_s.
  
@@ -31532,25 +31532,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.422) m shall be greater than
  strnlen_s(s2, m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strcat_s sets s1[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The strcat_s function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character
  from s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strcat_s in
  the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when
  strcat_s returns.423)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The strcat_s function returns zero424) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -31568,7 +31568,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.2.2 The strncat_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31578,10 +31578,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Let m denote the value s1max - strnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to
  strncat_s.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.425) If n is not less
  
@@ -31589,26 +31589,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
  than m, then m shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2, m). Copying shall not take
  place between objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strncat_s sets s1[0] to the
  null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The strncat_s function appends not more than n successive characters (characters
  that follow a null character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
  the string pointed to by s1. The initial character from s2 overwrites the null character at
  the end of s1. If no null character was copied from s2, then s1[s1max-m+n] is set to
  a null character.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strncat_s in
  the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when
  strncat_s returns.426)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The strncat_s function returns zero427) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  EXAMPLE 1 The strncat_s function can be used to copy a string without the danger that the result
  will not be null terminated or that characters will be written past the end of the destination array.
 
                                                                                                                                          @@ -31653,7 +31653,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.3.1 The strtok_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
@@ -31663,23 +31663,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               char ** restrict ptr);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  None of s1max, s2, or ptr shall be a null pointer. If s1 is a null pointer, then *ptr
  shall not be a null pointer. The value of *s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  The end of the token found shall occur within the first *s1max characters of s1 for the
  first call, and shall occur within the first *s1max characters of where searching resumes
  on subsequent calls.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the strtok_s function does not indirect
  through the s1 or s2 pointers, and does not store a value in the object pointed to by ptr.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  A sequence of calls to the strtok_s function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a
  sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to
  by s2. The fourth argument points to a caller-provided char pointer into which the
  strtok_s function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the same
  string.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and s1max points to an object
  whose value is the number of elements in the character array pointed to by the first
  argument. The first call stores an initial value in the object pointed to by ptr and
@@ -31688,28 +31688,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  objects pointed to by s1max and ptr are required to have the values stored by the
  previous call in the sequence, which are then updated. The separator string pointed to by
  s2 may be different from call to call.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character
  that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character
  is found, then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok_s
  function returns a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is the start of the first token.
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The strtok_s function then searches from there for the first character in s1 that is
  contained in the current separator string. If no such character is found, the current token
  extends to the end of the string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the same
  string for a token return a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is overwritten by a
  null character, which terminates the current token.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  In all cases, the strtok_s function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed
  to by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer
  value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null character
  (if any).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  The strtok_s function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null
  pointer if there is no token or there is a runtime-constraint violation.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
@@ -31733,23 +31733,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.4.1 The memset_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
          errno_t memset_s(void *s, rsize_t smax, int c, rsize_t n)
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  s shall not be a null pointer. Neither smax nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. n
  shall not be greater than smax.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and smax is not
  greater than RSIZE_MAX, the memset_s function stores the value of c (converted to an
  unsigned char) into each of the first smax characters of the object pointed to by s.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The memset_s function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into
  each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s. Unlike memset, any call to
  the memset_s function shall be evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract
@@ -31757,14 +31757,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  assume that the memory indicated by s and n may be accessible in the future and thus
  must contain the values indicated by c.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The memset_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.4.2 The strerror_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <string.h>
@@ -31772,27 +31772,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              errno_t errnum);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  s shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  maxsize shall not equal zero.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then the array (if any) pointed to by s is not
  modified.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The strerror_s function maps the number in errnum to a locale-specific message
  string. Typically, the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror_s shall
  map any value of type int to a message.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If the length of the desired string is less than maxsize, then the string is copied to the
  array pointed to by s.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  Otherwise, if maxsize is greater than zero, then maxsize-1 characters are copied
  from the string to the array pointed to by s and then s[maxsize-1] is set to the null
  character. Then, if maxsize is greater than 3, then s[maxsize-2],
  s[maxsize-3], and s[maxsize-4] are set to the character period (.).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The strerror_s function returns zero if the length of the desired string was less than
  maxsize and there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the strerror_s
  function returns a nonzero value.
@@ -31801,37 +31801,37 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.4.3 The strerrorlen_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
          size_t strerrorlen_s(errno_t errnum);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The strerrorlen_s function calculates the length of the (untruncated) locale-specific
  message string that the strerror_s function maps to errnum.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  The strerrorlen_s function returns the number of characters (not including the null
  character) in the full message string.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.7.4.4 The strnlen_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <string.h>
          size_t strnlen_s(const char *s, size_t maxsize);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The strnlen_s function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If s is a null pointer,428) then the strnlen_s function returns zero.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  Otherwise, the strnlen_s function returns the number of characters that precede the
  terminating null character. If there is no null character in the first maxsize characters of
  s then strnlen_s returns maxsize. At most the first maxsize characters of s shall
@@ -31850,9 +31850,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8 Date and time <time.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <time.h> defines two types.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The types are
 
                                                                                                                                                    errno_t
@@ -31865,7 +31865,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.1 Components of time
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  A broken-down time is normalized if the values of the members of the tm structure are in
  their normal rages.429)
 
@@ -31875,14 +31875,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.2 Time conversion functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Like the strftime function, the asctime_s and ctime_s functions do not return a
  pointer to a static object, and other library functions are permitted to call them.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.2.1 The asctime_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <time.h>
@@ -31890,18 +31890,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const struct tm *timeptr);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor timeptr shall be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be less than 26 and
  shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The broken-down time pointed to by timeptr
  shall be normalized. The calendar year represented by the broken-down time pointed to
  by timeptr shall not be less than calendar year 0 and shall not be greater than calendar
  year 9999.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time, and
  s[0] is set to a null character if s is not a null pointer and maxsize is not zero and is
  not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The asctime_s function converts the normalized broken-down time in the structure
  pointed to by timeptr into a 26 character (including the null character) string in the
  
@@ -31942,7 +31942,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  behavior. If you do not require the exact form of the result string produced by the
  asctime_s function, consider using the strftime function instead.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The asctime_s function returns zero if the time was successfully converted and stored
  into the array pointed to by s. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
@@ -31950,7 +31950,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.2.2 The ctime_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <time.h>
@@ -31958,14 +31958,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const time_t *timer);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor timer shall be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be less than 26 and
  shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, s[0] is set to a null character if s is not a null
  pointer and maxsize is not equal zero and is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The ctime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in
  the form of a string. It is equivalent to
 
                                                                                                                                          @@ -31976,14 +31976,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  behavior. If you do not require the exact form of the result string produced by the
  ctime_s function, consider using the strftime function instead.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The ctime_s function returns zero if the time was successfully converted and stored
  into the array pointed to by s. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.2.3 The gmtime_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <time.h>
@@ -31991,25 +31991,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              struct tm * restrict result);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither timer nor result shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The gmtime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-
  down time, expressed as UTC. The broken-down time is stored in the structure pointed
 
  to by result.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The gmtime_s function returns result, or a null pointer if the specified time cannot
  be converted to UTC or there is a runtime-constraint violation.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.8.2.4 The localtime_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <time.h>
@@ -32017,25 +32017,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                struct tm * restrict result);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither timer nor result shall be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The localtime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a
  broken-down time, expressed as local time. The broken-down time is stored in the
  structure pointed to by result.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The localtime_s function returns result, or a null pointer if the specified time
  cannot be converted to local time or there is a runtime-constraint violation.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  The header <wchar.h> defines two types.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The types are
 
                                                                                                                                                     errno_t
@@ -32045,7 +32045,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
           rsize_t
 
                                                                                                                                          
  which is the type size_t.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this
  subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the objects take on
  unspecified values.
@@ -32057,7 +32057,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.1 The fwprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32065,21 +32065,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier430) (modified or
  not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by
  format. Any argument to fwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a
  null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the fwprintf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent fwprintf_s produced
  output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The fwprintf_s function is equivalent to the fwprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The fwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -32092,7 +32092,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.2 The fwscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdio.h>
@@ -32101,18 +32101,18 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in
  order to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the fwscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent fwscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The fwscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf except that the c, s, and [
  conversion specifiers apply to a pair of arguments (unless assignment suppression is
  indicated by a *). The first of these arguments is the same as for fwscanf. That
@@ -32120,11 +32120,11 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  type size_t and gives the number of elements in the array pointed to by the first
  argument of the pair. If the first argument points to a scalar object, it is considered to be
  an array of one element.431)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  A matching failure occurs if the number of elements in a receiving object is insufficient to
  hold the converted input (including any trailing null character).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The fwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  fwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -32146,7 +32146,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.3 The snwprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32155,7 +32155,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier432) (modified or not by flags, field width, or
  
@@ -32163,19 +32163,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to
  snwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding
  error shall occur.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the snwprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The snwprintf_s function is equivalent to the swprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The snwprintf_s function, unlike swprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within
  the array pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The snwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters that would have
  been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating wide null
  character, or a negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-
@@ -32191,7 +32191,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.4 The swprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32199,7 +32199,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The number of wide characters (including the trailing null) required
  for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n
@@ -32209,19 +32209,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the swprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The swprintf_s function is equivalent to the swprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The swprintf_s function, unlike snwprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array
  pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the swprintf_s function returns the
  number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide
  character. If an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters are requested to
@@ -32237,7 +32237,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.5 The swscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32245,21 +32245,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order
  to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the swscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent swscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The swscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s, except that the argument s
  specifies a wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream.
  Reaching the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the
  fwscanf_s function.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The swscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  swscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -32269,7 +32269,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.6 The vfwprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32280,21 +32280,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier434) (modified or
  not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by
  format. Any argument to vfwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be
  a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfwprintf_s function does not attempt
  to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vfwprintf_s produced
  output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vfwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vfwprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vfwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -32307,7 +32307,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.7 The vfwscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32321,21 +32321,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in
  order to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfwscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vfwscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vfwscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s, with the variable argument
  list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwscanf_s function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.435)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vfwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vfwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -32349,7 +32349,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.8 The vsnwprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32360,7 +32360,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier436) (modified or not by flags, field width, or
  precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to
@@ -32368,19 +32368,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  encoding error shall occur.
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the vsnwprintf_s function sets s[0] to
  the null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vsnwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vswprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vsnwprintf_s function, unlike vswprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit
  within the array pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The vsnwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters that would have
  been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or
  a negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated
@@ -32396,7 +32396,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.9 The vswprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32407,28 +32407,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater
  than RSIZE_MAX. The number of wide characters (including the trailing null) required
  for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n
  specifier437) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the
  wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to vswprintf_s corresponding to a
  %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater
  than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX, then the vswprintf_s function sets s[0] to the
  null wide character.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vswprintf_s function is equivalent to the vswprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vswprintf_s function, unlike vsnwprintf_s, treats a result too big for the
  array pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the vswprintf_s function returns the
  number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide
  character. If an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters are requested to
@@ -32444,7 +32444,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.10 The vswscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32454,15 +32454,15 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order
  to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vswscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vswscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vswscanf_s function is equivalent to swscanf_s, with the variable argument
  list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswscanf_s function does not invoke the
@@ -32473,7 +32473,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vswscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vswscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -32487,7 +32487,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.11 The vwprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32496,20 +32496,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier439) (modified or not by flags, field
  width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any
  argument to vwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vwprintf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vwprintf_s produced
  output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vwprintf function except for the
  explicit runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
  
@@ -32527,7 +32527,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.12 The vwscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <stdarg.h>
@@ -32536,21 +32536,21 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               va_list arg);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order to store
  converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vwscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vwscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The vwscanf_s function is equivalent to wscanf_s, with the variable argument list
  replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
  possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwscanf_s function does not invoke the
  va_end macro.440)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The vwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  vwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer
@@ -32564,29 +32564,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.13 The wprintf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
          int wprintf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier441) (modified or not by flags, field
  
 
  width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any
  argument to wprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wprintf_s function does not attempt to
  produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent wprintf_s produced output
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The wprintf_s function is equivalent to the wprintf function except for the explicit
  runtime-constraints listed above.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The wprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
  negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.
 
@@ -32599,26 +32599,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.1.14 The wscanf_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <wchar.h>
         int wscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though in order to store
  converted input shall not be a null pointer.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wscanf_s function does not attempt to
  perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent wscanf_s performed input
  before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The wscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s with the argument stdin
  interposed before the arguments to wscanf_s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The wscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
  before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the
  wscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than
@@ -32634,7 +32634,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.1.1 The wcscpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32643,24 +32643,24 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  s1max shall not equal zero. s1max shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2, s1max).
  Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcscpy_s sets s1[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  The wcscpy_s function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the
  terminating null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  wcscpy_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified
  values when wcscpy_s returns.442)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The wcscpy_s function returns zero443) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
  
@@ -32681,7 +32681,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.1.2 The wcsncpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32691,30 +32691,30 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. If n is not less than s1max, then s1max
  shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between
  objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcsncpy_s sets s1[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  The wcsncpy_s function copies not more than n successive wide characters (wide
  characters that follow a null wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by
  s2 to the array pointed to by s1. If no null wide character was copied from s2, then
  s1[n] is set to a null wide character.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          11
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  wcsncpy_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified
  values when wcsncpy_s returns.444)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          12
  The wcsncpy_s function returns zero445) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          13
  EXAMPLE 1 The wcsncpy_s function can be used to copy a wide string without the danger that the
  result will not be null terminated or that wide characters will be written past the end of the destination
  array.
@@ -32752,7 +32752,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.1.3 The wmemcpy_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          14
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32762,20 +32762,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          15
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max. Copying shall not take place between
  objects that overlap.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          16
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wmemcpy_s function stores zeros in the
  first s1max wide characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and
  s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          17
  The wmemcpy_s function copies n successive wide characters from the object pointed
  to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          18
  The wmemcpy_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -32783,7 +32783,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.1.4 The wmemmove_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          19
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32791,22 +32791,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const wchar_t *s2, rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          20
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          21
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wmemmove_s function stores zeros in the
  first s1max wide characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and
  s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          22
  The wmemmove_s function copies n successive wide characters from the object pointed
  to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1. This copying takes place as if the n wide
  characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n
  wide characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n
  wide characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          23
  The wmemmove_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -32816,7 +32816,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.2.1 The wcscat_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32825,29 +32825,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              const wchar_t * restrict s2);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  Let m denote the value s1max - wcsnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to
  wcscat_s.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.446) m shall be greater than
  wcsnlen_s(s2, m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcscat_s sets s1[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The wcscat_s function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including
  the terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The
  initial wide character from s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  wcscat_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified
  values when wcscat_s returns.447)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The wcscat_s function returns zero448) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -32865,7 +32865,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.2.2 The wcsncat_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
 
                                                                                                                                                     #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
           #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32875,10 +32875,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
                rsize_t n);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  Let m denote the value s1max - wcsnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to
  wcsncat_s.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than
  RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.449) If n is not less
  than m, then m shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2, m). Copying shall not take
@@ -32886,26 +32886,26 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          11
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is
  greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcsncat_s sets s1[0] to the
  null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          12
  The wcsncat_s function appends not more than n successive wide characters (wide
  characters that follow a null wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by
  s2 to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character from s2
  overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1. If no null wide character was copied
  from s2, then s1[s1max-m+n] is set to a null wide character.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          13
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  wcsncat_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified
  values when wcsncat_s returns.450)
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          14
  The wcsncat_s function returns zero451) if there was no runtime-constraint violation.
  Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          15
  EXAMPLE 1 The wcsncat_s function can be used to copy a wide string without the danger that the
  result will not be null terminated or that wide characters will be written past the end of the destination
  array.
@@ -32951,7 +32951,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.3.1 The wcstok_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                    #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
          #include <wchar.h>
@@ -32961,23 +32961,23 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  None of s1max, s2, or ptr shall be a null pointer. If s1 is a null pointer, then *ptr
  shall not be a null pointer. The value of *s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.
  The end of the token found shall occur within the first *s1max wide characters of s1 for
  the first call, and shall occur within the first *s1max wide characters of where searching
  resumes on subsequent calls.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wcstok_s function does not indirect
  through the s1 or s2 pointers, and does not store a value in the object pointed to by ptr.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  A sequence of calls to the wcstok_s function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1
  into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide
  string pointed to by s2. The fourth argument points to a caller-provided wchar_t
  pointer into which the wcstok_s function stores information necessary for it to
  continue scanning the same wide string.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and s1max points to an object
  whose value is the number of elements in the wide character array pointed to by the first
  argument. The first call stores an initial value in the object pointed to by ptr and
@@ -32986,29 +32986,29 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  objects pointed to by s1max and ptr are required to have the values stored by the
  previous call in the sequence, which are then updated. The separator wide string pointed
  to by s2 may be different from call to call.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  The first call in the sequence searches the wide string pointed to by s1 for the first wide
  character that is not contained in the current separator wide string pointed to by s2. If no
  such wide character is found, then there are no tokens in the wide string pointed to by s1
  and the wcstok_s function returns a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is
  the start of the first token.
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  The wcstok_s function then searches from there for the first wide character in s1 that
  is contained in the current separator wide string. If no such wide character is found, the
  current token extends to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1, and subsequent
  searches in the same wide string for a token return a null pointer. If such a wide character
  is found, it is overwritten by a null wide character, which terminates the current token.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  In all cases, the wcstok_s function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed
  to by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer
  value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide
  character (if any).
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  The wcstok_s function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null
  pointer if there is no token or there is a runtime-constraint violation.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  EXAMPLE
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
@@ -33032,19 +33032,19 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.2.4.1 The wcsnlen_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
 
                                                                                                                                                   #define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
         #include <wchar.h>
         size_t wcsnlen_s(const wchar_t *s, size_t maxsize);
 
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  The wcsnlen_s function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  If s is a null pointer,452) then the wcsnlen_s function returns zero.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  Otherwise, the wcsnlen_s function returns the number of wide characters that precede
  the terminating null wide character. If there is no null wide character in the first
  maxsize wide characters of s then wcsnlen_s returns maxsize. At most the first
@@ -33062,14 +33062,14 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.3.1 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Unlike wcrtomb, wcrtomb_s does not permit the ps parameter (the pointer to the
  conversion state) to be a null pointer.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.3.1.1 The wcrtomb_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
 
                                                                                                                                                    #include <wchar.h>
          errno_t wcrtomb_s(size_t * restrict retval,
@@ -33077,25 +33077,25 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
               wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  Neither retval nor ps shall be a null pointer. If s is not a null pointer, then smax
  shall not equal zero and shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If s is not a null pointer,
  then smax shall be not be less than the number of bytes to be stored in the array pointed
  to by s. If s is a null pointer, then smax shall equal zero.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcrtomb_s does the following. If s is
  not a null pointer and smax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then
  wcrtomb_s sets s[0] to the null character. If retval is not a null pointer, then
  wcrtomb_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1).
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb_s function is equivalent to the call
 
                                                                                                                                                            wcrtomb_s(&retval, buf, sizeof buf, L'\0', ps)
 
                                                                                                                                          
  where retval and buf are internal variables of the appropriate types, and the size of
  buf is greater than MB_CUR_MAX.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If s is not a null pointer, the wcrtomb_s function determines the number of bytes
  needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given
  by wc (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation
@@ -33105,27 +33105,27 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  conversion state.
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  If wc does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the
  wcrtomb_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval and the
  conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the wcrtomb_s function stores into
  *retval the number of bytes (including any shift sequences) stored in the array pointed
  to by s.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  The wcrtomb_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no
  encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.3.2 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  Unlike mbsrtowcs and wcsrtombs, mbsrtowcs_s and wcsrtombs_s do not
  permit the ps parameter (the pointer to the conversion state) to be a null pointer.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.3.2.1 The mbsrtowcs_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
 
                                                                                                                                                   #include <wchar.h>
         errno_t mbsrtowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval,
@@ -33134,20 +33134,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
              mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 
                                                                                                                                          
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  None of retval, src, *src, or ps shall be null pointers. If dst is not a null pointer,
  then neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null
  pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall
  not equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then a null
  character shall occur within the first dstmax multibyte characters of the array pointed to
  by *src.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          4
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then mbsrtowcs_s does the following. If
  retval is not a null pointer, then mbsrtowcs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1).
  If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX,
  then mbsrtowcs_s sets dst[0] to the null wide character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          5
  The mbsrtowcs_s function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in
  the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly
  pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null
@@ -33160,28 +33160,28 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointer and no null wide character was stored into the array pointed to by dst, then
  dst[len] is set to the null wide character. Each conversion takes place as if by a call
  to the mbrtowc function.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          6
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character) or the address
  just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
  reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state
  described is the initial conversion state.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          7
  Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a
  sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs:
  the mbsrtowcs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval and the
  conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the mbsrtowcs_s function stores into
  *retval the number of multibyte characters successfully converted, not including the
  terminating null character (if any).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          8
  All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by
  mbsrtowcs_s in the array of dstmax wide characters pointed to by dst take
  unspecified values when mbsrtowcs_s returns.454)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          9
  If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified
  values.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          10
  The mbsrtowcs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no
  encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
 
@@ -33195,7 +33195,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          K.3.9.3.2.2 The wcsrtombs_s function
                                                                                                                                          
 
                                                                                                                                          Synopsis
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          11
 
                                                                                                                                                     #include <wchar.h>
           errno_t wcsrtombs_s(size_t * restrict retval,
@@ -33209,20 +33209,20 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
 
  Runtime-constraints
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          12
  None of retval, src, *src, or ps shall be null pointers. If dst is not a null pointer,
  then neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null
  pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall
  not equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then the
  conversion shall have been stopped (see below) because a terminating null wide character
  was reached or because an encoding error occurred.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          13
  If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcsrtombs_s does the following. If
  retval is not a null pointer, then wcsrtombs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1).
  If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and less than RSIZE_MAX,
  then wcsrtombs_s sets dst[0] to the null character.
 
                                                                                                                                          Description
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          14
  The wcsrtombs_s function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array
  indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that
  begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps. If dst is not a
@@ -33241,7 +33241,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  pointer, then a null character is stored into the array pointed to by dst immediately
  following any multibyte characters already stored. Each conversion takes place as if by a
  call to the wcrtomb function.455)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          15
  If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null
  pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character) or the
  address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
@@ -33250,22 +33250,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
  
  
 
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          16
  Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a
  wide character that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error
  occurs: the wcsrtombs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval
  and the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the wcsrtombs_s function stores
  into *retval the number of bytes in the resulting multibyte character sequence, not
  including the terminating null character (if any).
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          17
  All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by wcsrtombs_s
  in the array of dstmax elements pointed to by dst take unspecified values when
  wcsrtombs_s returns.456)
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          18
  If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified
  values.
 
                                                                                                                                          Returns
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          19
  The wcsrtombs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no
  encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.
  
@@ -33293,9 +33293,9 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          L.1 Scope
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  This annex specifies optional behavior that can aid in the analyzability of C programs.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  An implementation that defines __STDC_ANALYZABLE__ shall conform to the
  specifications in this annex.457)
 
@@ -33309,7 +33309,7 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          L.2.1
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  out-of-bounds store
  an (attempted) access (3.1) that, at run time, for a given computational state, would
  modify (or, for an object declared volatile, fetch) one or more bytes that lie outside
@@ -33317,22 +33317,22 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          L.2.2
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  bounded undefined behavior
  undefined behavior (3.4.3) that does not perform an out-of-bounds store.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  NOTE 1    The behavior might perform a trap.
  
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          3
  NOTE 2    Any values produced or stored might be indeterminate values.
  
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          L.2.3
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  critical undefined behavior
  undefined behavior that is not bounded undefined behavior.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  NOTE     The behavior might perform an out-of-bounds store or perform a trap.
  
  
@@ -33342,10 +33342,10 @@ margin: deleted text is marked with ''*'', new or changed text with '' ''.
 
 
                                                                                                                                          Contents
 
                                                                                                                                          L.3 Requirements
                                                                                                                                          
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          1
  If the program performs a trap (3.19.5), the implementation is permitted to invoke a
  runtime-constraint handler. Any such semantics are implementation-defined.
-
                                                                                                                                          
+
                                                                                                                                          2
  All undefined behavior shall be limited to bounded undefined behavior, except for the
  following which are permitted to result in critical undefined behavior:
 
                                                                                                                                            
-- 
2.20.1